new microtype-de translation (29mar11)

git-svn-id: svn://tug.org/texlive/trunk@21917 c570f23f-e606-0410-a88d-b1316a301751

6 files changed, 15151 insertions, 20 deletions

diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/microtype-de/microtype-DE.dtx b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/microtype-de/microtype-DE.dtx
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..5eea8636390
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/microtype-de/microtype-DE.dtx
@@ -0,0 +1,15129 @@
+%\iffalse meta-comment
+% ^^A messages to WinEdt:
+% !Mode:: "TeX:DTX:UK"
+% !smartQuote:: "English"
+% !DTXversion:: "2.4"
+% ------------------------------------------------------------------------
+% $Id: microtype.dtx,v 1.60 2010-01-10 02:00:23+01 schlicht Exp schlicht $
+% ------------------------------------------------------------------------
+%                       The `microtype' package
+%        An interface to the micro-typographic extensions of pdfTeX
+%           Copyright (c) 2004--2010  R Schlicht <w.m.l@gmx.net>
+%
+% This work may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions of the
+% LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c of this license or (at
+% your option) any later version. The latest version of this license is in:
+% http://www.latex-project.org/lppl.txt, and version 1.3c or later is part
+% of all distributions of LaTeX version 2005/12/01 or later.
+%
+% This work has the LPPL maintenance status `author-maintained'.
+%
+% This work consists of the files microtype.dtx and microtype.ins and the
+% derived files microtype.sty, microtype.lua and letterspace.sty.
+%
+% Modified versions of the configuration files (*.cfg) may be distributed
+% provided that: (1) the original copyright statement is not removed, and
+% (2) the identification string is changed.
+% ------------------------------------------------------------------------
+%
+%<package|letterspace>\NeedsTeXFormat{LaTeX2e}
+%<*driver>
+\ProvidesFile{\jobname.dtx}
+%</driver>
+%<package|letterspace>\ProvidesPackage
+%<config>\ProvidesFile
+%<package>  {microtype}
+%<letterspace>  {letterspace}
+%<m-t>  {microtype.cfg}
+%<*package|letterspace|m-t>
+  [2010/01/10 v2.4
+%<package>   Micro-typography with pdfTeX
+%<letterspace>   Robust letterspacing
+%<m-t>   microtype main configuration file
+  (RS)]
+%</package|letterspace|m-t>
+%<*config>
+%<bch>  {mt-bch.cfg}[2007/03/03 v1.5 microtype config. file: Bitstream Charter (RS)]
+%<blg>  {mt-blg.cfg}[2007/07/14 v1.0 microtype config. file: Bitstream Letter Gothic (RS)]
+%<cmr>  {mt-cmr.cfg}[2009/11/09 v2.0 microtype config. file: Computer Modern Roman (RS)]
+%<pad>  {mt-pad.cfg}[2005/11/07 v1.5 microtype config. file: Adobe Garamond (RS)]
+%<pmn>  {mt-pmn.cfg}[2009/11/14 v1.3 microtype config. file: Adobe Minion (HH/KK)]
+%<ppl>  {mt-ppl.cfg}[2005/11/16 v1.6 microtype config. file: Palatino (RS)]
+%<ptm>  {mt-ptm.cfg}[2006/04/20 v1.7 microtype config. file: Times (RS)]
+%<ugm>  {mt-ugm.cfg}[2006/01/26 v1.0 microtype config. file: URW Garamond (RS)]
+%<msa>  {mt-msa.cfg}[2006/02/04 v1.1 microtype config. file: AMS symbols (a) (RS)]
+%<msb>  {mt-msb.cfg}[2005/06/01 v1.0 microtype config. file: AMS symbols (b) (RS)]
+%<euf>  {mt-euf.cfg}[2006/07/03 v1.1 microtype config. file: AMS Euler Fraktur (RS)]
+%<eur>  {mt-eur.cfg}[2006/07/31 v1.1 microtype config. file: AMS Euler Roman (RS)]
+%<eus>  {mt-eus.cfg}[2006/07/28 v1.2 microtype config. file: AMS Euler Script (RS)]
+%<zpeu>  {mt-zpeu.cfg}[2006/05/04 v1.0 microtype config. file: Adobe Euro (RS)]
+%<euroitc>  {mt-euroitc.cfg}[2006/05/04 v1.0 microtype config. file: ITC Euro (RS)]
+%<mvs>  {mt-mvs.cfg}[2006/07/05 v1.1 microtype config. file: Marvosym Euro (RS)]
+%</config>
+%
+%<*driver|docsty>
+%<*driver>
+\documentclass[10pt,a4paper]{ltxdoc}
+\makeatletter
+%</driver>
+% Let's abolish CM! We use Charter and Letter Gothic
+% (for the pre-built documentation on CTAN):
+% \usepackage[charter]{mathdesign}
+% \def\rmdefault{bch} % not scaled
+% \def\ttdefault{blg}
+\usepackage{ifpdf,ifluatex}
+\usepackage[latin1]{\ifluatex luainputenc,\fi inputenc}
+\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+\usepackage[ngerman]{babel} 
+\usepackage{textcomp}
+\GetFileInfo{\jobname.dtx}
+\usepackage[expansion=false,kerning=true]{microtype}[\filedate]
+ \DeclareMicrotypeSet*[protrusion]
+      { doc }
+      { encoding = {*, TS1, OMS},
+        family   = {rm*, tt*},
+        size     = {footnotesize, small, normalsize} }
+ \SetProtrusion
+      { encoding = OMS,
+        family   = mdbch }
+      { "68 = {400, },  % \langle
+        "69 = { ,400} } % \rangle
+ \DeclareMicrotypeSet*[kerning]
+      { doc }
+      { encoding = T1,
+        family   = blg, % typewriter font and ...
+        font     = * }  % French sample in section \ref{sub:kerning}
+ \SetExtraKerning
+      { encoding = T1,
+        family   = blg }
+      { _ = {100,100} } % underscores shouldn't touch
+ % disable ?` and !` ligatures (sample in section \ref{sec:disable-ligatures})
+ \DisableLigatures[?,!]{encoding = *, family = rm* }
+ % Fraktur sample in section \ref{sec:lettersp}
+ \IfFileExists{t1mwr.fd}
+   {\newcommand\textfrak[1]{{\fontfamily{mwr}\selectfont ##1}}
+    \ifpdf
+      \SetTracking[no ligatures={f}]{encoding=T1,family=mwr}{100}
+    \fi}
+   {\IfFileExists{yfonts.sty}
+     {\usepackage{yfonts}
+      \ifpdf
+        \SetTracking[no ligatures={f}]{encoding=LY,family=yfrak}{100}
+      \fi}
+     {\let\textfrak\@gobble}}
+\tolerance=700
+\ifpdf
+  \ifnum\pdftexversion<140 \else % pdftex 1.40, including textmatrix patch,
+    \microtypesetup{expansion=alltext,step=1} % hence we can activate expansion ...
+    \tolerance=300         % ... and make TeX almost as intolerant as it normally is
+    \g@addto@macro\macrocode{\microtypesetup{expansion=false}}
+    \pdfminorversion=5 % for the OCGs
+  \fi
+  % bonus material
+  \InputIfFileExists{microtype-logo.dtx}\relax\relax
+  \InputIfFileExists{microtype-lssample.dtx}\relax\relax
+\else
+  \let\lsstyle\relax
+\fi
+\ifluatex % microtype.dtx finally compiles with 0.35!
+  \microtypesetup{kerning=false}
+  \let\lsstyle\relax
+\fi
+\usepackage{booktabs}
+\usepackage{array}
+ \newcolumntype{L}[1]{p{#1}<{\raggedright}}
+\usepackage{color}
+ \definecolor{theblue} {rgb}{0.02,0.04,0.48}
+ \definecolor{thered}  {rgb}{0.65,0.04,0.07}
+ \definecolor{thegreen}{rgb}{0.06,0.44,0.08}
+ \definecolor{thegrey} {gray}{0.5}
+ \definecolor{theshade}{gray}{0.94}
+ \definecolor{theframe}{gray}{0.75}
+\usepackage{graphicx}
+% general layout
+\frenchspacing
+\DeclareRobustCommand\textoractual[2]{\ifpdf
+  \pdfliteral direct{/Span<</ActualText(#2)>>BDC}#1\pdfliteral direct{EMC}%
+  \else #1\fi}
+\expandafter\newif\csname ifcmr\endcsname
+\long\def\@tempa{cmr}
+\ifx\rmdefault\@tempa
+  \cmrtrue
+  \def\PackageFont{\sffamily}
+  \def\match{\textbullet}
+  \usepackage{amssymb} % \varnothing
+  \let\OrigTeX\TeX
+  \def\TeX{\textoractual{\OrigTeX}{TeX}}
+  \setlength\textheight{47\baselineskip}
+\else
+  \def\bfdefault{b}
+  \def\Module#1{{\color{theblue}\textoractual{$\langle$}{<}\textit{#1}\textoractual{$\rangle$}{>}}}
+  \def\TeX{\textoractual{T\kern-.1667em\lower.4ex\hbox{E}\kern-.125emX\@}{TeX}}
+  \DeclareRobustCommand\LaTeX{\textoractual{L\kern-.26em{\sbox\z@ T\vbox to\ht\z@{%
+     \hbox{\check@mathfonts\fontsize\sf@size\z@\math@fontsfalse\selectfont A}%
+    \vss}}}{La}\kern-.1em\TeX}
+  \def\PackageFont{\ttfamily}
+  \def\match{{\large\raisebox{-.15em}{\textbullet}}}
+  {\catcode`\`=\active % indiscernible from ' in Bitstream Letter Gothic
+   \g@addto@macro\macro@code{\let`\textasciigrave}}
+  \linespread{1.07}\normalfont
+  \setlength\textheight{46\baselineskip}
+\fi
+\addtolength\textheight{\topskip}
+\setlength\topmargin{12pt}
+% sections
+\def\@seccntformat#1{\llap{\csname the#1\endcsname\hskip\marginparsep}}
+\def\paragraph{\@startsection{paragraph}{4}%
+  {0pt}{8pt plus 2pt minus 1pt}{-1em}%
+  {\normalfont\normalsize\itshape}}
+% title
+\def\@maketitle{%
+  \newpage\null\vskip 2em
+  \begin{center}\let\footnote\thanks
+    {\LARGE \@title\par}\vskip 1.5em
+    {\large \parbox{.33\textwidth}{\centering\@author}%
+            \parbox{.33\textwidth}{\centering\@date}}%
+  \vskip1.5em\rule{.66\textwidth}{.4pt}%
+  \end{center}\par\vskip1.5em}
+% headers
+\headheight=15pt
+\def\ps@MTheadings{%
+  \def\@oddhead{%
+    \hbox to\textwidth{\vbox{\hbox to\textwidth{%
+      \footnotesize{\leftmark\rightmark\strut}\hfill\thepage\strut}%
+      \hrule height 0.4pt width\textwidth \vskip-0.4pt
+    }}\hss}
+  \let\@oddfoot\@empty
+  \let\@mkboth\markboth
+  \def\sectionmark##1{\markboth{\textls*[60]{\MakeUppercase{##1}}}{}}
+  \def\subsectionmark##1{\markright{: ##1}}}
+\pagestyle{MTheadings}
+% toc
+\let\l@section@\l@section
+\def\l@section{\vskip -.75ex\l@section@}
+\def\l@subsection{\vskip.35ex \penalty\@secpenalty \@dottedtocline{2}{1.5em}{2.7em}}
+\def\l@subsubsection#1#2{%
+  \leftskip 4.2em
+  \rightskip 2em plus 2em
+  \parindent 0pt
+  {\let\numberline\@gobble{\small #1~[#2]}}}
+\def\l@table{\@dottedtocline{1}{0pt}{1.5em}}
+\def\@pnumwidth{1.7em}
+\ifpdf
+  \let\ORIGpdfoutline\pdfoutline
+  \def\special@outlines{attr{/F 01}}
+  \def\normaloutline {\protected@write\@outlinefile{}{\let\pdfoutline \ORIGpdfoutline}}
+  \def\specialoutline{\protected@write\@outlinefile{}{\def\pdfoutline{\ORIGpdfoutline\special@outlines}}}
+  \g@addto@macro\appendix{\specialoutline}
+\fi
+\def\defspecial@toc#1#2#3{\long\def#1{%
+  \ifpdf\phantomsection\specialoutline\pdfbookmark[1]{#2}{#3}\normaloutline\fi
+  \section*{#2}\@mkboth{\textls*[60]{\MakeUppercase{#2}}}{}%
+  \@starttoc{#3}}}
+\defspecial@toc\tableofcontents\contentsname{toc}
+\defspecial@toc\listoftables\listtablename{lot}
+% bibliography
+\def\@cite#1#2{#1\if@tempswa, #2\fi}
+\def\thebibliography#1{%
+  \section{\refname}%
+  \list{}{\leftmargin 0pt}%
+  \sloppy
+  \clubpenalty 4000
+  \@clubpenalty \clubpenalty
+  \widowpenalty 4000}
+\def\@biblabel#1{}
+% footnotes
+\long\def\@makefntext#1{%
+  \leftskip 0pt
+  \parindent 0pt
+  \everypar{\parindent 0pt}%
+  \leavevmode\llap{\@thefnmark\hskip\marginparsep}#1}
+\renewcommand\footnoterule{%
+  \kern-3\p@
+  \hrule\@width \columnwidth
+  \kern2.6\p@}
+\skip\@mpfootins=4pt
+% lists
+\setlength\leftmargini{15pt}
+\setlength\leftmarginii{12.5pt}
+\setlength\leftmarginiii{10pt}
+\def\@listi{\leftmargin \leftmargini
+            \parsep 4.5pt plus 1pt minus 1pt
+            \topsep 4.5pt plus 1pt minus 1pt
+            \itemsep 0pt}
+\let\@listI\@listi
+\def\descriptionlabel#1{\hspace\labelsep\normalfont#1:}
+\renewenvironment{itemize}
+  {\ifnum \@itemdepth >\thr@@\@toodeep\else
+    \advance\@itemdepth\@ne
+    \edef\@itemitem{labelitem\romannumeral\the\@itemdepth}%
+    \expandafter\list
+      \csname\@itemitem\endcsname
+      {\ifnum\@itemdepth=\@ne\leftmargin 0pt\fi
+       \def\makelabel##1{\hss\llap{##1}}}%
+   \fi}
+  {\endlist}
+\newenvironment{enum}[1][0]
+  {\list\labelenumi
+    {\usecounter{enumi}\setcounter{enumi}{#1}\addtocounter{enumi}{-1}%
+     \renewcommand\labelenumi{\texttt{\theenumi}:}%
+     \leftmargin 30pt
+     \itemindent-15pt
+     \labelwidth 15pt
+     \labelsep 0pt
+     \def\makelabel##1{##1\hss}}}
+  {\endlist}
+\newenvironment{options}
+  {\list{}
+    {\leftmargin 0pt
+     \labelwidth 0pt
+     \labelsep 1em
+     \itemindent \labelsep
+     \lstset{belowskip=0pt}}}
+  {\endlist}
+% boxes (for some reason, mathdesign changes these values)
+\setlength\fboxrule{0.4pt}
+\setlength\fboxsep{3pt}
+\setlength\arrayrulewidth{0.4pt}
+% tables
+\setlength\tabcolsep{2pt}
+\long\def\@makecaption#1#2{%
+  \sbox\@tempboxa{\footnotesize\itshape#1: #2}%
+  \ifdim \wd\@tempboxa >\hsize
+    \footnotesize\itshape#1: #2\par
+  \else
+    \hb@xt@\hsize{\box\@tempboxa\hfil}%
+  \fi
+  \vskip 4pt}
+% index and change log
+\IndexPrologue{\section{Index}%
+  Links (in blue) refer to the page where the corresponding entry is described
+  (bold face) resp. occurs. Plain numbers (in black) refer to the code line
+  where the corresponding entry is defined (underlined) resp. used.}
+\GlossaryPrologue{\section{Change history}\label{sec:changes}\vspace*{-\multicolsep}}
+ %\setcounter{finalcolumnbadness}{100}
+ %\raggedcolumns
+\setcounter{IndexColumns}{2}
+\def\IndexMin{12\baselineskip}
+\g@addto@macro\IndexParms{\footnotesize}
+\def\GlossaryParms{\IndexParms
+  \def\@idxitem ##1##2\efill{%
+    \end{multicols}
+    \begin{multicols}{2}
+      [\subsubsection*{\if##1v\relax Version ##2
+        (\csname MTversiondate##2\endcsname)\else ##2\fi}][5\baselineskip]
+       \ifpdf \phantomsection \pdfbookmark[2]{\if##1v\relax ##2
+           (\csname MTversiondate##2\endcsname)\else ##2\fi}{subsection##2}\fi
+    \GlossaryParms \rightskip 15pt plus 5pt
+    \let\item\@idxitem
+    \ignorespaces \makeatletter \scan@allowedfalse}%
+  \def\subitem{\par\hangindent 15pt}%
+  \def\subsubitem{\subitem\hspace*{7.5pt}}}
+% macro code
+\MacroTopsep=0pt
+\MacrocodeTopsep=3pt
+\setlength\MacroIndent{0pt}
+\def\theCodelineNo{\reset@font\color{thegrey}\scriptsize
+  \textoractual{\arabic{CodelineNo}\,}{}}% don't copy line numbers
+\def\MacroFont{\ttfamily\small}
+\def\AltMacroFont{\ttfamily\footnotesize}
+\def\PrintMacroName#1{\strut\MacroFont\string #1\hskip15pt}
+\def\ImplementationSettings{%
+  \linespread{1}%
+  \hfuzz=10pt
+  \def\MacroFont{\ttfamily\footnotesize}%
+  \let\macro@font\MacroFont}
+% additional bells ...
+\def\Describe#1#2#3{\noindent\csname Describe#1\endcsname{#2}%
+  \DescribeValues{#1}{#3}}
+\def\DescribeOption{\leavevmode\@bsphack
+  \begingroup\MakePrivateLetters\Describe@Option}
+\def\Describe@Option#1{\endgroup
+  \marginpar{\raggedleft\PrintDescribeOption{#1}}%
+  \SpecialOptionIndex{#1}\@esphack\ignorespaces}
+\def\DescribePackage{\leavevmode\@bsphack
+  \begingroup\MakePrivateLetters\Describe@Package}
+\def\Describe@Package#1{\endgroup
+  \marginpar{\raggedleft\PrintDescribeOption{#1.sty}}%
+  \CatIndex{#1}{package}\@esphack\ignorespaces}
+\def\DescribeValues#1#2{%
+  \let\@tempa\@empty \let\Option@default\@empty
+  \@for\@tempb:=#2\do{%
+    \csname Special#1Value\expandafter\endcsname\@tempb\@nil
+    \expandafter\g@addto@macro\expandafter\@tempa
+      \expandafter{\csname #1Sep\endcsname}%
+    \expandafter\g@addto@macro\expandafter\@tempa
+      \expandafter{\@tempb}}%
+  \@ifnextchar[\PrintValues{\PrintValues[\Option@default]}}
+\def\SpecialOptionValue#1#2\@nil{%
+  \if#1:\def\@tempb{\Variable{#2}}\else %                      : = variable
+  \if#1!\def\@tempb{#2}\def\Option@default{#2}\else %          ! = default
+  \if#1*\def\@tempb{#2}\def\Option@default{\MaybeDefault{#2}}% * = default (maybe)
+  \fi\fi\fi}
+\def\SpecialMacroValue#1#2\@nil{%
+  \if#1?\def\@tempb{\normalsize[\Variable{#2}]}%  % ? = optional
+   \else\def\@tempb{\normalsize\{\Variable{#1#2}\}}\fi}
+\let\SpecialEnvValue\SpecialMacroValue
+\def\Variable#1{$\langle${\rmfamily\itshape\small#1}$\rangle$}
+\def\MaybeDefault#1{\textrm{*}\,#1}
+\def\OptionSep{{\rmfamily, }} \def\MacroSep{\,} \def\EnvironmentSep{\,}
+\def\PrintValues[#1]{{\MacroFont\expandafter\@gobble\@tempa\hfill #1}\\*[.25\baselineskip]}
+\def\CatIndex#1#2{\index{#1\actualchar{\protect\ttfamily #1} (#2)\encapchar hyperpage}}
+\def\SpecialOptionIndex#1{\@bsphack\CatIndex{#1}{option}%
+  \index{\quotechar!Options % the `!' will be sorted first
+    \actualchar{\protect\bfseries Options:}%
+    \levelchar{\protect\ttfamily#1}\encapchar usage}\@esphack}
+\def\SpecialUsageIndex#1{\@bsphack{\index{\quotechar!User Commands
+    \actualchar{\protect\indexspace\protect\bfseries User Commands:}%
+    \levelchar\expandafter\@gobble\string#1\actualchar\string\verb
+      \quotechar*\verbatimchar\string#1\verbatimchar\encapchar usage}%
+   \let\special@index\index\SpecialIndex@{#1}{\encapchar usage}}\@esphack}
+\def\SpecialEnvIndex#1{\CatIndex{#1}{environment}}
+\def\PrintDescribeMacro#1{\strut\MacroFont\color{thegreen}\string #1}
+\def\PrintDescribeEnv#1{\strut\MacroFont\bslash begin\{{\color{thegreen}#1}\}%
+  \\*[.25\baselineskip]\strut\bslash end\{{\color{thegreen}#1}\}}
+\def\PrintDescribeOption#1{\strut\MacroFont\color{thered}#1}
+\def\Indexing{\let\special@index\codeline@wrindex}
+\def\NoIndexing{\let\special@index\@gobble}
+\def\GeneralChanges#1{\edef\generalname{\if*#1 General\else#1\fi}}% mind the space!
+\DeclareRobustCommand\key[1]{\textcolor{thered}{\ttfamily#1}}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\pkg[1]{{\PackageFont#1}\@bsphack\CatIndex{#1}{package}\@esphack}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\opt[1]{{\ttfamily#1}\@bsphack\CatIndex{#1}{option}\@esphack}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\file[1]{{\ttfamily#1}}
+% ... and whistles
+{\catcode`\"\active
+ \gdef\verbatim#1
+   {\catcode`\"\active \def"##1"{\colorbox{theshade}{%
+      \textrm{Text lost! Please install the \pkg{listings} package.}}}%
+    \@beginparpenalty\predisplaypenalty\@verbatim\MacroFont
+    \frenchspacing\@vobeyspaces\expandafter\@xverbatim\@gobble}}
+\IfFileExists{listings.sty}{
+ \usepackage{listings}
+ \lstset{
+   gobble=1,columns=flexible,keepspaces,upquote,escapechar=",
+   basicstyle=\MacroFont,
+   keywords=[0]{\microtypesetup,\DeclareMicrotypeSet,\UseMicrotypeSet,
+     \DeclareMicrotypeSetDefault,\SetProtrusion,\SetExpansion,\SetTracking,
+     \SetExtraKerning,\SetExtraSpacing,\DisableLigatures,\DeclareCharacterInheritance,
+     \DeclareMicrotypeVariants,\DeclareMicrotypeAlias,\DeclareMicrotypeBabelHook,
+     \LoadMicrotypeFile,\microtypecontext,\textmicrotypecontext,
+     \textls,\lsstyle,\lslig,\Microtype@Hook},
+   keywordstyle=[0]\color{thegreen},
+   keywords=[1]{protrusion,expansion,activate,DVIoutput,draft,final,verbose,
+     config,factor,auto,stretch,shrink,step,selected,unit,tracking,kerning,
+     spacing,letterspace,babel,context,%defersetup,copyfonts, % undocumented
+     no ligatures,outer spacing,outer kerning}, % there are three \nobreakspace in this line
+   keywordstyle=[1]\color{thered},
+   comment=[l]\%,
+   commentstyle=\color{thegrey}\itshape,
+   alsoother={0123456789_},
+   frame=single,backgroundcolor=\color{theshade},rulecolor=\color{theframe},
+   framerule=\fboxrule,xleftmargin=3.4pt,xrightmargin=3.4pt,belowskip=\smallskipamount
+ }
+ \let\verbatim\relax
+ \lstnewenvironment{verbatim}[1][]{\lstset{##1}}{}
+ \ifpdf \IfFileExists{dummy-space.pfb}{%
+   \pdfmapline{+dummy-space <dummy-space.pfb}
+   \font\dummyspace=dummy-space
+   \def\lst@outputspace{% copy spaces (from a font that really has a space at x20)
+     \setbox0\hbox{ }\@tempdima\wd0
+     \setbox0\hbox{\dummyspace\char"20}\advance\@tempdima-\wd0
+     \unhbox0 \kern\@tempdima}
+  }\relax \fi
+}{
+ \let\lstset\@gobble
+}
+%\def\todo{\changes{zTo Do}{0000/00/00}}
+\let\todo\@gobble
+\newcommand\microtypesample[1]{\begin{quote}#1\end{quote}}
+\let\emptypdfpageresources\relax
+% fancy PDF document
+\ifpdf
+  \ifx\eTeXversion\@undefined \else % errors when not using etex (conflict with multicol)
+    \ifx\pdfcolorstack\@undefined   % no longer required with pdftex 1.40
+      \usepackage{pdfcolmk}
+  \fi\fi
+  \usepackage[bookmarks,bookmarksopen,pdfdisplaydoctitle,colorlinks,
+    linkcolor=theblue,citecolor=theblue,urlcolor=thered,
+    hyperindex=false,hyperfootnotes=false,
+    pdftitle={The microtype package},
+    pdfauthor={R Schlicht <w.m.l@gmx.net>},
+    pdfsubject={An interface to the micro-typographic extensions of pdfTeX},
+    pdfkeywords={TeX, LaTeX, pdfTeX, luaTeX, typography, micro-typography,
+      character protrusion, margin kerning, optical alignment, font expansion,
+      font scaling, hz, kerning, spacing, glue, letterspacing, tracking, ligatures}
+    ]{hyperref}
+  \pdfcatalog{/Lang(en-GB)}
+  \ifnum\pdftexversion < 130 \else
+    \IfFileExists{hypdestopt.sty}{\usepackage{hypdestopt}}\relax\fi
+  \IfFileExists{hyperxmp.sty}{
+    \usepackage{hyperxmp}
+    \hypersetup{%
+      pdfcopyright={\textcopyright\ 2004--2010 R Schlicht\012%
+        This work may be distributed and/or modified under the conditions
+        of the LaTeX Project Public License, either version 1.3c of this
+        license or (at your option) any later version.\&\#xA;%
+        This work has the LPPL maintenance status `author-maintained'.},
+      pdflicenseurl={http://www.latex-project.org/lppl/}}
+  }\relax
+  \def\usage#1{\textbf{\hyperpage{#1}}}% for indexing of \DescribeMacro ...
+  \def\changes@#1#2#3{% ... the changes ...
+    \protected@edef\@tempa{\noexpand\glossary{#1\levelchar
+      \ifx\saved@macroname\@empty \space\actualchar\generalname
+      \else\expandafter\@gobble\saved@macroname\actualchar
+        \string\verb\quotechar*\verbatimchar\saved@macroname\verbatimchar\fi
+      :\levelchar #3\encapchar hyperpage}}%
+    \@tempa\endgroup\@esphack}
+  %\def\theCodelineNo{% % ... and everything else (would double the pdf file size)
+  %  \reset@font\color{thegrey}\scriptsize
+  %  \@tempcnta\arabic{CodelineNo}\advance\@tempcnta by\@ne
+  %  \hypertarget{L:\number\@tempcnta}{\arabic{CodelineNo}}}
+  %\def\main#1{\underline{\hyperlink{L:#1}{#1}}}
+  %\def\codeline#1{\link@sanitize#1-\@nil{#1}}
+  %\def\link@sanitize#1-#2\@nil{\link@@sanitize#1,\@nil}
+  %\def\link@@sanitize#1,#2\@nil{\hyperlink{L:#1}}
+  %\def\SpecialIndex#1{\@bsphack\special@index{\expandafter\@gobble
+  %    \string#1\actualchar
+  %    \string\verb\quotechar*\verbatimchar\string#1\verbatimchar
+  %    \encapchar codeline}%
+  %  \@esphack}
+  \def\ctanurl#1{Available from \acronym{CTAN} at
+                 \href{http://www.ctan.org/tex-archive/#1}{\nolinkurl{/#1}}}
+  \DeclareRobustCommand\mailto[1]{\href{mailto:#1}{\nolinkurl{#1}}}
+  \def\mailtoRS{\href % some PDF viewers don't like spaces:
+    {mailto:<w.m.l@gmx.net>\%20Robert\%20Schlicht?subject=[microtype\%20\fileversion]}
+    {\texttt{w.m.l@gmx.net}}}
+  % the samples in the introduction, utilising nested optional content groups (aka. layers):
+  \ifnum\pdftexversion<140 \else
+    \def\mt@layer#1#2{\pdfliteral direct{/OC/#1 BDC}#2\pdfliteral direct{EMC}}
+    \ifx\mt@objects\@undefined\let\mt@objects\@empty\fi
+    \ifx\mt@order  \@undefined\let\mt@order  \@empty\fi
+    \let\mt@resources\@empty
+    \def\mt@register#1#2{%
+      \immediate\pdfobj{<< /Type/OCG /Name(#1:#2) >>}
+      \expandafter\xdef\csname mt@#1@#2\endcsname{\the\pdflastobj\space 0 R }
+      \xdef\mt@objects  {\mt@objects        \csname mt@#1@#2\endcsname}
+      \xdef\mt@order    {\mt@order          \csname mt@#1@#2\endcsname}
+      \xdef\mt@resources{\mt@resources/#1#2 \csname mt@#1@#2\endcsname}}
+    \xdef\mt@order{\mt@order[(Sample)}
+     \mt@register{Protrusion}{true} \mt@register{Protrusion}{false}
+     \mt@register{Expansion} {true} \mt@register{Expansion} {false}
+     \mt@register{_compatibility}{}
+    \xdef\mt@order{\mt@order]}
+    \pdfcatalog{/OCProperties <<
+                   /OCGs [\mt@objects]
+                   /D << /Order [\mt@order]
+                         /BaseState/OFF
+                         /ON [\mt@Protrusion@false \mt@Expansion@false
+                              \ifx\mtl@objects\@undefined\else\mtl@objects\fi] >> >> }
+    \newbox\mt@box
+    \newdimen\mt@unvdimen
+    \def\mt@place#1{%
+      \vskip-\mt@unvdimen
+      \setbox\mt@box\vbox{#1}%
+      \mt@unvdimen\dimexpr\ht\mt@box+\dp\mt@box\relax
+      \unvbox\mt@box}
+    \def\mt@pseudo@marg#1{%
+      \mt@place{\llap{\vbox{%
+        \hsize\marginparwidth
+        \rightskip \marginparsep plus 1em
+        \leavevmode\itshape\footnotesize #1}}}}
+    \def\mt@show@sample#1#2{%
+      \mt@layer{Protrusion#1}{%
+        \mt@layer{Expansion#2}{%
+          \mt@place{\microtypesetup{protrusion=#1,expansion=#2}%
+            \mt@sample@text}}}}
+    \def\mt@toggle@sample#1{%
+      \pdfstartlink user{/Subtype/Link
+        /BS << /Type/Border/W 1 /S/D /D[4 1] >>
+        /H/O /C[0.65 0.04 0.07] /Contents(Click to Toggle #1!)
+        %/OC << /Type/OCMD /VE[/Not \csname mt@_compatibility@\endcsname] >> % not honoured by older viewers anyway
+        /A << /S/SetOCGState /State[/Toggle \csname mt@#1@true\endcsname
+                                            \csname mt@#1@false\endcsname] >>}
+      #1 \hfill\pdfendlink & \mt@layer{#1true}{\rlap{on}}\mt@layer{#1false}{off}}
+    \renewcommand\microtypesample[1]{%
+      \begingroup
+      \leftskip 15pt \rightskip 15pt
+      \parskip   4pt \parindent  0pt
+      \vskip 8pt % = \topsep without vertical stretchability
+      \long\def\mt@sample@text{#1}
+      \mt@pseudo@marg{\color{theblue}%
+        Nachdem Sie den Text rechterhand gelesen haben, können Sie den Effekt
+        dieser Features betrachten, indem Sie auf die Links klicken:\strut\\
+        \colorbox{theshade}{%
+          \begin{tabular}{@{}>{\upshape}l@{\quad}l}
+            \mt@toggle@sample{Protrusion}\\\addlinespace
+            \mt@toggle@sample{Expansion}
+          \end{tabular}}\\[0.3\baselineskip]
+        Beide Features sind im ganzen Dokument eingeschaltet.}
+      \mt@show@sample{false}{false}
+      \mt@show@sample{false}{true}
+      \mt@show@sample{true} {false}
+      \mt@layer{_compatibility}{%
+        % for compatibility with older PDF viewers that don't support OCGs, we
+        % add a layer that contains a white box, which will hide the underlying
+        % layers for older viewers, and will be ignored by PDF 1.5 capable viewers.
+        \mt@place{\rlap{\hskip-\marginparwidth \color{white}%
+          \vrule width\dimexpr\hsize+\marginparwidth\relax height\mt@unvdimen}}
+        \mt@pseudo@marg{\color{thered}%
+          If you had a \acronym{PDF} viewer that understands
+          \acronym{PDF}\,{\smaller1.5}, you could view the effect of the
+          micro-typographic features by clicking on the links.\strut
+          \\\vphantom{\colorbox{white}{\tabular l\\\addlinespace\\\endtabular}}%
+          \\[0.3\baselineskip] Both features are enabled throughout this document.}}
+      \mt@show@sample{true}{true}
+      \vskip 4pt
+      \endgroup
+      \edef\x{\pdfpageresources{/Properties <<\mt@resources>>}}\x}
+    \def\emptypdfpageresources{\pdfpageresources{}}
+  \fi
+\else
+  \usepackage{url}
+  \newcommand\hyperref[2][]{#2}
+  \let\hyperpage\@firstofone
+  \let\texorpdfstring\@firstoftwo
+  \def\ctanurl{Available from \acronym{CTAN} at \url}
+  \let\nolinkurl\url
+  \let\mailto\texttt
+  \def\mailtoRS{\mailto{w.m.l@gmx.net}}
+\fi
+\ifx\l@ukenglish\@undefined
+  \hyphenation{let-ter-spac-ing let-ter-spaced let-ter-space}
+\else
+  \language=\l@ukenglish
+\fi
+\hyphenation{An-dre-as Ber-nard Ha-rald Mi-cha-el Pe-ter Ste-phan Wolf-ram
+             Har-ders Hop-pe Jac-kow-ski Ku-char-czyk Mei-er Mu-the-si-us Zed-ler
+             Sveinung % ?
+             with-out}
+\def\fallbacktext#1{{\centering\itshape[#1]\par}}
+% abbreviations
+\DeclareRobustCommand\thanh{H\`an Th\^e%
+     \ifx\eTeXversion\undefined \llap{\raisebox{0.5ex}{\'{}}}
+     \else \llap{\raisebox{0.45ex}{\'{}\kern\dimexpr.05em-2\fontdimen1\font\relax}}
+     \fi Th\`anh}
+\def\pdftex{\texorpdfstring{pdf\kern.05em\TeX}{pdfTeX}}
+\def\luatex{\texorpdfstring{lua\kern-.05em\TeX}{luaTeX}}
+\def\etex{\mbox{e-\TeX}}
+\def\nonetex{\mbox{\rlap{\kern.05em/}e-\TeX}} % aka. \TeX
+\def\@reflect#1{\ifdim\fontdimen1\font=0pt \reflectbox{#1}%
+  \else \rotatebox[origin=c]{180}{#1}\fi}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\xetex{% also reflect the initial `X'?
+  \textoractual{\@reflect{X}\lower.4ex\hbox{\kern-.12em\@reflect{E}}}{Xe}%
+  \kern-.16em\TeX}
+\def\texlive{\TeX~Live}
+\def\microtype{{\PackageFont microtype}}
+\def\letterspace{\pkg{letterspace}}
+\def\fontdim{\cmd\fontdimen\,}
+\def\eg{e.\,g.}
+\def\ie{i.\,e.}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\smaller{\setbox\z@\hbox{\@tempcnta=\f@size
+  \edef\x{\@tempcnta=\the\@tempcnta}\expandafter}\x
+  \advance\@tempcnta-7  \ifcase\@tempcnta\tiny\or\scriptsize\or
+    \footnotesize\or\small\or\or\normalsize\or\or\large\or\or\or\Large\fi}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\acronym[1]{\texorpdfstring{{\smaller\textls[60]{#1}}}{#1}}
+\let\less=<
+{\catcode`\<=\active
+ \AtBeginDocument{\catcode`\<=\active
+   \def<#1>{\acronym{#1}}
+   \def\contributor#1 <#2\at#3>{\@contributor{#1}{#2@#3}}
+   \DeclareRobustCommand\@contributor[2]{\textit{#1}}
+   %\DeclareRobustCommand\@contributor[2]{\href{mailto:#2}{\textit{#1}}}
+   }}
+%<*driver>
+\CodelineIndex
+\EnableCrossrefs
+\RecordChanges
+%\OnlyDescription
+\begin{document}
+  \DocInput{\jobname.dtx}
+\end{document}
+%</driver>
+%</driver|docsty>
+% \fi
+%
+% ^^A -------------------------------------------------------------------------
+%\GeneralChanges*
+%\changes{v1.0}{2004/09/11}{Initial version}
+%\changes{v2.0}{2006/12/29}{new package \letterspace: a stripped-down version,
+%                           containing the letterspacing commands only}
+%\GeneralChanges{Documentation}
+%\changes{v1.9b}{2006/01/13}{activate expansion in the distributed <PDF>}
+%\changes{v2.2}{2007/04/01}{logo transparency and amusement}
+% ^^A Adobe Reader 8.0 had serious bugs with transparency. Fixed in 8.1.
+%
+% \GetFileInfo{microtype.dtx}
+% \title{\ifx\printlogo\undefined\else\printlogo\fi
+%        \textls{Das \microtype\ Paket}\\[.3\baselineskip]\large
+%        Eine Schnittstelle für die mikrotypographischen Erweiterungen von \pdftex}
+% \author{R Schlicht\\\mailtoRS}
+% \date{\fileversion\\\filedate}
+%
+% \maketitle \thispagestyle{empty}
+%
+%\begin{abstract}
+%\noindent
+% Das \microtype\ Paket stellt eine \LaTeX\ Schnittstelle für die mikrotypographischen
+% Erweiterungen von \pdftex bereit: besonders markant Zeichenvorsprünge und Fontexpansion,
+% weiterhin die Justierung von Zeichenabständen innerhalb Wörter und zusätzliches Kerning sowie
+% durch Bindestrich trennbaren Sperrsatz (Tracking) und die Möglichkeit, alle oder ausgewählte
+% Ligaturen abzuschalten.
+% Es erlaubt, diese Features auf anpassbare Fonts anzuwenden und alle mikrotypographischen Aspekte
+% dieser Fonts in einer einfachen und flexiblen Art und Weise zu konfigurieren. Einstellungen
+% für verschiedene Schriftarten werden bereitgestellt.\footnote{
+%   Zur Zeit stellt dieses Paket Protrusionseinstellungen für Computer Modern
+%   Roman, Palatino, Times, <URW> Garamond, Adobe Garamond und Minion,
+%   Bitstream Charter und Letter Gothic, die <AMS> Symbole und Euler Fonts,
+%   verschiedene Eurosymbol Schriftarten, sowie einige allgemeine Einstellungen für unbekannte Schriftarten
+%   (siehe~Tabelle~\ref{tab:fonts} auf Seite~\pageref{tab:fonts}) bereit.
+%   Beisteuerungen sind gern gesehen.}
+%
+% Zu beachten ist, dass Fontexpansion und Zeichenvorsprünge nur mit 
+% \pdftex ($\geq$ Version 0.14f) arbeiten. Automatische Fontexpansion erfordert mindestens
+% Version 1.20 oder neuer. Ligaturen zu deaktivieren erfordert \pdftex\ 1.30, Sperrsatz und 
+% die Justierung von Zeichenabständen innerhalb Wörter sowie Kerning erfordern Version 1.40. Das
+% Paket aktiviert standardmäßig Protrusion und Expansion, falls sicher angenommen werden kann, dass diese
+% funktionieren. Diese beiden Features sind ebenso verfügbar mit \luatex. Das
+% \microtype\ Paket arbeitet nicht mit \xetex.
+%
+% Das alternative Paket \letterspace, welches ebenso mit einfachem \TeX arbeitet,
+% stellt nur die Befehle für Sperrsatz (Letter-spacing) bereit, und lässt Support für alle
+% anderen Erweiterungen aus (siehe Abschnitt~\ref{sec:lettersp}).
+%
+%\bigskip\noindent
+% Dieses Paket ist urheberrechtlich geschützt \textcopyright\ 2004\kern.09em--2010 R Schlicht.
+% Es darf vertrieben und/oder modifiziert werden unter den Bedingungen der
+% \IfFileExists{lppl.tex}{\hyperref[LPPL:LPPL]}{\href{http://www.latex-project.org/lppl/}}
+%   {\LaTeX\ Project Public License},
+% entweder Version~1.3c dieser Lizenz oder alternativ jeder späteren Version.
+% Das Projekt hat den <LPPL> Wartungsstatus `author-maintained'.
+%\end{abstract}
+%
+%
+%\newpage
+%\emptypdfpageresources ^^A layers of the logo
+%\tableofcontents
+%\listoftables
+%
+%
+%\newpage
+%\section{Mikrotypographie mit \pdftex}\label{sec:micro-type}
+%
+% \pdftex, die \TeX\ Erweiterung geschrieben von \thanh, führt eine Reihe 
+% mikrotypographischer Features ein. welche es nicht nur zum Werkzeug der Wahl 
+% für die Erstellung elektronischer Dokumente, sondern auch Werke überragender, altehrwürdiger
+% Typographie machen: am bedeutendsten \textit{Zeichenvorsprünge (Character Protrusion, auch bekannt als margin kerning)}
+% und\textit{Fontexpansion}. \thanh s Thesis zitierend:
+%
+%\changes{v1.9b}{2006/01/13}{add samples of micro-typographic features}
+%\microtypesample{\small
+% `Margin kerning bezeichnet die Justierung der Zeichen an den Rändern (margin) eines
+%  gesetzten Textes. Eine vereinfachte Anwendung von Margin kerning ist hängende
+%  Zeichensetzung. Margin kerning ist notwendig für optische Ausrichtung der Ränder
+%  eines gesetzten Textes, weil mechanisches Angleichen der Ränder diese eher stümperhaft
+%  aussehen lässt. Einige Zeichen können eine Zeile für das menschliche Auge kürzer
+%  erscheinen lassen als andere. Solche Zeichen um einen passenden Betrag zu den Rändern zu
+%  verschieben würde das Aussehen des Textes massiv verbessern.
+%
+%  Mit Fontexpansion zu verfassen ist die Methode, eine weitere oder engere 
+%  Variante des Fonts zu erschaffen, welche die Wortzwischenräume mehr ausgleichen. 
+%  Eine Schriftart in einer losen Zeile kann durch eine weitere Variante ausgetauscht werden, sodass die Wortzwischenräume
+%  weniger stark gestreckt werden. Gleichermaßen kann ein Font in einer dicht bepackten Zeile 
+%  durch eine schmalern Variante ersetzt werden, um die Abstände zu verringern.
+%  Es besteht mit Sicherheit die potentielle Gefahr der Fontdeformierung wenn 
+%  solche Manipulationen vorgenommen werden, weshalb sie mit extremer Vorsicht vorgenommen
+%  werden müssen. Das Potential, eine Zeilebreite mittels Fontexpansion zu justieren,
+%  sollte bedacht werden, wenn ein Paragraph in Zeilen zerbrochen wird,
+%  um bessere Stopppunkte zu wählen.' [\cite[p.~323]{ThanhThesis}]} ~\\
+%
+% Diesen beiden Features fehlte seit einiger Zeit eine einfache \LaTeX\ Benutzerschnittstelle.
+% Dann wurde das \cite{pdfcprot} Paket veröffentlicht, welches
+% \LaTeX\ Benutzern ermöglichte, Zeichenvorsprünge zu benutzen, ohne sich zu sehr 
+% mit den Interna beschäftigen zu müssen.
+%
+% Fontexpansion allerdings war weiterhin schwierig zu utilisieren, da es erforderte,
+% dass die Fontmetriken für alle Ebenen der Erweiterung verfügbar waren.
+% Deswegen musste jeder, der von diesem Feature Gebrauch machen wollte, im Vorfeld
+% multiple Ausführungen der Schriftarten anfertigen. Shellskripte, um den Benutzer wenigstens
+% teilweise von dieser Last zu befreien, waren verfügbar~-- dennoch blieb es eine lästige Arbeit.
+% Darüber hinaus mussten alle Fonts weiterhin physisch erstellt werden, wodurch Kompilierungszeit 
+% und Speicherplatz auf der Festplatte verschwendet wurden.
+%
+% Im Sommer 2004 implementierte \thanh\ eine Besonderheit, welche sich als eine
+% bedeutende Erleichterung für \TeX\ und \LaTeX\ Benutzer entpuppte: Fontexpansion kann nun
+% automatisch stattfinden. Das heißt, \pdftex\ braucht nicht länger die Fontmetriken der expandierten
+% Schriftart, sondern berechnet diese zur Laufzeit und komplett im Speicher.
+%
+%\bigskip\noindent
+% Nach diesem großen Sprung in der Anwendbarkeit stoppte die Entwicklung nicht.
+% Im Gegenteil, \pdftex\ wurde mit immer mehr besonderen Merkmalen ausgestattet: Version
+% 1.30 führte die Möglichkeit ein, \emph{alle Ligaturen auszuschalten}, Version 1.40
+% brachte ein robustes \emph{Letter-spacing} Kommando, die Möglichkeit
+% \emph{zusätzliches Zeichen Kerning} zu spezifizieren und die \emph{Justierung von Zeichenabständen innerhalb Wörter}.
+%
+% Robustes und per Bindestrich trennbares \emph{Letter-spacing (Tracking)} war immer
+% extrem schwierig in \TeX zu realisieren. Obwohl das \cite{soul} Paket
+% große Mühen unternahm um es möglich zu machen, konnte es trotzdem weiterhin in 
+% bestimmten Situationen scheitern; allein das Tracking einer Schriftart für das ganze
+% Dokument blieb unmöglich. Wendet man die neue Erweiterung von \pdftex an, stellt dies
+% nicht länger ein Problem dar. Das \microtype\ Paket stellt die Möglichkeit bereit,
+% das Tracking anpassbarer Fontsets zu ändern, z.B., alle kleinen Kapitälchen.
+% Es führt außerdem die zwei neuen Kommandos \cs{textls} und \cs{lsstyle}
+% für ad-hoc Letter-spacing ein, welche wie normale Textkommandos benutzt werden können.
+% Beachten Sie, dass Letter-spacing nur im <PDF> Modus funktioniert.
+%
+% \emph{Zusätzliches kerning} für Zeichen einer Schriftart einzustellen ist besonders
+% nützliche für Sprachen, deren typographische Tradition es erfordert, bestimmte Zeichen
+% durch ein Leerzeichen abzutrennen. Es ist zum Beispiel üblich, in französischer
+% Typographie ein wenig Platz vor einem Fragezeichen, Ausrufezeichen und Semikolon zu lassen,
+% und ein wenig mehr Platz vorm Doppelpunkt und den Guillemets. Bis jetzt konnte das nur 
+% erreicht werden, indem man diese Zeichen aktivierte (z.B.
+% mit dem \pkg{babel} Paket), was nicht immer eine praxistaugliche Lösung sein kann.
+% Im Kontrast zum Standard Kerning, welches in die Schriftarten eingebaut ist
+% (und welches natürlich wie üblich greift), basiert dieses Kerning auf einzelnen Zeichen
+% nicht auf Zeichenpaaren.
+%
+% \emph{Wortzwischenräume zu justieren} basiert auf der Idee, dass - um eine 
+% uniforme Grauheit in einem Text zu erreichen - die Wortzwischenräume auch von den
+% Zeichen in der direkten Umgebung abhängen sollten. Wenn zum Beispiel ein Wort mit 
+% einem `r' endet, sollte der folgende Abstand ein kleines bisschen kleiner sein als z.B. nach
+% einem `m'. Man kann von diesem Konzept wie von einer Erweiterung von \TeX s `space
+% factors' denken. Allerdings, während space factors alle drei Parameter dieser
+% Wortzwischenräume (oder Haftung) um den selben Betrag beeinflusst~-- das Kerning, den maximalen
+% Betrag, um den der Zwischenraum gestreckt oder geschrumpft werden kann
+% ~-- stellt \pdftex\ die Möglichkeit bereit, diese Parameter unabhängig voneinander
+% zu modifizieren. Darüber hinaus können die Werte für jeden Font anders eingestellt werden.
+% Außerdem -- und vielleicht am wichtigsten -- können diese Parameter nicht nur erhöht sondern
+% auch erniedrigt werden. Dieses Merkmal wird das Aussehen von Paragraphen vielleicht noch
+% mehr aufwerten.
+% Die Betonung liegt im letzten Satz auf dem Wort `vielleicht': diese Erweiterung ist immer 
+% noch sehr experimentell -- speziell haben nur die letzten Zeichen im Moment Einfluss auf die Wortzwischenräume.
+% Außerdem sind die mit \microtype\ gelieferten Einstellungen nicht mehr als eine erste Annäherung,
+% weshalb ich es begrüßen würde, wenn Sie Korrekturen und Verbesserungen vornehmen.
+% Ich würde vorschlagen, die Begründung für die Einstellungen in Abschnitt~\ref{sub:conf-spacing} durchzulesen.
+%
+% Abschließend mag die Möglichkeit, für einen Font \emph{alle Ligaturen auszuschalten},
+% nützlich für Schreibmaschinenschriftarten sein.
+%
+%\emptypdfpageresources ^^A layers of the sample
+%\bigskip\noindent
+% Das \microtype\ Paket stellt für all diese mikrotypographischen
+% Erweiterungen eine Schnittstelle bereit. Alle mikrotypographischen Aspekte können individuell und einfach angepasst werden.
+% Die nächsten Kapitel werden einen Abriss aller Optionen und Anpassungsmöglichkeiten präsentieren. 
+%
+%
+%\section{Loslegen}
+%
+% Es gibt keine Überraschungen beim Laden des Paketes:
+%\begin{verbatim}[morekeywords={[1]{microtype}}]
+%\usepackage{microtype}
+%\end{verbatim}
+% In den meisten Fällen ist das ausreichend, und falls Sie nicht an der Feinabstimmung
+% des mikrotypographischen Aussehens ihres Dokumentes (was unwahrscheinlich erscheint
+% da Sie dieses Paket benutzen, was ihr Interesse an typographischen Problemen bestätigt)
+% interessiert sind, können Sie den Rest dieses Dokumentes auslassen.
+%^^A
+% Falls Sie dies andererseits nicht befriedigt -- sei es aus theoretischen oder praktischen Gründen
+% -- wird Sie dieses Handbuch auf den Weg zu den erwünschten Ergebnissen und folgenden
+% Meilensteinen bringen:
+%
+%\changes{v2.2}{2007/06/06}{add overview}
+%\begin{itemize}
+%  \item Das entsprechende mikrotypograpische Feature einschalten, entweder
+%        mittels der respektiven package Option oder mittels des \cs{microtypesetup} Kommandos
+%        (Abschnitt~\ref{sec:options}).
+%  \item Wählen Sie die Schriftarten aus, auf welche dieses Feature angwendet werden soll, indem
+%        Sie `Font Sets' deklarieren und aktivieren. Einige Sets sind vorerstellt und können direkt
+%        in den Paketoptionen aktiviert werden
+%        (Abschnitt~\ref{sec:font-sets}).
+%  \item Feinabstimmen der mikrotypographischen Einstellungen an den Schriftarten oder Sets von Schriftarten
+%        (Abschnitt~\ref{sec:fine-tuning}).
+%  \item Falls sie der Typ sind, der immer weiter marschiert, werden
+%        Sie sicher an der Möglichkeit zu Context-abhängigen Einstellungen interessiert sein
+%        (Abschnitt~\ref{sec:context}).
+%  \item Wir ermutigen Sie sogar, den Pfad typographischer Tugend zu verlassen 
+%        und ein paar Schafe zu stehlen (section~\ref{sec:lettersp}) oder auf andere Weise einzudringen
+%        (section~\ref{sec:disable-ligatures}).
+%  \item Sollten sich Ihnen ein Hindernis auftun, folgen Sie den Tipps und Warnungen
+%        (Abschnitt~\ref{sec:caveats}).
+%\end{itemize}
+%
+%
+%\section{Optionen}\label{sec:options}
+%
+% Wie viele andere \LaTeX\ Pakete auch akzeptiert das \microtype\ Paket Optionen
+% über die bekannte |Schlüssel=Wert| Syntax. Im Folgenden finden sie eine Beschreibung aller
+% \key{Schlüssel} und ihrer möglichen |Werte|
+% (`|true|' kann ausgelassen werden; multiple Werte (falls erlaubt) müssen eingeklammert
+% werden; der Standardwert wirds rechts gezeigt, angeführt von einem Sternchen 
+% falls es abhängig von der \pdftex\ Version und/oder dem Output Modus ist).
+%
+%
+%\subsection{Die mikro-typographischen Features anschalten}\label{sub:options-microtype}
+%
+%\Describe{Option}{protrusion}
+%                 {*true,false,compatibility,nocompatibility,:Name des Font Sets}
+%\DescribeOption{expansion}
+% Dies sind die hauptsächlichen Optionen um die Ebene mikro-typographischer Verfeinerung,
+% welche die Schriftarten in ihrem Dokument erhalten sollten, zu kontrollieren. 
+% Standardmäßig ist das Paket recht gierig; Character Protrusion ist aktiviert, Fontexpansion
+% wird nur in Situationen abgeschaltet, in denen \pdftex\ die Fonts nicht automatisch expandieren
+% kann, also falls es entweder zu alt ist (Versionen vor 1.20) 
+% oder falls der Output Modus <DVI> ist (siehe Abschnitt~\ref{sub:options-misc}).
+% Anders  gesagt wird \microtype\ versuchen, soviel Mikrotypographie anzuschalten wie
+% es sicher als funktionierend unter den gegebenen Bedingungen erwarten kann
+% (und normalerweise ist es nicht nötig, das Paket mit anderen Optionen für die <PDF>
+% bzw. <DVI> Modi zu laden).
+%
+% Protrusion und Expansion können getrennt (de)aktiviert werden, indem man den betreffenden
+% Schlüssel auf |true| bzw. |false| setzt. Die
+% \opt{activate} Option
+%\DescribeOption{activate}
+% kürzt das Setzen beider Optionen zur gleichen Zeit ab. Deswegen haben die folgenden Zeilen
+% alle denselben Effekt (wenn man <PDF> Dateien mit einer aktuellen Version
+% von \pdftex erstellt):
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\usepackage[protrusion=true,expansion]{microtype}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\usepackage[activate={true,nocompatibility}]{microtype}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\usepackage{microtype}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%\smallskip
+% Wenn \pdftex\ Fontexpansion und Character Protrusion verwendet, können Zeilenumbrüche
+% (und konsequenterweise auch Seitenumbrüche) unterschiedlich ausfallen. Wenn das nicht gewünscht ist
+%  -- weil sie z.B. ein Buch neu setzen, dessen Seitenumbrüche sich nicht ändern dürfen --
+%  können Sie den Wert |compatibility| an die \opt{protrusion}
+% und/oder \opt{expansion} Optionen hängen. Aus typographischer Sicht jedoch werden die Ergebnisse
+% suboptimal sein, weshalb der Wert standardmäßig |nocompatibility| ist.
+%
+% Abschließend können Sie auch den Namen eines Font Sets angeben, auf welches
+% Character Protrusion und/oder Fontexpansion beschränkt werden sollten, siehe auch
+% Abschnitt~\ref{sec:font-sets} für eine detaillierte Beschreibung. Spezifizieren eines Font Sets
+% für ein Features aktiviert dieses Features implizit mit.
+%
+%\medskip
+%\Describe{Option}{tracking}{true,!false,:font set name}
+%\DescribeOption{kerning}
+%\DescribeOption{spacing}
+% Es existiert keine Kompatibilitätsebene für die neuen Erweiterungen Tracking,
+% zusätzliches Kerning und Wortzwischenräume (interword spacing). Deshalb können sie nur an-
+% oder ausgeschaltet werden, oder sie können aktiviert werden indem man einen Setnamen an die
+% Option leitet. Standardmäßig ist keines der Features angeschaltet.
+%
+%\begin{table}\small
+%\changes{v2.3a}{2008/02/25}{add table of available and enabled features}
+%\caption{Verfügbarkeit mikro-typographischer Features}\label{tab:available-features}
+%\catcode`\!=13 \def!{\textcolor{thegreen}{\hskip.9em $\bigstar$}}
+%\catcode`\?=13 \def?{\textcolor{theblue} {\hskip 1em $\boxtimes$}}
+%\catcode`\_=13 \def_{\textcolor{thered}  {\hskip 1em $\varnothing$}}
+%\setlength\fboxsep{4pt}
+%\leavevmode\kern-\dimexpr\fboxsep+\fboxrule\relax
+%\fcolorbox{theframe}{white}{^^A
+%\begin{minipage}{\textwidth}
+%\def\arraystretch{1.2}
+%\begin{tabular}{*3{@{}L{40pt}}*2{@{}L{43pt}}*4{@{}L{37pt}}@{}}
+%      \multicolumn{3}{@{}l}{\footnotesize \TeX\ engine}
+%    & \multicolumn{6}{@{}l}{\footnotesize Mikrotypographische Features}\\
+%\cmidrule(r){1-3}\cmidrule{4-9}
+%      \footnotesize Engine
+%    & \footnotesize Version
+%    & \footnotesize Output
+%    & \footnotesize Protrusion
+%    & \footnotesize Expansion
+%    & \footnotesize (= auto)
+%    & \footnotesize Kerning
+%    & \footnotesize Spacing
+%    & \footnotesize Tracking\\
+%\cmidrule(r){1-1}\cmidrule(r){2-2}\cmidrule(r){3-3}\cmidrule(r){4-4}
+%\cmidrule(r){5-5}\cmidrule(r){6-6}\cmidrule(r){7-7}\cmidrule(r){8-8}\cmidrule{9-9}
+% \pdftex
+%    & $\less$ 0.14f & <DVI>/<PDF> & _ & _ & _ & _ & _ & _\\
+%    & $\geq$  0.14f & <DVI>/<PDF> & ! & ? & _ & _ & _ & _\\
+%    & $\geq$  1.20  & <DVI>       & ! & ? & _ & _ & _ & _\\
+%    &               & <PDF>       & ! & ! & ! & _ & _ & _\\
+%    & $\geq$  1.40  & <DVI>       & ! & ? & _ & ? & ? & _\\
+%    &               & <PDF>       & ! & ! & ! & ? & ? & ?\,\textsuperscript{\itshape a}\\
+% \luatex ^^A we will have to re-model kerning, spacing and tracking with \luatex:
+%    & $\geq$  0.25  & <DVI>       & ! & ? & _ & _ & _ & _\\
+%    &               & <PDF>       & ! & ! & ! & _ & _ & _\\
+%\bottomrule
+%\end{tabular}^^A
+%\vskip4pt\footnotesize
+%\hskip-.8em
+% ! = aktiviert\quad
+% ? = nicht aktiviert\quad
+% _ = nicht verfügbar
+%\hfill
+% \textit{a}\quad $\geq$ 1.40.4 empfohlen
+%\vskip3pt
+%\end{minipage}^^A
+%}\kern-\dimexpr\fboxsep+\fboxrule\relax ^^A end \fcolorbox
+%\end{table}
+%
+%\medskip\noindent
+% In Tabelle~\ref{tab:available-features} erhalten Sie einen Überblick über die verfügbaren
+% und standardmäßig aktivierten mikro-typographischen Features für die
+% relevanten \pdftex\ Versionen und Output Modi.
+%
+%\medskip\noindent
+% Ob Ligaturen deaktiviert werden sollten kann nicht mittels einer Option kontrolliert werden,
+% sondern per \cs{DisableLigatures} Kommando, welches in 
+% Abschnitt~\ref{sec:disable-ligatures} erklärt wird.
+%
+%
+%\subsection{Zeichenvorsprünge}\label{sub:options-protrusion}
+%
+%\Describe{Option}{factor}{:integer}[1000]
+% Benutzen Sie diese Option, um global einzustellen, um welchen Betrag die Zeichen
+% hervorragen sollen. Während ein Wert von 1000 bedeutet, dass der volle Vorsprung 
+% wie in der Konfiguration (siehe Abschnitt~\ref{sub:protrusion}) spezifiziert benutzt wird,
+% bedeutet ein Wert von 500 entsprechend die Halbierung der Protrusion.
+% Dies kann nützlich sein, falls Sie grundsätzlich zufrieden mit den Einstellungen sind,
+% aber bevorzugen, wenn die Zeichenhervorragungen weniger oder mehr zu sehen sind.
+% (z.B. wenn sie so stolz darauf sind, dieses Feature nutzen zu können, dass sie es jedem 
+% zeigen wollen, oder -- um eine Motivation zu nennen, die in Einverständnis mit typographischer
+% Korrektheit steht -- falls sie eine große Schriftart nutzen, die gemäßigtere Vorsprünge verlangt).
+%
+%\medskip
+%\Describe{Option}{unit}{!character,:dimension}
+% Diese Option wird in Abschnitt~\ref{sub:protrusion} erklärt, ebenso das Kommando
+% \cs{SetProtrusion}. Seien sie vorsichtig bei Benutzung dieser Optionen!
+%
+%
+%\subsection{Fontexpansion}\label{sub:options-expansion}
+%
+%\Describe{Option}{auto}{*true,false}
+% Wie bereits im Kapitel~\ref{sec:micro-type} angemerkt, können die expandierten Versionen
+% der Fonts automatisch erstellt werden. Diese Option ist standardmäßig an, wenn
+% \pdftex Version 1.20 oder höher beträgt und der Output Modus <PDF> ist;
+% ansonsten ist die Option deaktiviert.
+% Falls \opt{auto} auf false gesetzt ist, müssen die einzelnen Fonts aller Expansionsstufen
+% bereits existieren (mit nach dem Schema \meta{font~name}\texttt{\textpm}\meta{expansion value} benannten Dateien,
+% z.B. \file{cmr12+10}, wie beschrieben in \cite{pdftexman}).
+%\iffalse ^^A no longer true (1.40?)
+% Falls expandierte Instanzen der Fonts verfügbar sind, werden sie verwendet,
+% egal ob \opt{auto} auf true oder false gesetzt ist.
+%\fi
+%
+%\changes{v1.9}{2005/08/27}{add remark about Type\,1 fonts required for
+%                           automatic font expansion}
+% Automatische Fontexpansion funktioniert nicht mit Bitmap Fonts, weswegen Sie, falls Sie
+% die Computer Modern Roman Fonts in <T1> Kodierung\footnote{
+%     Beiläufig bemerkt, Type\,1 Format und <T1> Encoding hängen in keiner
+%     Weise miteinander zusammen, abgesehen davon, dass beide mit einem `T' anfangen und mit einer `1' enden.},
+% nutzen, entweder \pkg{cm-super} Fonts installieren oder die Latin Modern
+% Fonts (package \pkg{lmodern}) benutzen sollten.
+%
+%\medskip
+%\Describe{Option}{stretch}{:integer}[20]
+%\DescribeOption{shrink}
+% Sie können bestimmen, wie sehr ein Font maximal gestreckt bzw. geschrumpft werden kann.
+% Die Zahl wird durch 1000 dividiert, sodass ein Stretch Limit von 10 bedeutet,
+% dass ein Font um bis zu ~1\% expandiert werden kann. 
+% Das standardmäßige Stretch Limit ist 20; das Shrink Limit ist standardmäßig gleich
+% dem Stretch Limit.
+%
+%\medskip
+%\Describe{Option}{step}{:integer}[\MaybeDefault{1}]
+% Fonts werden nicht um beliebige Mengen expandiert, sondern nur um gewisse bestimmte
+% Schritte innerhalb der Expansionslimits.Mit aktuellen Version von \pdftex\ (1.40 oder
+% neuer) ist diese Option standardmäßig auf 1 gesetzt, damit \pdftex\ die
+% maximale Anzahl an Instanzen der jeweiligen Fonts ausprobieren kann und somit den bestmöglichen
+% Output garantiert.\footnote{
+%   Die Kehrseite an dieser Standardeinstellung ist, dass \pdftex\ vielleicht bei großen Dokumenten
+%   nicht genügend Speicher zur Verfügung hat; in diesem Falle sollten Sie über die Fehlermeldungen in der `Hints
+%   and caveats' Abschnitt~(\ref{sec:caveats}) nachlesen oder es mit einem größeren \opt{step} probieren.}
+% Ältere \pdftex\ Versionen jedoch mussten jede einzelne Fontinstanz in der
+% <PDF> Datei einfügen, wodurch die Dateigröße teils dramatisch erhöht wurde. Deswegen --
+% sollten Sie eine pre-1.40 \pdftex\ Version nutzen -- ist \opt{step} standardmäßig
+% auf ein Fünftel des kleineren Wertes von \opt{stretch} und \opt{shrink} gesetzt.
+%
+%\medskip
+%\Describe{Option}{selected}{true,!false}
+% Wenn Fontexpansion angewendet wird ist es möglich, die Expansion einiger sensibler Zeichen,
+% welche schnell deformiert erscheinen können (z.B. das `O' im Kontrast zum `I'), zu begrenzen.
+% Das nennt sich \emph{selected expansion} und seine Benutzung erlaubt, die Stretch und Shrink
+% Limits zu erhöhen (auf z.B. 30 anstelle von 20); allerdings ist der Zuwachs limitiert, da
+% gleichzeitig die durchschnittliche Stretch Varianz verringert wird
+% Deswegen ist diese Option standardmäßig auf
+% |false| gesetzt, sodass alle Zeichen um denselben Betrag expandiert werden.
+% Siehe Abschnitt~\ref{sub:expansion} für eine detailliertere Beschreibung.
+%
+%
+%\subsection{Tracking/Letterspacing}\label{sub:option-tracking}
+%
+%\Describe{Option}{letterspace}{:integer}[100]
+% Diese Option verändert den Standardbetrag fürs Tracking (siehe Abschnitt~\ref{sub:tracking})
+% sowie Letterspacing (siehe Abschnitt~\ref{sec:lettersp}). Der Betrag wird in Tausendsteln
+% von 1\,em angegeben; zulässige Werte sind im Bereich von \textminus1000
+% bis +1000.
+%
+%
+%\subsection{Verschiedene Optionen}\label{sub:options-misc}
+%
+%\Describe{Option}{DVIoutput}{true,*false}
+% \pdftex\ ist nicht bloß in der Lage, <PDF> Dateien zu erstellen, sondern kann auch <DVI>
+% Dateien erzeugen.\footnote{
+%    Neuere \TeX\ Systeme benutzen \pdftex\ als Standard Engine auch für
+%    <DVI> Ausgaben.}
+% Letztere können mit der Option \opt{DVIoutput} erzwungen werden, was 
+% \cmd\pdfoutput\ auf Null setzt.
+%
+%\changes{v1.5}{2004/12/15}{add note about \opt{DVIoutput} option}
+% Beachten Sie, dass dies Pakete verwirren wird, die auf den Wert von
+% \cmd\pdfoutput\ angewiesen sind, falls diese früher geladen wurden; so erwarten sie,
+% dass sie aufgerufen wurden um eine <PDF> Ausgabe zu erzeugen, obwohl das nicht der Fall ist.
+% Diese Pakete sind u.a.: \pkg{graphics}, \pkg{color},
+% \pkg{hyperref}, \pkg{pstricks} und natürlich \pkg{ifpdf}. Entweder laden sie diese Pakete nach
+% \microtype\ oder benutzen die Anweisung |\pdfoutput=0| früher
+% -- in letzterem Fall ist die \opt{DVIoutput} Option redundant.
+%
+% Wenn man <DVI> Dateien erstellt, muss Fontexpansion explizit aktiviert werden.
+% Weder Letterspacing noch \emph{automatische} Fontexpansion werden funktionieren, da
+% die postprocessing Treiber (|dvips|, |dvipdfm| etc.) sowie die <DVI> Betrachter
+% nicht in der Lage sind, die Fonts on the fly zu generieren.
+%
+%\changes{v2.0}{2006/11/28}{add remark about `\opt{draft}' option disabling \microtype\
+%               (noted by \contributor Michalis Miatidis <miatidis\at informatik.rwth-aachen.de>)}
+%                                                                    ^^A private mail, 2006/11/26
+%\medskip
+%\Describe{Option}{draft}{true,!false}
+%\DescribeOption{final}
+% Falls die \opt{draft} Option an das Paket geleitet wird, werden \emph{alle
+% mikro-typographischen Erweiterungen ausgeschaltet}, was zu unterschiedlichen Zeilen-
+% und somit Seitenumbrüchen führen kann. Die \opt{draft} und \opt{final} Optionen können
+% außerdem von den Optionen der Klasse geerbt werden; natürlich kann man diese mit den
+% Optionen der Pakete überschreiben. Falls man z.B. die Klassenoption |draft| verwendet, um
+% jegliche übervollen Boxen anzuzeigen, sollte man \microtype\ mit der |final|
+% Option laden.
+%
+%\medskip
+%\Describe{Option}{verbose}{true,!false,errors,silent}
+% Informationen bzgl. der Einstellungen an jeglichen Fonts werden in die Log Datei
+% geschrieben, sofern man die \opt{verbose} Option aktiviert. Wenn \microtype\ auf ein nicht-fatales Problem trifft
+% (z.B. ein unbekanntes Zeichen in den Einstellungen oder nicht-existente Einstellungen),
+% gibt es standardmäßig nur eine Warnung aus und versucht weiterzumachen.
+% Lädt man das Paket mit |verbose=errors| werden alle Warnungen in Fehler verwandelt, sodass
+% man sicher sein kann, dass kein Problem unerkannt bleibt. Falls man
+% andererseits allen Warnungen nachgegangen ist und sich entscheidet, diese zu ignorieren,
+% kann man \microtype\ mittels |verbose=silent| zum Schweigen bringen.
+%
+%\medskip
+%\Describe{Option}{babel}{true,!false}
+% Das Paket mit der \opt{babel} Option zu laden wird die Zeichensetzung 
+% der jeweiligen ausgewählten Sprache anpassen. Mehr Information hierzu in Abschnitt~\ref{sec:context}.
+%
+%\medskip
+%\Describe{Option}{config}{:file name}[microtype]
+% Verschiedene Einstellungen für dieses Paket werden aus einer Hauptkonfigurationsdatei geladen,
+% standardmäßig ist dies \file{microtype.cfg} (siehe Abschnitt~\ref{sub:config-file}).
+% Sie können eine andere Konfigurationsdatei wählen, indem sie deren Name
+% mittels \emph{ohne die Dateiendung} angeben, z.B. |config=mycrotype|.
+%
+%\iffalse ^^A ... waiting for bug reports before documenting yet another option ...
+%\medskip
+%\Describe{Option}{defersetup}{!true,false}
+% Anders als in früheren Versionen verzögert \microtype\ seit Version 1.9a sein
+% Setup bis zum Ende der Präambel. Dies hat mindestens 2 Vorteile: Das unten
+% beschriebene Kommando \cs{microtypesetup} kann genutzt werden um Paketoptionen später
+% zu ändern und es ist nicht länger notwendig, die Standardfonts und Enkodierungen
+% noch vor \microtype zu laden. Es gibt nur ein mögliches Problem: Falls eine Box
+% innerhalb der Präambel konstruiert wird \emph{und} diese Box eine Schriftart enthält, 
+% die nicht geladen wird bevor die Box im Dokument verwendet wird, so wird diese Schriftart
+% nicht eingerichtet. Sollte dieser extrem unwahrscheinliche Fall auftreten, sollten Sie
+% |defersetup=false| setzen. Dann greifen jedoch die angesprochenen Restriktionen.
+%
+%\medskip
+%\Describe{Option}{copyfonts}{true,!false} ^^A and another one ...
+% There are some restrictions as to what \pdftex\ can do with a font: Firstly,
+% it cannot expand a single font with different parameters, secondly, it cannot
+% apply different protrusion settings to one font within the same paragraph.
+% Both restrictions, which only matter with a context-sensitive setup
+% (cf.~section~\ref{sec:context}), can be circumvented with the \opt{copyfonts}
+% option: when it is set to |true|, \microtype\ will use font copies to work
+% on. This option will automatically be set to |true|, whenever protrusion or
+% expansion settings with a |context| keyword are encountered. If these
+% settings are loaded after the preamble, however, it is too late, and you
+% should set the \opt{copyfonts} option manually.
+% This only works with \pdftex\ 1.40.4 or later.
+%\fi
+%
+%
+%\ifcmr\else\pagebreak\markright{}\fi ^^A layout
+%\subsection{Changing options later}\label{sub:options-cmd}
+%
+%\Describe{Macro}{\microtypesetup}{key\,|=|\,value list}
+% Innerhalb der Präambel akzeptiert dieses Kommando alle oben genannten Paketoptionen
+% (außer |config|).
+% Im Dokumentkörper kann dieser Aufruf verwendet werden, um grundlegende Einstellungen
+% der mikro-typographischen Erweiterungen zu verändern. Es akzeptiert dann alle Optionen aus
+% Abschnitt~\ref{sub:options-microtype}: \key{expansion}, \key{protrusion} und
+% \key{activate}, welche wiederum die Werte |true|, |false|,
+% |compatibility| oder |nocompatibility| erhalten können, \key{tracking}, \key{kerning} und
+% \key{spacing} mit den zulässigen Werten |true| oder |false|.
+% Den Namen eines Fonts an die Option zu leiten ist nicht erlaubt.
+% Benutzt man dieses Kommando, so könnte man z.B. temporär Fontexpansion ausschalten
+% indem man wie folgt verfährt:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\microtypesetup{expansion=false}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+%
+%\section{Fonts für Mikrotypographie auswählen}\label{sec:font-sets}
+%
+% Standardmäßig wird Character Protrusion auf alle Textschriftarten angewandt, die
+% im Dokument genutzt werden, und eine grundlegende Auswahl an Fonts wird Fontexpansion
+% unterzogen. Sie wollen vielleicht anpassen, welche Schriftarten den Vorzug bekommen sollten,
+% mikro-typographisch behandelt zu werden. Dies kann geschehen, indem man 
+% `Font Sets' deklariert und auswählt; diese Font Sets werden mittels Font Attributen spezifiziert,
+% die zutreffen müssen.
+%
+%\medskip
+%\Describe{Macro}{\DeclareMicrotypeSet}{?features,set name,set of fonts}
+%\DescribeMacro{\DeclareMicrotypeSet*}
+% Dieses Kommando deklariert ein neues Font Set, auf welches die the mikro-typographischen
+% Erweiterungen angewendet werden. Das optionale Argument kann eine mit Komma separierte
+% Liste von Features enthalten, auf die das jeweilige Set beschränkt werden soll.
+% Die mit Stern versehene Variante deklariert \emph{und} aktiviert das Font Set
+% gleichzeitig.
+%
+% \paragraph{Das Font Set} wird durch den <NFSS> Font Attributen zugewiesene Werte definiert:
+% Kodierung, Familie, Serie, Form und Größe (siehe auch~\cite{fntguide}).
+% Wir fangen mit einem Beispiel an. Dieses Paket definiert einen Font namens
+% `|basictext|' in der Hauptkonfigurationsdatei wie folgt:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\DeclareMicrotypeSet{basictext}
+%   { encoding = {OT1,T1,T2A,LY1,OT4,QX,T5},
+%     family   = {rm*,sf*},
+%     series   = {md*},
+%     size     = {normalsize,footnotesize,small,large}
+%   }
+%\end{verbatim}
+% Wenn Sie nun 
+%\begin{verbatim}[deletekeywords={[1]{protrusion}}]
+%\UseMicrotypeSet[protrusion]{basictext}
+%\end{verbatim}
+% in der Präambel des Dokuments aufrufen, werden nur Fonts mit den Kodierungen <OT1>, <T1>,
+% <T2A>, <LY1>, <OT4>, <QX> oder <T5> aus Roman oder Sans Serif Familien, normalen (oder
+% `medium') Serien und in per \cmd\normalsize, \cmd\footnotesize, \cmd\small\ oder \cmd\large 
+%  aufgerufenen Größen hervorragen. Mathematische Schriftarten andererseits
+% werden das nicht, da sie anderen Kodierungen angehören; gleiches gilt für 
+% fettgedruckte oder große Schriftarten etc.
+%
+% Falls eine Attributsliste leer ist oder fehlt -- wie das `shape' Attribut
+% im obigen Beispiel -- führt dies zu keiner Einschränkung, sprich, es ist äquivalent dazu
+% \emph{alle} möglichen Werte für dieses Attribut einzusetzen.
+% Deswegen ist das vordefinierte Set `|alltext|', welches wie folgt deklariert ist:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\DeclareMicrotypeSet{alltext}
+%   { encoding = {OT1,T1,T2A,LY1,OT4,QX,T5,TS1} }
+%\end{verbatim}
+% viel weniger restriktiv. Die einzige Bedingung lautet, dass die Kodierung stimmen muss.
+%
+% Folgt einem Wert ein Asterisk (wie `|rm*|' und `|sf*|' im ersten Beispiel),
+% kennzeichnet dieser keinen <NFSS> Code, sondern wird in das
+% |\|\meta{value}|default| des Dokuments übersetzt, z.B. \cmd\rmdefault.\footnote{
+%   Diese Übersetzungen geschehen zum \cmd\AtBeginDocument, was bedeutet, dass
+%   Änderungen an den Standardwerten innerhalb der Präambel auch berücksichtigt werden.
+%   Nur falls Font Standards \cmd\AtBeginDocument\ vom Benutzer selbst geändert werden,
+%   müssen Sie \microtype\ nach diesen Änderungen laden.}
+% Ein einzelner Asterisk bedeutet |\|\meta{attribute}|default|, z.B.
+% \cmd\encodingdefault, gleichermaßen \cmd\normalsize\ für die Größenachse.
+% Größen können entweder als Dimension angegeben werden (`|10|' oder `|10pt|') oder
+% als Größenwahlkommando \emph{ohne} den Backslash. Sie können sogar Bereiche
+% (z.B. `|small-Large|') wählen; während die untere Grenze im Bereich enthalten ist, gilt
+% dies nicht für die obere Grenze. Deshalb würde `|12-16|' beispielsweise 12\,pt,
+% 13.5\,pt und 15.999\,pt enthalten, aber nicht 16\,pt. Es ist nicht erlaubt, die untere
+% oder obere Grenze auszulassen (`|-10|', `|large-|').
+%
+% Zusätzlich zu diesem Deklarationsschema können sie einzelne Schriften zu einem
+% Set hinzufügen, indem Sie den `|font|' Schlüssel nutzen, welcher die Aneinanderreihung aller
+% Fontattribute, getrennt durch Slashes, erwartet, das heißt,
+%`|font|\,|=|\,\meta{encoding}|/|\meta{family}|/|\meta{series}|/|\meta{shape}|/|\meta{size}'.
+% Das erlaubt uns, Font Sets zu Sets hinzuzufügen, von denen sie sonst disjunkt sind.
+% Falls Sie zum Beispiel wollen, dass die Roman Familie in allen Größen hervorragt,
+% aber nur die normal große, möglicherweise kursive typewriter Font (im Kontrast zum
+% z.B. kleinen Font), so könnten sie das Set so deklarieren:
+%\begin{verbatim}[deletekeywords={[1]{protrusion}}]
+%\DeclareMicrotypeSet[protrusion]
+%   { myset }
+%   { encoding = T1,
+%     family   = rm*,
+%     font     = {T1/tt*/m/n/*,
+%                 T1/tt*/m/it/*} }
+%\end{verbatim}
+% Wie Sie dem Beispiel entnehmen können, ist die Asterisk Notation auch für
+% den |font| Schlüssel zulässig. Ein einzelner Asterisk ist äquivalent zu `|*/*/*/*/*|', also dem
+% normalen Font. Befehle zur Größenwahl sind auch möglich, allerdings sind keine Bereiche erlaubt. 
+%
+%\medskip\noindent
+% Tabelle~\ref{tab:predefined-font-sets} listet die 9 vordefinierten Font Sets auf.
+% Diese können ebenfalls aktiviert werden, indem ihr Name an die Optionen
+% \opt{protrusion}, \opt{expansion}, \opt{tracking}, \opt{kerning} und
+% \opt{spacing} der Features geleitet wird, wenn das Paket geladen wird, z.B.:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\usepackage[protrusion=allmath,tracking=smallcaps]{microtype}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+%\begin{table}\microtypesetup{protrusion=false}\small
+%\caption{Vordefinierte Font Sets}\label{tab:predefined-font-sets}
+%\catcode`\!=13 \def!{\textcolor{thered}{$\varnothing$}}
+%\catcode`\/=13 \def/#1/{\textcolor{thegreen}{#1}}
+%\def<#1>{\textcolor{theblue}{\acronym{#1}}}
+%\setlength\fboxsep{4pt}
+%\leavevmode\kern-\dimexpr\fboxsep+\fboxrule\relax
+%\fcolorbox{theframe}{white}{^^A
+%\begin{minipage}{\textwidth}
+%\begin{tabular}{@{}L{65pt}L{80pt}*3{L{41pt}}L{67pt}@{}}
+%      \footnotesize Set Name
+%    & \multicolumn{5}{l}{\footnotesize Font attributes}\\
+%\cmidrule{2-6}
+%    & \footnotesize Kodierung
+%    & \footnotesize Familie
+%    & \footnotesize Serie
+%    & \footnotesize Shape
+%    & \footnotesize Größe\\
+%\cmidrule(r){1-1}\cmidrule(r){2-2}\cmidrule(r){3-3}
+%\cmidrule(r){4-4}\cmidrule(r){5-5}\cmidrule{6-6}
+% |all|
+%    & !
+%    & !
+%    & !
+%    & !
+%    & ! \\
+%\cmidrule(r){1-1}
+% |alltext|\linebreak(|allmath|)
+%    & Textkodierungen, <TS1>\linebreak (<OML>, <OMS>, <U>)
+%    & !
+%    & !
+%    & !
+%    & ! \\
+%\cmidrule(r){1-1}
+% |basictext|\linebreak(|basicmath|)
+%    & Textkodierungen \linebreak (<OML>, <OMS>)
+%    & /\cmd\rm|*|/,\linebreak /\cmd\sf|*|/
+%    & /\cmd\md|*|/
+%    & !
+%    & /\cmd\normalsize/, /\cmd\footnotesize/, /\cmd\small/, /\cmd\large/\\
+%\cmidrule(r){1-1}
+% |smallcaps|
+%    & Textkodierungen
+%    & !
+%    & !
+%    & /\cmd\sc|*|/
+%    & ! \\
+%\cmidrule(r){1-1}
+% |footnotesize|
+%    & Textkodierungen, <TS1>
+%    & !
+%    & !
+%    & !
+%    & |-|/\cmd\small/\\
+%\cmidrule(r){1-1}
+% |scriptsize|
+%    & Textkodierungen, <TS1>
+%    & !
+%    & !
+%    & !
+%    & |-|/\cmd\footnotesize/\\
+%\cmidrule(r){1-1}
+% |normalfont|
+%    & /\cmd\encoding|*|/
+%    & /\cmd\family|*|/
+%    & /\cmd\series|*|/
+%    & /\cmd\shape|*|/
+%    & /\cmd\normalsize/\\
+%\bottomrule
+%\end{tabular}
+%\vskip4pt\footnotesize
+% `Textkodierungen' = <OT1>, <T1>, <T2A>, <LY1>, <OT4>, <QX>, <T5>
+%\hfill
+% `/\bslash\,\dots|*|/' = `/\bslash\,\dots|default|/'
+%\vskip3pt
+%\end{minipage}^^A
+%}\kern-\dimexpr\fboxsep+\fboxrule\relax ^^A end \fcolorbox
+%\end{table}
+%
+%\medskip
+%\Describe{Macro}{\UseMicrotypeSet}{?features,set name}
+% Dieses Kommando aktiviert ein vorher durch \cs{DeclareMicrotypeSet} deklariertes Font Set.
+% Nutzt man das optionale Argument, so kann man begrenzen, wieviele Features auf das Set angewendet werden.
+% Diese Anweisung hat nur einen Effekt, wenn das Features in den Paketoptionen aktiviert wurde. 
+%
+%\medskip
+%\Describe{Macro}{\DeclareMicrotypeSetDefault}{?features,set name}
+% Falls ein Feature aktiviert ist, aber kein Font Set explizit gewählt wurde, so
+% werden die von diesem Befehl deklarierten Sets aktiviert. Standardmäßig wird das `|alltext|' Font
+% Set für Zeichenhervorhebungen und zusätzliches Kerning genutzt, das
+% `|basictext|' Set für Fontexpansion und Wortzwischenräume und das
+% `|smallcaps|' Set für Tracking.
+%
+%\medskip\noindent
+% Diese Anweisungen können nur in der Präambel oder der Hauptkonfigurationsdatei
+% verwendet werden. Ihre Bandbreite gilt global für das Dokument. Nur ein Set pro Feature
+% kann aktiviert werden.
+%
+%
+%\section{Micro Feinabstimmung}\label{sec:fine-tuning}
+%
+% Jedes Zeichen bedarf eines bestimmten Betrags an Protrusion, Kerning oder Spacing.
+% Es kann ebenso wünschenswert sein, die maximale Expansion bestimmter Zeichen zu
+% begrenzen. Überdies, da jeder Font anders aussieht, müssen Einstellungen speziell
+% auf eine Schriftart oder ein Set von Fonts zutreffen. Dieses Paket enthält flexible und
+% einfache Methoden, um diese feineren Aspekte der Mikrotypographie
+% anzupassen.
+%
+% Alle Anweisungen zur Feinabstimmung folgen prinzipiell derselben Syntax: Sie benötigen alle
+% 3 argumente; das Erste ist optional und kann zusätzliche Optionen enthalten;
+% im zweiten Argument werden Font Sets spezifiziert, auf welche die Einstellungen angewendet
+% werden sollen; das dritte Argument enthält die eigentlichen Einstellungen.
+%
+% Das Font Set, für welches die Einstellungen greifen sollen, wird mit der selben
+% Syntax von \meta{font axis}\,|=|\,\meta{Werteliste} Paaren deklariert wie für das 
+% Kommando \cs{DeclareMicrotypeSet} (siehe Abschnitt~\ref{sec:font-sets}). Der einzige 
+% Unterschied liegt darin, dass Werte mit anführendem Asterisk sofort übersetzt werden,
+% nicht am Ende der Präambel.
+%^^A
+%\ifcmr\else\enlargethispage{3\baselineskip}\fi ^^A layout
+%\changes{v1.7}{2005/03/23}{remove table of match order}^^A
+% Um die passenden Einstellungen für eine gegebene Schriftart zu finden, versucht das Paket alle
+% Kombinationen von Fontkodierung, Familie, Serie, Form und Größe, mit abnehmendem 
+% Stellenwert in dieser Reihenfolge. Existieren zum Beispiel sowohl Einstellungen für die
+% momentanen Familien (z.B. |T1/cmr///|) als auch Einstellungen für kursive Fonts mit normalem Gewicht
+% (|T1//m/it/|), so würden die Einstellungen für die |cmr| Familie benutzt.\footnote{
+%    Für alle Interessierten stellt Tabelle~\ref{tab:match-order} auf
+%    Seite~\pageref{tab:match-order} die exakte Reihenfolge dar.}
+% Die Kodierung muss immer stimmen.
+%
+%\subsection{Character Protrusion}\label{sub:protrusion}
+%
+%\Describe{Macro}{\SetProtrusion}{?options,set of fonts,protrusion settings}
+% Benutzt man dieses Kommando, so kann man die Protrusionsfaktoren jedes einzelnen Zeichens
+% einer Schriftart oder eines Font Sets verändern. Ein sehr unvollständiges Beispiel wäre das folgende:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\SetProtrusion
+%   { encoding = T1,
+%     family   = cmr }
+%   { A              = {50,50},
+%     \textquoteleft = {700, } }
+%\end{verbatim}
+% Dies würde darin resultieren, dass der Buchstabe `A' um 5\% seiner Breite
+% auf beiden Seiten hervorragt; das linke Anführungszeichen würde hier um 70\% seiner Breite zum linken Rand hin
+% hervorragen. Angewandt wird das Beispiel auf alle Font Formen, Serien und Größen der
+% <T1>~kodierten Computer Modern Roman Familie.
+%
+%\paragraph{Die Protrusionseinstellungen}
+% bestehen aus \meta{Zeichen}\,|=|\,\meta{Protrusionsfaktoren} Paaren.
+%
+% Die Zeichen können entweder einzeln als solche angegeben werden (`|A|'),
+% als ein Symbolkommando (`\cmd\textquoteleft'), oder als Slotnummer: 3 Stellen
+% für dezimale Notation, angeführt von~|"| für hexadezimal, mit~|'| für
+% oktal (z.B. die `fl' Ligatur in <T1> Kodierung:~|029|, |"1D|, |'35|).
+% \mbox{8-bit} (und sogar <UTF-8>) Zeichen können direkt oder in
+% \LaTeX's traditioneller \mbox{7-bit} Notation eingegeben werden: sowohl |\"A| als auch \expandafter|\"A|
+% sind zulässig, vorausgesetzt, dass das Zeichen sowohl in der Input- als auch
+% der Fontkodierung deklariert wird. Sie haben ebenfalls die Möglichkeit, Zeichenlisten anzugeben,
+% für welche die Einstellungen übernommen werden sollen (siehe Abschnitt~\ref{sub:inherit}).
+%
+% Die Protrusionsfaktoren weisen einem Zeichen den Betrag zu,
+% um den sie zum linken Rand hin (erster Wert) bzw. rechten Rand hin (zweiter Wert) hervorragen
+% sollen. Standardmäßig sind die Werte relativ zur Breite des Zeichens zu verstehen,
+% sodass ein Wert von 1000 bedeutet, dass das Zeichen vollständig zwischen die Ränder
+% gelegt werden sollte, während es z.B. bei einem Wert von 50 
+% um 5\% seiner Breite hervorragen würde. Negative Werte sind erlaubt, ebenso Zahlen größer
+% als 1000 (effektiv jedoch nicht mehr als 1\,em der Schriftart).
+% Sie können jede der beiden Zahlen auslassen, wenn Sie nicht wollen, dass
+% das jeweilige Zeichen zu dieser Seite hervorragen sollte. Das abtrennende Komma jedoch
+% dürfen Sie nicht auslassen.
+%
+%\paragraph{Optionen:}
+%\begin{options}
+%  \item[\key{name}] Sie können den Protrusionseinstellungen einen Namen zuweisen, sodass
+%       Sie in der Lage sind, es aus einer anderen Liste zu laden.
+%  \item[\key{load}] Sie können eine andere Liste laden (vorausgesetzt, dass Sie dieser zuvor
+%       einen Namen zugewiesen haben) bevor die aktuelle Liste geladen wird, wodurch die Fonts die
+%       Werte der geladenen Liste erben.
+%      \par
+%       Dadurch kann die Konfiguration beträchtlich erleichtert werden. Sie können
+%       zum Beispiel eine Standardliste für eine Schriftarte erstllen; Einstellungen für andere
+%       Formen oder Serien können diese Einstellungen laden, sie erweitern und überschreiben
+%       (da der jeweils letzte Wert Vorrang hat). Font Einstellungen werden
+%       rekursiv geladen.
+%       Die folgenden Optionen werden alle geladenen Listen beeinflussen:
+%\changes{v1.8}{2005/06/23}{add example for \texttt{factor} option}
+%  \item[\key{factor}] Diese Option kann genutzt werden, um alle Protrusionsfaktoren
+%       der Liste zu beeinflussen, was alle globalen \opt{factor} Einstellungen überschreibt (siehe
+%       Abschnitt~\ref{sub:options-protrusion}). Wollen sie zum Beispiel, dass Fonts mit größeren Abmaßen
+%       weniger hervorragen, könnten Sie die normalen Listen laden, allerdings
+%       könnten Sie kleinere Faktoren darauf anwenden:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\SetProtrusion
+%   [ factor   = 700
+%     load     = cmr-T1 ]
+%   { encoding = T1,
+%     family   = cmr,
+%     size     = large- }
+%   { }
+%\end{verbatim}
+%  \item[\key{unit}] Standardmäßig sind die Protrusionsfaktoren relativ zur Breite
+%       des jeweiligen Zeichens. Die |unit| Option kann genutzt werden, um dieses Verhalten
+%       zu überschreiben, sodass \microtype\ diese Werte als Tausendstel der
+%       angegeben Werte deutet. Gibt man z.B. die Anweisung `|unit=1em|' hätte dies den Effekt, dass
+%       ein Wert von 50 nun darin resultieren würde, dass ein ein Zeichen um
+%       5\% eines em des Fonts hervorragen würde (und somit die interne
+%       Vermessung von \pdftex's \cmd\lpcode\ und \cmd\rpcode\ primitives simuliert).
+%       Das normale Verhalten kann mittels |unit=character| wiederhergestellt werden.\footnote{
+%          Die |unit| Option kann auch global an das Paket geleitet werden (siehe
+%          Abschnitt~\ref{sub:options-protrusion}).
+%          Allerdings werden alle vorliegenden Einstellungen unter der Annahme,
+%          dass die Werte relativ zur Zeichenbreite sind, erstellt. Deshalb
+%          sollten Sie es nur ändern wenn Sie sich sicher sind, dass
+%          die Standardeinstellungen im Dokument nicht verwendet werden.}
+%  \item[\key{preset}] Setzt die Protrusions Codes aller Zeichen auf die angegebenen
+%       Werte (|={|\meta{left}|,|\meta{right}|}|), u.U. skaliert mit
+%       einem |factor|. Eine |unit| Einstellung wird nur berücksichtigt, wenn sie
+%       nicht |=character| ist.
+%  \item[\key{inputenc}] Wählt eine Inputkodierung aus, die auf die Liste angewendet
+%       werden soll, unabhängig von der Eingabekodierung des Dokuments selbst. Sie können jede
+%       Kodierung angeben, die per \pkg{inputenc} geladen werden könnte,
+%       also u.a. |ansinew|, |koi8-r|, |utf8|.
+%  \item[\key{context}] Die Bandbreite der Liste kann auf einen gewissen Kontext limitiert
+%       werden. Schauen Sie in Abschnitt~\ref{sec:context} für ein Anwendungsbeispiel nach.
+%\end{options}
+%
+%
+%\subsection{Fontexpansion}\label{sub:expansion}
+%
+%\Describe{Macro}{\SetExpansion}{?options,set of fonts,expansion settings}
+% Standardmäßig können alle Zeichen eines Fonts um denselben Betrag gestrecht
+% oder geschrumpft werden. Man kann aber auch die Expansionslimits für bestimmte
+% einzelne Zeichen festlegen, wenn diese sensibler auf Deformation reagieren. Das ist der
+% Zweck des \cs{SetExpansion} Kommandos. Beachten Sie, dass dies nur einen Effekt hat,
+% wenn das Paket mit der Option \opt{selected} geladen wurde (siehe
+% Abschnitt~\ref{sub:options-expansion}). Ansonsten werden die Expansionseinstellungen
+% ignoriert~-- anders als die Optionen im optionalen ersten Argument, welche
+% trotzdem ausgewertet werden.
+%
+% Falls das Paket mit der \opt{selected} Option geladen wurde und Einstellungen für einen Font
+% nicht existieren, wird Fontexpansion gar nicht auf diesen Font angewendet.
+% Sollte die außergewöhnliche Situation aufkommen, dass sie die ausgewählte Expansion
+% generell verwenden wollen, aber dass alle Zeichen eines bestimmten Font (Sets)
+% um denselben Betrag geschrumpft oder expandiert werden sollten, so müssen sie eine
+% leere Liste für diese Fonts erstellen.
+%
+%\ifcmr\else\enlargethispage\baselineskip\fi ^^A layout
+%\paragraph{Die Expansionseinstellungen}
+% bestehen aus Paaren der Form \meta{character}\,|=|\,\meta{expansion factor}.
+% Sie können eine Zahl für jedes Zeichen festlegen, die den Betrag bestimmt, um den
+% ein Zeichen expandiert werden kann. Die Zahlen bezeichnen Tausendstel
+% der vollen Expansion.
+% Setzt man zum Beispiel den Expansionsfaktor des Zeichens `O' auf 500,
+% wird dieses nur um die Hälfte des Betrages geschrumpft oder expandiert, um
+% den die anderen Zeichen expandiert werden.
+% Während der Standardwert für Character Protrusion auf 0 gesetzt ist -- sofern Sie
+% keine Zeichen angegeben haben, wird auch keines hervorspringen ~-- ist der Standardwert
+% für Expansion 1000, was bedeutet, dass alle Zeichen um denselben Betrag
+% expandiert werden.
+%
+%\paragraph{Optionen:}
+%\begin{options}
+%  \item[\key{name}, \key{load}, \key{preset}, \key{inputenc}, \key{context}]
+%       Analog zu \cs{SetProtrusion} kann dieses optionale Argument genutzt werden,
+%       um einer Liste einen Namen zuzuweisen, eine andere Liste zu laden, alle Expansionsfaktoren
+%       voreinzustellen, die Eingabekodierung festzulegen oder den Kontext der Liste
+%       zu bestimmen (Expansionskontexte sind nur möglich mit \pdftex\
+%       Version 1.40.4 oder neuer).
+%\changes{v1.8}{2005/04/12}{add example of how to get rid of a widow
+%               (suggested by \contributor Adam Kucharczyk <adamk\at ijp-pan.krakow.pl>)}
+%                                                          ^^A private mail, 2005/04/09
+%  \item[\key{auto}, \key{stretch}, \key{shrink}, \key{step}]
+%       Diese Schlüssel können genutzt werden um die globalen Einstellungen der Paketoptionen
+%       zu überschreiben (siehe Abschnitt~\ref{sub:options-expansion}). Wenn Sie keine
+%       der Optionen |stretch|, |shrink| und |step| angeben, wird ihr jeweiliger globaler
+%       Wert genutzt (es findet also keine Berechnung statt).
+%
+%       Ein praktisches Beispiel: Nehmen wir an, wir haben einen Paragraphen, der eine
+%       Witwe enthält, die man einfach hätte verhindern können, indem man den Font ein wenig
+%       mehr geschrumpft hätte. In Verbindung mit der |context| Option (siehe Abschnitt~\ref{sec:context}
+%       für weitere Details) könnte man mit diesem speziellen Paragraphen mehr Expansion erlauben:
+%\begin{verbatim}[gobble=2]
+% \SetExpansion
+%    [ context = sloppy,
+%      stretch = 30,
+%      shrink  = 60,
+%      step    =  5  ]
+%    { encoding = {OT1,T1,TS1} }
+%    { }
+% % ... END PREAMBLE
+% {\microtypecontext{expansion=sloppy}%
+%  Dieser Paragraph enthält eine `unnötige' Witwe.}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%       Diese Methode, Kontext anzuwenden um vorübergehend verschiedene
+%       Expansionsparameter zu setzen funktioniert nur mit \pdftex\ 1.40.4 oder neuer
+%       (für ältere Versionen wird ein schmutziger Trick in
+%       Abschnitt~\ref{ssec:font-setup} auf Seite~\pageref{exp-hack} beschrieben). Bedenken Sie auch,
+%       dass \pdftex\ die Nutzung von Fonts mit verschiedenen Expansionslimits oder -stufen
+%       (sogar für verschiedene Fonts) innerhalb eines Paragraphs verbietet, weswegen
+%       der saloppe Kontext benutzt werden muss, um Paragraphen zu komplettieren.
+%  \item[\key{factor}]
+%       Diese Option stelle eine andere Methode bereit, um Expansionseinstellungen für
+%       bestimmte Fonts zu verändern, arbeitet aber um die eben beschriebenen Restriktionen herum. Die
+%       |factor| Option beeinflusst die Expansionsfaktoren aller Zeichen (in
+%       Kontrast zur allgemeinen Streckbarkeit) des Fonts. Wollten sie z.B. die
+%       kursive Form weniger expandieren lassen, würden sie vereinbaren:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\SetExpansion
+%   [ factor   = 500 ]
+%   { encoding = *,
+%     shape    = it }
+%   { }
+%\end{verbatim}
+%       Die |factor| Option kann nur genutzt werden, um die Streckbarkeit der Zeichen 
+%       zu \emph{verringern}, weshalb sie nur Werte kleiner als 1000 erhalten darf.
+%       Außerdem kann sie nur für einzelne Fonts oder Font Sets genutzt werden;
+%       die Option global in den Paketoptionen zu setzen macht wenig Sinn --
+%       dafür nutzt man die Optionen \opt{stretch} und
+%       \opt{shrink} des Pakets.
+%\end{options}
+%
+%
+%\subsection{Tracking}\label{sub:tracking}
+%\Describe{Macro}{\SetTracking}{?options,set of fonts,tracking amount}
+% Eine bedeutende typographische Technik -- welche lange in \TeX\ fehlte --
+% ist die Anpassung des Trackings, sprich die uniforme Addition oder Subtraktion
+% von Sperrsatz zu/von allen Zeichen eines Fonts. Zum Beispiel ist es ein 
+% normal üblicher, typographischer Brauch, komplett in Kapitälchen
+% (wie in diesem Dokument) ein wenig zu sperren. Die Lesbarkeit kann auch verbessert
+% werden, indem man das Tracking von kleinerer Typen minimal erhöht und das größerer
+% Typen minimal erhöht.\footnote{
+%     Für Fonts mit vollem Funktionsumfang wie Computer Modern ist das für gewöhnlich
+%     nicht nötig, da sie in optischen Größen kommen und das Tracking der Kapitälchen
+%     bereits angepasst ist.}
+% Das \cs{SetTracking} Kommando erlaubt, die Menge des Trackings für verschiedene
+% Fonts oder Font Sets zu setzen. Es wird vom \cs{textls} Kommando ausgewertet,
+% welches genutzt werden kann, um kleinere Textpassagen zu sperren (siehe
+% Abschnitt~\ref{sec:lettersp}).
+%
+%\paragraph{Die Menge des Tracking}
+% wird festgelegt in Tausendsteln von 1\,em (oder der gegebenen Einheit); negative Werte
+% sind ebenfalls erlaubt.
+%
+%\paragraph{Optionen:}
+%\begin{options}
+%  \item[\key{name}, \key{unit}, \key{context}]
+%       Diese Optionen dienen derselben Funktionalität wie bei den vorigen
+%       Konfigurationskommandos. Die Einheit kann jegliche Dimension annehmen, 
+%       der Standard beträgt 1\,em.
+%  \item[\key{spacing}]
+%       Werden die \emph{Zeichen}zwischenräume verändert, müssen auch die \emph{Wort}zwischenräume
+%       vielleicht angepasst werden. Diese Option erwartet drei Zahlen für Wortzwischenraum,
+%       bzw. Streckung und Schrumpfung, welche in Tausendsteln eines 1\,em
+%       angegeben werden (oder in der aktuellen Einheit (\texttt{unit})). Folgt 
+%       einem Wert ein Asterisk, so zeigt es an, dass Tausendstel der jeweiligen
+%       Fontdimension zu dieser hinzuaddiert werden. Zum Beispiel werden durch
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\SetTracking[ spacing = {25*,166, } ]{ encoding = *, shape = sc }{ 25 }
+%\end{verbatim}
+%       die Wortzwischenräume um 2.5\% erhöht, die Streckung wird auf einen Betrag
+%       von 0.166\,em gesetzt, an den Schrumpf-Einstellungen wird nichts geändert. Falls
+%       sie die \texttt{spacing} Option nicht angeben, wird der Wortzwischenraum
+%       über die aktuelle Größe der Sperrsatzabstände skaliert (wie in obigem Beispiel),
+%       wobei stretch und shrink unberührt bleiben.
+%  \item[\key{outer spacing}]
+%       Falls ein Wortzwischenraum direkt auf Sperrsatz folgt (oder umgekehrt),
+%       wird er standardmäßig gleich den Zwischenräumen im gesperrten Text behandelt.
+%       Mit dieser Option, welche dieselben Werte wie \texttt{spacing} akzeptiert, 
+%       kann sie unabhängig eingestellt werden.
+%  \item[\key{outer kerning}]
+%       Falls andererseits kein Wortzwischenraum folgt oder vorgeht, können Sie
+%       immer noch die ersten und letzten Buchstaben von angrenzenden Buchstaben 
+%       abtrennen. Diese Option erwartet durch Komma abgretrennte Kerning Beträge 
+%       für die linke und rechte Seite, in Tausendsteln eines 1\,em (oder der aktuellen
+%       \texttt{unit}). Folgt einem Wert ein Asterisk, bezeichnet dies Tausendstel 
+%       der aktuellen Abstandsgröße des Sperrsatzes. Ein einzelner Asterisk bedeutet
+%       `|500*|'; das ist ebenso der Standard, sprich die Summe des äußeren Kerns beträgt
+%       standardmäßig soviel wie die aktuelle Größe der Abstände des Sperrsatzes. Um kerning auf
+%       beiden Seiten zu entfernen, verwendet man `|outer kerning={0,0}|'.
+%  \item[\key{no ligatures}]
+%       Soweit \pdftex\ betroffen ist, werden Ligaturen in gesperrten Fonts 
+%       wie gewöhnlich konstruiert, was angebracht sein kann, wenn das Tracking
+%       um einen kleinen Betrag geändert wird. Für größere Abstände andererseits
+%       hätte der normale Abstand zwischen Zeichen innerhalb Ligaturen
+%       enttäsuchende \textls[150]{E\lslig{ff}ekte}.
+%       Dieser Schlüssel erwartet eine per Komma abgetrennte Liste von Zeichen, für welche
+%       die Ligaturen abgeschaltet werden sollen; nur das Zeichen, mit welchem die Ligatur
+%       beginnt, muss angegeben werden.
+%       Wird der Schlüssel ohne Wert angegeben, so werden \emph{alle} Ligaturen des Fonts
+%       abgeschaltet. Das wird jedoch nicht empfohlen, da es ebenso mit sich bringt, dass
+%       Kerning ausgeschaltet wird.\footnote{
+%         Die untrennbare Verbindung von Ligaturen und Kernen ist eine Begrenzung von
+%         \TeX\, die nicht vor der Einführung \luatex beseitigt wird.}
+%       Die Standardeinstellungen stellen Ligaturen nur für das Zeichen `|f|' ab,
+%       sprich, `ff', `fi', ffi', etc.\footnote{
+%         Mit \pdftex\ Versions vor 1.40.4 sind \emph{alle} Ligaturen und
+%         somit jegliches Kerning abgeschaltet. Es wird deshalb empfohlen, wenigstens
+%         Version 1.40.4 zu nutzen.}
+%       In außergewöhnlichen Situationen könenn Sie manuell Ligaturen aufbrechen, indem
+%       sie `|{\kern0pt}|' bzw. \pkg{babel}s \verb="|=
+%       Kürzel verwenden, oder aber die Ligaturen schützen, indem Sie sie in \cs{lslig} einschließen (siehe
+%       Abschnitt~\ref{sec:lettersp}).
+%\end{options}
+%
+%\ifx\lssample\undefined
+% \fallbacktext{Die originale Dokumentation\footnote{
+%     \ctanurl{macros/latex/contrib/microtype/microtype.pdf}.}
+%   enthält ein Bild, welches all diese Optionen illustriert.}
+%\medskip\noindent
+% Nehmen wir zum Beispiel an,
+%\else
+%\changes{v2.3}{2007/11/03}{add letterspacing illustration}
+%\medskip\noindent
+% Since a picture is worth a thousand words, probably even more if, in our
+% case, it depicts a couple of letterspaced words, let's bring one to sum up
+% these somewhat confusing options. Suppose you had the following settings
+% (which I would in no way recommend; they are only for illustrative purposes):
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\SetTracking
+%  [ no ligatures  = {"\anchorarrow{nolig}"f},
+%    spacing       = {60"\anchorarrow{ispace}"0*,-1"\anchorarrow{istretch}"00*, "\anchorarrow{ishrink}"},
+%    outer spacing = {4"\anchorarrow{ospace}"50,2"\anchorarrow{ostretch}"50,1"\anchorarrow{oshrink}"50},
+%    outer kerning = {"\anchorarrow{okernbegin}"*,"\anchorarrow{okernend}"*} ]
+%  { encoding = * }
+%  { 1"\anchorarrow{lsamount}"60 }
+%\end{verbatim}
+% and then write:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%Stop \textls{stealing sheep}!
+%\end{verbatim}
+% this is the (typographically dubious) outcome:
+%
+% \lssample
+%
+%\noindent
+% While the word `Stop' is not letterspaced, the space between the letters in
+% the other two words is expanded by the \showarrow[tracking]{tracking~amount}{red}
+% of 160/1000\,em\,=\allowbreak\,0.16\,em.
+% The \showarrow[ispace]{inner~space}{green} within the letterspaced text is
+% increased by 60\%, while its \showarrow[istretch]{stretch}{green} amount is
+% decreased by 10\% and the \showarrow[ishrink]{shrink}{green} amount is left
+% untouched.
+% The \showarrow[ospace]{outer~space}{green} (of 0.45\,em) immediately before the
+% piece of text may \showarrow[ostretch]{stretch}{green} by 0.25\,em and
+% \showarrow[oshrink]{shrink}{green} by 0.15\,em.
+% Note that there is no outer space after the text, since the exclamation mark
+% immediately follows; instead, the default \showarrow[okern]{outer~kern}{red}
+% of half the letterspace amount (0.08\,em) is added.
+% Furthermore, one \showarrow{ligature}{grey} wasn't broken up, because we
+% neglected to specify the `|s|' in the |no ligatures| key.
+%
+%\medskip\noindent
+% As another, more realistic
+%\fi
+%                            Sie wollen alle kleinen Kapitälchen um 50/1000\,em
+% sperren, Fonts kleiner \cmd\small\ um 0.02\,em, und das Tracking großer Typen
+% um 0.02\,em erhöhen. Sie können das mit folgenden Einstellungen erreichen:
+%^^A there's a \nobreakspace ahead!
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\usepackage[tracking=true]{microtype}
+%\DeclareMicrotypeSet*[tracking]{my}
+%   { encoding = *,
+%     size     = {-small,Large-},
+%     font     = */*/*/sc/* }
+%\SetTracking[ no ligatures = f ]{ encoding = *, shape = sc}{ 50 }
+%\SetTracking{ encoding = *, size = -small }{  20 }
+%\SetTracking{ encoding = *, size = Large- }{ -20 }
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+%\medskip\noindent
+% Gesperrte Schriftarten, für welche keine Einstellungen vorliegen, werden um den
+% den Standard von 0.1\,em gesperrt (einstellbar mit der Paketoption \opt{letterspace}, siehe
+% Abschnitt~\ref{sub:options-misc}). Setzen wir voraus, ihr Herausgeber will, dass Sie ihre
+% 1000 Seiten auf ein Meisterwerk von einer handvoll Seiten zusammenkürzen, dann könnten Sie
+% (mit gekreuzten Fingern) \microtype\ laden:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\usepackage[tracking=alltext,letterspace=-40]{microtype}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+%\emptypdfpageresources ^^A layers of letterspacing illustration
+%
+%
+%\subsection{Zusätzliches Kerning}\label{sub:kerning}
+%
+%\Describe{Macro}{\SetExtraKerning}{?options,set of fonts,kerning settings}
+% Mit diesem Befehl können sie das zusätzliche Kerning feinabstimmen. Im Vergleich zu
+% herkömmlichem Kerning, welches immer mit einem \emph{Paar} von Zeichen assoziiert
+% wird, und Tracking, welches den Zwischenraum zwischen \emph{allen}
+% Zeichen eines Fonts angibt, bezieht sich zusätzliches Kerning nur auf einzelne Zeichen,
+% soll heißen, immer wenn ein bestimmtes Zeichen im Text auftaucht, wird das angegebene
+% Kerning eingefügt, unabhängig davon, welche Zeichen vorgehen oder folgen.
+%
+% Ich sollte nicht versäumen zu sagen, dass es eine Limitierung zusätzlichen Kernings gibt:
+% Wörter, die solch einem Kern\emph{direkt folgen} (nicht von einem Leerzeichen getrennt),
+% werden nicht mit Bindestrich versehen, solang man die Trennpunkte nicht selbst einstellt, 
+% z.B. für Kerning nach dem Apostroph `|l'apos\-trophe|'. Diese Restriktion von \pdftex\
+% wird hoffentlich bald abgeschafft.
+%
+%\paragraph{Die Einstellungen des Kerning}
+% werden als Paare der Form \meta{Zeichen}\,|=|\,\meta{Kerning Werte} angegeben, wobei
+% letzteres 2 Werte enthätl: das Kerning, welches vor und nach dem betreffenden Zeichen angefügt wird.
+% Einmal mehr können Werte ausgelassen werden, nicht aber das Komma.
+%
+%\paragraph{Optionen:}
+%\begin{options}
+%  \item[\key{name}, \key{load}, \key{factor}, \key{preset}, \key{inputenc}]
+%       Diese Optionen dienen der gleichen Funktionalität wie in den vorigen
+%       Konfigurationsbefehlen.
+%  \item[\key{unit}] Zulässige Werte sind: |space|, |character| und eine
+%       \meta{Dimension}. Standardmäßig bezeichnen die Werte ein Tausendstel von 1\,em.
+%  \item[\key{context}] Wenn es um Kerning Einstellungen geht, ist diese Option
+%       besonders nützlich, da sie erlaubt, Einstellungen abhängig von der Sprache
+%       anzuwenden.
+%      \par
+%       Zum Beispiel kann man die folgenden Einstellungen, angedacht für Dokumente in Französisch,
+%       in der Hauptkonfigurationsdatei finden:
+%\ifcmr\else\pagebreak\fi ^^A layout
+%\begin{verbatim}[deletekeywords={[1]{unit}}]
+%\SetExtraKerning
+%   [ name     = french-default,
+%     context  = french,
+%     unit     = space   ]
+%   { encoding = {OT1,T1,LY1} }
+%   {
+%     :  = {1000,}, % = \fontdimen2
+%     ;  = {500, }, % ~ \thinspace
+%     !  = {500, },
+%     ?  = {500, }
+%   }
+%\end{verbatim}
+%\changes{v2.3}{2007/11/20}{add kerning sample}
+%\ifluatex
+% \fallbacktext{Since this document was compiled with |luatex| instead of
+%   |pdftex|, it does not\\include the sample that the original documentation
+%   features.}
+%\else
+%      \begin{microtypecontext}{kerning=french}
+%       Was ist das Ergebnis dieser Einstellungen? Wenn sie aktiv sind wie 
+%       im vorliegenden Paragraphen, wird ein schmales Leerzeichen vor jedem Fragezeichen,
+%       Ausrufezeichen und Semikolon eingefügt; ein normales Leerzeichen vorm Doppelpunkt.
+%       In Abschnitt~\ref{sec:context} wird beschrieben, wie diese Einstellungen aktiviert
+%       werden. Dieser Paragraph wurde eingegeben wie folgt:
+%      \end{microtypecontext}
+%\begin{verbatim}[deletekeywords={[1]{context,activate}}]
+%\begin{microtypecontext}{kerning=french}
+%       Was ist das Ergebnis dieser Einstellungen? Wenn sie aktiv sind wie 
+%       im vorliegenden Paragraphen, wird ein schmales Leerzeichen vor jedem Fragezeichen,
+%       Ausrufezeichen und Semikolon eingefügt; ein normales Leerzeichen vorm Doppelpunkt.
+%       In Abschnitt~\ref{sec:context} wird beschrieben, wie diese Einstellungen aktiviert
+%       werden. Dieser Paragraph wurde eingegeben wie folgt:
+%\end{microtypecontext}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%\fi
+%\end{options}
+%
+%
+%\subsection{Wortzwischenräume}\label{sub:spacing}
+%
+%\Describe{Macro}{\SetExtraSpacing}{?Optionen,Font Set,Spacing Einstellungen}
+% Dieser Befehl erlaubt Ihnen, die Wortzwischenräume fein abzustimmen (auch bekannt als
+% glue). Eine vorausgehende Bemerkung darüber, was ein `Zwischenraum' ist, könnte angebracht sein: zwischen zwei
+% Wörtern fügt \TeX\ sogenannten glue ein, welcher von drei Parametern charakterisiert wird
+% -- der normale Abstand zwischen zwei Wörtern, der maximale Abstand, der dem angefügt
+% werden darf, und das Maximum welches davon subtrahiert werden kann.
+% Die letzteren beiden Parameter wirken wann immer \TeX\ versucht, einen Paragraphen
+% in Zeilen zu zerlegen und dabei scheitert; es kann die Räume zwischen Wörtern strecken
+% oder schrumpfen. Diese drei Parameter sind spezifisch für jeden Font.
+%
+% Obendrein beherrscht \TeX\ das Konzept von `space factors'.
+% Sie können genutzt werden, um die Räume zwischen bestimmten Zeichen, besonders
+% den Satzzeichen zu vergrößern. Falls \pdftex zusätzliche Zwischenräume
+% in Betrieb sind, werden space factors ignoriert, da es als Erweiterung
+% zu space factors mit viel präziserer Kontrolle betrachtet werden kann.
+%
+%\paragraph{Einstellungen an den Zwischenräumen}
+% werden als Paare der Form \meta{Zeichen}\,|=|\,\meta{Zwischenraum Faktoren} deklariert, wobei
+% letztere aus drei Zahlen bestehen: zuerst der zusätzliche Kern, der nach diesem Zeichen
+% angefügt wird, wenn es vor einem Wortzwischenraum vorkommt, 2. der zusätzliche Streckungsbetrag
+% und zuletzt der zusätzliche Schrumpfbetrag. Alle Werte können auch negativ sein,
+% wodurch die Dimensionen verkleinert werden. Nicht alle Werte müssen angegeben werden,
+% die Einstellungen müssen jedoch zwei abtrennende Kommas beinhalten.
+%
+%\paragraph{Optionen:}
+%\begin{options}
+%  \item[\key{name}, \key{load}, \key{factor}, \key{preset}, \key{inputenc}, \key{context}]
+%       Diese Optionen dienen der gleichen Funktionalität wie in den vorigen
+%       Konfigurationsbefehlen.
+%  \item[\key{unit}] Sie können die Einheit wählen, in der die angegebenen Zahlen
+%       gemessen werden. Mögliche Werte sind: |character|, eine \meta{Dimension} und
+%       zusätzlich |space|. Letztere Einstellung misst die Werte in Tausendsteln der
+%       jeweiligen Dimension, die vom Font eingestellt ist. Standardmäßig wird die Einheit
+%       in Zwischenraumdimensionen gemessen. Mit folgenden (unsinnigen) Einstellungen z.B.:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\SetExtraSpacing
+%   [ unit = space  ] % default
+%   { font = */*/*/*/* }
+%   {
+%       .  = {1000,1000,1000},
+%   }
+%\end{verbatim}
+%       würde der Raum nach einem Punkt verdoppelt (streng genommen:
+%       2\,\texttimes\ \fontdim2),ebenso
+%       die Schrumpfbeträge der Wortzwischenräume (\fontdim3 und~4). Umgekehrt
+%       würde man, so alle drei Werte auf \textminus1000 setzt, das Leerzeichen
+%       nach dem betreffenden Zeichen komplett aufheben.
+%\end{options}
+%
+%
+%\subsection{Zeichenvererbung}\label{sub:inherit}
+%
+% \Describe{Macro}{\DeclareCharacterInheritance}
+%                 {?Features,Font Set,Vererbungslisten}
+% In den meisten Fällen sollten akzentuierte Zeichen die Einstellungen ihres
+% Ursprungszeichens erben. Zum Beispiel sollten vermutlich alle der Zeichen \`A, \'A, \^A,
+% \~A, \"A, \r{A} und \u{A} um denselben (absoluten) Betrag hervorragen wie der
+% Buchstabe A. Nutzt man den Befehl \cs{DeclareCharacterInheritance},
+% so kann man Klassen von Zeichen benennen, wodurch man nur das betreffende
+% Grundzeichen einstellen muss. Mit dem zusätzlichen Argument, welches eine per
+% Komma abgetrennte Liste von Features enthalten kann, können Sie die Reichweite
+% der Liste beschränken. Zusätzlich dazu akzeptiert es den |inputenc| Schlüssel, um die Eingabekodierung
+% für diese Liste einzustellen. Das Font Set kann wie üblich eingestellt werden.
+% Die einzige Ausnahme hierbei ist, dass exakt eine Kodierung gewählt werden muss. Die Vererbungslisten
+% werden als Paare der Form \meta{base character}\,|=|\,\meta{Liste der erbenden
+% Zeichen} deklariert. Solange Sie keine abweichende Kodierung oder einen sehr eigenartig
+% geformten Font verwenden, sollte es keinen Grund geben, die standardmäßigen Vererbungseinstellungen
+% zu ändern.
+%
+%\bigskip\noindent
+% In der Hauptkonfigurationsdatei \file{microtype.cfg} und den anderen
+% font-spezifischen Konfigurationsdateien können Sie Beispiele zu all
+% diesen Befehlen finden.
+%
+%
+%\subsection{Konfigurationsdateien}\label{sub:config-file}
+%
+% Die Standardkonfiguration beinhaltet Vererbungseinstellungen, Deklarationen von
+% Font Sets und alias Fonts sowie generische Hervorragung, Expansion, Spacing und
+% Kerning Einstellungen, und wird aus der Datei \file{microtype.cfg} geladen. Sie können
+% diese Datei mit eigenen Einstellungen erweitern (oder eine andere Konfigurationsdatei
+% mit der `\opt{config}' Option laden, siehe Abschnitt~\ref{sub:options-misc}).
+%
+% Wenn Sie den Weg einschlagen, neue Einstellungen für eine Fontfamilie zu treffen, sollten Sie
+% diese in eine separate Datei stecken, deren Name `|mt-|\meta{Fontfamilie}|.cfg|' 
+% (z.B. `\file{mt-cmr.cfg}') lauten muss, und welche alle Befehle enthalten muss,
+% die in diesem Abschnitt~\ref{sec:fine-tuning} beschrieben. Diese Dateien werden
+% automatisch geladen, wenn sie die betreffenden Fonts tatsächlich nutzen.
+% Das Paket kommt mit mit Konfigurationsdateien für eine Reihe von Fontfamilien;
+% Tabelle~\ref{tab:fonts} enthält sie alle.
+%
+%\begin{table}[t]\small
+%\changes{v1.6a}{2005/02/02}{add table of fonts with tailored protrusion settings}
+%\caption{Fonts mit zugeschnitten Hervorragungseinstellungen}\label{tab:fonts}
+%\setlength\fboxsep{4pt}
+%\leavevmode\kern-\dimexpr\fboxsep+\fboxrule\relax
+%\fcolorbox{theframe}{white}{^^A
+%\begin{minipage}{\textwidth}
+%\def\arraystretch{1.2}
+%\long\def\@makefntext#1{%
+%  \leftskip 0pt
+%  \parindent 0pt
+%  \everypar{\parindent 0pt}%
+%  \leavevmode\hbox to 15pt{\@thefnmark\hss}#1}
+%\let\footnoterule\relax
+%\def\fnref#1{\textsuperscript{\itshape\ifpdf\ref*{#1}\else\ref{#1}\fi}}
+%\begin{tabular*}{\textwidth}{@{\extracolsep{\fill}}*3l@{}}
+%       \footnotesize Fontfamilie (<NFSS> code)
+%      & \multicolumn{2}{l}{\footnotesize Features}\\
+%\cmidrule{2-3}
+%      & \footnotesize Kodierungen
+%      & \footnotesize Formen\\
+%\cmidrule{1-1}\cmidrule{2-2}\cmidrule{3-3}
+% Generic
+%      & <OT1>, <T1>, <T2A>, <LY1>, <QX>, (<TS1>)\footnote{Unvollständig\label{fn:incmpl}}
+%      & n, (it, sl, sc)\fnref{fn:incmpl} \\
+% Computer Modern Roman (|cmr|)\footnote{Alias: Latin Modern (|lmr|),
+%                                        \pkg{ae} (|aer|), \pkg{zefonts} (|zer|),
+%                                        \pkg{eco} (|cmor|), \pkg{hfoldsty} (|hfor|)}
+%      & <OT1>, <OT4>, <T1>, <T2A>, <T5>, <LY1>, <TS1>
+%      & n, it, sl, sc \\
+% Bitstream Charter (|bch|)\footnote{Alias: \pkg{mathdesign}/Charter (|mdbch|),
+%                                    MicroPress's \pkg{chmath} (|chr|)}
+%      & <OT1>, <T1>, <T5>, <LY1>, <TS1>
+%      & n, it, (sl)\footnote{Einstellungen vererbt von kursiver Form\label{fn:it-sl}}, sc \\
+% Adobe Garamond (|pad|, |padx|, |padj|)
+%      & <OT1>, <T1>, <LY1>, <TS1>
+%      & n, it, (sl)\fnref{fn:it-sl}, sc \\
+% <URW> Garamond (|ugm|)\footnote{Alias: \pkg{mathdesign}/<URW> Garamond (|mdugm|)}
+%      & <OT1>, <T1>, <TS1>
+%      & n, it\\
+% Bitstream Letter Gothic (|blg|)\footnote{Alias: \pkg{ulgothic} (|ulg|)}
+%      & <OT1>, <T1>, <TS1>
+%      & n, it \\
+% Adobe Minion (|pmnx|, |pmnj|)
+%      & <OT1>, <T1>, <T2A>, <LY1>, <TS1>
+%      & n, it, (sl)\fnref{fn:it-sl}, sc, si\\
+% Palatino (|ppl|, |pplx|, |pplj|)\footnote{Alias: \pkg{pxfonts} (|pxr|),
+%                                           \pkg{qfonts}/QuasiPalatino, \TeX\ Gyre Pagella (|qpl|),
+%                                           <FPL> Neu (|fp9x|, |fp9j|)}
+%      & <OT1>, <OT4>, <T1>, <LY1>, (<TS1>)\fnref{fn:incmpl}
+%      & n, it, (sl)\fnref{fn:it-sl}, sc \\
+% Times (|ptm|, |ptmx|, |ptmj|)\footnote{Alias: \pkg{txfonts} (|txr|),
+%                                        \pkg{qfonts}/QuasiTimes, \TeX\ Gyre Termes (|qtm|)}
+%      & <OT1>, <OT4>, <T1>, <LY1>, <QX>, (<TS1>)\fnref{fn:incmpl}
+%      & n, it, (sl)\fnref{fn:it-sl}, sc \\
+% Computer Modern math (|cmsy|, |cmm|)
+%      & <OML>/<OMS>
+%      & n/it \\
+% <AMS> symbols (|msa|, |msb|)
+%      & <U>
+%      & n\\
+% Euler (|eur|, |eus|, |euf|)\footnote{Alias: \pkg{eulervm} (|zeur|, |zeus|)}
+%      & <U>
+%      & n\\
+% Euro symbols (Adobe, <ITC>, \pkg{marvosym})
+%      & <U>/<OT1>
+%      & n, it \\
+%\bottomrule
+%\end{tabular*}^^A
+%\end{minipage}^^A
+%}\kern-\dimexpr\fboxsep+\fboxrule\relax ^^A end \fcolorbox
+%\end{table}
+%
+%\medskip
+%\Describe{Macro}{\DeclareMicrotypeVariants}{list of suffixes}
+%\DescribeMacro{\DeclareMicrotypeVariants*}
+% Auf seiner Suche nach einer Konfigurationsdatei versucht das Paket auch,
+% Suffixe oder einen oder mehr Buchstaben von einem Fontnamen zu entfernen, welche auf eine `Variante'
+% des Basisfonts hindeuten könnten (vergleiche Karl Berrys \cite{fontname}). Das erlaubt z.B.,
+% Einstellungen für z.B. die Fonts |padx| (Experten Set), |padj| (altertümliche Numerale)
+% und |pad| (einfach) in der selben Datei \file{mt-pad.cfg} vorzunehmen.
+% Der Befehl erwartet eine durch Komma abgetrennte Liste von Suffixen für Varianten. Die Version
+% mit Stern hängt die Suffixe der existierenden Liste an. Die Standard-Deklaration
+% in \file{microtype.cfg} lautet:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\DeclareMicrotypeVariants{x,j,w,a,d,0,1}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+%\medskip
+%\Describe{Macro}{\DeclareMicrotypeAlias}{Fontname,alias Font}
+% Dieser Befehle kann für Fonts genutzt werden, die sich sehr ähnlich
+% oder gar gleich sind (falls sie sich zum Beispiel nicht an das Berry Namensgebungsschema beim
+% Installieren der Fonts hielten). Ein Beispiel wären die Latin Modern Fonts, welche
+% von Computer Modern abgeleitet sind, sodass es nicht notwendig ist, neue Einstellungen
+% für diese vorzunehmen -- man könnte sagen:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\DeclareMicrotypeAlias{lmr}{cmr}
+%\end{verbatim}
+% wodurch das Paket -- wann immer der Font |lmr| vorkommt und keine Einstellungen
+% dafür gefunden werden können -- auch den Font |cmr| ausprobiert. Tatsächlich werden Sie
+% eben diese Zeile (mit einigen anderen) in der Standardkonfigurationsdatei vorfinden.
+%
+%\medskip
+%\Describe{Macro}{\LoadMicrotypeFile}{Fontname}
+% In wenigen Fällen kann es nötig sein, eine Fontkonfigurationsdatei manuell
+% zu laden (z.B. aus einer anderen Konfigurationsdatei heraus), oder in der Lage
+% zu sein, in einer Datei festgelegte Einstellungen zu erweitern, die sonst
+% nicht automatisch oder zu spät geladen würden.\footnote{
+%    Authoren von Fontpaketen sollten vielleicht einen Blick auf den hook
+%    \cs{Microtype@Hook} werfen, beschrieben im Implementationsteil,
+%     Abschnitt~\ref{sub:hook}.}
+% Dieser Befehle lädt die Datei `|mt-|\meta{Fontname}|.cfg|'.
+%
+%
+%\section{Kontext-sensitive Einstellungen}\label{sec:context}
+%
+% Das \microtype\ -Paket erlaubt zudem verschiedene Mikro-typografische 
+% Einstellungen für die Schriftarten, die vom Zusammenhang abhängig sind, zu 
+% verwenden.
+% Dies eröffnet unendlich viele Möglichkeiten der Feinabstimmungen für das Aussehen 
+% des Dokuments.
+%
+%\medskip
+%\Describe{Macro}{\microtypecontext}{context assignments}
+% Dieser Befehl kann überall im Dokument (auch in der Präambel) verwendet werden, 
+% um den Mikro-typografischen Zusammenhang in der aktuellen Gruppe zu ändern. 
+% Zu jeder Funktion (\key{protrusion}, \key{expansion}, \key{tracking}, 
+% \key{spacing} und \key{kerning}), kann ein Kontext zugewiesen werden. Folglich 
+% können nur Einstellungen mit dem entsprechenden 'Kontext'-Schlüsselwort verwendet 
+% werden.
+%
+%\medskip
+%\Describe{Env}{microtypecontext}{context assignments}
+% Wieviele andere \LaTeX\ -Befehle ist der Befehl, in Form einer Umgebung 
+% verfügbar.
+%
+%\medskip
+%\Describe{Macro}{\textmicrotypecontext}{context assignments,general text}
+% Als weitere Möglichkeit, ändert der Befehl \cs {textmicrotypecontext} den
+% Kontext für den Text, der im zweiten Argument übergeben wird.
+%
+%\changes{v1.9c}{2006/01/25}{add example of how to increase protrusion of footnote markers
+%                (suggested by \contributor Georg Verweyen <verweyen\at gmail.com>)}
+%                                                     ^^A private mail, 2006/01/25
+%\medskip\noindent
+% Angenommen, Sie möchten eine größere Menge von Fussnotenzeichen im Text  
+% erhalten, dann können die Einstellungen der Zahlen so definieret werden
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\SetProtrusion
+%   [ context = footnote ]
+%   { font    = */*/*/*/scriptsize } % adapt if necessary
+%   { 1 = { ,650}, 2 = { ,400}, 3 = { ,400}, 4 = { ,400}, 5 = { ,400},
+%     6 = { ,400}, 7 = { ,500}, 8 = { ,400}, 9 = { ,400}, 0 = { ,400} }
+%\end{verbatim}
+%\ifcmr\else\enlargethispage{2\baselineskip}\fi ^^A layout
+% um damit den Kontext im Fussnoten-Befehl zu ändern. Dieser Befehl 
+% unterscheidet sich zwischen den verscheidenen Klassen. Für die Basisklassen z.B, % \pkg{article}, wäre es:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\newcommand*\new@makefnmark{\hbox{\@textsuperscript{\normalfont
+%   \microtypecontext{protrusion=footnote}\@thefnmark}}}
+%\renewcommand*\@footnotemark{%
+%   \leavevmode \ifhmode\edef\@x@sf{\the\spacefactor}\nobreak\fi
+%   \new@makefnmark \ifhmode\spacefactor\@x@sf\fi \relax}
+%\end{verbatim}
+% Für die \pkg{memoir} Klasse, müssten Sie zusätzlich die automatische Erkennung 
+% mehrerer Fussnoten deaktivieren, welches ein hervorheben des Fussnotentextes 
+% verhindert.
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\renewcommand*\@makefnmark{\hbox{\@textsuperscript{\normalfont
+%   \microtypecontext{protrusion=footnote}\@thefnmark}}}
+%\let\m@mmf@prepare\relax
+%\let\m@mmf@check\relax
+%\end{verbatim}
+% ^^A For other classes, the command would have to be changed in a similar way.
+%
+%\medskip\noindent
+% Eine weitere Möglichkeit wäre es den Kontext für eine sprachabhängige Einstellung 
+% zu verwenden. 
+% Zum Beispiel, wenn Sie einen Text auf Französisch schreiben, können Sie
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\microtypecontext{kerning=french}
+%\end{verbatim}
+% in der Präampel hinzufügen. Das hätte den Effekt, dass die 
+% Abstandseinstellungen des französischen Kontextes, für das Dokument übernommen würden. Sollten Teile des Dokuments in Englisch sein, könnten Sie schreiben
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\textmicrotypecontext{kerning=}{English text!}
+%\end{verbatim}
+% um den Kontext zurückzusetzen, so dass die Interpunktion in diesen 
+% Teilen kein extra Zeichenabstand erhalten.
+%
+% Anstatt diese Befehle manuell zu Ihrem Dokument hinzuzufügen, können Sie  
+% \microtype\	auch mit der \opt {Babel}-Funktion laden 
+% (siehe Abteilung~\ref{sub:options-misc}).
+% Die aktuelle Sprache wird dann automatisch erkannt und der Kontext
+% dementsprechend angepasst.
+%
+%\medskip
+%\Describe{Macro}{\DeclareMicrotypeBabelHook}
+%                {list of \pkg{babel} languages,context list}
+% Natürlich kennt \microtype\ nicht jede typografische Besonderheit, jeder einzelen 
+% Sprache.
+% Dieser Befehl ist ein Mittel, um zu lehren, wie man den Kontext anpassen 
+% kann, wenn eine bestimmte Sprache ausgewählt ist. Die Hauptkonfigurationsdatei
+% enthält unter anderen die folgende Deklaration:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\DeclareMicrotypeBabelHook
+%   {french,francais,acadian,canadien}
+%   {kerning=french, spacing=}
+%\end{verbatim}
+% Folglich, wann immer Sie auf französische Sprache umschalten, wird die 
+% Abstandseinstellung im Kontext auf `|französisch|' geändert und der 
+% Abstandskontext zurüchgesetzt.
+% Dieser Effekt greift nur dann, wenn das Paket mit der \opt {babel} Option geladen % wurde. Derzeit unterstützt \microtype\ französische, türkische und englische 
+% Buchstabenabstände (auch bekannt als \cmd\nonfrenchspacing). Für unbekannte 
+% Sprachen werden alle Kontexte zurückgesetzt.
+
+%
+%\section{Erneute Betrachtung der Funktion Letterspacing}\label{sec:lettersp}
+%
+%\Describe{Macro}{\textls}{?amount,general text}
+%\DescribeMacro{\textls*}
+%\DescribeMacro{\lsstyle}
+% Während die \opt{tracking} Funktion, die im Abschnitt~\ref{sub:tracking} 
+% beschrieben wurde, für Sätze von Schriftarten gilt, können sie letterspace 
+% benutzen um kürzere Stücke des Textes zu erzeugen, unabhängig von der Schriftart 
+% in dem sich der Schriftsatz befindet.\footnote{
+%   Letterspacing sollte vorsichtig verwendet werden, insbesondere der 
+%		Zeichenabstand der Kleinbuchstaben wird mit Abscheu von einigen Typpgrafen 
+% 	betrachtet. Falls sie wissen was sie tun, sollten Sie vielleicht kleine Kapitel % 	oder oder alle Kapitel nutzen. Eine andere Eigenschaft kann zur Betonung in 
+% 	Texten von Schriftarten verwendet werden.}
+% Für solche Ad-hoc-Zeichenabstände, bestizt \microtype\ zwei Befehle, (unabhängig 
+% davon, ob die |tracking| Option aktiviert ist) die auf die gleiche Weise
+% verwendet werden können wie die \LaTeX-Befehle: \cs{textls} -- welches auch im 
+% Mathemodus funktioniert --  erwartet der Text im notwendigen Argument, während 
+% \cs{lsstyle} `letterspacing' für alle nachfolgenden Schriften bis zum Ende der 
+% aktuellen Gruppe aktiviert wird. Die Favoriten-Version von \cs{textls} fügt keine % zusätzlichen Buchstabenabstände, vor oder nachdem Text ein, was für z.B 
+% Absatztitel nützlich sein  kann.
+% Standardmäßig wird jedes Zeichen mit 100/1000 \,em \,= \,0.1 \,em von einander 
+% getrennt, dieser Betrag kann im optionalen Argument von \cs {textls}, durch 
+% Verwendung des \cs {SetTracking} Befehl oder global über die \opt {letterspace} 
+% Paketoption, geändert werden, mit abnehmender Signifikanz in dieser Reihenfolge.
+%
+%\medskip
+%\Describe{Macro}{\lslig}{ligature}
+% Seitdem die Befehle \cs{textls} und \cs{lsstyle} auch die
+% `\texttt{no ligatures}'-Schlüssel für die entsprechenden Schriftarten auswerten,
+% brauchen Sie sich keine Gedanken mehr über das Schützen oder Trennen von Liganten % in den meisten Schriftarten zu machen. Jedoch, in bestimmten Situationen, kann es % zu einem Konflikt der Liganten, welche mit den gleichen Buchstaben beginnen, 
+% kommen, wobei einige von diesen verhindert werden sollten, während das bei 
+% anderen nicht geschehen soll. Beim letterspacing von Texten mit Textschriftsatz 
+% in Frakturschriftarten, sollen zum Beispiel, die Liganten 'ch', 'ck', 'tz' und 
+% 'sz' ~(`\textfrak {sz}') niemals getrennt werden, normalerweise sieht man auch 
+% 'St.' ~(`\textfrak {St.}') Liganten im letterspacing-Text. Darüber hinaus 
+% realisiert  das \pkg{yfonts} Paket das kurze ~s~(`\textfrak{s:}') als den
+% Liganten~`|s:|' andererseits, wenn der `ct'~Ligant und die anderen `lang~s' 
+% Liganten in Frakturschriftarten gefunden werden, unterdrückt werden. 
+% Es gibt zwei Wege dieses Problem zu lösen: Entweder deaktivieren Sie nicht die
+% "`| s | und/ oder | c |" Ligaturen und 
+% trennen diejenigen, die getrennt werden müssen durch das Einfügen von 
+% `|{\kern0pt}|' oder  \pkg{babel}'s Abkürzung oder deaktivieren Sie diese 
+% und schützen jene Liganten welche geschützt werden müssen, durch umschließen mit % dem \cs{lslig} Befehl. Damit liefern folgende Lösungen das gleiche Ergebnis
+% (nämlich, `\textfrak{\lsstyle Aus:s{\kern0pt}ichts:los{\kern0pt}igkeit}').
+%
+%\begin{verbatim}[morekeywords={[0]{\kern}}]
+%\SetTracking[no ligatures={f}]{encoding = LY, family = yfrak}{100}
+%\textfrak{\lsstyle Aus:s{\kern0pt}ichts:los{\kern0pt}igkeit}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\SetTracking[no ligatures={f,s,c}]{encoding = LY, family = yfrak}{100}
+%\textfrak{\lsstyle Au\lslig{s:}si\lslig{ch}t\lslig{s:}losigkeit}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+%\bigskip\noindent
+%\DescribePackage{letterspace} 
+% Diese drei Befehle (mitsamt der \opt{letterspace} -Option, beschrieben in
+% Abschnitt~\ref{sub:option-tracking}) sind auch in dem alternativen
+% \letterspace\ Paket enthalten, welches ansich eine sehr stark abgespeckte Version % von \microtype\ ist, das eine Unterstützung für alle anderen Erweiterungen 
+% weglässt (zudem wurden die Möglichkeiten des \cs{SetTracking} Befehls weggelassen % und alle `|f|' Liganten werden deaktiviert, innere und äußere Abstände und der 
+% äußere  Buchstabenabstand wurden auf ihre Standartwerte zurückgesetzt, so wie in 
+% Abschnitt~\ref{sub:tracking} beschrieben). Wenn Sie es bevorzugen auf
+% \microtype's Besonderheiten zu verzichten, können Sie stattdesen das 
+% \letterspace\ Paket laden. Beide Pakete können nicht zur gleichen Zeit benutzt 
+% werden.
+%
+% Im Gegensatz zu \microtype, welches \LaTeX\ verlangt, arbeitet das \letterspace\  
+% Paket auch mit \pkg{eplain} oder auch nur mit \pkg{miniltx}: beim Gebrauch von
+% \pkg{eplain}, laden Sie das Paket mit \cmd\usepackage\ innerhalb  
+% \cmd\beginpackages~\dots\ \cmd\endpackages\ Umgebung, für \pkg{miniltx}
+% (welches die Paketoptionen nicht unterstützt) einfach mit \cmd\input\ 
+% \file{letterspace.sty} laden.
+%
+%
+%\section{Deaktivieren von Ligaturen(Bindungen)}\label{sec:disable-ligatures}
+%
+%\Describe{Macro}{\DisableLigatures}{?characters,set of fonts}
+% Beim vollständigen Deaktivieren aller Liganten einer Schriftart (welches auch 
+% Kerning für diese Schriftart ausschaltet, senkt \textit{lowers} absichtlich die 
+% mikro-typografische Qualität des Textes, anstatt diese zu erhöhen, dies ist 
+% speziell für Schreibmaschine-Schriftarten nützlich, so dass, z.B. in einer <T1> 
+% kodierten Schriftart, `|\texttt{--}|' natürlich als  `|--|', nicht als 
+% `\texttt{--}'gedruckt wird. \cs{DisableLigatures} kann dazu verwendet werden, um % auf gewöhnlichem Weg, eine Reihe von Schriftarten zu spezifizieren, für welche 
+% Liganten deaktiviert sein sollen, z.B für die Schriebmaschinenschrift kodiert in <T1>:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\DisableLigatures{encoding = T1, family = tt* }
+%\end{verbatim}
+% Es ist auch möglich nur ganz bestimmt Liganten zu deaktivieren. Das optionale 
+% Argument, kann eine durch Komma getrennte Liste von Zeichen enthalten, für die 
+% der Ligantenmechanismus unterbunden werden soll:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\DisableLigatures[?,!]{encoding = T1} % "\ifx\tagcode\undefined\else ^^A
+%           \normalfont\color{thegrey}inhibit ?` and !`, but not fi, --, >>, etc.\fi"
+%\end{verbatim}
+% Dabei ist der Buchstabe, mit dem der Ligant beginnt von Bedeutung. Dieser Befehl 
+% kann nur in der Präampel verwendet werden und auch nur einmal. Der Befehl 
+% fortert \pdftex\ 1.30 oder eine aktuellere Version.
+%
+%
+%\section{Hinweise und Warnungen}\label{sec:caveats}
+%
+%\paragraph{Verwenden Sie Einstellungen, die zu Ihrer Schriftart passen.}
+% Obwohl die Standardeinstellungen akzeptable Ergebnisse für die meisten Schriften 
+% liefern sollten, kann es sein das die spezielle Schriftart, welche Sie gerade 
+% verwenden, verschiedene Schriftformen hat, so dass mehr oder weniger Hervorhebung 
+% oder Vergrößerungen erforderlich sind. Insbesondere kursive Schriftformen 
+% können sich deutlich in unterschiedlichen Schriftarten unterscheiden, deshalb
+% habe Ich mich dageben entscheiden Standarthervorhebungseinstellungen für diese 
+% anzubieten. Die Datei \file{test-microtype.tex} kann eine Hilfe, beim anpassen 
+% der Hervorhebungseinstellungen für eine Schriftart sein.
+%
+%\paragraph{Verwenden Sie keinen zu großen Wert für die Vergrößerung.}
+% Font-expansion (Schriftartenvergrößerung) ist eine Funktion, welche die 
+% typographische Qualität des Dokuments verbessern soll, indem sie eine 
+% gleichmäßige Graustufe des Textblocks erzeugt (und potenziell die Verringerung 
+% der Zahl der erforderlichen Silbentrennungen).
+% Wenn die Erweiterung oder Verkleinerung einer Schrift zu groß 
+% oder zu klein wird, so wird der Effekt ins Gegenteil gewandelt. Die Vergrößerung 
+% der Schriftarten um mehr als 2\%, d.h. der Wert der Einstellung \opt{Strecken}
+% größer als 20 ist, erfordert ein geschultes Auge.
+% Wenn Sie das Glück haben und im Besitz von mehreren Kopien einer 
+% multiplen Master-Schriftart sind, können Sie die Vergrößerungsgrenze bis 
+% auf 4\% erhöhen.
+%
+%\changes{v2.0}{2006/12/13}{Hinweis für Web-Dokumente im Hinblick auf ältere \pdftex\ Versionen}
+%\paragraph{Verwenden Sie keine Schriftartvergrößerung für Web-Documente (mit 
+% älteren \pdftex\ Versionen).}
+% Mit \pdftex\ Versionen die älter als die 1.40 Version sind, wird jede vergrößerte % Kopie der Schriftart in der <PDF> Datei eingebettet, folglich kann die 
+% Dateigröße stark zunehmen (abhängig von Vergrößerungsgrenze und -schritt). 
+% Deshalb, für die Zuvorkommenheit und für Sparsamkeit der Bandbreite, aktivieren 
+% Sie nicht die Schriftartenvergrößerung, beim Erstellen von Datein die 
+% elektronisch verteilt werden. Mit \pdftex\ 1.40, 
+% welches eine andere Technik der Vergrößerung nutzt, kann die Erhöhung der 
+% Dateigröße vernachlässigt werden.
+%
+%\changes{v2.2}{2007/07/06}{add hint about extra <TOC> leader dot
+%                           (first discovered by \contributor Morten H\o gholm <morten.hoegholm\at latex-project.org>)}
+%                                                                                       ^^A private mail, 2006/08/26
+%\paragraph{Möglicherweise möchten sie Hervorhebungen im Inhaltsverzeichnis deaktivieren.}
+% In unglücklichen Fällen, könnte die aktivierte Hervorhebung, die Längenlinie im  im Inhaltsverzeichnis und ähnliche Listen auf eine Weise verändern, so dass ein Excess-Leader Punkte einfügeführt werden muss. Die Lösung ist Hervorhebungen vorübergehend im Inhaltsverzeichnis zu deaktivieren:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\microtypesetup{protrusion=false}
+%\tableofcontents
+%\microtypesetup{protrusion=true}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+%\changes{v1.9}{2005/07/10}{Hinzufügen von Hinweisen in \texttt{verbatim} Umgebungen}
+%\todo{introduce option to patch \texttt{verbatim}} ^^A for Karl
+%\paragraph{Möglicherweise möchten Sie die Hervorhebungen in der \texttt{verbatim} % Umgebung deaktivieren.}
+% Wie Sie bereits wissen, wird \microtype\ standartmäßig die Zeichenhervorhebung in % allen Schriftarten aktiviert, die im Schriftartenset `|alltext|' enthalten sind. % Das schließt auch die Schreibmaschinenschrift mit ein. Obwohl es wirklich Sinn 
+% macht, die Schreibmaschine-Schriftart hervorzuheben, wenn Sie im laufenden Text 
+% erscheint (wie, zum Beispiel, in diesem Handbuch), ist dies wahrscheinlich nicht 
+% wünschenswert innerhalb der |verbatim| Umgebung. Jedoch hat
+% \microtype\ kein Wissen über den Kontext, in dem eine Schriftart steht, dies wird % allein durch die Bestimmung der Attribute entschieden. 
+% Deshalb müssen Sie sich um die Deaktivierung der Hervorhebung in der |verbatim| 
+% Umgebung, selbst kümmern (d.h wenn Sie Hervorhebungen in der
+% Schreibmaschinenschrift, nicht durch auswählen eines anderen Schriftsatzes 
+% insgesamt deaktivieren  wollen). Obwohl der \cs{microtypesetup} Befehl natürlich % für Fälle wie diesen entwickelt wurde, könnten Sie es 
+% anstrengend finden ihn jedesmal zu wiederholen, wenn Sie ihn in der |verbatim| 
+% Umgebung öfters nutzen. Die folgende Zeile, die der Präampel hinzugefügt wird, 
+% hätte den selben Effekt:
+%\changes{v2.3e}{2009/07/21}{suggest to patch \cmd\@verbatim\ instead of \cmd\verbatim}
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\g@addto@macro\@verbatim{\microtypesetup{activate=false}}
+%\end{verbatim}
+% Falls sie das \pkg{fancyvrb} oder das \pkg{listings} Paket verwenden, ist dies 
+% nicht notwenig, da diese so konzipiert sind, das Sie in der entsprechenden 
+% Umgebung, die Hervorhebung in jedem Fall hemmen.
+%
+%\changes{v1.9e}{2006/07/10}{add hint about unknown encodings}
+%\paragraph{Einstellungen für Griechisch/Thailändisch/Amerikanisch usw. Kodierungen 
+% sind bis jetzt noch nicht inbegriffen.}
+% Die Standartsätze von Schriftarten, für welche die mikro-typrografischen 
+% Funktionen aktiviert werden (siehe Tabelle~\ref{tab:predefined-font-sets}), 
+% enthalten nur die Kodierungen für die auch  Konfigurationen existieren. Deshalb, % wenn Sie eine andere Kodierung verwenden (z.B. <LGR>, <T2B>, etc.), wird 
+% \microtype\ nicht auf diese Schriftarten anwendbar sein. Sie müssen einen neuen 
+% Schriftsatz, einschließlich der Kodierung, definieren und aktivieren um Sie 
+% benutzen zu können(weitere Details, siehe 
+% Abschnitt~\ref{sec:font-sets}). Spätestens für die Hervorhebungen müssten Sie
+% Einstellungen für die Schriftarten die in Frage kommen erstellen (siehe 
+% Abschnitt~\ref{sub:protrusion}). 
+% Selbstverständlich sind Beiträge für diese Art von Kodierung mehr als willkommen.
+%
+%\paragraph{Nehmen Sie nur dann Kerning-Anpassungen vor, wenn es üblich in der typografischen Tradition der Sprache ist.}
+% Im Gegensatz zu Hervorhebung und der Vergrößerung, trägt zusätzliche Kerning 
+% nicht unbedingt zur Verbesserung der mikro-typographische Qualität des Dokuments % bei. Sie sollten das zusätzliche Kerning nur aktivieren, wenn Sie ein Dokument in % einer Sprache schreiben, dessen typografische Tradition ein solches Kerning 
+% garantiert. Wenn Sie zum Beispiel einen englischen Text schreiben, würden die 
+% Leser durch zusätzliche Leerzeichen vor dem Satzzeichen verwirrt werden.
+%
+%\changes{v2.3c}{2008/10/27}{add hint about spacing being experimental}
+%\paragraph{Anpassung der Zwischenwortabstandes befindet sich noch in einem 
+% experimentellen Stadium.}
+% Die Umsetzung dieser Eigenschaft in \pdftex\ ist nicht vollständig und kann zu 
+% den positiven Auswirkungen, auf die typographische Qualität, die Sie eventuell 
+% erwarten, nicht beitragen. In bestimmten Situationen kann es sogar zu 
+% unerwünschten Nebenwirkungen kommen.
+% Deshalb, sollte die \opt {Abstand}option nicht blind gewählt werden. Es wird 
+% empfohlen mit den Einstellungen zu experimentieren, um zuverstehen wie die 
+% Eigenschaften funktionieren.
+%
+%\changes{v1.7}{2005/03/23}{add hint about compatibility}
+%\paragraph{Kompatibilität und Interaktion mit anderen Paketen:}
+% Das \microtype\ -Paket sollte sehr gut mit anderen 
+% \LaTeX\ -Paketen zusammen arbeiten (ausgenommen von \pkg{pdfcprot}). Jedoch da 
+% das Leben nicht perfekt ist, sind Probleme zu erwarten. Momentan sind folgende 
+% Probleme bekannt:
+%\begin{itemize}
+%  \item Wenn Sie 8-Bit-Zeichen in der Konfiguration verwenden möchten, müssen Sie %				zuerst das Paket \pkg{inputenc} laden. Das Verwenden von Unicode wird 
+% 		 	 ebenfalls unterstützt (wenn Sie \pkg{inputenc} mit der |utf8| oder |utf8x| %				 option laden).
+%        Bei der Verwendung von mehreren Input-Kodierungen in einem Dokument, 
+%				 werden 8-Bit-Zeichen in den Einstellungen nur zuverlässig funktionieren, 
+%				 wenn Sie den |inputenc| Schlüssel spezifizieren.
+%\changes{v2.3a}{2008/02/25}{add hint about \pkg{babel} having to be loaded first}
+%  \item Beim Laden des Pakets mit der \opt{babel}-Option, sollten Sie das
+%        \pkg{babel}-Paket vor \microtype\ laden.
+%\changes{v2.3c}{2008/11/11}{add hint about partial incompatibility with \pkg{CJK}}
+%  \item Es ist derzeit nicht möglich, Charakter-spezifische Einstellungen für 
+%				 chinesische\slash japanischen\slash koreanischen Schriften zu erstellen. 
+%				 Deshalb, ist die einzige mikro-typografische Erweiterung, die mit dem 
+%			   \pkg {CJK} Paket arbeiten kann, die Schriftartvergrößerung.
+%\end{itemize}
+%
+%\changes{v1.8}{2005/06/23}{add hint about error messages}
+%\paragraph{Mögliche Fehlermeldungen und wie man diese beseitigt:}
+%\begin{itemize}
+%\lstset{deletekeywords={[1]{expansion,auto}},belowskip=-\smallskipamount,frame=none,
+%        xleftmargin=0pt,backgroundcolor=,basicstyle=\MacroFont\footnotesize}
+%\changes{v1.9a}{2005/11/15}{add explanation for error message in <DVI> mode}
+%  \item
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%! Font csnameendcsname=cmr10+20 at 10.0pt not loadable: Metric (TFM) file not found.
+%\end{verbatim}
+% Diese Fehlermeldung tritt auf, wenn Sie versuchen die Schriftartvergrößerung zu 
+% verwenden, während Sie eine <DVI>- Ausgabe erstellen. Denken Sie daran, dass die % \emph{automatische} Schriftartenerweiterung nur als \pdftex\ im <PDF> Modus 
+% funktioniert. Vergrößerung ist auch im <DVI> Modus möglich. Dies erfordert, dass % alle Instanzen der erweiterten Schriftarten auf Ihrem \TeX\ -System existieren.
+%
+%\changes{v2.2}{2007/06/13}{add hint about error message with \pdftex\ 1.40}
+%  \item
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%! pdfTeX error (font expansion): auto expansion is only possible with scalable fonts.
+%\end{verbatim}
+% Die automatische Schriftartvergrößerung ist in \pdftex\ 1.40, darin verbessert 
+% worden, 
+% dass sie nicht nur mit Typ\,1 Schriften sondern, auch mit TrueType, OpenType und 
+% sogar auch mit nicht-eingebetteten Schriftarten arbeitet. Die obige Fehlermeldung % bedeutet entweder, dass Sie versuchen die Vergrößerung, auf eine Bitmap~(|pk|) 
+% Schriftart anzuwenden, die noch nicht möglich ist, oder dass die Schrift nicht 
+% gefunden werden kann, da z.B. deren Einträge fehlen.
+%
+%\changes{v2.0}{2006/12/13}{qualify hints about expansion error messages with
+%                           regard to older \pdftex\ versions}
+%  \item
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% Warning: pdflatex: font ptmr8r cannot be expanded (not an included Type1 font)
+%\end{verbatim}
+% und der <PDF> Viewer beklagt sich über eine fehlende Schriftart, z.B der Adobe 
+% Reader auf diese Weise:
+%\begin{verbatim}[aboveskip=\smallskipamount]
+% Could not find a font in the Resources dictionary - using Helvetica instead.
+%\end{verbatim}
+% Mit \pdftex\ Versionen, die älter sind als 1.40, kann Schriftartvergrößerung nur 
+% dann angewandt werden, wenn die Schriftart in der <PDF> Datei eingebettet wird. 
+% Falls Sie die obengenannte Fehlermeldung erhalten, kann Ihr \TeX\ System noch 
+% nicht mit PostScript-Schriftarten (z.B Times, Helvetica, Courier) arbeiten, da 
+% diese in die Basisdatei eingebettet werden müssen. In den meisten \TeX\
+% Distributionen, kann diese in der Datei \file{updmap.cfg} durch Einstellungen der
+% |pdftexDownloadBase14| in |true| geändert werden.
+%
+%\changes{v1.9a}{2005/11/15}{add explanation for error message with non-Type\,1  fonts}
+%  \item
+%\begin{verbatim}
+% Warning: pdflatex (file ecrm1000+20): Font ecrm1000+20 at 1200 not found
+%\end{verbatim}
+% Außerdem erfordern \pdftex\ Versionen die älter als 1.40 sind, Typ \,1-Schriften 
+% für die automatische Schriftarten-Vergrößerung. Wenn Sie eine Nachricht wie die 
+% obengenannte erhalten, haben Sie wahrscheinlich versucht, die 
+% Schriftartvergrößerung auf eine bitmap oder TrueType Schriftart anzuwenden. Bei 
+% älteren \pdftex\ Versionen ist dies nur möglich, wenn Sie manuell erweiterte 
+% Instanzen der Schriften erstellen.
+%\ifcmr\else\pagebreak\fi ^^A layout
+%\changes{v2.0}{2006/11/05}{add hint about how to increase \texttt{font\textunderscore max}
+%               and \texttt{font\textunderscore mem\textunderscore size}}
+% \item
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%! Font T1/cmr/m/n/10=ecrm1000 at 10.0pt not loaded: Not enough room left.
+%\end{verbatim}
+% Speicherparameter `|font_mem_size|` zu klein.
+% \item
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%! TeX capacity exceeded, sorry [maximum internal font number (font_max)=2000].
+%\end{verbatim}
+% Speicherparameter `|font_max|` zu klein.
+% \item
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%! TeX capacity exceeded, sorry [PDF memory size (pdf_mem_size)=65536].
+%\end{verbatim}
+% Speicherparameter `|pdf_mem_size|` zu klein (bei \pdftex\ Versionen, die älter 
+% sind als 1.30).
+%
+% Bei Anwendung von mikro-typografischen Erweiterung eines großes Dokumentes mit 
+% einer Menge von Schriftarten, kann die Speicherkapazität von \pdftex\ knapp 
+% werden. Dies kann durch Setzen der entsprechenden Parameter, auf einen größeren 
+% Wert erhöht werden. Für web2c-basierte Systeme, z.B \texlive, sollten Sie die 
+% Einstellungen in der Datei \file{texmf.cnf}, und für MiK\TeX in der Datei 
+% \file{miktex.ini} (für 2,4 Jahre ältere Versionen) bzw. \file{pdflatex.ini} (2,5 
+% Jahre neuere Versionen) ändern.
+%
+%\changes{v2.0}{2007/01/05}{add hint about warning when tracking \emph{and}
+%                           expansion is applied to a font}
+%  \item
+%\begin{verbatim}[deletekeywords={[1]{expansion}}]
+%pdfTeX warning (font expansion): font should be expanded before its first use
+%\end{verbatim}
+% Diese Warnung wird bei \pdftex\ Versionen vorkommen, die älter sind als 1.40.4, 
+% wenn Tracking \emph{und} Vergrößerung auf eine Schriftart angewendet werden. Sie 
+% ist harmlos und kann ignoriert werden.
+%\end{itemize}
+%
+%
+%
+%\section{Beiträge}
+%
+% Ich wäre froh, Konfigurationsdateien für mehr Schriftarten beizufügen. Das 
+% Vorbereiten solcher Konfigurationen ist recht zeitaufwändig und erfordert viel 
+% Geduld.
+% Um diesen Prozess zu erleichtern, schließt dieses Paket auch eine Testdatei ein, 
+% die verwendet werden kann, um zumindest die Hervorhebungseinstellungen überprüfen % zu können (\file{test-microtype.tex}).
+%^^A
+% Wenn Sie eine Konfigurationsdatei für eine andere Schriftart erstellt, oder 
+% Anregungen für Verbesserungen in den Standardkonfigurations-Dateien haben, würde % Ich diese dankbar entgegennehmen: \mailtoRS.
+%\iffalse\footnote{^^A ... OK, so nobody has any ...
+%    Should you have lots of \pkg{pdfcprot} configuration files lying around,
+%    I can also provide you with a \TeX\ conversion script. Just ask me.}
+%\fi
+%
+%
+%\section{Danksagungen}
+%
+% Dieses Paket wäre sinnlos, wenn \contributor\thanh{} <thanh\at pdftex.org>
+% dieses \pdftex\ Programm überhautpt nicht erstellt hätte, welches die 
+% mikro-typographische Erweiterung einführt und so für die \TeX\ -Welt verfügbar 
+% macht. Darüber hinaus danke ich ihm für die Hilfe, dieses Paket zu 
+% verbessern und nicht zuletzt für die Förderung in \cite{ThanhPracTeX} und 
+% \cite{ThanhEuroTeX07} und anderswo. Also bedanke Ich mich bei ihm und dem Rest 
+% der \pdftex\ Mannschaft für die Widerlegung der Idee, dass \TeX\ tot ist, und für % dass Fixen der Programmfehler die ich gefunden habe.
+%
+% \contributor Harald Harders <h.harders\at tu-bs.de> hat dazu beigetragen die 
+% Vorsprungseinstellungen für Adobe Minion möglich zu machen. Ich möchste ihm auch % für eine Reihe an Fehlermeldungen und Vorschlägen danken, die er gemacht hat.
+% \contributor Andreas B\"uhmann <andreas.buehmann\at web.de> hat die Möglichkeit 
+% vorgeschlagen, Bereiche von Schriftgrößen anzugeben und geistreich bei der 
+% Implementierung dieser zu helfen. Er hatte auch einige guten Ideen für das 
+% Management von komplexen Konfigurationen.
+% \contributor Ulrich Dirr <ud\at art-satz.de> hat zahlreiche Vorschläge gemacht, 
+% besonders bezüglich der neuen Erweiterungen der Zwischenwortabstandsanpassung und % zum zusätzlichen Kerning.
+% Mein Dank gilt auch \contributor Maciej Eder <maciej_eder\at poczta.onet.pl>
+% für die beigetragenen Einstellungen der <QX> Kodierung, sowie 
+% \contributor Karl Karlsson <karl-karlsson\at yandex.ru> zur Bereitstellung von 
+% Einstellungen für die kyrillische <T2A> Kodierung.
+% Ich bedanke mich bei \contributor \'Elie Roux <elie.roux\at telecom-bretagne.eu>,
+% das sie das |lua| Modul erschaffen hat.
+%
+% Ich danke \contributor Philipp Lehman <plehman\at gmx.net> das er seinem
+% \pkg{csquotes} Paket die Möglichkeit hinzugefügt hat, die ursprüngliche Bedeutung % aller aktivierten Zeichen wiederherzustellen, so dass diese für die Zeichen in 
+% den Konfigurationsdateien verwendet werden können. 
+% Freundlicherweise hat \contributor Peter Wilson <herries.press\at earthlink.net> 
+% ein Häkchen in seinen \pkg{ledmac}/\pkg{ledpar} Paketen zur Verfügung gestellt, 
+% so dass kritische Editionen, schließlich auch vom Charakter-Vorsprung profitieren.
+%
+% Zusätzlich haben die folgenden Personen Bugs gemeldet, Vorschläge gemacht oder 
+% anders geholfen (in chronologischer Reihenfolge):
+%  \contributor Tom Kink          <kink\at hia.rwth-aachen.de>,
+%  \contributor Herb Schulz       <herbs\at wideopenwest.com>,
+%  \contributor Michael Hoppe     <mh\at michael-hoppe.de>,
+%  \contributor Gary~L. Gray      <gray\at engr.psu.edu>,
+%  \contributor Georg Verweyen    <verweyen\at gmail.com>,
+%  \contributor Christoph Bier    <christoph.bier\at web.de>,
+%  \contributor Peter Muthesius   <Pemu\at gmx.de>,
+%  \contributor Bernard Gaulle    <gaulle\at idris.fr>\,\textdagger,
+%  \contributor Adam Kucharczyk   <adamk\at ijp-pan.krakow.pl>,
+%  \contributor Mark Rossi        <mark.rossi\at de.bosch.com>,
+%  \contributor Stephan Hennig    <stephanhennig\at arcor.de>,
+%  \contributor Michael Zedler    <Michael.Zedler\at tum.de>,
+%  \contributor Herbert Vo\ss{}   <Herbert.Voss\at gmx.net>,
+%  \contributor Ralf Stubner      <ralf.stubner\at physik.uni-erlangen.de>,
+%  \contributor Holger Uhr        <huhr\at uni-paderborn.de>,
+%  \contributor Peter Dyballa     <Peter_Dyballa\at Web.DE>,
+%  \contributor Morten H\o gholm  <morten.hoegholm\at latex-project.org>,
+%  \contributor Steven Bath       <steven128\at iname.com>,
+%  \contributor Daniel Flipo      <daniel.flipo\at univ-lille1.fr>,
+%  \contributor Michalis Miatidis <miatidis\at informatik.rwth-aachen.de>,
+%  \contributor Sven Naumann      <svenau\at gmx.net>,
+%  \contributor Ross Hetherington <ross\at heth.eclipse.co.uk>,
+%  \contributor Geoff Vallis      <gkv\at Princeton.EDU>,
+%  \contributor Steven~E. Harris  <seh\at panix.com>,
+%  \contributor Karl Berry        <karl\at freefriends.org>,
+%  \contributor Peter Meier       <Peter.Meier998\at gmx.de>,
+%  \contributor Nathan Rosenblum  <nater\at cs.wisc.edu>,
+%  \contributor Wolfram Schaalo   <schaalo\at gmx.net>,
+%  \contributor Vasile Gaburici   <vgaburici\at gmail.com>,
+%  \contributor Sveinung Heggen   <sveinung.heggen\at orkla.no>,
+%  \contributor Colin Rourke      <gt\at msp.warwick.ac.uk>,
+%  \contributor Maverick Woo      <maverick\at cs.cmu.edu>,
+%  \contributor Silas~S. Brown    <ssb22\at cam.ac.uk>,
+%  \contributor Christian Stark   <cstark\at gmx.de>
+% and
+%  \contributor Marcin Borkowski  <mbork\at atos.wmid.amu.edu.pl>.
+%
+%
+%\begin{thebibliography}{}
+% \bibitem[Th\`anh 2000]{ThanhThesis}
+%   \thanh, `Micro-typographic extensions to the \TeX\ typesetting system',
+%   \newblock Diss. Masaryk University Brno 2000,
+%   \newblock in: \textit{TUGBoat}, vol.~21 (2000), no.~4, pp.~317--434.
+%   \newblock (Online at \url{http://www.tug.org/TUGboat/Articles/tb21-4/tb69thanh.pdf})
+%
+%\iffalse ^^A obsolete
+% \bibitem[Th\`anh 2001]{ThanhTUG}
+%   \thanh, `Margin Kerning and Font Expansion with \pdftex',
+%   \newblock in: \textit{TUGBoat}, vol.~22 (2001), no.~3:
+%             `Proceedings of the 2001 Annual Meeting', pp.~146--148.
+%   \newblock (Online at \url{http://www.tug.org/TUGboat/Articles/tb22-3/tb72thanh.pdf})
+%\fi
+%
+% \bibitem[Th\`anh 2004]{ThanhPracTeX}
+%   \thanh, `Micro-typographic extensions of \pdftex\ in practice',
+%   \newblock in: \textit{TUGBoat}, vol.~25 (2004), no.~1:
+%             `Proceedings of the Practical \TeX\ 2004 Conference', pp.~35--38.
+%   \newblock (Online at \url{http://www.tug.org/TUGboat/Articles/tb25-1/thanh.pdf})
+%
+%\iffalse
+% \bibitem[Th\`anh 2005]{ThanhEuroTeX05}
+%   \thanh, `Experiences with micro-typographic extensions of \pdftex\ in practice',
+%   \newblock in: Euro\TeX\ 2005 Proceedings
+%             ^^A 15th~Annual Meeting of the European \TeX\ Users,
+%             ^^A March~7 -- March~11, 2005, Abbaye des Pr\'emontr\'es, Pont-\`a-Mousson,
+%             [=~\textit{TUGBoat}, vol.~27 (2006), no.~0],
+%             pp.~159--164.
+%   \newblock (Online at \url{http://www.tug.org/TUGboat/Articles/tb27-0/thanh.pdf})
+%                  ^^A = \url{http://www.dante.de/dante/events/eurotex/papers/TUT07.pdf}
+%\fi
+%
+% \bibitem[Th\`anh 2008]{ThanhEuroTeX07}
+%   \thanh, `Font-specific issues in \pdftex',
+%   \newblock in: \textit{TUGBoat}, vol.~29 (2008), no.~1:
+%             `EuroBacho\TeX\ 2007 Proceedings', pp.~36--41.
+%   \newblock (Online at \url{http://www.tug.org/TUGboat/Articles/tb29-1/tb91thanh-fonts.pdf})
+%
+% \bibitem[\pdftex\ manual]{pdftexman}
+%   \thanh, Sebastian Rahtz, Hans Hagen, Hartmut Henkel, Pawe\l\ Jackowski, Martin Schr\"oder,
+%   \emph{The \pdftex\ user manual},
+%   \newblock 25 January 2007.
+%   \newblock (\ctanurl{systems/pdftex/};
+%             latest version at \url{http://sarovar.org/projects/pdftex/})
+%             ^^A or even \url{http://foundry.supelec.fr/scm/?group_id=23}
+%
+% \bibitem[Fontname]{fontname}
+%   Karl Berry, \emph{Fontname. Filenames for \TeX\ fonts},
+%   \newblock July 2009.
+%   \newblock (\ctanurl{info/fontname/fontname.pdf})
+%
+% \bibitem[\LaTeXe\ font selection]{fntguide}
+%   \LaTeX3 Project Team, \emph{\LaTeXe\ font selection},
+%   \newblock 27 November 2005.
+%   \newblock (\ctanurl{macros/latex/doc/fntguide.pdf})
+%
+% \bibitem[\pkg{pdfcprot}]{pdfcprot}
+%   Carsten Schurig, Tobias Schlemmer, \emph{The \pkg{pdfcprot}|.sty| package},
+%   \newblock 10 June 2005.
+%   \newblock (\ctanurl{macros/latex/contrib/pdfcprot/})
+%
+% \bibitem[\pkg{soul}]{soul}
+%   Melchior Franz, \emph{The \pkg{soul} package},
+%   \newblock 17 November 2003.
+%   \newblock (\ctanurl{macros/latex/contrib/soul/}).
+%\changes{v2.3a}{2008/01/06}{mention \pkg{soulutf8}}
+%   \newblock See also Heiko Oberdiek's extension of this package,
+%             \pkg{soulutf8}, which adds Unicode support.
+%   \newblock (\ctanurl{macros/latex/contrib/oberdiek/})
+%\end{thebibliography}
+%
+%
+%\section{Short history}
+%\changes{v1.5}{2004/12/11}{add `Short history'}
+%
+% The comprehensive list of changes can be
+% \expandafter\ifx\csname r@sec:changes\endcsname\relax
+%     obtained by running `\texttt{makeindex \mbox{-s gglo.ist}
+%                                  \mbox{-o microtype.gls} microtype.glo}'\else
+%     found in appendix~\ref{sec:changes}\fi.
+% The following is a list of all changes relevant in the user land; bug and
+% compatibility fixes are swept under the rug. Numbers in brackets indicate
+% the relevant section in this manual.
+%
+%\newenvironment{History}
+%  {\list\labelitemi
+%   {\leftmargin 0pt
+%    \parsep 0pt
+%    \def\refsection##1{[##1]}
+%    \def\makelabel##1{\hss\llap{##1}}}}
+%  {\endlist}
+%\newcommand\Version[2]{
+%  \VersionDate{#1}{#2}
+%  \vskip\topsep
+%  \pagebreak[2]
+%  \item[#1](#2)
+%  \vskip\topsep
+%  \nopagebreak}
+%\newcommand\VersionDate[2]{^^A needed in the Change history
+%  \global\expandafter\def\csname MTversiondate#1\endcsname{#2}}
+%
+%\begin{History}
+%
+%\Version{\expandafter\@gobble\fileversion}{\filedate}
+%  \item |lua| functions moved to a dedicated file
+%  \item Protrusion settings for <T2A> encoded Minion
+%
+%\Version{2.3e}{2009/11/09}
+%  \item Support for the Cyrillic <T2A> encoding (protrusion, expansion, spacing)
+%
+%\Version{2.3d}{2009/03/27}
+%  \item New default for expansion option `\opt{step}': 1, if \pdftex\ $\geq$ 1.40
+%        \refsection{\ref{sub:options-expansion}}
+%
+%\Version{2.3c}{2008/11/11}
+%  \item Support for \luatex\ enabled by default
+%
+%\VersionDate{2.3b}{2008/06/04}
+%
+%\VersionDate{2.3a}{2008/02/29}
+%
+%\Version{2.3}{2007/12/23}
+%  \item New key `|outer kerning|' for \cs{SetTracking} to customise outer kerning
+%        \refsection{\ref{sub:tracking}}
+%  \item Adjust protrusion settings for tracking even if protrusion is not enabled
+%  \item New option `\opt{verbose}|=silent|' to turn all warnings into mere messages
+%        \refsection{\ref{sub:options-misc}}
+%  \item The \letterspace\ package also works with \pkg{eplain} or \pkg{miniltx}
+%        \refsection{\ref{sec:lettersp}}
+%
+%\Version{2.2}{2007/07/14}
+%  \item Improvements to tracking/letterspacing: retain kerning (\pdftex\ $\geq$ 1.40.4);
+%        automatically adjust protrusion settings
+%  \item New key `|no ligatures|' for \cs{SetTracking} to disable selected or
+%        all ligatures (\pdftex\ $\geq$ 1.40.4)
+%        \refsection{\ref{sub:tracking}}
+%  \item New keys `|spacing|' and `|outer spacing|' for \cs{SetTracking} to
+%        customise interword spacing
+%        \refsection{\ref{sub:tracking}}
+%  \item Possibility to expand a font with different parameters (\pdftex\ $\geq$ 1.40.4)
+%    ^^A ; new option `\opt{copyfonts}'
+%        \refsection{\ref{sub:expansion}}
+%  \item New optional argument for \cs{DisableLigatures} to disable selected ligatures only
+%        \refsection{\ref{sec:disable-ligatures}}
+%  \item New command \cs{DeclareMicrotypeVariants} to specify variant suffixes
+%        \refsection{\ref{sub:config-file}}
+%  \item New command \cs{textmicrotypecontext} as a wrapper for \cs{microtypecontext}
+%        \refsection{\ref{sec:context}}
+%  \item Protrusion settings for Bitstream Letter Gothic
+%^^A  \item Basic support for \luatex\ (if generated with the |lua| option)
+%
+%\Version{2.1}{2007/01/21}
+%  \item New command \cs{lslig} to protect ligatures in letterspaced text
+%        \refsection{\ref{sec:lettersp}}
+%
+%\Version{2.0}{2007/01/14}
+%  \item Support for the new extensions of \pdftex\ $\geq$ 1.40:
+%        tracking/letterspacing, adjustment of interword spacing (glue),
+%        and additional kerning
+%        (new commands \cs{SetTracking}, \cs{SetExtraSpacing}, \cs{SetExtraKerning};
+%         new options `\opt{tracking}', `\opt{spacing}', `\opt{kerning}')
+%        \refsection{\ref{sub:tracking}, \ref{sub:spacing}, \ref{sub:kerning}}
+%  \item New commands \cs{textls} and \cs{lsstyle} for letterspacing,
+%        new option `\opt{letterspace}'
+%        \refsection{\ref{sub:option-tracking}, \ref{sec:lettersp}}
+%  \item New option `\opt{babel}' for automatic micro-typographic adjustment to
+%        the selected language
+%        \refsection{\ref{sub:options-misc}, \ref{sec:context}}
+%  \item New font sets: `|smallcaps|', `|footnotesize|', `|scriptsize|'
+%        \refsection{\ref{sec:font-sets}, table~\ref{tab:predefined-font-sets}}
+%  \item New package `\letterspace' providing the commands for robust and
+%        hyphenatable letterspacing
+%        \refsection{\ref{sec:lettersp}}
+%
+%\VersionDate{1.9f}{2006/09/09}
+%
+%\Version{1.9e}{2006/07/28}
+%  \item New key `|inputenc|' to specify the lists' input encodings
+%        \refsection{\ref{sec:fine-tuning}}
+%  \item Protrusion settings for Euler math fonts
+%
+%\Version{1.9d}{2006/05/05}
+%  \item Support for the Central European <QX> encoding
+%        (protrusion, inheritance)
+%  \item Protrusion settings for various Euro symbol fonts (Adobe, <ITC>, \pkg{marvosym})
+%  \item Support for Unicode input in the configuration (\pkg{inputenc}/|utf8|)
+%
+%\Version{1.9c}{2006/02/02}
+%  \item Protrusion settings for <URW> Garamond
+%
+%\VersionDate{1.9b}{2006/01/20}
+%
+%\Version{1.9a}{2005/12/05}
+%  \item Defer setup until the end of the preamble
+%   ^^A ; consequently, no need to
+%   ^^A   change font defaults before loading \microtype, or to put it the other
+%   ^^A   way round, \microtype\ may now be loaded at any time
+%   ^^A ; new option `\opt{defersetup}'
+%  \item Inside the preamble, \cs{microtypesetup} accepts all package options
+%        \refsection{\ref{sub:options-cmd}}
+%  \item Protrusion settings for <T5> encoded Charter
+%
+%\Version{1.9}{2005/10/28}
+%  \item New command \cs{DisableLigatures} to disable ligatures of fonts
+%        (\pdftex\ $\geq$ 1.30)
+%        \refsection{\ref{sec:disable-ligatures}}
+%  \item New command \cs{microtypecontext} to change the configuration context;
+%        new key `|context|' for the configuration commands
+%        \refsection{\ref{sec:context}}
+%  \item New key `|font|' to add single fonts to the font sets
+%        \refsection{\ref{sec:font-sets}}
+%  \item New key `|preset|' to set all characters to the specified value before
+%        loading the lists
+%  \item Value `|relative|' renamed to `|character|' for `|unit|' keys
+%  \item Support for the Polish <OT4> encoding (protrusion, expansion, inheritance)
+%  \item Support for the Vietnamese <T5> encoding (protrusion, expansion, inheritance)
+%^^A  \item `\opt{DVIoutput}' option will work with \texlive\ 2004
+%
+%\Version{1.8}{2005/06/23}
+%^^A  \item If font substitution has occurred, the settings for the substitute will
+%^^A        be used instead of those for the selected font
+%  \item New command \cs{DeclareMicrotypeSetDefault} to declare the default font sets
+%        \refsection{\ref{sec:font-sets}}
+%  \item New option `\opt{config}' to load a different configuration file
+%        \refsection{\ref{sub:options-misc}}
+%  \item New option `\opt{unit}' to measure protrusion factors relative to a
+%        dimension instead of the character width
+%        \refsection{\ref{sub:protrusion}}
+%  \item Renamed commands from \cs{..MicroType..} to \cs{..Microtype..}
+%  \item Protrusion settings for <AMS> math fonts
+%  \item Protrusion settings for Times in <LY1> encoding completed
+%  \item The `|allmath|' font set also includes <U> encoding
+%^^A  \item 8-bit characters in the configuration finally work as advertised,
+%^^A        even if made active by the \pkg{csquotes} package
+%  \item When using the \pkg{ledmac} package, character protrusion will work
+%        for the first time ever (\pdftex\ $\geq$ 1.30)
+%
+%\Version{1.7}{2005/03/23}
+%  \item Possibility to specify ranges of font sizes in the set declarations
+%        and protrusion and expansion settings
+%        \refsection{\ref{sec:font-sets}, \ref{sec:fine-tuning}}
+%^^A  \item Always take font size into account when trying to find protrusion resp.
+%^^A        expansion settings for a given font
+%^^A        \refsection{\ref{sec:fine-tuning}}
+%  \item New command \cs{LoadMicrotypeFile} to load a font configuration file manually
+%        \refsection{\ref{sub:config-file}}
+%  \item Hook \cs{Microtype@Hook} for font package authors
+%        \refsection{\ref{sub:hook}}
+%  \item New option `\opt{verbose}|=errors|' to turn all warnings into errors
+%^^A  \item Disable expansion inside \cmd\showhyphens
+%  \item Warning when running in draft mode
+%
+%\VersionDate{1.6a}{2005/02/02}
+%
+%\Version{1.6}{2005/01/24}
+%  \item New option `\opt{factor}' to influence protrusion resp. expansion of
+%        all characters of a font or font set
+%        \refsection{\ref{sub:options-protrusion}, \ref{sec:fine-tuning}}
+%  \item When \pdftex\ is too old to expand fonts automatically, expansion
+%        has to be enabled explicitly, automatic expansion will be disabled
+%        \refsection{\ref{sub:options-microtype}}
+%^^A  \item Protrusion settings of digits improved
+%  \item Use \etex\ extensions, if available
+%
+%\Version{1.5}{2004/12/15}
+%  \item When output mode is <DVI>, font expansion has to be enabled explicitly,
+%        automatic expansion will be disabled
+%        \refsection{\ref{sub:options-microtype}}
+%  \item New option `\opt{selected}' to enable selected expansion,
+%        default: |false|
+%        \refsection{\ref{sub:options-expansion}, \ref{sub:expansion}}
+%  \item New default for expansion option `\opt{step}': 4 (min(\opt{stretch},\opt{shrink})/5)
+%        \refsection{\ref{sub:options-expansion}}
+%  \item Protrusion settings for Bitstream Charter
+%
+%\VersionDate{1.4b}{2004/11/26}
+%^^A\Version{1.4b}{2004/11/26}
+%^^A  \item \cs{UseMicrotypeSet} requires the set to be declared
+%^^A        \refsection{\ref{sec:font-sets}}
+%
+%\VersionDate{1.4a}{2004/11/17}
+%
+%\Version{1.4}{2004/11/12}
+%  \item Set up fonts independently from \LaTeX\ font loading
+%^^A        (therefore, no risk of overlooking fonts anymore, and the package may
+%^^A        be loaded at any time)
+%^^A  \item \cs{microtypesetup} now sets the correct level of protrusion
+%^^A        \refsection{\ref{sub:options-cmd}}
+%  \item New option: `\opt{final}'
+%        \refsection{\ref{sub:options-misc}}
+%
+%\VersionDate{1.3}{2004/10/27}
+%
+%\Version{1.2}{2004/10/03}
+%  \item New font sets: `|allmath|' and `|basicmath|'
+%        \refsection{\ref{sec:font-sets}, table~\ref{tab:predefined-font-sets}}
+%  \item Protrusion settings for Computer Modern Roman math symbols
+%  \item Protrusion settings for <TS1> encoding completed for Computer Modern
+%        Roman and Adobe Garamond
+%^^A  \item If an alias font name is specified, it will be used as an alternative,
+%^^A        not as a replacement \refsection{\ref{sub:config-file}}
+%
+%\Version{1.1}{2004/09/21}
+%  \item Protrusion settings for Adobe Minion
+%  \item New command: \cs{DeclareCharacterInheritance}
+%        \refsection{\ref{sub:inherit}}
+%  \item Characters may also be specified as octal or hexadecimal numbers
+%        \refsection{\ref{sec:fine-tuning}}
+%^^A  \item Configuration file names in lowercase [\ref{sub:config-file}]
+%
+%\Version{1.0}{2004/09/11}
+%  \item First <CTAN> release
+%\end{History}
+%
+%
+%\def\AppendixSettings{
+%  \addtolength\textwidth{50pt}
+%  \addtolength{\oddsidemargin}{-50pt}
+%  \setlength{\columnwidth}{\textwidth}
+%  \setlength{\hsize}{\textwidth}
+%  \setlength{\linewidth}{\textwidth}
+%  \footnotesize
+%}
+%\def\LPPLSettings{
+%\changes{v1.9e}{2006/06/13}{include <LPPL>}
+%  \let\LPPLicense\empty
+%  \def\endLPPLicense{\endmulticols\endgroup}
+%  \def\LPPLsection##1{\begin{multicols}{2}[\section{##1}][12\baselineskip]}
+%  \def\LPPLsubsection##1{\end{multicols}\begin{multicols}{2}[\subsection*{##1}][6\baselineskip]}
+%  \def\LPPLsubsubsection{\subsubsection*}
+%  \let\LPPLparagraph\textit
+%  \let\LPPLfile\file
+%  \def\textsc##1{\acronym{\MakeUppercase{##1}}}
+%  \lstset{gobble=2,basicstyle=\MacroFont\tiny,commentstyle=,aboveskip=\smallskipamount}
+%  \let\oldmakeatletter\makeatletter
+%  \long\def\makeatletter##1\makeatother{\let\makeatletter\oldmakeatletter}
+%  \MakePercentComment
+%}
+%
+%\StopEventually{
+%  \GeneralChanges{Documentation}
+%  \newpage
+%  \appendix
+%  \AppendixSettings
+%  \typeout{:?1000} ^^A tell WinEdt not to bother about overfull boxes
+%  \PrintChanges
+%  \PrintIndex
+%  \typeout{:?1111}
+%  \InputIfFileExists{lppl.tex}\LPPLSettings\relax
+%}
+%
+% \GeneralChanges*
+%
+% ^^A =========================================================================
+%
+% ^^A Heiko Oberdiek's fix from latexbugs (latex/3540):
+%\begingroup
+%  \def\x\begingroup#1\@nil{\endgroup
+%    \def\DoNotIndex{\begingroup
+%      \@tfor\@tempa:=\#\$\&\^\_\|\~\ \<\do{\expandafter\@makeother\@tempa}#1}}
+%\expandafter\x\DoNotIndex\@nil
+%\def\PercentIndex{}\def\LeftBraceIndex{}\def\RightBraceIndex{}
+% ^^A also index new ifs:
+%\def\@newif{newif}\newif\if@newif
+%\def\macro@finish{\macro@namepart
+%  \ifx\macro@namepart\@newif\@tempswatrue\else\@tempswafalse\fi
+%  \ifnot@excluded
+%    \edef\@tempa{\noexpand\SpecialIndex{\bslash\macro@namepart}}\@tempa
+%  \fi
+%  \if@newif
+%    \edef\@tempa{\noexpand\SpecialMainIndex
+%       {\bslash\expandafter\@gobbletwo\macro@namepart true}}\@tempa
+%    \edef\@tempa{\noexpand\SpecialMainIndex
+%       {\bslash\expandafter\@gobbletwo\macro@namepart false}}\@tempa
+%  \fi
+%  \if@tempswa\@newiftrue\else\@newiffalse\fi
+%}
+%
+%
+%\DoNotIndex{\!,\",\',\(,\),\*,\+,\,,\-,\.,\/,\:,\;,\<,\=,\>,\?,\[,\\,\],\`,
+%  \#,\$,\&,\^,\_,\|,\~,\ ,
+%  \advance,\afterassignment,\aftergroup,\begingroup,\bgroup,\catcode,\char,
+%  \chardef,\csname,\def,\divide,\edef,\egroup,\else,\endcsname,\endgroup,
+%  \endinput,\escapechar,\everypar,\expandafter,\fi,\futurelet,\gdef,\global,
+%  \hbadness,\hbox,\hsize,\hskip,\if,\ifcase,\ifcat,\ifdim,\iffalse,\ifhbox,
+%  \ifhmode,\ifmmode,\ifnum,\iftrue,\ifx,\immediate,\input,\inputlineno,\jobname,
+%  \kern,\lastskip,\let,\lowercase,\meaning,\multiply,\newlinechar,\noexpand,
+%  \number,\or,\parfillskip,\pretolerance,\relax,\setbox,\showboxdepth,\string,
+%  \the,\tolerance,\unkern,\unskip,\uppercase,\vbox,\wd,\write,\xdef}
+%^^A\DoNotIndex{\font,\fontdimen,\nullfont,\sfcode,\spacefactor,\spaceskip,
+%^^A  \xspaceskip}                                                           ^^A tex
+%\DoNotIndex{\currentgrouptype,\detokenize,\dimexpr,\eTeXversion,\ifcsname,
+%  \ifdefined,\numexpr}
+%^^A\DoNotIndex{\fontcharwd,\iffontchar}                                     ^^A e-tex
+%\DoNotIndex{\pdfannot,\pdfescapestring,\pdfmatch,\pdfoutput,\pdfstrcmp,
+%  \pdftexrevision,\pdftexversion}
+%^^A\DoNotIndex{\(ef,lp,rp,kn(ac,bc),(kn,sh,st)bs)code,\(left,right)marginkern,
+%^^A  \tagcode,\letterspacefont,\pdfcopyfont,\pdffontexpand,\pdfnoligatures,
+%^^A  \pdfprotrudechars,\pdfadjust(interwordglue,spacing),\pdf(app,prep)endkern,
+%^^A  \pdftracingfonts}                                                      ^^A pdftex
+%\DoNotIndex{\directlua,\luatexversion}                                      ^^A luatex
+%\DoNotIndex{\eplain,\usepkg@pkg}                                            ^^A eplain
+%\DoNotIndex{\@backslashchar,\@cclv,\@cclvi,\@classoptionslist,\@currext,
+%  \@currname,\@defaultunits,\@empty,\@expandtwoargs,\@firstofone,\@firstoftwo,
+%  \@gobble,\@gobbletwo,\@ifl@aded,\@ifpackagelater,\@ifpackageloaded,\@ifstar,
+%  \@ifundefined,\@let@token,\@m,\@makeother,\@minus,\@nameuse,\@ne,\@nil,\@nnil,
+%  \@onelevel@sanitize,\@onlypreamble,\@percentchar,\@pkgextension,\@plus,
+%  \@ptionlist,\@removeelement,\@secondoftwo,\@spaces,\@sptoken,\@tempa,\@tempb,
+%  \@tempc,\@tempcnta,\@tempcntb,\@tempdima,\@typeset@protect,\@undefined,
+%  \@unprocessedoptions,\@unusedoptionlist,\@xobeysp,\check@icr,\color@begingroup,
+%  \color@endgroup,\g@addto@macro,\hmode@bgroup,\m@ne,\maybe@ic,\maybe@ic@,
+%  \nfss@text,\not@math@alphabet,\on@line,\p@,\set@display@protect,\strip@prefix,
+%  \strip@pt,\tw@,\z@,\z@skip,\active,\documentclass,\leavevmode,\makeatletter,
+%  \maxdimen,\newcommand,\newcount,\newdimen,\newif,\newskip,\newtoks,\nobreak,
+%  \nonfrenchspacing,\normalsize,\renewcommand,\space,
+%  \AtBeginDocument,\AtEndOfPackage,\CheckCommand,\CurrentOption,
+%  \DeclareRobustCommand,\IfFileExists,\InputIfFileExists,\MessageBreak,
+%  \PackageError,\PackageInfo,\PackageWarning,\RequirePackage,
+%  \@@enc@update,\cf@encoding,\f@encoding}
+%^^A\DoNotIndex{\add@accent,\curr@fontshape,\define@newfont,\do@subst@correction,
+%^^A  \f@size,\font@name,\normalfont,\pickup@font,\selectfont,\set@fontsize,
+%^^A  \showhyphens}                                                          ^^A latex
+%\DoNotIndex{\XeTeXversion}                                                  ^^A xetex
+%\DoNotIndex{\normalpdfoutput,\normalpdftexversion,\normalpdftexrevision}    ^^A tex live
+%\DoNotIndex{\foreign@language,\languagename,\select@language,\shorthandoff} ^^A babel
+%\DoNotIndex{\percentsign}                                                   ^^A babel/spanish,galician,mexican
+%\DoNotIndex{\CJK@ifundefined,\CJK@plane,\CJK@temp,\CJK@addcmap}             ^^A CJK,CJKutf8
+%\DoNotIndex{\@disablequotes}                                                ^^A csquotes
+%\DoNotIndex{\pdfstringdefDisableCommands,\pdfstringdefWarn}                 ^^A hyperref
+%\DoNotIndex{\ifpdf}                                                         ^^A ifpdf
+%\DoNotIndex{\@inpenc@undefined@,\IeC,\inputencoding,\inputencodingname}     ^^A inputenc
+%\DoNotIndex{\UTFviii@defined}                                               ^^A inputenc/utf8
+%\DoNotIndex{\PrerenderUnicode,\unicode@charfilter}                          ^^A inputenc/utf8x
+%\DoNotIndex{\define@key,\KV@@sp@def,\setkeys}                               ^^A keyval
+%\DoNotIndex{\l@dunhbox@line}                                                ^^A ledmac,ledpar
+%\DoNotIndex{\lst@ProcessLetter}                                             ^^A listings
+%\DoNotIndex{\pdf@escapestring}                                              ^^A pdftexcmds
+%\DoNotIndex{\py@macron}                                                     ^^A pinyin
+%\DoNotIndex{\SOUL@,\soulregister}                                           ^^A soul
+%\DoNotIndex{\tikz@expandcount}                                              ^^A tikz
+%\DoNotIndex{\conditionally@traceoff}                                        ^^A trace
+%\DoNotIndex{\x,\MT@dinfo,\MT@dinfo@nl,\tracingmicrotype,\tracingmicrotypeinpdf,
+%  \ifMT@inannot,\MT@inannottrue,\MT@inannotfalse,\MT@addto@annot,\MT@pdf@annot,
+%  \MT@show@pdfannot,\iftracingmicrotypeinpdfall,\tracingmicrotypeinpdfalltrue,
+%  \tracingmicrotypeinpdfallfalse,\DeclareMicroTypeSet,\DeclareMicroTypeAlias,
+%  \UseMicroTypeSet,\LoadMicroTypeFile,\MicroType@Hook}                      ^^A microtype
+%
+% ^^A -------------------------------------------------------------------------
+%
+%\newpage
+%\ImplementationSettings
+%\ifpdf\hypersetup{bookmarksopen=false}\fi
+%
+%\section{Implementation}
+%
+% The \pkg{docstrip} modules in this file are:
+% \begin{description}
+%  \item[|driver|]  The documentation driver, only visible in the \file{dtx} file.
+%  \item[|package|] The code for the \microtype\ package (\file{microtype.sty}).
+%   \begin{description}
+%    \item[|letterspace|] The code for the \letterspace\ package (\file{letterspace.sty}).
+%    \item[|lua|]    Code for \luatex\ (\microtype\ only).
+%    \item[|plain|]  Code for \pkg{eplain}, \pkg{miniltx} (\letterspace\ only).
+%    \item[|debug|]  Code for additional output in the log file.
+%                   \\Used for -- surprise! -- debugging purposes.
+%   \end{description}
+%  \item[|config|]  Surrounds all configuration modules.
+%   \begin{description}
+%    \item[|cfg-t|]  Surrounds (Latin) text configurations.
+%     \begin{description}
+%      \item[|m-t|]   The main configuration file (\file{microtype.cfg}).
+%      \item[|bch|]   Settings for Bitstream Charter (\file{mt-bch.cfg}).
+%      \item[|blg|]   Settings for Bitstream Letter Gothic (\file{mt-blg.cfg}).
+%      \item[|cmr|]   Settings for Computer Modern Roman (\file{mt-cmr.cfg}).
+%      \item[|pad|]   Settings for Adobe Garamond (\file{mt-pad.cfg}).
+%      \item[|ppl|]   Settings for Palatino (\file{mt-ppl.cfg}).
+%      \item[|ptm|]   Settings for Times (\file{mt-ptm.cfg}).
+%      \item[|pmn|]   Settings for Adobe Minion (\file{mt-pmn.cfg}).
+%                    \\Contributed by \contributor Harald Harders <h.harders\at tu-bs.de>.
+%      \item[|ugm|]   Settings for <URW> Garamond (\file{mt-ugm.cfg}).
+%     \end{description}
+%    \item[|cfg-u|]  Surrounds non-text configurations (<U> encoding).
+%     \begin{description}
+%      \item[|msa|]   Settings for <AMS> `a' symbol font (\file{mt-msa.cfg}).
+%      \item[|msb|]   Settings for <AMS> `b' symbol font (\file{mt-msb.cfg}).
+%      \item[|euf|]   Settings for Euler Fraktur font (\file{mt-euf.cfg}).
+%      \item[|eur|]   Settings for Euler Roman font (\file{mt-eur.cfg}).
+%      \item[|eus|]   Settings for Euler Script font (\file{mt-eus.cfg}).
+%     \end{description}
+%    \item[|cfg-e|]  Surrounds Euro symbol configurations.
+%     \begin{description}
+%      \item[|zpeu|]  Settings for Adobe Euro symbol fonts (\file{mt-zpeu.cfg}).
+%      \item[|euroitc|] Settings for <ITC> Euro symbol fonts (\file{mt-euroitc.cfg}).
+%      \item[|mvs|]   Settings for \pkg{marvosym} Euro symbol (\file{mt-mvs.cfg}).
+%     \end{description}
+%   \end{description}
+%  \item[|test|]    A helper file that may be used to create and test
+%                    protrusion settings\\(\file{test-microtype.tex}).
+% \end{description}
+% And now for something completely different.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*package|letterspace>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%\subsection{Preliminaries}
+%
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@MT}
+% This is us.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@MT
+%<package>  {microtype}
+%<letterspace>  {letterspace}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@fix@catcode}
+%\changes{v1.3}{2004/10/27}{check some category codes (compatibility with \pkg{german})}
+%\changes{v1.5}{2004/12/03}{reset catcode of `\texttt{\^}' (compatibility with \pkg{chemsym})}
+%\changes{v2.3a}{2007/12/29}{fix catcodes earlier, and also for the \letterspace\ package}
+% We have to make sure that the category codes of some characters are correct
+% (the \pkg{german} package, for instance, makes |"| active). Probably overly
+% cautious. Ceterum censeo: it should be forbidden for packages to change
+% catcodes within the preamble.
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@restore@catcodes}
+% Polite as we are, we'll restore them afterwards.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\MT@restore@catcodes\@empty
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@fix@catcode#1#2{%
+  \edef\MT@restore@catcodes{%
+    \MT@restore@catcodes
+    \catcode#1 \the\catcode#1\relax
+  }%
+  \catcode#1 #2\relax
+}
+%<package>\MT@fix@catcode{17}{14}% ^^Q (comment)
+\MT@fix@catcode{24} {9}% ^^X (ignore)
+%<package>\MT@fix@catcode{33}{12}% !
+%<package>\MT@fix@catcode{34}{12}% "
+\MT@fix@catcode{36} {3}% $ (math shift)
+\MT@fix@catcode{39}{12}% '
+\MT@fix@catcode{42}{12}% *
+\MT@fix@catcode{43}{12}% +
+\MT@fix@catcode{44}{12}% ,
+\MT@fix@catcode{45}{12}% -
+\MT@fix@catcode{58}{12}% :
+\MT@fix@catcode{60}{12}% <
+\MT@fix@catcode{61}{12}% =
+\MT@fix@catcode{62}{12}% >
+%<package>\MT@fix@catcode{63}{12}% ?
+\MT@fix@catcode{94} {7}% ^ (superscript)
+\MT@fix@catcode{96}{12}% `
+%<package>\MT@fix@catcode{124}{12}% |
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+% These are all commands for the outside world. We define them here as blank
+% commands, so that they won't generate an error if we are not running \pdftex.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*package>
+\newcommand*\DeclareMicrotypeSet[3][]{}
+\newcommand*\UseMicrotypeSet[2][]{}
+\newcommand*\DeclareMicrotypeSetDefault[2][]{}
+\newcommand*\SetProtrusion[3][]{}
+\newcommand*\SetExpansion[3][]{}
+\newcommand*\SetTracking[3][]{}
+\newcommand*\SetExtraKerning[3][]{}
+\newcommand*\SetExtraSpacing[3][]{}
+\newcommand*\DisableLigatures[2][]{}
+\newcommand*\DeclareCharacterInheritance[3][]{}
+\newcommand*\DeclareMicrotypeVariants[1]{}
+\newcommand*\DeclareMicrotypeAlias[2]{}
+\newcommand*\LoadMicrotypeFile[1]{}
+\newcommand*\DeclareMicrotypeBabelHook[2]{}
+\newcommand*\microtypesetup[1]{}
+\newcommand*\microtypecontext[1]{}
+\newcommand*\textmicrotypecontext[2]{#2}
+\@ifpackageloaded{letterspace}{\let\MT@textls\relax}{%
+%</package>
+\newcommand*\lsstyle{}
+\newcommand\textls[2][]{}
+\def\textls#1#{}
+\newcommand*\lslig[1]{#1}
+%<*package>
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% These commands also have a starred version.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\DeclareMicrotypeSet#1#{\@gobbletwo}
+\def\DeclareMicrotypeVariants#1#{\@gobble}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Set declarations are only allowed in the preamble (resp. the main
+% configuration file). The configuration commands, on the other hand, must be
+% allowed in the document, too, since they may be called inside font
+% configuration files, which, in principle, may be loaded at any time.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@onlypreamble\DeclareMicrotypeSet
+\@onlypreamble\UseMicrotypeSet
+\@onlypreamble\DeclareMicrotypeSetDefault
+\@onlypreamble\DisableLigatures
+\@onlypreamble\DeclareMicrotypeVariants
+\@onlypreamble\DeclareMicrotypeBabelHook
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@old@cmd}
+% The old command names had one more hunch.
+%\changes{v1.8}{2005/04/28}{renamed commands from \cs{..MicroType..} to \cs{..Microtype..}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@old@cmd#1#2{%
+  \newcommand*#1{\MT@warning{%
+    \string#1 is deprecated. Please use\MessageBreak
+    \string#2 instead}%
+    \let #1#2#2}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\MT@old@cmd\DeclareMicroTypeAlias\DeclareMicrotypeAlias
+\MT@old@cmd\DeclareMicroTypeSet  \DeclareMicrotypeSet
+\MT@old@cmd\UseMicroTypeSet      \UseMicrotypeSet
+\MT@old@cmd\LoadMicroTypeFile    \LoadMicrotypeFile
+%</package>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@warning}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@warning@nl}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@info}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@info@nl}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@vinfo}
+%\changes{v1.6}{2005/01/06}{new macro instead of \cs{ifMT@verbose}}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@error}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@warn@err}
+%\changes{v1.7}{2005/03/16}{new macro: for \opt{verbose}\texttt{\quotechar=errors}}
+% Communicate.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@warning{\PackageWarning\MT@MT}
+\def\MT@warning@nl#1{\MT@warning{#1\@gobble}}
+%<*package>
+\def\MT@info{\PackageInfo\MT@MT}
+\def\MT@info@nl#1{\MT@info{#1\@gobble}}
+\let\MT@vinfo\@gobble
+\def\MT@error{\PackageError\MT@MT}
+\def\MT@warn@err#1{\MT@error{#1}{%
+  This error message appears because you loaded the `\MT@MT'\MessageBreak
+  package with the option `verbose=errors'. Consult the documentation\MessageBreak
+  in \MT@MT.pdf to find out what went wrong.}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%
+%\subsubsection{Debugging}
+%
+%\begin{macro}{\tracingmicrotype}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@dinfo}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@dinfo@nl}
+% Cases for \cs{tracingmicrotype}:
+%\begin{enum}
+%  \item almost none
+%  \item + sets \& lists
+%  \item + heirs
+%  \item + slots
+%  \item + factors
+%\end{enum}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*debug>
+\MT@warning@nl{This is the debug version}
+\newcount\tracingmicrotype
+\tracingmicrotype=2
+\def\MT@info#1{\PackageInfo\MT@MT{#1}\MT@addto@annot{#1}}
+\def\MT@info@nl#1{\PackageInfo\MT@MT{#1\@gobble}\MT@addto@annot{#1}}
+\let\MT@vinfo\MT@info@nl
+\def\MT@warning#1{\PackageWarning\MT@MT{#1}\MT@addto@annot{Warning: #1}}
+\def\MT@warning@nl#1{\PackageWarning\MT@MT{#1\@gobble}\MT@addto@annot{Warning: #1}}
+\def\MT@dinfo#1#2{\ifnum\tracingmicrotype<#1 \else\MT@info{#2}\fi}
+\def\MT@dinfo@nl#1#2{\ifnum\tracingmicrotype<#1 \else\MT@info@nl{#2}\fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\tracingmicrotypeinpdf}
+%\changes{v2.0}{2006/09/21}{new debug method: mark all fonts with <PDF> annotations}
+% Another debug method: font switches can be marked in the <PDF> file with a
+% small caret, an accompanying popup text box displaying all debug messages.
+%
+% Cases for \cs{tracingmicrotypeinpdf}:
+%\begin{enum}[1]
+%  \item show new fonts
+%  \item + show known fonts
+%\end{enum}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcount\tracingmicrotypeinpdf
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\ifpdf\ifx\tracingmicrotypeinpdf\undefined
+% \fallbacktext{If \file{microtype.sty} had been generated with the `|debug|'
+%   option,\\this method would be demonstrated here.}
+%\else
+% Let's see how it works~\dots
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\tracingmicrotypeinpdf=2
+%\end{verbatim}
+%\tracingmicrotypeinpdf=2
+%\fi\fi
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@pdf@annot}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@addto@annot}
+%\begin{macro}{\ifMT@inannot}
+% During font setup, we save the text for the popup in \cs{MT@pdf@annot}.
+% (This requires \pdftex\ $\geq$~1.30.)
+% The \pkg{pdftexcmds} package provides \pdftex's utility commands in \luatex, too.
+%\changes{v2.3d}{2009/02/27}{use \pkg{pdftexcmds} for debugging}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\RequirePackage{pdftexcmds}
+\newif\ifMT@inannot \MT@inannottrue
+\let\MT@pdf@annot\@empty
+\def\MT@addto@annot#1{\ifnum\tracingmicrotypeinpdf>\z@ \ifMT@inannot
+  {\def\MessageBreak{^^J\@spaces}%
+   \MT@xadd\MT@pdf@annot{\pdf@escapestring{#1^^J}}}\fi\fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\iftracingmicrotypeinpdfall}
+% With \cs{tracingmicrotypeinpdfallfalse}, the <PDF> output is (hopefully)
+% identical, but some font switches will not be displayed; otherwise the output
+% is affected, but \emph{all} font switches are visible. In the latter case, we
+% also insert a small kern so that multiple font switches are discernable.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\iftracingmicrotypeinpdfall
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@show@pdfannot}
+% A red caret is shown for fonts which are actually set up by
+% {\ifpdf\ifx\tracingmicrotypeinpdf\undefined\else\fontfamily{pzc}\itshape\fi\fi
+%  Microtype},
+% a green one marks fonts that we have already seen. The |/Caret| annotation
+% requires a viewer for <PDF> version 1.5 (you could use |/Text| if you're
+% using an older <PDF> viewer).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@show@pdfannot#1{%
+  \ifnum\tracingmicrotypeinpdf<#1 \else
+    \iftracingmicrotypeinpdfall\leavevmode\fi
+    \pdfannot height 4pt width 4pt depth 2pt {%
+      /Subtype/Caret
+      /T(\expandafter\string\font@name)
+      \ifcase#1\or
+      /Subj(New font)/C[1 0 0]
+      \else
+      /Subj(Known font)/C[0 1 0]
+      \fi
+      /Contents(\MT@pdf@annot)
+    }%
+    \iftracingmicrotypeinpdfall\kern1pt \fi
+    \global\MT@inannotfalse
+  \fi
+}
+%</debug>
+%</package>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\ifpdf\ifx\tracingmicrotypeinpdf\undefined\else
+% \tracingmicrotypeinpdf0
+% \tracingmicrotype0
+%\fi\fi
+%
+%\subsubsection{Requirements}
+%
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@plain}
+% The \letterspace\ package works with:
+%\begin{enum}
+%\changes{v2.3}{2007/11/07}{\letterspace: support for \pkg{eplain}/\pkg{miniltx}}
+%  \item \pkg{miniltx}
+%  \item \pkg{eplain} ^^A tested with eplain v3.1, 2006/12/03; v3.2, 2007/11/26; v3.3, 2009/07/21
+%  \item \LaTeX
+%\end{enum}
+% For plain usage, we have to copy some commands from \file{latex.ltx}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*plain>
+\def\MT@plain{2}
+\ifx\documentclass\@undefined
+  \def\MT@plain{1}
+  \def\hmode@bgroup{\leavevmode\bgroup}
+  \def\nfss@text#1{{\mbox{#1}}}
+  \let\@typeset@protect\relax
+  \ifx\eplain\@undefined
+    \def\MT@plain{0}
+    \def\PackageWarning#1#2{%
+      \begingroup
+        \newlinechar=10 %
+        \def\MessageBreak{^^J(#1)\@spaces\@spaces\@spaces\@spaces}%
+        \immediate\write16{^^JPackage #1 Warning: #2\on@line.^^J}%
+      \endgroup
+    }
+    \def\on@line{ on input line \the\inputlineno}
+    \def\@spaces{\space\space\space\space}
+  \fi
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@requires@latex}
+%\changes{v2.3b}{2008/05/26}{new macro}
+% Better use groups than plain ifs.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@requires@latex#1{%
+  \ifnum\MT@plain<#1 \expandafter\@secondoftwo\else\expandafter\@firstoftwo\fi
+}
+%</plain>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@pdftex@no}
+%\changes{v1.6a}{2005/02/02}{new macro}
+% \pdftex's features for which we provide an interface here haven't always been
+% available, and some specifics have changed over time. Therefore, we have to
+% test which \pdftex\ we're using, if any. \cs{MT@pdftex@no} will be used
+% throughout the package to respectively do the right thing.
+%
+% Currently, we have to distinguish seven cases for \pdftex:
+%\begin{enum}
+%  \item not running \pdftex
+%  \item \pdftex\ ($\less$~0.14f)
+%  \item + micro-typographic extensions (0.14f,g)
+%  \item + protrusion relative to 1\,em ($\geq$~0.14h)
+%  \item + automatic font expansion;
+%          protrusion no longer has to be set up first;
+%          scale factor fixed to 1000;
+%          default \cmd\efcode\,=\,1000 ($\geq$~1.20)
+%\changes{v1.8}{2005/04/15}{case 5: \pdftex\ 1.30}
+%  \item + \cmd{\(left,right)marginkern};
+%          \cmd\pdfnoligatures;
+%          \cmd\pdfstrcmp;
+%          \cmd\pdfescapestring\ ($\geq$~1.30)
+%\changes{v2.0}{2005/08/20}{(beta:1) case 6: \pdftex\ 1.40}
+%  \item + adjustment of interword spacing;
+%          extra kerning;
+%          \cmd\letterspacefont;
+%          \cmd\pdfmatch\footnote{This command was actually introduced
+%           in 1.30, but failed on strings longer than 1023 bytes.};
+%          \cmd\pdftracingfonts;
+%          always \etex\
+%          ($\geq$~1.40)
+%\changes{v2.2}{2007/02/23}{case 7: \pdftex\ 1.40.4}
+%  \item + \cmd\letterspacefont\ doesn't disable ligatures and kerns;
+%          \cmd\pdfcopyfont\
+%          ($\geq$~1.40.4)
+%\end{enum}
+%\changes{v1.1}{2004/09/13}{fix: version check
+%               (reported by \contributor Harald Harders <h.harders\at tu-bs.de>)}
+%                                                   ^^A private mail, 2004/09/13
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@pdftex@no{0}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\changes{v1.9}{2005/08/29}{compatibility with \texlive\ hack
+%               (reported by \contributor Herbert Vo\ss{} <Herbert.Voss\at gmx.net>)}
+%                                      ^^A MID: <deprh8$c69$00$1@news.t-online.com>
+% A hack circumventing the \texlive\ 2004 hack which undefines the \pdftex\
+% primitives in the format in order to hide the fact that \pdftex\ is being run
+% from the user. This has been \emph{fixed} in \texlive\ 2005.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\ifx\normalpdftexversion\@undefined \else
+  \let\pdftexversion \normalpdftexversion
+  \let\pdftexrevision\normalpdftexrevision
+  \let\pdfoutput     \normalpdfoutput
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Old packages might have let \cmd\pdftexversion\ to \cmd\relax.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\ifx\pdftexversion\@undefined \else
+  \ifx\pdftexversion\relax \else
+%<debug>\MT@dinfo@nl{0}{this is pdftex \the\pdftexversion(\pdftexrevision)}
+    \def\MT@pdftex@no{7}
+%<*package>
+    \ifnum\pdftexversion = 140
+      \ifnum\pdftexrevision < 4
+        \def\MT@pdftex@no{6}
+      \fi
+    \else
+%</package>
+      \ifnum\pdftexversion < 140
+        \def\MT@pdftex@no{5}
+%<*package>
+        \ifnum\pdftexversion < 130
+          \def\MT@pdftex@no{4}
+          \ifnum\pdftexversion < 120
+            \def\MT@pdftex@no{3}
+            \ifnum\pdftexversion = 14
+              \ifnum \expandafter`\pdftexrevision < `h
+                \def\MT@pdftex@no{2}
+                \ifnum \expandafter`\pdftexrevision < `f
+                  \def\MT@pdftex@no{1}
+                \fi
+              \fi
+            \else
+              \ifnum\pdftexversion < 14
+                \def\MT@pdftex@no{1}
+              \fi
+            \fi
+          \fi
+        \fi
+      \fi
+%</package>
+    \fi
+  \fi
+\fi
+%<debug>\MT@dinfo@nl{0}{pdftex no.: \MT@pdftex@no}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@clear@options}
+% If we are not using \pdftex\ or in case it is too old, we disable everything
+% and exit.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@clear@options{%
+%<plain>  \MT@requires@latex1{%
+  \AtEndOfPackage{\let\@unprocessedoptions\relax}%
+  \let\CurrentOption\@empty
+%<plain>  }\relax
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\ifnum\MT@pdftex@no <
+%<package>    2
+%<letterspace>    6
+  \MT@warning@nl{You
+    \ifcase\MT@pdftex@no
+      don't seem to be using pdftex.\MessageBreak
+      `\MT@MT' only works with pdftex.\MessageBreak
+      Try running `pdflatex' instead of
+        `\ifx\XeTeXversion\@undefined\else xe\fi latex'%
+    \else
+      are using a pdftex version older than
+%<package>      0.14f%
+%<letterspace>      1.40%
+      .\MessageBreak
+      `\MT@MT' does not work with this version.\MessageBreak
+      Please install a newer version of pdftex%
+    \fi
+  }
+  \MT@clear@options\MT@restore@catcodes
+\endinput\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\changes{v2.3c}{2008/09/09}{\luatex\ supported by default}
+% Since \luatex\ is included in \texlive\ 2008, we now support it by default,
+% even though it's still experimental. Letterspacing doesn't work at all yet,
+% since \luatex\ doesn't know the \cmd\letterspacefont\ command.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*!lua|letterspace>
+\ifx\directlua\@undefined \else
+  \ifx\directlua\relax \else
+%<!letterspace>    \MT@error
+%<letterspace>    \MT@warning@nl
+    {`\MT@MT'
+%<!letterspace>     only works with luatex if you generate%
+%<letterspace>     doesn't currently work with luatex.%
+     \MessageBreak
+%<!letterspace>     the package with the `lua' option%
+%<letterspace>     Bye bye%
+    }
+%<!letterspace>    {}
+%<letterspace>    \MT@clear@options\MT@restore@catcodes
+%<letterspace>    \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\endinput
+  \fi
+\fi
+%</!lua|letterspace>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Still there? Then we can begin:
+% We need the \pkg{keyval} package, including the `new' \cmd\KV@@sp@def\
+% implementation.
+%\changes{v2.1}{2007/01/15}{fix: \letterspace\ package forgot to load \pkg{keyval}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\RequirePackage{keyval}[1997/11/10]
+%<*package>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@toks}
+% We need a token register.
+%\changes{v1.9}{2005/09/28}{use instead of \cmd\toks@}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newtoks\MT@toks
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\ifMT@if@}
+% A scratch if.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\ifMT@if@
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%
+%\subsubsection{Declarations}
+%
+%\begin{macro}{\ifMT@protrusion}
+%\begin{macro}{\ifMT@expansion}
+%\begin{macro}{\ifMT@auto}
+%\begin{macro}{\ifMT@selected}
+%\begin{macro}{\ifMT@noligatures}
+%\begin{macro}{\ifMT@draft}
+%\begin{macro}{\ifMT@spacing}
+%\begin{macro}{\ifMT@kerning}
+%\begin{macro}{\ifMT@tracking}
+%\begin{macro}{\ifMT@babel}
+% These are the global switches~\dots
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\ifMT@protrusion
+\newif\ifMT@expansion
+\newif\ifMT@auto
+\newif\ifMT@selected
+\newif\ifMT@noligatures
+\newif\ifMT@draft
+\newif\ifMT@spacing
+\newif\ifMT@kerning
+\newif\ifMT@tracking
+\newif\ifMT@babel
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@pr@level}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@ex@level}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@pr@factor}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@ex@factor}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@sp@factor}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@kn@factor}
+% \dots~and numbers.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\MT@pr@level\tw@
+\let\MT@ex@level\tw@
+\let\MT@pr@factor\@m
+\let\MT@ex@factor\@m
+\let\MT@sp@factor\@m
+\let\MT@kn@factor\@m
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@pr@unit}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@sp@unit}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@kn@unit}
+% Default unit for protrusion settings is character width, for spacing
+% |space|, for kerning (and tracking) 1\,em.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\MT@pr@unit\@empty
+\let\MT@sp@unit\m@ne
+\def\MT@kn@unit{1em}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@stretch}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@shrink}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@step}
+% Expansion settings.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\MT@stretch\m@ne
+\let\MT@shrink \m@ne
+\let\MT@step   \m@ne
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@pr@min}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@pr@max}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@ex@min}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@ex@max}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@sp@min}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@sp@max}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@kn@min}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@kn@max}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@tr@min}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@tr@max}
+% Minimum and maximum values allowed by \pdftex.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@pr@min{-\@m}
+\let\MT@pr@max\@m
+\let\MT@ex@min\z@
+\let\MT@ex@max\@m
+\def\MT@sp@min{-\@m}
+\let\MT@sp@max\@m
+\def\MT@kn@min{-\@m}
+\let\MT@kn@max\@m
+%</package>
+\def\MT@tr@min{-\@m}
+\let\MT@tr@max\@m
+%<*package>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@factor@default}
+% Default factor.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@factor@default{1000 }
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@stretch@default}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@shrink@default}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@step@default}
+% Default values for expansion.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@stretch@default{20 }
+\def\MT@shrink@default{20 }
+\def\MT@step@default{4 }
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@letterspace}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@letterspace@default}
+% Default value for letterspacing (in thousandths of 1\,em).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%</package>
+\let\MT@letterspace\m@ne
+\def\MT@letterspace@default{100}
+%<*package>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\ifMT@document}
+% Our private test whether we're still in the preamble.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\ifMT@document
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%
+%\subsubsection{Auxiliary macros}
+%
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@maybe@etex}
+%\changes{v2.2}{2007/05/01}{use catcode trickery}
+%\changes{v2.3a}{2007/12/29}{removed}
+% For definitions that depend on \etex\ features.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\ifcase 0%
+  \ifx\eTeXversion\@undefined 1\else
+    \ifx\eTeXversion\relax    1\else
+      \ifcase\eTeXversion     1\fi
+    \fi
+  \fi
+\else
+  \catcode`\^^Q=9 \catcode`\^^X=14
+\fi
+%<debug>\MT@dinfo@nl{0}{this is
+%<debug>^^Q not
+%<debug>  etex}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@requires@pdftex}
+% For definitions that depend on a particular \pdftex\ version.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@requires@pdftex#1{%
+  \ifnum\MT@pdftex@no<#1 \expandafter\@secondoftwo\else\expandafter\@firstoftwo\fi
+}
+%<debug>\MT@requires@pdftex6{\pdftracingfonts=1 }\relax
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@requires@luatex}
+%\changes{v2.2}{2007/05/10}{(basic) support for \luatex}
+% For definitions that depend on \luatex.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*lua>
+\let\MT@requires@luatex\@secondoftwo
+\ifx\directlua\@undefined \else
+  \ifx\directlua\relax \else
+    \let\MT@requires@luatex\@firstoftwo
+  \fi
+\fi
+%<debug>\MT@dinfo@nl0{this is \MT@requires@luatex{}{not }luatex}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@lua}
+% Communicate with |lua|.
+% Beginning with \luatex\ 0.36, \cmd\directlua\ no longer requires a state
+% number.
+%\changes{v2.3d}{2009/03/25}{update for \luatex\ 0.36}
+% \cmd\luatexversion\ ought to have been enabled by the format.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\MT@requires@luatex{
+\ifnum\luatexversion<36
+  \def\MT@lua{\directlua0}
+\else
+  \def\MT@lua{\directlua}
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+% Some functions are loaded from a dedicated |lua| file. This avoids character
+% escaping problems and incompatibilities between versions of \luatex.
+% If available, we'll use the \pkg{luatextra} package to load the module.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\MT@lua{
+  if (luatextra and luatextra.use_module) then
+    luatextra.use_module("microtype")
+  else
+    dofile(kpse.find_file("microtype.lua"))
+  end}
+}\relax
+%</lua>
+%</package>
+%</package|letterspace>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Here it begins. The module was contributed by \'Elie Roux.
+%\changes{v2.4}{2009/11/12}{new file \file{microtype.lua} containing the \texttt{lua} functions
+%                           (contributed by \contributor \'Elie Roux <elie.roux\at telecom-bretagne.eu>)}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*luafile>
+if microtype then
+  -- we simply don't load
+else
+
+microtype = {}
+
+microtype.module = {
+  name         = "microtype",
+  version      = 2.4,
+  date         = "2010/01/10",
+  description  = "microtype module.",
+  author       = "R Schlicht",
+  copyright    = "R Schlicht",
+  license      = "LPPL",
+}
+
+if luatextra and luatextra.provides_module then
+  luatextra.provides_module(microtype.module)
+end
+
+%</luafile>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% To be continued, but first back to primitives.
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@glet}
+%\changes{v1.9f}{2006/08/09}{new macro}
+% Here's the forgotten one.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*package|letterspace>
+\def\MT@glet{\global\let}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@exp@cs}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@exp@gcs}
+%\changes{v2.3b}{2008/03/07}{new macro: reduce save stack size}
+% Commands to create command sequences. Those that are going to be defined
+% globally should be created inside a group so that the save stack won't
+% explode.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@exp@cs#1#2{\expandafter#1\csname#2\endcsname}
+%<*package>
+\def\MT@exp@gcs#1#2{\begingroup\expandafter\endgroup\expandafter#1\csname#2\endcsname}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\changes{v1.4b}{2004/11/21}{optimisation: use less \cmd\expandafter s and \cmd\csname s}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@def@n}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@gdef@n}
+%\changes{v1.9f}{2006/08/09}{new macros: global variants}
+% This is \cmd\@namedef\ and global.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@def@n{\MT@exp@cs\def}
+\def\MT@gdef@n{\MT@exp@gcs\gdef}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@edef@n}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@xdef@n}
+% Its expanding versions.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%</package>
+\def\MT@edef@n{\MT@exp@cs\edef}
+%<*package>
+\def\MT@xdef@n{\MT@exp@gcs\xdef}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@let@nc}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@glet@nc}
+% \cmd\let\ a \cmd\csname\ sequence to a command.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@let@nc{\MT@exp@cs\let}
+\def\MT@glet@nc{\MT@exp@gcs\MT@glet}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@let@cn}
+% \cmd\let\ a command to a \cmd\csname\ sequence.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@let@cn#1#2{\expandafter\let\expandafter#1\csname #2\endcsname}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@let@nn}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@glet@nn}
+% \cmd\let\ a \cmd\csname\ sequence to a \cmd\csname\ sequence.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@let@nn{\MT@exp@cs\MT@let@cn}
+\def\MT@glet@nn{\MT@exp@gcs{\global\expandafter\MT@let@cn}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@@font}
+% Remove trailing space from the font name.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@@font{\expandafter\string\MT@font}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@exp@one@n}
+% Expand the second token once and enclose it in braces.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%</package>
+\def\MT@exp@one@n#1#2{\expandafter#1\expandafter{#2}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@exp@two@c}
+% Expand the next two tokens after \meta{\#1} once.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@exp@two@c#1{\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter#1\expandafter}
+%<*package>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@exp@two@n}
+%\changes{v1.9}{2005/09/28}{new macros: less \cmd\expandafter s}
+% Expand the next two tokens after \meta{\#1} once and enclose them in braces.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@exp@two@n#1#2#3{%
+  \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter
+    #1\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter
+      {\expandafter#2\expandafter}\expandafter{#3}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+% You do not wonder why |\MT@exp@one@c| doesn't exist, do you?
+%\changes{v1.6}{2005/01/19}{use \etex's \cs{ifcsname} and \cs{ifdefined} if defined}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@ifdefined@c@T}
+%\changes{v1.9a}{2005/11/08}{new macros: true case only}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@ifdefined@c@TF}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@ifdefined@n@T}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@ifdefined@n@TF}
+% Wrapper for testing whether command resp. \cmd\csname\ sequence is defined.
+% If we are running \etex, we will use its primitives \cs{ifdefined} and
+% \cs{ifcsname}, which decreases memory use substantially.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@ifdefined@c@T#1{%
+^^X  \ifdefined#1\expandafter\@firstofone\else\expandafter\@gobble\fi
+^^Q  \ifx#1\@undefined\expandafter\@gobble\else\expandafter\@firstofone\fi
+}
+%</package>
+\def\MT@ifdefined@c@TF#1{%
+^^X  \ifdefined#1\expandafter\@firstoftwo\else\expandafter\@secondoftwo\fi
+%<package>^^Q  \ifx#1\@undefined
+%<package>^^Q    \expandafter\@secondoftwo\else\expandafter\@firstoftwo\fi
+}
+\def\MT@ifdefined@n@T#1{%
+^^X  \ifcsname#1\endcsname\expandafter\@firstofone\else\expandafter\@gobble\fi
+%<package>^^Q  \begingroup\MT@exp@two@c\endgroup\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\relax
+%<package>^^Q    \expandafter\@gobble\else\expandafter\@firstofone\fi
+}
+%<*package>
+\def\MT@ifdefined@n@TF#1{%
+^^X  \ifcsname#1\endcsname\expandafter\@firstoftwo\else\expandafter\@secondoftwo\fi
+^^Q  \begingroup\MT@exp@two@c\endgroup\ifx\csname #1\endcsname\relax
+^^Q    \expandafter\@secondoftwo\else\expandafter\@firstoftwo\fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@detokenize@n}
+%\changes{v1.9d}{2006/03/08}{new macro: use \cmd\detokenize\ if available}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@detokenize@c}
+%\changes{v1.9}{2005/08/17}{fix the \nonetex\ version}
+%\changes{v2.3c}{2008/08/23}{fix: remove last space only
+%                            (reported by \contributor Ulrich Dirr <ud\at mucschach.de>)}
+%                                                         ^^A private mail, 2008/08/22
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@rem@last@space}
+% Translate a macro into a token list. With \etex, we can use \cmd\detokenize.
+% We also need to remove the last trailing space; and only the last one --
+% therefore the fiddling (and the \cmd\string\ isn't perfect, of course).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@detokenize@n#1{%
+^^X  \expandafter\MT@rem@last@space\detokenize{#1} \@nil
+^^Q  \string#1%
+}
+\def\MT@detokenize@c#1{%
+^^X  \MT@exp@one@n\MT@detokenize@n#1%
+^^Q  \MT@exp@two@c\MT@rem@last@space\strip@prefix\meaning#1 \@nil
+}
+\def\MT@rem@last@space#1 #2{#1%
+  \ifx\@nil#2\else \space
+  \expandafter\MT@rem@last@space\expandafter#2\fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@ifempty}
+% Test whether argument is empty.
+%\changes{v1.1}{2004/09/15}{fix: use category code 12 for the percent character
+%               (reported by \contributor Tom Kink <kink\at hia.rwth-aachen.de>)}
+%                                      ^^A MID: <2qrkp9F134l6lU1@uni-berlin.de>
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%</package>
+\begingroup
+\catcode`\%=12
+\catcode`\&=14
+\gdef\MT@ifempty#1{&
+  \if %#1%&
+    \expandafter\@firstoftwo
+  \else
+    \expandafter\@secondoftwo
+  \fi
+}
+\endgroup
+%<*package>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@ifint}
+% Test whether argument is an integer, using an old trick by Mr. Arseneau,
+%\changes{v1.9a}{2005/11/03}{use \cmd\pdfmatch\ if available}
+% or the latest and greatest from \pdftex\
+%\changes{v2.2}{2007/05/10}{employ \luatex\ features if available}
+% or \luatex\ (which also allows negative numbers, as required by the
+% \opt{letterspace} option).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\MT@requires@pdftex6{
+%<*lua>
+  \MT@requires@luatex{
+    \def\MT@ifint#1{\csname\MT@lua{microtype.ifint([[#1]])}\endcsname}
+  }{
+%</lua>
+%</package>
+    \def\MT@ifint#1{%
+      \ifcase\pdfmatch{^-*[0-9]+ *$}{#1}\relax
+        \expandafter\@secondoftwo
+      \else
+        \expandafter\@firstoftwo
+      \fi
+    }
+%<*package>
+%<lua>  }
+}{
+  \def\MT@ifint#1{%
+    \if!\ifnum9<1#1!\else?\fi
+      \expandafter\@firstoftwo
+    \else
+      \expandafter\@secondoftwo
+    \fi
+  }
+}
+%</package>
+%</package|letterspace>
+%<*luafile>
+function microtype.ifint(s)
+  if string.find(s,"^-*[0-9]+ *$") then
+    tex.write("@firstoftwo")
+  else
+    tex.write("@secondoftwo")
+  end
+end
+
+%</luafile>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@ifdimen}
+% Test whether argument is dimension (or number).
+%\changes{v1.4b}{2004/11/22}{don't set \cs{MT@count} globally (save stack problem)}
+%\changes{v1.7}{2005/03/15}{comparison with 1 to allow size smaller than 1
+%               (suggested by \contributor Andreas B\"uhmann <andreas.buehmann\at web.de>)}
+%                                                            ^^A private mail, 2005/03/15
+%\changes{v1.9b}{2006/01/05}{use \cmd\pdfmatch\ if available}
+% (|nd| and |nc| are new Didot resp. Cicero, added in \pdftex\ 1.30; |px| is a pixel.)
+%\changes{v2.2}{2007/05/10}{employ \luatex\ features if available}
+%\todo{fix \texttt{lua} expression}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*package>
+\MT@requires@pdftex6{
+%<*lua>
+  \MT@requires@luatex{
+    \def\MT@ifdimen#1{\csname\MT@lua{microtype.ifdimen([[#1]])}\endcsname}
+  }{
+%</lua>
+    \def\MT@ifdimen#1{%
+      \ifcase\pdfmatch{^([0-9]+([.,][0-9]+)?|[.,][0-9]+)%
+                        (em|ex|cm|mm|in|pc|pt|dd|cc|bp|sp|nd|nc|px)? *$}{#1}\relax
+        \expandafter\@secondoftwo
+      \else
+        \expandafter\@firstoftwo
+      \fi
+    }
+%<lua>  }
+}{
+  \def\MT@ifdimen#1{%
+    \setbox\z@=\hbox{%
+      \MT@count=1#1\relax
+      \ifnum\MT@count=\@ne
+        \aftergroup\@secondoftwo
+      \else
+        \aftergroup\@firstoftwo
+      \fi
+    }%
+  }
+}
+%</package>
+%<*luafile>
+function microtype.ifdimen(s)
+  if (string.find(s, "^-*[0-9]+(%a*) *$") or
+      string.find(s, "^-*[0-9]*[.,][0-9]+(%a*) *$")) then
+    tex.write("@firstoftwo")
+  else
+    tex.write("@secondoftwo")
+  end
+end
+
+%</luafile>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@ifdim}
+% Test floating point numbers.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*package>
+\def\MT@ifdim#1#2#3{%
+  \ifdim #1\p@ #2 #3\p@
+    \expandafter\@firstoftwo
+  \else
+    \expandafter\@secondoftwo
+  \fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@ifstreq}
+% Test whether two strings (fully expanded) are equal.
+%\changes{v1.9a}{2005/11/03}{use \cmd\pdfstrcmp\ if available}
+%\changes{v2.2}{2007/03/07}{fix: \nonetex\ version shouldn't use \cmd\x\ and \cmd\y\
+%                           (found by \contributor Wiebke Petersen <petersew\at uni-duesseldorf.de>)}
+%                                               ^^A MID: <esmd6k$954$1@news1.rz.uni-duesseldorf.de>
+%\changes{v2.2}{2007/05/10}{employ \luatex\ features if available}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\MT@requires@pdftex5{
+%<*lua>
+  \MT@requires@luatex{
+    \def\MT@ifstreq#1#2{\csname\MT@lua{microtype.ifstreq([[#1]],[[#2]])}\endcsname}
+  }{
+%</lua>
+    \def\MT@ifstreq#1#2{%
+      \ifcase\pdfstrcmp{#1}{#2}\relax
+        \expandafter\@firstoftwo
+      \else
+        \expandafter\@secondoftwo
+      \fi
+    }
+%<lua>  }
+}{
+  \def\MT@ifstreq#1#2{%
+    \edef\MT@res@a{#1}%
+    \edef\MT@res@b{#2}%
+    \ifx\MT@res@a\MT@res@b
+      \expandafter\@firstoftwo
+    \else
+      \expandafter\@secondoftwo
+    \fi
+  }
+}
+%</package>
+%<*luafile>
+function microtype.ifstreq(s1, s2)
+  if s1 == s2 then
+    tex.write("@firstoftwo")
+  else
+    tex.write("@secondoftwo")
+  end
+end
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% And here we end the |lua| file.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+end
+%</luafile>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@xadd}
+%\changes{v1.8}{2005/04/17}{simplified}
+% Add item to a list.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*package>
+\def\MT@xadd#1#2{%
+  \ifx#1\relax
+    \xdef#1{#2}%
+  \else
+    \xdef#1{#1#2}%
+  \fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@xaddb}
+% Add item to the beginning.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@xaddb#1#2{%
+  \ifx#1\relax
+    \xdef#1{#2}%
+  \else
+    \xdef#1{#2#1}%
+  \fi
+}
+%</package>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@map@clist@n}
+%\changes{v1.8}{2005/04/17}{new macro: used instead of \cmd\@for}
+%\changes{v1.9a}{2005/11/03}{following \LaTeX3}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@map@clist@c}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@map@clist@}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@clist@function}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@clist@break}
+% Run \meta{\#2} on all elements of the comma list \meta{\#1}. This and the
+% following is modelled after \LaTeX3 commands.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*package|letterspace>
+\def\MT@map@clist@n#1#2{%
+  \ifx\@empty#1\else
+    \def\MT@clist@function##1{#2}%
+    \MT@map@clist@#1,\@nil,\@nnil
+  \fi
+}
+\def\MT@map@clist@c#1{\MT@exp@one@n\MT@map@clist@n#1}
+\def\MT@map@clist@#1,{%
+  \ifx\@nil#1%
+    \expandafter\MT@clist@break
+  \fi
+  \MT@clist@function{#1}%
+  \MT@map@clist@
+}
+\let\MT@clist@function\@gobble
+\def\MT@clist@break#1\@nnil{}
+%<*package>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@map@tlist@n}
+%\changes{v1.8}{2005/04/16}{new macro: used instead of \cmd\@tfor}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@map@tlist@c}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@map@tlist@}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@tlist@break}
+% Execute \meta{\#2} on all elements of the token list \meta{\#1}.
+% \cs{MT@tlist@break} can be used to jump out of the loop.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@map@tlist@n#1#2{\MT@map@tlist@#2#1\@nnil}
+\def\MT@map@tlist@c#1#2{\expandafter\MT@map@tlist@\expandafter#2#1\@nnil}
+\def\MT@map@tlist@#1#2{%
+  \ifx\@nnil#2\else
+    #1{#2}%
+    \expandafter\MT@map@tlist@
+    \expandafter#1%
+  \fi
+}
+\def\MT@tlist@break#1\@nnil{\fi}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\ifMT@inlist@}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@in@clist}
+% Test whether item \meta{\#1} is in comma list \meta{\#2}.
+%^^A\changes{v1.4b}{2004/11/22}{fix: compare with \cmd\\ instead of \cmd\relax\
+%^^A                (discovered by \contributor Herb Schulz <herbs\at wideopenwest.com>)}
+%^^A                                    ^^A MID: <BDBFA967.C01F%herbs@wideopenwest.com>
+% Using \cmd\pdfmatch\ would be slower.
+%\changes{v1.9a}{2005/11/03}{fix}
+%\changes{v2.3}{2007/11/14}{fix: don't use \cmd\x\
+%                           (reported by \contributor Peter Meier <Peter.Meier998\at gmx.de>)}
+%                                                                ^^A private mail, 2007/11/12
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\ifMT@inlist@
+\def\MT@in@clist#1#2{%
+  \def\MT@res@a##1,#1,##2##3\@nnil{%
+    \ifx##2\@empty
+      \MT@inlist@false
+    \else
+      \MT@inlist@true
+    \fi
+  }%
+  \expandafter\MT@res@a\expandafter,#2,#1,\@empty\@nnil
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@rem@from@clist}
+% Remove item \meta{\#1} from comma list \meta{\#2}. This is basically
+% \cmd\@removeelement\ from \file{ltcntrl.dtx}.
+%\changes{v1.9}{2005/10/28}{new macro: remove an item from a comma list}
+%\changes{v1.9a}{2005/11/03}{fix}
+%\changes{v1.9e}{2006/07/26}{model after \cmd\@removeelement}
+% Using \cmd\pdfmatch\ and \cmd\pdflastmatch\ here would be really slow!
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@rem@from@clist#1#2{%
+  \def\MT@res@a##1,#1,##2\MT@res@a{##1,##2\MT@res@b}%
+  \def\MT@res@b##1,\MT@res@b##2\MT@res@b{\ifx,##1\@empty\else##1\fi}%
+  \xdef#2{\MT@exp@two@c\MT@res@b\MT@res@a\expandafter,#2,\MT@res@b,#1,\MT@res@a}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@in@tlist}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@in@tlist@}
+% Test whether item is in token list. Since this isn't too elegant, I thought
+% that at least here, \cmd\pdfmatch\ would be more efficient -- however, it
+% turned out to be even slower than this solution.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@in@tlist#1#2{%
+  \MT@inlist@false
+  \def\MT@res@a{#1}%
+  \MT@map@tlist@c#2\MT@in@tlist@
+}
+\def\MT@in@tlist@#1{%
+  \edef\MT@res@b{#1}%
+  \ifx\MT@res@a\MT@res@b
+    \MT@inlist@true
+    \expandafter\MT@tlist@break
+  \fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@in@rlist}
+%\changes{v1.8}{2005/04/20}{made recursive}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@in@rlist@}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@in@rlist@@}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@size@name}
+% Test whether size \cs{MT@size} is in a list of ranges. Store the name of the
+% list in \cs{MT@size@name}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@in@rlist#1{%
+  \MT@inlist@false
+  \MT@map@tlist@c#1\MT@in@rlist@
+}
+\def\MT@in@rlist@#1{\expandafter\MT@in@rlist@@#1}
+\def\MT@in@rlist@@#1#2#3{%
+  \MT@ifdim{#2}=\m@ne{%
+    \MT@ifdim{#1}=\MT@size
+      \MT@inlist@true
+      \relax
+  }{%
+    \MT@ifdim\MT@size<{#1}\relax{%
+      \MT@ifdim\MT@size<{#2}%
+        \MT@inlist@true
+        \relax
+    }%
+  }%
+  \ifMT@inlist@
+    \def\MT@size@name{#3}%
+    \expandafter\MT@tlist@break
+  \fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@loop}
+%\changes{v1.2}{2004/09/23}{fix: new macro, used instead of \cmd\loop}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@iterate}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@repeat}
+% This is the same as \LaTeX's \cmd\loop, which we mustn't use, since this
+% could confuse an outer \cmd\loop\ in the document.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%</package>
+\def\MT@loop#1\MT@repeat{%
+  \def\MT@iterate{#1\relax\expandafter\MT@iterate\fi}%
+  \MT@iterate \let\MT@iterate\relax
+}
+\let\MT@repeat\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@while@num}
+% Execute \meta{\#3} from \meta{\#1} up to (excluding) \meta{\#2} (much faster
+% than \LaTeX's \cmd\@whilenum).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@while@num#1#2#3{%
+  \@tempcnta#1\relax
+  \MT@loop #3%
+    \advance\@tempcnta \@ne
+    \ifnum\@tempcnta < #2\MT@repeat
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@do@font}
+% Execute \meta{\#1} 256 times.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@do@font{\MT@while@num\z@\@cclvi}
+%<*package>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\changes{v1.4}{2004/11/12}{use one instead of five counters}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@count}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@increment}
+% Increment macro \meta{\#1} by one. Saves using up too many counters.
+%\changes{v1.7}{2005/03/07}{use \etex's \cmd\numexpr\ if available}
+% The \etex\ way is slightly faster.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcount\MT@count
+\def\MT@increment#1{%
+^^X  \edef#1{\number\numexpr #1 + 1\relax}%
+^^Q  \MT@count=#1\relax
+^^Q  \advance\MT@count \@ne
+^^Q  \edef#1{\number\MT@count}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@scale}
+%\changes{v1.7}{2005/02/12}{new macro: use \etex's \cs{numexpr} if available}
+%\changes{v1.8}{2005/03/30}{fix: remove spaces in \nonetex\ variant
+%               (reported by \contributor Mark Rossi <mark.rossi\at de.bosch.com>)}
+%                               ^^A MID: <d6uhag$qoi$1@ns2.fe.internet.bosch.com>
+% Multiply and divide a counter. If we are using \etex, we will use its
+% \cmd\numexpr\ primitive. This has the advantage that it is less likely to
+% run into arithmetic overflow. The result of the division will be rounded
+% instead of truncated. Therefore, we'll get a different (more accurate)
+% result in about half of the cases.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@scale#1#2#3{%
+^^Q  \multiply #1 #2\relax
+  \ifnum #3 = \z@
+^^X    #1=\numexpr #1 * #2\relax
+  \else
+^^X    #1=\numexpr #1 * #2 / #3\relax
+^^Q    \divide #1 #3\relax
+  \fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\changes{v1.7}{2005/03/07}{shorter command names}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@abbr@pr}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@abbr@ex}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@abbr@pr@c}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@abbr@ex@c}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@abbr@pr@inh}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@abbr@ex@inh}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@abbr@nl}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@abbr@sp}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@abbr@sp@c}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@abbr@sp@inh}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@abbr@kn}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@abbr@kn@c}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@abbr@kn@inh}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@abbr@tr}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@abbr@tr@c}
+% Some abbreviations. Thus, we can have short command names but full-length
+% log output.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@abbr@pr{protrusion}
+\def\MT@abbr@ex{expansion}
+\def\MT@abbr@pr@c{protrusion codes}
+\def\MT@abbr@ex@c{expansion codes}
+\def\MT@abbr@pr@inh{protrusion inheritance}
+\def\MT@abbr@ex@inh{expansion inheritance}
+\def\MT@abbr@nl{noligatures}
+\def\MT@abbr@sp{spacing}
+\def\MT@abbr@sp@c{interword spacing codes}
+\def\MT@abbr@sp@inh{interword spacing inheritance}
+\def\MT@abbr@kn{kerning}
+\def\MT@abbr@kn@c{kerning codes}
+\def\MT@abbr@kn@inh{kerning inheritance}
+\def\MT@abbr@tr{tracking}
+\def\MT@abbr@tr@c{tracking amount}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@rbba@protrusion}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@rbba@expansion}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@rbba@spacing}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@rbba@kerning}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@rbba@tracking}
+% These we also need the other way round.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@rbba@protrusion{pr}
+\def\MT@rbba@expansion{ex}
+\def\MT@rbba@spacing{sp}
+\def\MT@rbba@kerning{kn}
+\def\MT@rbba@tracking{tr}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@features}
+%\changes{v1.9b}{2006/01/17}{use throughout the package to adjust to beta-ness}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@features@long}
+% We can work on these lists to save some guards in the \file{dtx} file.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@features{pr,ex,sp,kn,tr}
+\def\MT@features@long{protrusion,expansion,spacing,kerning,tracking}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@is@feature}
+%\changes{v1.9a}{2005/11/03}{new macro: check for \pdftex\ feature}
+% Whenever an optional argument accepts a list of features, we can use this
+% command to check whether a feature exists in order to prevent a rather
+% confusing `|Missing \endcsname inserted|' error message. The feature (long
+% form) must be in \cmd\@tempa, the type of list to ignore in \meta{\#1},
+% then comes the action.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@is@feature#1{%
+  \MT@exp@one@n\MT@in@clist\@tempa\MT@features@long
+  \ifMT@inlist@
+    \expandafter\@firstofone
+  \else
+    \MT@error{`\@tempa' is not an available micro-typographic\MessageBreak
+      feature. Ignoring #1}{Available features are: `\MT@features@long'.}%
+    \expandafter\@gobble
+  \fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%
+%\subsubsection{Compatibility}\label{sub:compatibility}
+%
+% For the record, the following \LaTeX\ kernel commands will be modified by
+% \microtype:
+%\begin{itemize}
+%  \item \cmd\pickup@font
+%  \item \cmd\do@subst@correction
+%  \item \cmd\add@accent\ (all in section~\ref{sssec:impl.hook})
+%  \item \cmd\showhyphens\ (in section~\ref{sssec:impl.options})
+%\end{itemize}
+%
+% The \pkg{wordcount} package redefines the font-switching commands, which will
+% break \microtype. Since \microtype\ doesn't have an effect on the number of
+% words in the document anyway, we will simply disable ourselves.
+%\changes{v2.2}{2007/02/11}{disable \microtype\ if \pkg{wordcount} is loaded
+%                           (reported by \contributor Ross Hetherington <ross\at heth.eclipse.co.uk>)}
+%                                         ^^A MID: <A9-dnaHX5LxN01LYnZ2dnUVZ8tqqnZ2d@eclipse.net.uk>
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifl@aded{tex}{wordcount}{%
+  \MT@warning@nl{Detected the `wordcount' utility.\MessageBreak
+    Disabling `\MT@MT', since it wouldn't work}%
+  \MT@clear@options\MT@restore@catcodes\endinput}\relax
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@setup@}
+%\changes{v1.9a}{2005/11/21}{defer setup until the end of the preamble}
+%\changes{v1.9e}{2006/07/06}{empty \cs{MT@setup@} after use
+%                            (compatibility with the \pkg{combine} class)}
+%\changes{v2.3e}{2009/08/31}{make space-unaware
+%                            (requested by \contributor Marcin Borkowski <mbork\at atos.wmid.amu.edu.pl>)}
+%                               ^^A private mail, 2009/08/31
+% The setup is deferred until the end of the preamble. This has a couple of
+% advantages: \cs{microtypesetup} can be used to change options later on in the
+% preamble, and fonts don't have to be set up before \microtype.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%</package>
+%<plain>\MT@requires@latex1{
+\let\MT@setup@\@empty
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@addto@setup}
+% We use our private hook to have better control over the timing.
+% This will also work with \pkg{eplain}, but not with \pkg{miniltx} alone.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@addto@setup{\g@addto@macro\MT@setup@}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+% Don't hesitate with \pkg{miniltx}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<plain>}{\let\MT@addto@setup\@firstofone}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@with@package@T}
+% We almost never do anything if a package is not loaded.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@with@package@T#1{\@ifpackageloaded{#1}\@firstofone\@gobble}
+%<*package>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@with@babel@and@T}
+%\changes{v2.2}{2007/05/25}{also inspect class options}
+% \LaTeX's \cmd\@ifpackagewith\ ignores the class options.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@with@babel@and@T#1{%
+  \MT@ifdefined@n@T{opt@babel.\@pkgextension}{%
+    \@expandtwoargs\MT@in@clist{#1}
+      {\csname opt@babel.\@pkgextension\endcsname,\@classoptionslist}%
+    \ifMT@inlist@\expandafter\@gobble\fi
+  }\@gobble
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+% Don't load \letterspace.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\MT@let@nc{ver@letterspace.sty}\@empty
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@ledmac@setup}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@led@unhbox@line}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@led@kern}
+% The \pkg{ledmac} package first saves each paragraph in a box, from which it
+% then splits off the lines one by one. This will destroy character protrusion.
+% (There aren't any problems with the \pkg{lineno} package, since it takes a
+% different approach.)
+%\iffalse
+% We issue a warning, so that nobody can say they didn't know.
+%\changes{v1.6}{2004/12/29}{warning when using the \pkg{ledmac} package}
+% --- This is fixed in \pdftex\ 1.21a, so we no longer warn.
+%\changes{v1.6a}{2005/02/02}{no warning when using the \pkg{ledmac} package}
+% --- Actually, it was completely broken in 1.21a, but 1.21b provides a work-around.
+%\fi
+% ---~\dots~---
+%\changes{v1.8}{2005/04/15}{character protrusion with \pkg{ledmac}}
+% After much to and fro, the situation has finally settled and there is a fix.
+% Beginning with \pdftex\ version 1.21b together with \file{ledpatch.sty} as of
+% 2005/06/02 (v0.4), character protrusion will work at last.
+%
+% Peter Wilson was so kind to provide the \cmd\l@dunhbox@line\ hook in
+% \pkg{ledmac} to allow for protrusion. \cmd\leftmarginkern\ and
+% \cmd\rightmarginkern\ are new primitives of \pdftex\ 1.21b (aka. 1.30.0).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\MT@requires@pdftex5{
+  \def\MT@ledmac@setup{%
+    \ifMT@protrusion
+      \MT@ifdefined@c@TF\l@dunhbox@line{%
+        \MT@info@nl{Patching ledmac to enable character protrusion}%
+        \newdimen\MT@led@kern
+        \let\MT@led@unhbox@line\l@dunhbox@line
+        \renewcommand*{\l@dunhbox@line}[1]{%
+          \ifhbox##1%
+            \MT@led@kern=\rightmarginkern##1%
+            \kern\leftmarginkern##1%
+            \MT@led@unhbox@line##1%
+            \kern\MT@led@kern
+          \fi
+        }%
+      }{%
+        \MT@warning@nl{%
+          Character protrusion in paragraphs with line\MessageBreak
+          numbering will only work if you update ledmac}%
+      }%
+    \fi
+  }
+}{
+  \def\MT@ledmac@setup{%
+    \ifMT@protrusion
+      \MT@warning@nl{%
+        The pdftex version you are using does not allow\MessageBreak
+        character protrusion in paragraphs with line\MessageBreak
+        numbering by the `ledmac' package.\MessageBreak
+        Upgrade pdftex to version 1.30 or later}%
+    \fi
+  }
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@restore@p@h}
+% Restore meaning of \cmd\% and \cmd\#.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@restore@p@h{\chardef\%`\% \chardef\#`\# }
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@setupfont@hook}
+% This hook will be executed every time a font is set up (inside a group).
+%
+% In the preamble, we check for the packages each time a font is set up.
+% Thus, it will work regardless when the packages are loaded.
+%
+% Even for packages that don't activate any characters in the preamble (like
+% \pkg{babel} and \pkg{csquotes}), we have to check here, too, in case they were
+% loaded before \microtype, and a font is loaded \cmd\AtBeginDocument, before
+% \microtype.
+% (This is no longer needed, since the complete setup is now deferred until the
+% end of the preamble. However, it is still necessary for \opt{defersetup}|=false|.)
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@setupfont@hook{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\iffalse
+%\changes{v1.7}{2005/02/06}{compatibility with the \pkg{chemsym} package}
+% The \pkg{chemsym} package redefines, among other commands, the Hungarian
+% umlaut \cmd\H\ in a way that cannot be parsed by \microtype. As a work-around,
+% we restore the usual definition of \cmd\H\ before setting up the font (which
+% will be done inside a group).
+%\changes{v1.8}{2005/03/24}{remove superfluous \pkg{chemsym} hook}
+% --- Since version 1.7, this is no longer needed, since our character parsing
+% is robust enough now.
+%
+%\changes{v1.7}{2005/03/10}{compatibility with the \pkg{statex} package}
+% Same for \pkg{statex}.
+%\changes{v1.8}{2005/03/24}{remove superfluous \pkg{statex} hook}
+% --- No longer needed, either.
+%\fi
+%\changes{v1.8}{2005/03/30}{restore percent character if Spanish \pkg{babel} is loaded}
+%\changes{v2.2}{2007/02/02}{restore percent character if Galician \pkg{babel} is loaded}
+%\changes{v2.3a}{2008/01/29}{restore percent character if Mexican \pkg{babel} is loaded}
+% Spanish (and Galician and Mexican) \pkg{babel} modify \cmd\%, storing the
+% original meaning in \cmd\percentsign.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \MT@if@false
+  \MT@with@babel@and@T{spanish} \MT@if@true
+  \MT@with@babel@and@T{galician}\MT@if@true
+  \MT@with@babel@and@T{mexican} \MT@if@true
+  \ifMT@if@\MT@ifdefined@c@T\percentsign{\let\%\percentsign}\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\changes{v1.8}{2005/04/22}{restore \pkg{csquotes}'s active characters}
+% Using \cmd\@disablequotes, we can restore the original meaning of all
+% characters made active by \pkg{csquotes}.
+% (It would be doable for older versions, too, but we won't bother.)
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \MT@with@package@T{csquotes}{%
+    \@ifpackagelater{csquotes}{2005/05/11}\@disablequotes\relax}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \pkg{hyperref} redefines \cmd\% and \cmd\# inside a \cmd\url. We restore
+% the original meanings (which we can only hope are correct).
+%\changes{v1.8}{2005/05/20}{restore \cmd\% and \cmd\# when \pkg{hyperref} is loaded}
+% Same for \pkg{tex4ht}.
+%\changes{v1.9d}{2006/02/27}{restore \cmd\% and \cmd\# when \pkg{tex4ht} is loaded
+%                            (reported by \contributor Peter Dyballa <Peter_Dyballa\at Web.DE>)}
+%                                                                  ^^A private mail, 2006/02/26
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \MT@if@false
+  \MT@with@package@T{hyperref}\MT@if@true
+  \MT@with@package@T{tex4ht}  \MT@if@true
+  \ifMT@if@\MT@restore@p@h\fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+% Check again at the end of the preamble.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%</package>
+\MT@addto@setup{%
+%<*package>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\changes{v1.4}{2004/11/04}{check for \pkg{pdfcprot}}
+% Our competitor, the \pkg{pdfcprot} package, must not be tolerated!
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \MT@with@package@T{pdfcprot}{%
+    \MT@error{Detected the `pdfcprot' package!\MessageBreak
+              `\MT@MT' and `pdfcprot' may not be used together}{%
+The `pdfcprot' package provides an interface to character protrusion.\MessageBreak
+So does the `\MT@MT' package. Using both packages at the same\MessageBreak
+time will almost certainly lead to undesired results. Have your choice!}%
+  }%
+  \MT@with@package@T{ledmac}\MT@ledmac@setup
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% We can clean up \cs{MT@setupfont@hook} now.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \let\MT@setupfont@hook\@empty
+  \MT@if@false
+  \MT@with@babel@and@T{spanish} \MT@if@true
+  \MT@with@babel@and@T{galician}\MT@if@true
+  \MT@with@babel@and@T{mexican} \MT@if@true
+  \ifMT@if@
+    \g@addto@macro\MT@setupfont@hook{%
+      \MT@ifdefined@c@T\percentsign{\let\%\percentsign}}%
+  \fi
+  \MT@with@package@T{csquotes}{%
+    \@ifpackagelater{csquotes}{2005/05/11}{%
+      \g@addto@macro\MT@setupfont@hook\@disablequotes
+    }{%
+      \MT@warning@nl{%
+        Should you receive warnings about unknown slot\MessageBreak
+        numbers, try upgrading the `csquotes' package}%
+    }%
+  }%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% We disable \microtype's additions inside \pkg{hyperref}'s \cmd\pdfstringdef,
+% which redefines lots of commands.
+%\changes{v1.9}{2005/09/10}{disable \microtype\ setup inside \pkg{hyperref}'s \cmd\pdfstringdef\
+%               (reported by \contributor\thanh{} <hanthethanh\at gmail.com>)}
+%                                                  ^^A private mail, 2005/09/10
+%\changes{v2.3}{2007/11/11}{disable \cs{microtypecontext} in \pkg{hyperref}'s \cmd\pdfstringdef}
+% \pkg{hyperref} doesn't work with plain \TeX, so in that case we don't bother.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \MT@if@false
+%</package>
+%<plain>  \MT@requires@latex2{
+  \MT@with@package@T{hyperref}{%
+    \pdfstringdefDisableCommands{%
+%<*package>
+      \let\pickup@font\MT@orig@pickupfont
+      \let\textmicrotypecontext\@secondoftwo
+      \let\microtypecontext\@gobble
+%</package>
+      \def\lsstyle{\pdfstringdefWarn\lsstyle}%
+      \def\textls#1#{\pdfstringdefWarn\textls}%
+    }%
+%<package>    \MT@if@true
+  }%
+%<plain>  }\relax
+%<*package>
+  \MT@with@package@T{tex4ht}\MT@if@true
+  \ifMT@if@\g@addto@macro\MT@setupfont@hook\MT@restore@p@h\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\changes{v1.9b}{2005/12/19}{compatibility with \pkg{listings}: sanitise more catcodes
+%                            (reported by \contributor Holger Uhr <huhr\at uni-paderborn.de>)}
+%                                               ^^A MID: <do4gvo$tv$1@news.uni-paderborn.de>
+% The \pkg{listings} package makes numbers and letters active,
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \MT@with@package@T{listings}{%
+    \g@addto@macro\MT@cfg@catcodes{%
+      \MT@while@num{"30}{"3A}{\catcode\@tempcnta 12\relax}%
+      \MT@while@num{"41}{"5B}{\catcode\@tempcnta 11\relax}%
+      \MT@while@num{"61}{"7B}{\catcode\@tempcnta 11\relax}%
+    }%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \dots~and the backslash (which would lead to problems in \cs{MT@get@slot}).
+%\changes{v2.0}{2006/09/15}{compatibility with \pkg{listings}: set catcode of backslash to zero
+%                           (reported by \contributor Steven Bath <steven128\at iname.com>)}
+%                                                     ^^A private mail, 2006/09/15
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \g@addto@macro\MT@setupfont@hook{%
+      \catcode`\\\z@
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\changes{v1.9b}{2005/12/23}{compatibility with the \texttt{extendedchar} option of
+%                            the \pkg{listings} package}
+% When loaded with the |extendedchar| option, \pkg{listings} will also redefine
+% 8-bit active characters (\pkg{inputenc}). Luckily, this simple redefinition
+% will make them expand to their original definition, so that they could be used
+% in the configuration.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+      \let\lst@ProcessLetter\@empty
+    }%
+  }%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\changes{v2.0}{2005/12/21}{(beta:3) compatibility with \pkg{soul}: register \cs{textls} and \cs{lsstyle}}
+% Of course, using both \pkg{soul}'s and \microtype's letterspacing mechanisms
+% at the same time doesn't make much sense. But \pkg{soul} can do more, \eg,
+% underlining. The optional argument to \cs{textls} may not be used.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%</package>
+%<plain>  \MT@requires@latex2{
+  \MT@with@package@T{soul}{%
+    \soulregister\lsstyle 0%
+    \soulregister\textls  1%
+  }%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\changes{v2.3a}{2008/01/06}{fix test for \pkg{soul} under plain \TeX}
+% Under plain \TeX, \pkg{soul} doesn't register itself the \LaTeX\ way, hence
+% we have to use a different test in this case.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*plain>
+  }{\ifx\SOUL@\@undefined\else
+      \soulregister\lsstyle 0%
+      \soulregister\textls  1%
+    \fi}%
+%</plain>
+%<*package>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\changes{v2.1}{2007/01/15}{compatibility with \pkg{pinyin}: disable \microtype\ in \cmd\py@macron\
+%                           (reported by \contributor Sven Naumann <svenau\at gmx.net>)}
+%                                                 ^^A MID: <87d55hxxdd.fsf@linux.site>
+% Compatibility with the \pkg{pinyin} package (from \pkg{CJK}): disable
+% \microtype\ in \cmd\py@macron, which loads a different font for the accent.
+% In older versions of \pkg{pinyin} (pre-4.6.0),
+%\changes{v2.3d}{2009/03/19}{fix \pkg{pinyin} compatibility check
+%                            (reported by \contributor Silas~S. Brown <ssb22\at cam.ac.uk>)}
+%                                                            ^^A private mail, 2009/03/19
+% \cmd\py@macron\ had only one argument.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \MT@with@package@T{pinyin}{%
+    \let\MT@orig@py@macron\py@macron
+    \@ifpackagelater{pinyin}{2005/08/11}{% 4.6.0
+      \def\py@macron#1#2{%
+        \let\pickup@font\MT@orig@pickupfont
+        \MT@orig@py@macron{#1}{#2}%
+        \let\pickup@font\MT@pickupfont}%
+    }{%
+      \def\py@macron#1{%
+        \let\pickup@font\MT@orig@pickupfont
+        \MT@orig@py@macron{#1}%
+        \let\pickup@font\MT@pickupfont}%
+    }%
+  }%
+%</package>
+}
+%<*package>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\changes{v1.6}{2005/01/19}{load a font if none is selected}
+% We need a font (the \pkg{minimal} class doesn't load one).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\expandafter\ifx\the\font\nullfont\normalfont\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%\subsection{Font setup}\label{ssec:font-setup}
+%
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@setupfont}
+% Setting up a font entails checking for each feature whether it should be
+% applied to the current font (\cs{MT@font}).
+% But first, we might have to disable stuff when used together with adventurous
+% packages.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@setupfont{\MT@setupfont@hook}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% This will use a copy of the font (allowing for expansion parameter variation
+% and the use of more than one set of protrusion factors for a font within one
+% paragraph).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\MT@requires@pdftex7
+  {\g@addto@macro\MT@setupfont\MT@copy@font}\relax
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The font properties must be extracted from \cs{MT@font}, since the current
+% value of \cmd\f@encoding\ and friends may be wrong!
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\g@addto@macro\MT@setupfont{%
+  \MT@exp@two@c\MT@split@name\string\MT@font/\@nil
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Try to find a configuration file for the current font family.
+%\changes{v1.2}{2004/09/29}{also search for alias font file}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \MT@exp@one@n\MT@find@file\MT@family
+  \ifx\MT@familyalias\@empty \else
+    \MT@exp@one@n\MT@find@file\MT@familyalias\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\changes{v1.2}{2004/09/26}{fix: call \cmd\@@enc@update\ if necessary}
+% We have to make sure that \cmd\cf@encoding\ expands to the correct value (for
+% later, in \cs{MT@get@slot}), which isn't the case when \cmd\selectfont\
+% chooses a new encoding (this would be done a second later in
+% \cmd\selectfont, anyway -- three lines, to be exact).
+% (I think, I do not need this anymore -- however, I'm too afraid to remove it.
+% \dots\ Oops, I did it. Let's see whether anybody complains.)
+%\changes{v2.2}{2007/04/15}{don't call \cmd\@@enc@update\ anymore}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+% \ifx\f@encoding\cf@encoding\else\@@enc@update\fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Tracking has to come first, since it means actually loading a different font.
+%\changes{v2.2}{2007/04/15}{only add features that are available with the respective \pdftex}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\MT@requires@pdftex6
+  {\g@addto@macro\MT@setupfont\MT@tracking}\relax
+\g@addto@macro\MT@setupfont{%
+  \MT@check@font
+  \ifMT@inlist@
+%<debug>\MT@show@pdfannot2%
+  \else
+    \MT@vinfo{Setting up font `\MT@@font'\on@line}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Now we can begin setting up the font for all features that the current
+% \pdftex\ provides. The following commands are \cmd\let\ to \cmd\relax\ if the
+% respective feature is disabled via package options.
+%
+% For versions older than 1.20, protrusion has to be set up first, beginning
+% with 1.20, the order doesn't matter.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \MT@protrusion
+  \MT@expansion
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Interword spacing and kerning (\pdftex\ 1.40).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\MT@requires@pdftex6
+  {\g@addto@macro\MT@setupfont{\MT@spacing\MT@kerning}}\relax
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Disable ligatures (\pdftex\ 1.30).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\MT@requires@pdftex5
+  {\g@addto@macro\MT@setupfont\MT@noligatures}\relax
+\g@addto@macro\MT@setupfont{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Debugging.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<debug>\MT@show@pdfannot1%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Finally, register the font so that we don't set it up anew each time.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \MT@register@font
+  \fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@copy@font}
+%\changes{v2.2}{2007/07/03}{optionally work on copies of fonts}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@copy@font@}
+% The new (1.40.4) \cmd\pdfcopyfont\ command allows to expand a font with
+% different parameters, or to use more than one set of protrusion factors for a
+% given font within one paragraph. It will be used when we find a context for
+% \cs{SetProtrusion} or \cs{SetExpansion} in the preamble, or when the package
+% has been loaded with the \opt{copyfonts} option.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\MT@copy@font\relax
+\MT@requires@pdftex7{
+\def\MT@copy@font@{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@font@copy}
+% For every new protrusion and expansion contexts, we create a new copy.
+%\changes{v2.3b}{2008/04/15}{enable font copies also with protrusion contexts
+%                            (reported by \contributor Nathan Rosenblum <nater\at cs.wisc.edu>)}
+%                                                               ^^A private mail, 2008/04/14
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \xdef\MT@font@copy{\csname\MT@@font/\MT@pr@context/\MT@ex@context\endcsname}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@font@orig}
+% \pdftex\ doesn't allow to copy a font that has already been copied and
+% expanded\slash letterspaced. Hence, we have to get the original.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \expandafter\ifx\MT@font@copy\relax
+    \edef\MT@font@orig{\csname\expandafter\string\font@name @orig\endcsname}%
+    \expandafter\ifx\MT@font@orig\relax
+      \MT@exp@two@c\MT@glet\MT@font@orig\font@name
+    \else
+      \MT@exp@two@c\let\font@name\MT@font@orig
+    \fi
+    \global\MT@exp@two@c\pdfcopyfont\MT@font@copy\font@name
+%<debug>\MT@dinfo1{creating new copy: \MT@font@copy}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+% Since it's a new font, we have to remove it from the context lists.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \MT@map@clist@c\MT@active@features{%
+      \MT@exp@cs\ifx{MT@\@nameuse{MT@abbr@##1}}\relax\else
+        \def\@tempa{##1}%
+        \MT@exp@cs\MT@map@tlist@c{MT@##1@doc@contexts}\MT@rem@from@list
+      \fi
+    }%
+  \fi
+  \MT@exp@two@c\let\MT@font\MT@font@copy
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% We only need the font identifier for letterspacing.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \let\font@name\MT@font@copy
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% But we have to properly substitute the font after we're done.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \aftergroup\let\aftergroup\font@name\aftergroup\MT@font@copy
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@rem@from@list}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@rem@from@list#1{%
+  \MT@exp@cs\ifx{MT@\@tempa @#1font@list}\relax\else
+    \expandafter\MT@exp@one@n\expandafter\MT@rem@from@clist\expandafter
+       \MT@font \csname MT@\@tempa @#1font@list\endcsname
+  \fi
+}
+}\relax
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\ifpdf\phantomsection\fi\label{exp-hack}
+%\paragraph{Here's the promised dirty trick}
+% for users of older \pdftex\ versions, which works around the problem that the
+% use of the same font with different expansion parameters is prohibited. If
+% you do not want to create a clone of the font setup (this would require
+% duplicating the \file{tfm}/\file{vf} files under a new name, and writing new
+% \file{fd} files and \file{map} entries), you can load a minimally larger font
+% for the paragraph in question. E.\,g., for a document typeset in 10\,pt:
+%\begin{verbatim}[gobble=2,morekeywords={[0]{\expandpar}}]
+% \SetExpansion
+%    [ stretch = 30,
+%      shrink  = 60,
+%      step    =  5 ]
+%    { encoding = *,
+%      size = 10.001 }
+%    { }
+% \newcommand{\expandpar}[1]{{%
+%    \fontsize{10.001}{\baselineskip}\selectfont #1\par}}
+% % ...
+% \expandpar{This paragraph contains an `unnecessary' widow.}
+%\end{verbatim}
+% Note that the \cmd\expandpar\ command can only be applied to complete
+% paragraphs. If you are using Computer Modern Roman, you have to load the
+% \pkg{fix-cm} package to be able to select fonts in arbitrary sizes. Finally,
+% the reason I suggest to use a larger font, and not a smaller one, is to
+% prevent a different design size being selected.
+%
+%\bigskip
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@split@name}
+%\changes{v1.7}{2005/02/27}{don't define \cs{MT@encoding} \&c. \cmd\global ly}
+%\changes{v2.0}{2006/12/19}{adjust to possible letterspacing}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@encoding}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@family}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@series}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@shape}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@size}
+% Split up the font name (\meta{\#6} may be a protrusion\slash expansion
+% context and/or a letterspacing amount). ^^A really?
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@split@name#1/#2/#3/#4/#5/#6\@nil{%
+  \def\MT@encoding{#1}%
+  \def\MT@family  {#2}%
+  \def\MT@series  {#3}%
+  \def\MT@shape   {#4}%
+  \def\MT@size    {#5}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@familyalias}
+% Alias family?
+%\changes{v1.2}{2004/09/29}{define alias font name as an alternative, not
+%                          as a replacement}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \MT@ifdefined@n@TF{MT@\MT@family @alias}%
+    {\MT@let@cn\MT@familyalias{MT@\MT@family @alias}}%
+    {\let\MT@familyalias\@empty}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\ifMT@do}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@feat}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@maybe@do}
+% We check all features of the current font against the lists of the currently
+% active font set, and set \cs{ifMT@do} accordingly.
+%\changes{v1.2}{2004/09/29}{also check for alias font name}
+%\changes{v1.9}{2005/09/28}{redone}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\ifMT@do
+\def\MT@maybe@do#1{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% (but only if the feature isn't globally set to false)
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \csname ifMT@\csname MT@abbr@#1\endcsname\endcsname
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Begin with setting micro-typography to true for this font. The
+% \cs{MT@checklist@...} tests will set it to false if the property is not in
+% the list. The first non-empty list that does not contain a match will stop us
+% (except for |font|).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \MT@dotrue
+    \edef\@tempa{\csname MT@#1@setname\endcsname}%
+    \MT@map@clist@n{font,encoding,family,series,shape,size}{%
+      \MT@ifdefined@n@TF{MT@checklist@##1}%
+        {\csname MT@checklist@##1\endcsname}%
+        {\MT@checklist@{##1}}%
+      {#1}%
+    }%
+  \else
+    \MT@dofalse
+  \fi
+  \ifMT@do
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \cs{MT@feat} stores the current feature.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \def\MT@feat{#1}%
+    \csname MT@set@#1@codes\endcsname
+  \else
+    \MT@vinfo{... No \@nameuse{MT@abbr@#1}}%
+  \fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@dinfo@list}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<debug>\def\MT@dinfo@list#1#2#3{\MT@dinfo@nl{1}{\@nameuse{MT@abbr@#1}: #2
+%<debug>  \ifx\\#3\\list empty\else `\@nameuse{MT@#2}' #3 list\fi}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@checklist@}
+% The generic test (\meta{\#1} is the axis, \meta{\#2} the feature, \cmd\@tempa\
+% contains the set name).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@checklist@#1#2{%
+%<!debug>  \MT@ifdefined@n@T
+%<debug>  \MT@ifdefined@n@TF
+      {MT@#2list@#1@\@tempa}{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Begin a (masqueraded) \cmd\expandafter\ orgy to test whether the font
+% attribute is in the list.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \expandafter\MT@exp@one@n\expandafter\MT@in@clist
+      \csname MT@#1\expandafter\endcsname
+      \csname MT@#2list@#1@\@tempa\endcsname
+    \ifMT@inlist@
+%<debug>\MT@dinfo@list{#2}{#1}{in}%
+      \MT@dotrue
+    \else
+%<debug>\MT@dinfo@list{#2}{#1}{not in}%
+      \MT@dofalse
+      \expandafter\MT@clist@break
+    \fi
+  }%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% If no limitations have been specified, \ie, the list for a font attribute
+% has not been defined at all, the font should be set up.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<debug>  {\MT@dinfo@list{#2}{#1}{}}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@checklist@family}
+% Also test for the alias font, if the original font is not in the list.
+%\changes{v1.4b}{2004/11/22}{fix: don't try alias family name if encoding failed}
+%\changes{v1.9}{2005/07/12}{fix: add two missing \cmd\expandafter s}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@checklist@family#1{%
+%<!debug>  \MT@ifdefined@n@T
+%<debug>  \MT@ifdefined@n@TF
+      {MT@#1list@family@\@tempa}{%
+    \MT@exp@two@n\MT@in@clist
+        \MT@family{\csname MT@#1list@family@\@tempa\endcsname}%
+    \ifMT@inlist@
+%<debug>\MT@dinfo@list{#1}{family}{in}%
+      \MT@dotrue
+    \else
+%<debug>\MT@dinfo@list{#1}{family}{not in}%
+      \MT@dofalse
+      \ifx\MT@familyalias\@empty \else
+        \MT@exp@two@n\MT@in@clist
+            \MT@familyalias{\csname MT@#1list@family@\@tempa\endcsname}%
+        \ifMT@inlist@
+%<debug>  \MT@dinfo@list{#1}{family alias}{in}%
+          \MT@dotrue
+%<debug>\else\MT@dinfo@list{#1}{family alias}{not in}%
+        \fi
+      \fi
+    \fi
+    \ifMT@do \else
+      \expandafter\MT@clist@break
+    \fi
+  }%
+%<debug>  {\MT@dinfo@list{#1}{family}{}}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@checklist@size}
+% Test whether font size is in list of size ranges.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@checklist@size#1{%
+%<!debug>  \MT@ifdefined@n@T
+%<debug>  \MT@ifdefined@n@TF
+      {MT@#1list@size@\@tempa}{%
+    \MT@exp@cs\MT@in@rlist{MT@#1list@size@\@tempa}%
+    \ifMT@inlist@
+%<debug>\MT@dinfo@list{#1}{size}{in}%
+      \MT@dotrue
+    \else
+%<debug>\MT@dinfo@list{#1}{size}{not in}%
+      \MT@dofalse
+      \expandafter\MT@clist@break
+    \fi
+  }%
+%<debug>  {\MT@dinfo@list{#1}{size}{}}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@checklist@font}
+% If the font matches, we skip the rest of the test.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@checklist@font#1{%
+%<!debug>  \MT@ifdefined@n@T
+%<debug>  \MT@ifdefined@n@TF
+      {MT@#1list@font@\@tempa}{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Since \cs{MT@font} may be appended with context and/or letterspacing specs,
+% we construct the name from the font characteristics.
+%\changes{v2.2}{2007/07/03}{fix: construct font name from characteristics}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \edef\@tempb{\MT@encoding/\MT@family/\MT@series/\MT@shape/\MT@size}%
+    \expandafter\MT@exp@one@n\expandafter\MT@in@clist\expandafter
+      \@tempb \csname MT@#1list@font@\@tempa\endcsname
+    \ifMT@inlist@
+%<debug>\MT@dinfo@list{#1}{font}{in}%
+      \expandafter\MT@clist@break
+    \else
+%<debug>\MT@dinfo@list{#1}{font}{not in}%
+      \MT@dofalse
+    \fi
+  }%
+%<debug>  {\MT@dinfo@list{#1}{font}{}}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%
+%\subsubsection{Protrusion}
+%
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@protrusion}
+% Set up for protrusion?
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@protrusion{\MT@maybe@do{pr}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@set@pr@codes}
+% This macro is called by \cs{MT@setupfont}, and does all the work for setting
+% up a font for protrusion.
+%\changes{v1.5}{2004/12/10}{adjust protrusion factors before setting the inheriting
+%                           characters}
+%\changes{v1.6}{2004/12/18}{introduce \texttt{factor} option}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@set@pr@codes{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Check whether and if, which list should be applied to the current font.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \MT@if@list@exists{%
+    \MT@get@font@dimen@six{%
+      \MT@get@opt
+      \MT@reset@pr@codes
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Get the name of the inheritance list and parse it.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+      \MT@get@inh@list
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Set an input encoding?
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+      \MT@set@inputenc{c}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Load additional lists?
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+      \MT@load@list\MT@pr@c@name
+      \MT@set@listname
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Load the main list.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+      \MT@let@cn\@tempc{MT@pr@c@\MT@pr@c@name}%
+      \expandafter\MT@set@codes\@tempc,\relax,}%
+  }\MT@reset@pr@codes
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@get@font@dimen@six}
+%\changes{v1.8}{2005/05/03}{new macro: test whether \fontdim6 is defined}
+%\changes{v2.3e}{2009/08/31}{fix: gobbling settings with tracking failed
+%                            (reported by \contributor Leo <sdl.web\at gmail.com>)}
+%                                             ^^A MID: <m0vdk4g8t2.fsf@cam.ac.uk>
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@dimen@six}
+% If \fontdim6 is zero, character protrusion, spacing, kerning and tracking
+% won't work, and we can skip the settings (for example, the \pkg{dsfont} and
+% \pkg{fourier} fonts don't specify this dimension; this is probably a bug in
+% the fonts).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@get@font@dimen@six{%
+  \ifnum\fontdimen6\MT@font=\z@
+    \MT@warning@nl{%
+      Font `\MT@@font' does not specify its\MessageBreak
+      \@backslashchar fontdimen 6 (width of an `em')! Therefore,\MessageBreak
+      \@nameuse{MT@abbr@\MT@feat} will not work with this font}%
+    \expandafter\@gobble
+  \else
+    \edef\MT@dimen@six{\number\fontdimen6\MT@font}%
+    \expandafter\@firstofone
+  \fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@set@all@pr}
+%\changes{v2.2}{2007/06/16}{(et al.) allow empty values}
+% Set all protrusion codes of the font.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@set@all@pr#1#2{%
+%<debug>\MT@dinfo@nl{3}{-- lp/rp: setting all to #1/#2}%
+  \let\MT@temp\@empty
+  \MT@ifempty{#1}\relax{\g@addto@macro\MT@temp{\lpcode\MT@font\@tempcnta=#1\relax}}%
+  \MT@ifempty{#2}\relax{\g@addto@macro\MT@temp{\rpcode\MT@font\@tempcnta=#2\relax}}%
+  \MT@do@font\MT@temp
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@reset@pr@codes@}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@reset@pr@codes}
+% All protrusion codes are zero for new fonts. However, if we have to reload
+% the font due to different contexts, we have to reset them.
+% This command will be changed by \cs{microtypecontext} if necessary.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@reset@pr@codes@{\MT@set@all@pr\z@\z@}
+\let\MT@reset@pr@codes\relax
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@the@pr@code}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@the@pr@code@tr}
+%\changes{v2.2}{2007/04/05}{adjust protrusion of letterspaced fonts}
+% If the font is letterspaced, we have to add half the letterspacing amount to
+% the margin kerns. This will be activated in \cs{MT@set@tr@codes}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@the@pr@code{\@tempcntb}
+\MT@requires@pdftex6{
+  \def\MT@the@pr@code@tr{%
+    \numexpr\@tempcntb+\MT@letterspace@/2\relax
+  }
+}\relax
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@set@codes}
+%\changes{v2.3a}{2007/12/29}{generalised}
+% Split up the values and set the codes.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@set@codes#1,{%
+  \ifx\relax#1\@empty\else
+    \MT@split@codes #1==\relax
+    \expandafter\MT@set@codes
+  \fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@split@codes}
+%\changes{v1.1}{2004/09/13}{fix: allow zero and negative values}
+%\changes{v1.8}{2005/05/25}{get character width once only}
+% The \pkg{keyval} package would remove spaces here, which we needn't do since
+% \cs{SetProtrusion} ignores spaces in the protrusion list anyway.
+% \cs{MT@get@char@unit} may mean different things.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@split@codes#1=#2=#3\relax{%
+  \def\@tempa{#1}%
+  \ifx\@tempa\@empty \else
+    \MT@get@slot
+    \ifnum\MT@char > \m@ne
+      \MT@get@char@unit
+      \csname MT@\MT@feat @split@val\endcsname#2\relax
+    \fi
+  \fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@pr@split@val}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@pr@split@val#1,#2\relax{%
+  \def\@tempb{#1}%
+  \MT@ifempty\@tempb\relax{%
+    \MT@scale@to@em
+    \lpcode\MT@font\MT@char=\MT@the@pr@code
+%<debug>\MT@dinfo@nl{4}{;;; lp (\MT@char): \number\lpcode\MT@font\MT@char: [#1]}%
+  }%
+  \def\@tempb{#2}%
+  \MT@ifempty\@tempb\relax{%
+    \MT@scale@to@em
+    \rpcode\MT@font\MT@char=\MT@the@pr@code
+%<debug>\MT@dinfo@nl{4}{;;; rp (\MT@char): \number\rpcode\MT@font\MT@char: [#2]}%
+  }%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Now we can set the values for the inheriting characters. Their slot numbers
+% are saved in the macro |\MT@inh@|\meta{list name}|@|\meta{slot number}|@|.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \MT@ifdefined@c@T\MT@pr@inh@name{%
+    \MT@ifdefined@n@T{MT@inh@\MT@pr@inh@name @\MT@char @}{%
+      \MT@exp@cs\MT@map@tlist@c
+        {MT@inh@\MT@pr@inh@name @\MT@char @}%
+        \MT@set@pr@heirs
+    }%
+  }%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@scale@to@em}
+% Since \pdftex\ version 0.14h, we have to adjust the protrusion factors (\ie,
+% convert numbers from thousandths of character width to thousandths of an em
+% of the font). We have to do this \emph{before} setting the inheriting
+% characters, so that the latter inherit the absolute value, not the relative
+% one if they have a differing width (\eg, the `ff' ligature).
+%\changes{v1.5}{2004/12/10}{don't use \cmd\lpcode\ and \cmd\rpcode\ for the
+%                           calculation}
+% Unlike \file{protcode.tex} and \pkg{pdfcprot}, we do not calculate with
+% \cs{lpcode} resp. \cs{rpcode}, since this would disallow protrusion factors
+% larger than the character width (since \cs{[lr]pcode}'s limit is 1000). Now,
+% the maximum protrusion is 1\,em of the font.
+%
+% The unit is in \cs{MT@count}, the desired factor in \cmd\@tempb, and the
+% result will be returned in \cmd\@tempcntb.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\MT@requires@pdftex3{
+  \def\MT@scale@to@em{%
+    \@tempcntb=\MT@count\relax
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% For really huge fonts (100\,pt or so), an arithmetic overflow could occur
+% with vanilla \TeX. Using \etex, this can't happen, since the intermediate
+% value is 64\,bit, which could only be reached with a character width larger
+% than \cs{maxdimen}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \MT@scale\@tempcntb \@tempb \MT@dimen@six
+    \ifnum\@tempcntb=\z@ \else
+      \MT@scale@factor
+    \fi
+  }
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@get@charwd}
+% Get the width of the character. When using \etex, we can employ
+% \cmd\fontcharwd\ instead of building scratch boxes.
+%\changes{v1.6}{2005/01/19}{use \etex's \cmd\fontcharwd, if available}
+%\changes{v1.8}{2005/05/25}{warning for missing (resp. zero-width) characters}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \def\MT@get@charwd{%
+^^X    \MT@count=\fontcharwd\MT@font\MT@char\relax
+^^Q    \setbox\z@=\hbox{\MT@font \char\MT@char}%
+^^Q    \MT@count=\wd\z@
+    \ifnum\MT@count=\z@ \MT@info@missing@char \fi
+  }
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\changes{v2.2}{2007/04/05}{subtract letterspacing amount from width}
+% For letterspaced fonts, we have to subtract the letterspacing amount from the
+% characters' widths. The protrusion amounts will be adjusted in
+% \cs{MT@set@pr@codes}.
+% The letterspaced font is already loaded so that 1\,em = \fontdim6.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \MT@requires@pdftex6{
+    \g@addto@macro\MT@get@charwd{%
+      \MT@ifdefined@c@T\MT@letterspace@
+        {\advance\MT@count -\dimexpr\MT@letterspace@ sp *\dimexpr 1em/1000\relax}%
+    }
+  }\relax
+}{
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+% No adjustment with versions 0.14f and 0.14g.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \def\MT@scale@to@em{%
+    \MT@count=\@tempb\relax
+    \ifnum\MT@count=\z@ \else
+      \MT@scale@factor
+    \fi
+  }
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% We need this in \cs{MT@warn@code@too@large} (neutralised).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \def\MT@get@charwd{\MT@count=\MT@dimen@six}
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@get@font@dimen}
+% For the |space| unit.
+%\changes{v1.9d}{2006/02/13}{warning for zero fontdimen}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@get@font@dimen#1{%
+  \ifnum\fontdimen#1\MT@font=\z@
+    \MT@warning@nl{Font `\MT@@font' does not specify its\MessageBreak
+      \@backslashchar fontdimen #1 (it's zero)!\MessageBreak
+      You should use a different `unit' for \MT@curr@list@name}%
+  \else
+    \MT@count=\fontdimen#1\MT@font
+  \fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@info@missing@char}
+%\changes{v1.9a}{2005/11/17}{info instead of warning
+%                (after \contributor Michael Hoppe <mh\at michael-hoppe.de> reported that
+%                 the `fl' ligature is missing in Palatino <SC>)}
+%                 ^^A MID: <1h64d0x.16xsx9n1151dieN%mh@michael-hoppe.de>
+% Info about missing characters, or characters with zero width.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@info@missing@char{%
+  \MT@info@nl{Character `\the\MT@toks'
+^^X    \iffontchar\MT@font\MT@char
+      has a width of 0pt
+^^X    \else is missing\fi
+^^Q    \MessageBreak (it's probably missing)
+    \MessageBreak in font `\MT@@font'.\MessageBreak
+    Ignoring protrusion settings for this character}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@scale@factor}
+%\changes{v1.5}{2004/12/10}{warning for factors outside limits}
+%\changes{v1.9}{2005/09/28}{generalised}
+% Furthermore, we might have to multiply with a factor.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@scale@factor{%
+  \ifnum\csname MT@\MT@feat @factor@\endcsname=\@m \else
+    \expandafter\MT@scale\expandafter \@tempcntb
+      \csname MT@\MT@feat @factor@\endcsname \@m
+  \fi
+  \ifnum\@tempcntb>\csname MT@\MT@feat @max\endcsname\relax
+    \MT@exp@cs\MT@warn@code@too@large{MT@\MT@feat @max}%
+  \else
+    \ifnum\@tempcntb<\csname MT@\MT@feat @min\endcsname\relax
+      \MT@exp@cs\MT@warn@code@too@large{MT@\MT@feat @min}%
+    \fi
+  \fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@warn@code@too@large}
+% Type out a warning if a chosen protrusion factor is too large after the
+% conversion. As a special service, we also type out the maximum amount that
+% may be specified in the configuration.
+%\changes{v1.7}{2005/02/17}{new macro: type out maximum protrusion factor}
+%\changes{v1.9b}{2006/01/03}{fix calculation with present factor}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@warn@code@too@large#1{%
+  \@tempcnta=#1\relax
+  \ifnum\csname MT@\MT@feat @factor@\endcsname=\@m \else
+    \expandafter\MT@scale\expandafter\@tempcnta\expandafter
+      \@m \csname MT@\MT@feat @factor@\endcsname
+  \fi
+  \MT@scale\@tempcnta \MT@dimen@six \MT@count
+  \MT@warning@nl{The \@nameuse{MT@abbr@\MT@feat} code \@tempb\space
+    is too large for character\MessageBreak
+    `\the\MT@toks' in \MT@curr@list@name.\MessageBreak
+    Setting it to the maximum of \number\@tempcnta}%
+  \@tempcntb=#1\relax
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@get@opt}
+% The optional argument to the configuration commands (except for
+% \cs{SetExpansion}, which is being dealt with in \cs{MT@get@ex@opt}).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@get@opt{%
+  \MT@set@listname
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@pr@factor@}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@sp@factor@}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@kn@factor@}
+% Apply a factor?
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \MT@ifdefined@n@TF{MT@\MT@feat @c@\csname MT@\MT@feat @c@name\endcsname @factor}{%
+    \MT@let@nn{MT@\MT@feat @factor@}
+        {MT@\MT@feat @c@\csname MT@\MT@feat @c@name\endcsname @factor}%
+    \MT@vinfo{... : Multiplying \@nameuse{MT@abbr@\MT@feat} codes by
+                    \number\csname MT@\MT@feat @factor@\endcsname/1000}%
+  }{%
+    \MT@let@nn{MT@\MT@feat @factor@}{MT@\MT@feat @factor}%
+  }%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@pr@unit@}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@sp@unit@}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@kn@unit@}
+% The |unit| can only be evaluated here, since it might be font-specific.
+% If it's \cmd\@empty, it's relative to character widths, if it's \textminus1,
+% relative to space dimensions.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \MT@ifdefined@n@TF{MT@\MT@feat @c@\csname MT@\MT@feat @c@name\endcsname @unit}{%
+    \MT@let@nn{MT@\MT@feat @unit@}%
+        {MT@\MT@feat @c@\csname MT@\MT@feat @c@name\endcsname @unit}%
+    \MT@exp@cs\ifx{MT@\MT@feat @unit@}\@empty
+      \MT@vinfo{... : Setting \@nameuse{MT@abbr@\MT@feat} codes
+                      relative to character widths}%
+    \else
+      \MT@exp@cs\ifx{MT@\MT@feat @unit@}\m@ne
+        \MT@vinfo{... : Setting \@nameuse{MT@abbr@\MT@feat} codes
+                        relative to width of space}%
+      \fi
+    \fi
+  }{%
+    \MT@let@nn{MT@\MT@feat @unit@}{MT@\MT@feat @unit}%
+  }%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@get@space@unit}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@get@char@unit}
+% The codes are either relative to character widths, or to a fixed width.
+% For spacing and kerning lists, they may also be relative to the width of
+% the interword glue.
+% Only the setting from the top list will be taken into account.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \let\MT@get@char@unit\relax
+  \let\MT@get@space@unit\@gobble
+  \MT@exp@cs\ifx{MT@\MT@feat @unit@}\@empty
+    \let\MT@get@char@unit\MT@get@charwd
+  \else
+    \MT@exp@cs\ifx{MT@\MT@feat @unit@}\m@ne
+      \let\MT@get@space@unit\MT@get@font@dimen
+    \else
+      \MT@exp@cs\MT@get@unit{MT@\MT@feat @unit@}%
+    \fi
+  \fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+% Preset all characters? If so, we surely don't need to reset, too.
+%\changes{v1.9}{2005/10/08}{new key `\texttt{preset}' to set all characters to
+%                           the specified value before loading the lists}
+%\changes{v1.9d}{2006/02/13}{set list name before presetting}
+%\changes{v1.9d}{2006/02/18}{optimise: don't reset when \texttt{preset} option is set}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \MT@ifdefined@n@T{MT@\MT@feat @c@\csname MT@\MT@feat @c@name\endcsname @preset}{%
+    \csname MT@preset@\MT@feat\endcsname
+    \MT@let@nc{MT@reset@\MT@feat @codes}\relax
+  }%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@get@unit}
+%\changes{v1.8}{2005/04/14}{new macro: get unit for codes}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@get@unit@}
+% If |unit| contains an |em| or |ex|, we use the corresponding \cmd\fontdimen\
+% to obtain the real size. Simply converting the em into points might give a
+% wrong result, since the font probably isn't set up yet, so that these
+% dimensions haven't been updated, either.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@get@unit#1{%
+  \expandafter\MT@get@unit@#1 e!\@nil
+  \ifx\x\@empty\else\let#1\x\fi
+  \@defaultunits\@tempdima#1 pt\relax\@nnil
+  \ifdim\@tempdima=\z@
+    \MT@warning@nl{%
+      Cannot set \@nameuse{MT@abbr@\MT@feat} factors relative to zero\MessageBreak
+      width. Setting factors of list `\@nameuse{MT@\MT@feat @c@name}'\MessageBreak
+      relative to character widths instead}%
+    \let#1\@empty
+    \let\MT@get@char@unit\MT@get@charwd
+  \else
+    \MT@vinfo{... : Setting \@nameuse{MT@abbr@\MT@feat} factors relative
+                    to \the\@tempdima}%
+    \MT@count=\@tempdima\relax
+  \fi
+}
+\def\MT@get@unit@#1e#2#3\@nil{%
+  \ifx\\#3\\\let\x\@empty \else
+    \if m#2%
+      \edef\x{#1\fontdimen6\MT@font}%
+    \else
+      \if x#2%
+        \edef\x{#1\fontdimen5\MT@font}%
+      \fi
+    \fi
+  \fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@set@inputenc}
+% The configurations may be under the regime of an input encoding.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@set@inputenc#1{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@cat}
+% We remember the current category (|c| or |inh|), in case of warnings later.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \def\MT@cat{#1}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \edef\@tempa{MT@\MT@feat @#1@\csname MT@\MT@feat @#1@name\endcsname @inputenc}%
+  \MT@ifdefined@n@T\@tempa\MT@set@inputenc@
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@set@inputenc@}
+%\changes{v2.2}{2007/06/08}{only load \pkg{inputenc} files if necessary}
+% More recent versions of \pkg{inputenc} remember the current encoding, so that
+% we can test whether we really have to load the encoding file.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\MT@addto@setup{%
+  \@ifpackageloaded{inputenc}{%
+    \@ifpackagelater{inputenc}{2006/02/22}{%
+      \def\MT@set@inputenc@{%
+        \MT@ifstreq\inputencodingname{\csname\@tempa\endcsname}\relax
+          \MT@load@inputenc
+      }%
+    }{%
+      \let\MT@set@inputenc@\MT@load@inputenc
+    }%
+  }{%
+    \def\MT@set@inputenc@{%
+      \MT@warning@nl{Key `inputenc' used in \MT@curr@list@name, but the `inputenc'
+          \MessageBreak package isn't loaded. Ignoring input encoding}%
+    }%
+  }%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@load@inputenc}
+% Set up normal catcodes, since, \eg, \pkg{listings} would otherwise want to
+% actually typeset the \pkg{inputenc} file when it is being loaded inside a
+% listing.
+%\changes{v2.0}{2006/09/15}{sanitise catcodes before loading input encoding
+%                            (problem with \pkg{listings})}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@load@inputenc{%
+  \MT@cfg@catcodes
+%<debug>\MT@dinfo@nl{1}{loading input encoding: \@nameuse{\@tempa}}%
+  \inputencoding{\@nameuse{\@tempa}}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@set@pr@heirs}
+% Set the inheriting characters.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@set@pr@heirs#1{%
+  \lpcode\MT@font#1=\lpcode\MT@font\MT@char
+  \rpcode\MT@font#1=\rpcode\MT@font\MT@char
+%<debug>\MT@dinfo@nl{2}{-- heir of \MT@char: #1}%
+%<debug>\MT@dinfo@nl{4}{;;; lp/rp (#1): \number\lpcode\MT@font\MT@char/%
+%<debug>                                \number\rpcode\MT@font\MT@char}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@preset@pr}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@preset@pr@}
+% Preset characters. Presetting them relative to their widths is not allowed.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@preset@pr{%
+  \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\MT@preset@pr@
+    \csname MT@pr@c@\MT@pr@c@name @preset\endcsname\@nil
+}
+\def\MT@preset@pr@#1,#2\@nil{%
+  \ifx\MT@pr@unit@\@empty
+    \MT@warn@preset@towidth{pr}%
+    \let\MT@preset@aux\MT@preset@aux@factor
+  \else
+    \def\MT@preset@aux{\MT@preset@aux@space2}%
+  \fi
+  \MT@ifempty{#1}{\let\@tempa\@empty}{\MT@preset@aux{#1}\@tempa}%
+  \MT@ifempty{#2}{\let\@tempb\@empty}{\MT@preset@aux{#2}\@tempb}%
+  \MT@set@all@pr\@tempa\@tempb
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@preset@aux}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@preset@aux@factor}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@preset@aux@space}
+%\changes{v2.2}{2007/06/16}{generalised}
+% Auxiliary macro for presetting. Store value \meta{\#1} in macro \meta{\#2}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@preset@aux@factor#1#2{%
+  \@tempcntb=#1\relax
+  \MT@scale@factor
+  \edef#2{\number\@tempcntb}%
+}
+\def\MT@preset@aux@space#1#2#3{%
+  \def\@tempb{#2}%
+  \MT@get@space@unit#1%
+  \MT@scale@to@em
+  \edef#3{\number\@tempcntb}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@warn@preset@towidth}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@warn@preset@towidth#1{%
+  \MT@warning@nl{%
+    Cannot preset characters relative to their widths\MessageBreak
+    for \@nameuse{MT@abbr@#1} list `\@nameuse{MT@#1@c@name}'. Presetting them%
+    \MessageBreak relative to 1em instead}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%
+%\subsubsection{Expansion}
+%
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@expansion}
+% Set up for expansion?
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@expansion{\MT@maybe@do{ex}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@set@ex@codes@s}
+% Setting up font expansion is a bit different because of the \opt{selected} option.
+% There are two versions of this macro.
+%
+% If \opt{selected}|=true|, we only apply font expansion to those fonts for which a
+% list has been declared (\ie, like for protrusion).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@set@ex@codes@s{%
+  \MT@if@list@exists{%
+    \MT@get@ex@opt
+    \let\MT@get@char@unit\relax
+    \MT@reset@ef@codes
+    \MT@get@inh@list
+    \MT@set@inputenc{c}%
+    \MT@load@list\MT@ex@c@name
+    \MT@set@listname
+    \MT@let@cn\@tempc{MT@ex@c@\MT@ex@c@name}%
+    \expandafter\MT@set@codes\@tempc,\relax,%
+    \MT@expandfont
+  }\relax
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@set@ex@codes@n}
+% If, on the other hand, all characters should be expanded by the same amount,
+% we only take the first optional argument to \cs{SetExpansion} into account.
+%\begin{macro}{\ifMT@nonselected}
+% We need this boolean in \cs{MT@if@list@exists} so that no warning for missing
+% lists will be issued.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\ifMT@nonselected
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@set@ex@codes@n{%
+  \MT@nonselectedtrue
+  \MT@if@list@exists
+    \MT@get@ex@opt
+  {%
+    \let\MT@stretch@  \MT@stretch
+    \let\MT@shrink@   \MT@shrink
+    \let\MT@step@     \MT@step
+    \let\MT@auto@     \MT@auto
+    \let\MT@ex@factor@\MT@ex@factor
+  }%
+  \MT@reset@ef@codes
+  \MT@expandfont
+  \MT@nonselectedfalse
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@set@ex@codes}
+%\changes{v1.5}{2004/12/02}{allow non-selected font expansion}
+%\changes{v1.6}{2004/12/26}{introduce \texttt{factor} option}
+%\changes{v1.7}{2005/02/06}{two versions of this macro}
+% Default is non-selected. It can be changed in the package options.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\MT@set@ex@codes\MT@set@ex@codes@n
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@expandfont}
+% Expand the font.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@expandfont{%
+  \pdffontexpand\MT@font \MT@stretch@ \MT@shrink@ \MT@step@ \MT@auto@\relax
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@set@all@ex}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@reset@ef@codes@}
+% At first, all expansion factors for the characters will be set to 1000
+% (respectively the |factor| of this font).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@set@all@ex#1{%
+%<debug>\MT@dinfo@nl{3}{-- ex: setting all to \number#1}%
+  \MT@do@font{\efcode\MT@font\@tempcnta=#1\relax}%
+}
+\def\MT@reset@ef@codes@{\MT@set@all@ex\MT@ex@factor@}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@reset@ef@codes}
+% However, this is only necessary for versions prior to~1.20.
+%\changes{v1.6a}{2005/01/30}{only reset \cmd\efcode s for older \pdftex\ versions}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\MT@requires@pdftex4{
+  \def\MT@reset@ef@codes{%
+    \ifnum\MT@ex@factor@=\@m \else
+      \MT@reset@ef@codes@
+    \fi
+  }
+}{
+  \let\MT@reset@ef@codes\MT@reset@ef@codes@
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@ex@split@val}
+% There's only one number per character.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@ex@split@val#1\relax{%
+  \@tempcntb=#1\relax
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Take an optional factor into account.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \ifnum\MT@ex@factor@=\@m \else
+    \MT@scale\@tempcntb \MT@ex@factor@ \@m
+  \fi
+  \ifnum\@tempcntb > \MT@ex@max
+    \MT@warn@ex@too@large\MT@ex@max
+  \else
+    \ifnum\@tempcntb < \MT@ex@min
+      \MT@warn@ex@too@large\MT@ex@min
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  \efcode\MT@font\MT@char=\@tempcntb
+%<debug>\MT@dinfo@nl{4}{::: ef (\MT@char): \number\efcode\MT@font\MT@char: [#1]}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Heirs, heirs, I love thy heirs.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \MT@ifdefined@c@T\MT@ex@inh@name{%
+    \MT@ifdefined@n@T{MT@inh@\MT@ex@inh@name @\MT@char @}{%
+      \MT@exp@cs\MT@map@tlist@c{MT@inh@\MT@ex@inh@name @\MT@char @}\MT@set@ex@heirs
+    }%
+  }%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@warn@ex@too@large}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@warn@ex@too@large#1{%
+  \MT@warning@nl{Expansion factor \number\@tempcntb\space too large for
+    character\MessageBreak `\the\MT@toks' in \MT@curr@list@name.\MessageBreak
+    Setting it to the maximum of \number#1}%
+  \@tempcntb=#1\relax
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@get@ex@opt}
+%\changes{v1.9d}{2006/02/13}{fix: evaluate \texttt{preset}}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@ex@factor@}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@stretch@}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@shrink@}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@step@}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@auto@}
+% Apply different values to this font?
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@get@ex@opt{%
+  \MT@set@listname
+  \MT@ifdefined@n@TF{MT@ex@c@\MT@ex@c@name @factor}{%
+    \MT@let@cn\MT@ex@factor@{MT@ex@c@\MT@ex@c@name @factor}%
+    \MT@vinfo{... : Multiplying expansion factors by \number\MT@ex@factor@/1000}%
+  }{%
+    \let\MT@ex@factor@\MT@ex@factor
+  }%
+  \MT@get@ex@opt@{stretch}{Setting stretch limit to \number\MT@stretch@}%
+  \MT@get@ex@opt@{shrink} {Setting shrink limit to \number\MT@shrink@}%
+  \MT@get@ex@opt@{step}   {Setting expansion step to \number\MT@step@}%
+  \def\@tempa{autoexpand}%
+  \MT@get@ex@opt@{auto}{\ifx\@tempa\MT@auto@ En\else Dis\fi abling automatic expansion}%
+  \MT@ifdefined@n@T{MT@ex@c@\MT@ex@c@name @preset}{%
+    \MT@preset@ex
+    \let\MT@reset@ef@codes\relax
+  }%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@get@ex@opt@}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@get@ex@opt@#1#2{%
+  \MT@ifdefined@n@TF{MT@ex@c@\MT@ex@c@name @#1}{%
+    \MT@let@nn{MT@#1@}{MT@ex@c@\MT@ex@c@name @#1}%
+    \MT@vinfo{... : #2}%
+  }{%
+    \MT@let@nn{MT@#1@}{MT@#1}%
+  }%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@set@ex@heirs}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@set@ex@heirs#1{%
+  \efcode\MT@font#1=\efcode\MT@font\MT@char
+%<debug>\MT@dinfo@nl{2}{-- heir of \MT@char: #1}%
+%<debug>\MT@dinfo@nl{4}{::: ef (#1) \number\efcode\MT@font\MT@char}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@preset@ex}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@preset@ex{%
+  \@tempcntb=\csname MT@ex@c@\MT@ex@c@name @preset\endcsname\relax
+  \MT@scale@factor
+  \MT@set@all@ex\@tempcntb
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%
+%\subsubsection{Interword spacing (glue)}
+%
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@spacing}
+% Adjustment of interword spacing?
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\MT@requires@pdftex6{
+\def\MT@spacing{\MT@maybe@do{sp}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@set@sp@codes}
+% This is all the same.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@set@sp@codes{%
+  \MT@if@list@exists{%
+    \MT@get@font@dimen@six{%
+      \MT@get@opt
+      \MT@reset@sp@codes
+      \MT@get@inh@list
+      \MT@set@inputenc{c}%
+      \MT@load@list\MT@sp@c@name
+      \MT@set@listname
+      \MT@let@cn\@tempc{MT@sp@c@\MT@sp@c@name}%
+      \expandafter\MT@set@codes\@tempc,\relax,}%
+  }\MT@reset@sp@codes
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@sp@split@val}
+% If |unit=space|, \cs{MT@get@space@unit} will be defined to fetch the
+% corresponding fontdimen (2 for the first, 3 for the second and 4 for the
+% third argument).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@sp@split@val#1,#2,#3\relax{%
+  \def\@tempb{#1}%
+  \MT@ifempty\@tempb\relax{%
+    \MT@get@space@unit2%
+    \MT@scale@to@em
+    \knbscode\MT@font\MT@char=\@tempcntb
+%<debug>\MT@dinfo@nl{4}{;;; knbs (\MT@char): \number\knbscode\MT@font\MT@char: [#1]}%
+  }%
+  \def\@tempb{#2}%
+  \MT@ifempty\@tempb\relax{%
+    \MT@get@space@unit3%
+    \MT@scale@to@em
+    \stbscode\MT@font\MT@char=\@tempcntb
+%<debug>\MT@dinfo@nl{4}{;;; stbs (\MT@char): \number\stbscode\MT@font\MT@char: [#2]}%
+  }%
+  \def\@tempb{#3}%
+  \MT@ifempty\@tempb\relax{%
+    \MT@get@space@unit4%
+    \MT@scale@to@em
+    \shbscode\MT@font\MT@char=\@tempcntb
+%<debug>\MT@dinfo@nl{4}{;;; shbs (\MT@char): \number\shbscode\MT@font\MT@char: [#3]}%
+  }%
+  \MT@ifdefined@c@T\MT@sp@inh@name{%
+    \MT@ifdefined@n@T{MT@inh@\MT@sp@inh@name @\MT@char @}{%
+      \MT@exp@cs\MT@map@tlist@c{MT@inh@\MT@sp@inh@name @\MT@char @}\MT@set@sp@heirs
+    }%
+  }%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@set@sp@heirs}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@set@sp@heirs#1{%
+  \knbscode\MT@font#1=\knbscode\MT@font\MT@char
+  \stbscode\MT@font#1=\stbscode\MT@font\MT@char
+  \shbscode\MT@font#1=\shbscode\MT@font\MT@char
+%<debug>\MT@dinfo@nl{2}{-- heir of \MT@char: #1}%
+%<debug>\MT@dinfo@nl{4}{;;; knbs/stbs/shbs (#1): \number\knbscode\MT@font\MT@char/%
+%<debug>        \number\stbscode\MT@font\MT@char/\number\shbscode\MT@font\MT@char}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@set@all@sp}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@reset@sp@codes}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@reset@sp@codes@}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@set@all@sp#1#2#3{%
+%<debug>\MT@dinfo@nl{3}{-- knbs/stbs/shbs: setting all to #1/#2/#3}%
+  \let\MT@temp\@empty
+  \MT@ifempty{#1}\relax{\g@addto@macro\MT@temp{\knbscode\MT@font\@tempcnta=#1\relax}}%
+  \MT@ifempty{#2}\relax{\g@addto@macro\MT@temp{\stbscode\MT@font\@tempcnta=#2\relax}}%
+  \MT@ifempty{#3}\relax{\g@addto@macro\MT@temp{\shbscode\MT@font\@tempcnta=#3\relax}}%
+  \MT@do@font\MT@temp
+}
+\def\MT@reset@sp@codes@{\MT@set@all@sp\z@\z@\z@}
+\let\MT@reset@sp@codes\relax
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@preset@sp}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@preset@sp@}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@preset@sp{%
+  \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\MT@preset@sp@
+    \csname MT@sp@c@\MT@sp@c@name @preset\endcsname\@nil
+}
+\def\MT@preset@sp@#1,#2,#3\@nil{%
+  \ifx\MT@sp@unit@\@empty
+    \MT@warn@preset@towidth{sp}%
+    \MT@ifempty{#1}{\let\@tempa\@empty}{\MT@preset@aux@factor{#1}\@tempa}%
+    \MT@ifempty{#2}{\let\@tempc\@empty}{\MT@preset@aux@factor{#2}\@tempc}%
+    \MT@ifempty{#3}{\let\@tempb\@empty}{\MT@preset@aux@factor{#3}\@tempb}%
+  \else
+    \MT@ifempty{#1}{\let\@tempa\@empty}{\MT@preset@aux@space2{#1}\@tempa}%
+    \MT@ifempty{#2}{\let\@tempc\@empty}{\MT@preset@aux@space3{#2}\@tempc}%
+    \MT@ifempty{#3}{\let\@tempb\@empty}{\MT@preset@aux@space4{#3}\@tempb}%
+  \fi
+  \MT@set@all@sp\@tempa\@tempc\@tempb
+}
+}\relax
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%
+%\subsubsection{Additional kerning}
+%
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@kerning}
+% Again, only check for additional kerning for new versions of \pdftex.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\MT@requires@pdftex6{
+\def\MT@kerning{\MT@maybe@do{kn}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@set@kn@codes}
+% It's getting boring, I know.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@set@kn@codes{%
+  \MT@if@list@exists{%
+    \MT@get@font@dimen@six{%
+      \MT@get@opt
+      \MT@reset@kn@codes
+      \MT@get@inh@list
+      \MT@set@inputenc{c}%
+      \MT@load@list\MT@kn@c@name
+      \MT@set@listname
+      \MT@let@cn\@tempc{MT@kn@c@\MT@kn@c@name}%
+      \expandafter\MT@set@codes\@tempc,\relax,}%
+  }\MT@reset@kn@codes
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@kn@split@val}
+% Again, the unit may be measured in the space dimension; this time only
+% \fontdim2.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@kn@split@val#1,#2\relax{%
+  \def\@tempb{#1}%
+  \MT@ifempty\@tempb\relax{%
+    \MT@get@space@unit2%
+    \MT@scale@to@em
+    \knbccode\MT@font\MT@char=\@tempcntb
+%<debug>\MT@dinfo@nl{4}{;;; knbc (\MT@char): \number\knbccode\MT@font\MT@char: [#1]}%
+  }%
+  \def\@tempb{#2}%
+  \MT@ifempty\@tempb\relax{%
+    \MT@get@space@unit2%
+    \MT@scale@to@em
+    \knaccode\MT@font\MT@char=\@tempcntb
+%<debug>\MT@dinfo@nl{4}{;;; knac (\MT@char): \number\knaccode\MT@font\MT@char: [#2]}%
+  }%
+  \MT@ifdefined@c@T\MT@kn@inh@name{%
+    \MT@ifdefined@n@T{MT@inh@\MT@kn@inh@name @\MT@char @}{%
+      \MT@exp@cs\MT@map@tlist@c{MT@inh@\MT@kn@inh@name @\MT@char @}\MT@set@kn@heirs
+    }%
+  }%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@set@kn@heirs}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@set@kn@heirs#1{%
+  \knbccode\MT@font#1=\knbccode\MT@font\MT@char
+  \knaccode\MT@font#1=\knaccode\MT@font\MT@char
+%<debug>\MT@dinfo@nl{2}{-- heir of \MT@char: #1}%
+%<debug>\MT@dinfo@nl{4}{;;; knbc (#1): \number\knbccode\MT@font\MT@char/%
+%<debug>                               \number\knaccode\MT@font\MT@char}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@set@all@kn}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@reset@kn@codes}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@reset@kn@codes@}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@set@all@kn#1#2{%
+%<debug>\MT@dinfo@nl{3}{-- knac/knbc: setting all to #1/#2}%
+  \let\MT@temp\@empty
+  \MT@ifempty{#1}\relax{\g@addto@macro\MT@temp{\knbccode\MT@font\@tempcnta=#1\relax}}%
+  \MT@ifempty{#2}\relax{\g@addto@macro\MT@temp{\knaccode\MT@font\@tempcnta=#2\relax}}%
+  \MT@do@font\MT@temp
+}
+\def\MT@reset@kn@codes@{\MT@set@all@kn\z@\z@}
+\let\MT@reset@kn@codes\relax
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@preset@kn}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@preset@kn@}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@preset@kn{%
+  \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\MT@preset@kn@
+    \csname MT@kn@c@\MT@kn@c@name @preset\endcsname\@nil
+}
+\def\MT@preset@kn@#1,#2\@nil{%
+  \ifx\MT@kn@unit@\@empty
+    \MT@warn@preset@towidth{kn}%
+    \let\MT@preset@aux\MT@preset@aux@factor
+  \else
+    \def\MT@preset@aux{\MT@preset@aux@space2}%
+  \fi
+  \MT@ifempty{#1}{\let\@tempa\@empty}{\MT@preset@aux{#1}\@tempa}%
+  \MT@ifempty{#2}{\let\@tempb\@empty}{\MT@preset@aux{#2}\@tempb}%
+  \MT@set@all@kn\@tempa\@tempb
+}
+}\relax
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%
+%\subsubsection{\lsstyle Tracking}
+%
+% This only works with \pdftex\ 1.40.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\MT@requires@pdftex6{
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@tracking}
+%\changes{v2.2}{2007/02/23}{remember fonts that shouldn't be letterspaced}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@tracking@}
+%\changes{v2.2}{2007/06/16}{fix: tracking couldn't be re-enabled}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@tr@font@list}
+% We only check whether a font should not be letterspaced at all, not whether
+% we've already done that (because we have to do it again).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\MT@tr@font@list\@empty
+\def\MT@tracking@{%
+  \MT@exp@one@n\MT@in@clist\MT@font\MT@tr@font@list
+  \ifMT@inlist@\else
+    \MT@maybe@do{tr}%
+    \ifMT@do\else
+      \xdef\MT@tr@font@list{\MT@tr@font@list\MT@font,}%
+    \fi
+  \fi
+}
+%</package>
+\let\MT@tracking
+%<package>  \MT@tracking@
+%<letterspace>  \relax
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@set@tr@codes}
+% The tracking amount is determined by the optional argument to \cs{textls},
+% settings from \cs{SetTracking}, or the global \opt{letterspace} option, in
+% this order.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@set@tr@codes{%
+%<*package>
+  \MT@vinfo{Tracking font `\MT@@font'\on@line}%
+  \MT@get@font@dimen@six{%
+  \MT@if@list@exists
+    \MT@get@tr@opt
+    \relax
+%</package>
+  \MT@ifdefined@c@TF\MT@letterspace@\relax{\let\MT@letterspace@\MT@letterspace}%
+  \ifnum\MT@letterspace@=\z@
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\changes{v2.3d}{2009/03/05}{allow zero tracking}
+% Zero tracking requires special treatment.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \MT@set@tr@zero
+  \else
+%<package>    \MT@vinfo{... Tracking by \number\MT@letterspace@}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Letterspacing only works in <PDF> mode.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \MT@warn@tracking@DVI
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@lsfont}
+% The letterspaced font instances are saved in macros
+% |\|\meta{font name}|/|\meta{letterspacing amount}|ls|.
+%
+%\changes{v2.2}{2007/03/07}{use \cmd\font@name, not \cs{MT@font}}
+% In contrast to \cs{MT@font}, which may reflect the font characteristics more
+% accurately (taking substitutions into account), \cmd\font@name\ is guaranteed
+% to correspond to an actual font identifier.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \xdef\MT@lsfont{\csname\expandafter\string\font@name
+                           /\number\MT@letterspace@ ls\endcsname}%
+    \expandafter\ifx\MT@lsfont\relax
+%<debug>\MT@dinfo@nl{1}{... new letterspacing instance}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+% In case of nested letterspacing with different amounts, we have to extract
+% the base font again.
+%\todo{outer spacing/kerning for nested letterspaced text}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+      \MT@get@ls@basefont
+      \global\expandafter\letterspacefont\MT@lsfont\font@name\MT@letterspace@
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\changes{v2.2}{2007/06/16}{possibility to customise interword spacing}
+% Scale interword spacing (not configurable in \letterspace).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*package>
+      \MT@ifdefined@c@TF\MT@tr@ispace
+        {\let\@tempa\MT@tr@ispace}%
+        {\edef\@tempa{\MT@letterspace@*,,}}%
+      \MT@ifdefined@c@TF\MT@tr@ospace
+        {\edef\@tempa{\@tempa,\MT@tr@ospace}}%
+        {\edef\@tempa{\@tempa,,,}}%
+      \expandafter\MT@tr@set@space\@tempa,%
+%</package>
+%<*letterspace>
+      % spacing = {<letterspace amount>*,,}
+      \fontdimen2\MT@lsfont=\dimexpr\numexpr 1000+\MT@letterspace@\relax sp
+                                            * \fontdimen2\MT@lsfont/1000\relax
+%</letterspace>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\changes{v2.3}{2007/11/03}{possibility to customise outer kerning
+%                           (suggested by \contributor Stephan Hennig <stephanhennig\at arcor.de>)}
+%                            ^^A MID: <46aa1cbb$0$31620$9b4e6d93@newsspool3.arcor-online.net>
+% Adjust outer kerning (\microtype\ only).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*package>
+      \MT@ifdefined@c@TF\MT@tr@okern{\let\@tempa\MT@tr@okern}{\def\@tempa{*,*}}%
+      \expandafter\MT@tr@set@okern\@tempa,%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\changes{v2.2}{2007/02/23}{disable ligatures in letterspaced fonts manually
+%                           (due to change in \pdftex\ 1.40.4)}
+% Disable ligatures (not configurable in \letterspace).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+      \MT@ifdefined@c@T\MT@tr@ligatures\MT@tr@noligatures
+%</package>
+%<*letterspace>
+      % no ligatures = {f}
+      \tagcode\MT@lsfont`f=\m@ne
+%</letterspace>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Adjust protrusion values now, and maybe later (in \cs{MT@pr@split@val}).
+%\changes{v2.3}{2007/07/27}{also adjust tracking if protrusion is not enabled,
+%                           and even for \letterspace\
+%                           (reported by \contributor Stephan Hennig <stephanhennig\at arcor.de>)}
+%                               ^^A MID: <46a9c6c6$0$21005$9b4e6d93@newsspool1.arcor-online.net>
+%\changes{v2.3b}{2008/05/12}{fix: protrusion adjustment only for new fonts
+%                            (reported by \contributor Wolfram Schaalo <schaalo\at gmx.net>)}
+%                                                              ^^A private mail, 2008/05/12
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<debug>\MT@dinfo@nl{2}{... compensating for tracking (\number\MT@letterspace@)}%
+      \MT@do@font{\lpcode\MT@lsfont\@tempcnta=\numexpr\MT@letterspace@/2\relax
+                  \rpcode\MT@lsfont\@tempcnta=\numexpr\MT@letterspace@/2\relax}%
+%<package>      \let\MT@the@pr@code\MT@the@pr@code@tr
+    \fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Finally, let the letterspaced font propagate.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \aftergroup\MT@set@lsfont
+%<package>    \let\MT@font\MT@lsfont
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@set@curr@ls}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@curr@ls}
+% We need to remember the current letterspacing amount (for \cs{lslig}).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \xdef\MT@set@curr@ls{\def\noexpand\MT@curr@ls{\MT@letterspace@}}%
+    \aftergroup\MT@set@curr@ls
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+% Adjust surrounding spacing and kerning.
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@set@curr@os}
+%\changes{v2.3}{2007/11/03}{adjusting spaces made more reliable}
+% We get the current outer spacing and adjust it, then, after the end of the
+% current outer group, set the current outer spacing, again, and adjust.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*package>
+    \MT@outer@space=\csname MT@outer@space\expandafter\string\font@name\endcsname\relax
+    \xdef\MT@set@curr@os{\MT@outer@space=\the\MT@outer@space\relax}%
+    \MT@tr@outer@l
+%</package>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+% If \cs{MT@ls@adjust} is empty, it's the starred version of \cs{textls}.
+% Use scaling to avoid a `Dimension too large'.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \ifx\MT@ls@adjust\@empty
+%<letterspace>      % \textls : outer kerning = {*,*} ; \textls* : outer kerning = {0,0}
+      \MT@outer@kern=-\dimexpr\MT@letterspace@ sp * \fontdimen6\font@name/2000\relax
+      \MT@ls@outer@k
+%<*letterspace>
+      \xdef\MT@set@curr@ok{\MT@outer@kern=\the\MT@outer@kern\relax}%
+      \aftergroup\aftergroup\aftergroup\MT@ls@aftergroup
+%</letterspace>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Otherwise, get the current outer kerning and adjust it, for left and right
+% side (\microtype\ only).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*package>
+    \else
+      \MT@outer@kern=\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\@firstoftwo
+                      \csname MT@outer@kern\expandafter\string\font@name\endcsname\relax
+      \ifdim\MT@outer@kern=\z@\else \MT@ls@outer@k \fi
+      \MT@outer@kern=\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\@secondoftwo
+                      \csname MT@outer@kern\expandafter\string\font@name\endcsname\relax
+%</package>
+    \fi
+%<*package>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@set@curr@ok}
+% Carry the outer kerning amount to outside the next group, then set outer
+% spacing (which will set kerning, if no space follows).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \xdef\MT@set@curr@ok{\MT@outer@kern=\the\MT@outer@kern\relax}%
+    \aftergroup\aftergroup\aftergroup\MT@ls@aftergroup
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%</package>
+  \fi
+%<package>  }%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@ls@aftergroup}
+% Stuff to be done after the letterspace group. The \letterspace\ package
+% only adjusts the  kerning.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<letterspace>\def\MT@ls@aftergroup{\MT@set@curr@ok\MT@ls@outer@k}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\changes{v2.3e}{2009/11/02}{compatibility with \pkg{tikz} (first reported by
+%                           \contributor Christian Stark <cstark\at gmx.de>)}       ^^A MID: <7d81lgF2ad3ckU1@mid.dfncis.de>, 2009/07/28
+%^^A                  Also: \contributor Karl Karlsson <karl-karlsson\at yandex.ru> ^^A privat mail, 2009/10/29
+%^^A                        \contributor hscm <henkmetselaar\at gmail.com>          ^^A MID: <6a24e972-b1a7-4172-a5a0-d2707e016301@12g2000pri.googlegroups.com>, 2009/11/02
+% \microtype\ also adjusts spacing.
+% If \cmd\tikz@expandcount\ is greater than zero, we're inside or at the end of
+% a \pkg{tikz} node, where we don't want to do anything, lest we disturb
+% \pkg{tikz}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*package>
+\MT@addto@setup{%
+  \@ifpackageloaded{tikz}
+    {\def\MT@ls@aftergroup{%
+       \ifnum\tikz@expandcount>\z@ \else
+         \MT@set@curr@os\MT@set@curr@ok\expandafter\MT@tr@outer@r\fi}}
+    {\def\MT@ls@aftergroup{\MT@set@curr@os\MT@set@curr@ok\MT@tr@outer@r}}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@get@tr@opt}
+% Various settings (only for the \microtype\ version).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@get@tr@opt{%
+  \MT@set@listname
+  \MT@ifdefined@n@T{MT@tr@c@\MT@tr@c@name}{%
+    \MT@let@cn\MT@letterspace{MT@tr@c@\MT@tr@c@name}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@tr@unit@}
+% Different unit?
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \MT@ifdefined@n@T{MT@tr@c@\MT@tr@c@name @unit}{%
+      \MT@let@cn\MT@tr@unit@{MT@tr@c@\MT@tr@c@name @unit}%
+      \ifdim\MT@tr@unit@=1em
+        \let\MT@tr@unit@\@undefined
+      \else
+        \MT@let@cn\@tempb{MT@tr@c@\MT@tr@c@name}%
+        \MT@get@unit\MT@tr@unit@
+        \let\MT@tr@factor@\@m
+        \MT@scale@to@em
+        \edef\MT@letterspace{\number\@tempcntb}%
+      \fi
+    }%
+  }%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@tr@ispace}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@tr@ospace}
+% Adjust interword spacing.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \MT@get@tr@opt@{spacing}     {ispace}%
+  \MT@get@tr@opt@{outerspacing}{ospace}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@tr@okern}
+% Adjust outer kerning.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \MT@get@tr@opt@{outerkerning}{okern}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@tr@ligatures}
+% Which ligatures should we disable (empty means all, undefined none)?
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \MT@get@tr@opt@{noligatures} {ligatures}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@get@tr@opt@}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@get@tr@opt@#1#2{%
+  \MT@ifdefined@n@T{MT@tr@c@\MT@tr@c@name @#1}%
+    {\MT@let@nn{MT@tr@#2}{MT@tr@c@\MT@tr@c@name @#1}}%
+}
+%</package>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@set@lsfont}
+% Redefine \cmd\font@name, which will be called a second later (in
+% \cmd\selectfont).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<plain>\MT@requires@latex2{
+\def\MT@set@lsfont{\MT@exp@two@c\let\font@name\MT@lsfont}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\lsstyle}
+%\changes{v2.0}{2005/09/21}{(beta:1) new command: letterspacing}
+%\changes{v2.0}{2006/09/19}{(beta:8) fix: font switches don't pose a problem anymore}
+%\changes{v2.0}{2006/09/21}{(beta:8) fix: letterspacing commands may be nested}
+%\changes{v2.0}{2006/12/28}{totally redone, using the new \cmd\letterspacefont}
+%\changes{v2.3d}{2008/11/16}{make invalid in math mode}
+%\changes{v2.3d}{2009/01/07}{disable for \luatex}
+% Disable the tests whether the font should be letterspaced, then trigger the
+% setup.
+% Only \cs{textls} can be used in math mode (\cs{lsstyle} may be used inside
+% another text switch, of course).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\lsstyle{%
+  \not@math@alphabet\lsstyle\textls
+%<package>  \def\MT@feat{tr}%
+  \let\MT@tracking\MT@set@tr@codes
+  \selectfont
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Now the definitions for the \letterspace\ package with plain \TeX.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*plain>
+}{
+\def\MT@set@lsfont{\MT@lsfont}
+\def\lsstyle{%
+  \begingroup
+  \escapechar\m@ne
+  \xdef\font@name{\csname\expandafter\string\the\font\endcsname}%
+  \MT@set@tr@codes
+  \endgroup
+}
+\let\textls\@undefined
+\let\lslig\@undefined
+}
+%</plain>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\lslig}
+%\changes{v2.1}{2007/01/17}{new command: protect ligatures in letterspaced text}
+%\changes{v2.2}{2007/02/25}{always defined}
+%\changes{v2.3}{2007/11/03}{redone: extract outer kerns from current letterspacing
+%                           amount}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@lslig}
+% For Fraktur fonts, some ligatures shouldn't be broken up. This command will
+% temporarily select the base font and insert the correct kerning.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\lslig[1]{%
+  {\MT@ifdefined@c@TF\MT@curr@ls{%
+     \escapechar\m@ne
+     \MT@get@ls@basefont
+     \MT@outer@kern=\dimexpr\MT@curr@ls sp * \fontdimen6\font@name/2000\relax
+     \kern\MT@outer@kern
+     \font@name #1%
+     \kern\MT@outer@kern%
+  }{#1}}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@ls@basefont}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@get@ls@basefont}
+%\changes{v2.1}{2007/01/19}{redone: use \cmd\pdfmatch\ to make it bullet-proof}
+% \pdftex\ cannot letterspace fonts that already are letterspaced. Therefore,
+% we have to save the base font in |\|\meta{font name}|@base|.
+%
+%\changes{v2.2}{2007/02/18}{fix again: remember base font in a macro}
+% The previous solution (checking the macro's meaning with \cmd\pdfmatch),
+% where we were loading the base font via the \cmd\font\ primitive again,
+% would destroy all previously set up micro-typographic features of the font.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@get@ls@basefont{%
+  \xdef\MT@ls@basefont{\csname\expandafter\string\font@name @base\endcsname}%
+  \expandafter\ifx\MT@ls@basefont\relax
+    \MT@exp@two@c\MT@glet\MT@ls@basefont\font@name
+  \else
+%<debug>\MT@dinfo@nl{1}{... fixing base font}%
+    \MT@exp@two@c\let\font@name\MT@ls@basefont
+  \fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@set@lsbasefont}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@set@tr@zero}
+%\changes{v2.3d}{2009/03/05}{fix: allow switching off tracking
+%                            (reported by \contributor Ulrich Dirr <ud\at mucschach.de>)}
+%                                                          ^^A private mail, 2009/02/22
+% If tracking is switched off in the middle of the document, or if \cs{textls}
+% is called with a zero letterspacing amount, we have to retrieve the base font
+% and select it.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@set@lsbasefont{\MT@exp@two@c\let\font@name\MT@ls@basefont}
+\def\MT@set@tr@zero{%
+%<debug>\MT@dinfo@nl{1}{... zero tracking}%
+  \xdef\MT@ls@basefont{\csname\expandafter\string\font@name @base\endcsname}%
+  \expandafter\ifx\MT@ls@basefont\relax \else
+%<debug>\MT@dinfo@nl{1}{... fixing base font}%
+    \aftergroup\MT@set@lsbasefont
+  \fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@tr@noligatures}
+% \pdftex\ 1.40.0--1.40.3 disabled all ligatures in letterspaced fonts.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*package>
+\MT@requires@pdftex7{
+  \def\MT@tr@noligatures{%
+    \ifx\MT@tr@ligatures\@empty
+      \MT@noligatures@\MT@lsfont\@undefined
+    \else
+      \MT@noligatures@\MT@lsfont\MT@tr@ligatures
+    \fi
+  }
+}{
+  \def\MT@tr@noligatures{%
+    \MT@warning@nl{%
+      Disabling selected ligatures is only possible since\MessageBreak
+      pdftex 1.40.4. Disabling all ligatures instead}%
+    \MT@glet\MT@tr@noligatures\relax
+  }
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@outer@space}
+% A new skip for outer spacing.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newskip\MT@outer@space
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@tr@set@space}
+% Adjust interword spacing (\fontdim2--4) for inner and outer space.
+% For inner spacing, the font dimensions will be adjusted, the settings for
+% outer spacing will be remembered in a macro.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@tr@set@space#1,#2,#3,#4,#5,#6,{%
+%<debug>\MT@dinfo@nl2{... orig. space: \the\fontdimen2\MT@lsfont,
+%<debug>    \the\fontdimen3\MT@lsfont, \the\fontdimen4\MT@lsfont
+%<debug>    \MessageBreak... (#1,#2,#3) (#4,#5,#6)}%
+  \let\MT@temp\@empty
+  \MT@tr@set@space@{#1}{#4}{2}\@empty
+  \MT@tr@set@space@{#2}{#5}{3}\@plus
+  \MT@tr@set@space@{#3}{#6}{4}\@minus
+  \MT@glet@nc{MT@outer@space\expandafter\string\font@name}\MT@temp
+%<debug>\MT@dinfo@nl2{... inner space: \the\fontdimen2\MT@lsfont,
+%<debug>    \the\fontdimen3\MT@lsfont, \the\fontdimen4\MT@lsfont}%
+%<debug>\MT@dinfo@nl2{... outer space: \MT@temp}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@tr@set@space@}
+% If outer spacing settings don't exist, they will be inherited from the inner
+% spacing settings.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@tr@set@space@#1#2#3#4{%
+  \MT@ifempty{#2}{%
+    \MT@ifempty{#1}{%
+      \edef\MT@temp{\MT@temp#4\the\fontdimen#3\MT@lsfont}%
+    }{%
+      \MT@tr@set@space@@{#1}{#3}{1000}%
+      \edef\MT@temp{\MT@temp#4\the\@tempdima}%
+      \fontdimen#3\MT@lsfont=\@tempdima
+    }%
+  }{%
+    \MT@tr@set@space@@{#2}{#3}{2000}%
+    \edef\MT@temp{\MT@temp#4\the\@tempdima}%
+    \MT@ifempty{#1}\relax{%
+      \MT@tr@set@space@@{#1}{#3}{1000}%
+      \fontdimen#3\MT@lsfont=\@tempdima
+    }%
+  }%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@tr@set@space@@}
+% If the value is followed by an asterisk, the fontdimen will be scaled by the
+% respective amount, otherwise the value denotes the desired dimension in the
+% respective unit.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@tr@set@space@@#1#2#3{%
+  \MT@test@ast#1*\@nil{%
+    \MT@ifdefined@c@TF\MT@tr@unit@
+      {\edef\@tempb{#1}\MT@scale@to@em}
+      {\@tempcntb=#1\relax}%
+    \@tempdima=\dimexpr \dimexpr\@tempcntb sp*\MT@dimen@six/1000\relax
+                       -\fontdimen#2\MT@lsfont\relax
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% For \fontdim2, we also have to subtract the kerning that letterspacing adds
+% to the sides of the characters (only half if it's for outer spacing).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \ifnum#2=\tw@
+      \advance\@tempdima -\dimexpr\MT@letterspace@ sp*\MT@dimen@six/#3\relax
+    \fi
+    \@tempdima=\dimexpr \fontdimen#2\MT@lsfont+\@tempdima\relax
+  }{%
+    \MT@ifempty\@tempa{\let\@tempa\MT@letterspace@}\relax
+    \@tempdima=\dimexpr \numexpr1000+\@tempa sp *\fontdimen#2\MT@lsfont/1000\relax
+  }%
+%<debug>\MT@dinfo@nl3{... : font dimen #2 (#1): \the\@tempdima}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@tr@outer@l}
+% Recall the last skip (must really be an interword space, not just a marker,
+%\changes{v2.3}{2007/10/23}{only change pre outer space if it contains shrink}
+% nor a `hard' space, \ie, one that doesn't contain stretch or shrink parts).
+%\changes{v2.3b}{2008/05/12}{fix: only in horizontal mode}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@tr@outer@l{%
+  \ifhmode
+    \ifdim\lastskip>5sp
+      \edef\x{\the\lastskip minus 0pt}%
+      \setbox\z@\hbox{\MT@outer@space=\x}%
+      \ifdim\wd\z@>\z@
+%<debug>\MT@dinfo2{[[[ adjusting pre space: \the\MT@outer@space}%
+        \unskip \hskip\MT@outer@space\relax
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Disable left outer kerning.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \let\MT@ls@outer@k\relax
+      \else
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\changes{v2.3b}{2008/05/18}{make \cmd\spaceskip-aware (\pkg{ragged2e})}
+% The \pkg{ragged2e} package sets \cmd\spaceskip\ without glue.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \ifdim\lastskip=%
+            \ifnum\spacefactor<2000
+              \spaceskip
+            \else
+              \ifdim\xspaceskip=\z@
+                \dimexpr\spaceskip+\fontdimen7\font@name\relax
+              \else
+                \xspaceskip
+              \fi
+            \fi
+%<debug>\MT@dinfo2{[[[ adjusting pre space (skip): \the\MT@outer@space}%
+          \unskip \hskip\MT@outer@space\relax
+          \let\MT@ls@outer@k\relax
+        \fi
+      \fi
+    \fi
+  \fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@tr@outer@next}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@tr@outer@r}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@tr@outer@r@}
+% The following is borrowed from \pkg{soul}. I've added the cases for italic
+% correction, since tracking may also be triggered by text commands (\eg,
+% \cmd\textsc).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@tr@outer@r{%
+  \futurelet\MT@tr@outer@next\MT@tr@outer@r@
+}
+\def\MT@tr@outer@r@{%
+  \def\MT@temp*{}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Don't adjust in math mode.
+%\changes{v2.3d}{2008/11/16}{fix: don't adjust in math mode
+%                            (reported by \contributor Christoph Bier <christoph.bier\at web.de>)}
+%                                                   ^^A MID: <6oapk7F2lvo6U1@mid.individual.net>
+% There was a tricky bug when \cs{textls} was the last command in a
+% \cmd\mathchoice\ group.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \ifmmode \else
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% A similar bug occurred when adjustment would happen inside a discretionary
+% group, which we prevent here.
+%\changes{v2.3d}{2009/02/08}{fix: don't adjust inside discretionary
+%                            (reported by \contributor Maverick Woo <maverick\at cs.cmu.edu>)}
+%                                                  ^^A private mail, 2009/02/07
+% This only works with \etex\ (which we know is available).
+%\changes{v2.3b}{2008/05/18}{additional test for horizontal mode}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \ifnum\currentgrouptype=10 \else
+      \def\MT@temp*##1{\ifhmode\hskip\MT@outer@space
+%<debug>\MT@dinfo2{]]] adjusting post space (1): \the\MT@outer@space}%
+        \fi}%
+      \ifcat\egroup\noexpand\MT@tr@outer@next
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\changes{v2.3c}{2008/09/18}{additional test for horizontal mode
+%                            (reported by \contributor Sveinung Heggen <sveinung.heggen\at orkla.no>)}
+%                                                                       ^^A private mail, 2008/09/18
+%\todo{fix problem with tikz}
+%^^A \path[->] (N0) edge node {\textls{abc}} (N1);
+%^^A    reported by \contributor Christian Stark <cstark\at gmx.de>
+%^^A                  ^^A 2009/07/28, MID: <7d81lgF2ad3ckU1@mid.dfncis.de>
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \ifhmode\unkern\fi\egroup
+        \MT@set@curr@ok \MT@set@curr@os
+        \def\MT@temp*{\afterassignment\MT@tr@outer@r\let\MT@temp=}%
+      \else
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% If the next token is \cmd\maybe@ic\ (from an enclosing text command), we
+% gobble it, read the next one, feed it to \cmd\maybe@ic@\ (via
+% \cs{MT@tr@outer@icr}) and then call ourselves again.
+%\changes{v2.3d}{2009/02/25}{don't use \cmd\x\
+%                            (reported by \contributor Ulrich Dirr <ud\at mucschach.de>)}
+%                                 ^^A private mail, 2009/02/22
+%\changes{v2.3e}{2009/05/29}{fix: set current kerning and spacing again
+%                            (found by \contributor Lars R\"onnb\"ack <lars.ronnback\at affecto.com>)}
+%                                 ^^A <http://code.google.com/p/tufte-latex/issues/detail?id=25>
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \ifx\maybe@ic\MT@tr@outer@next
+          \MT@set@curr@ok \MT@set@curr@os
+          \def\MT@temp*{\afterassignment\MT@tr@outer@icr\let\MT@temp=}%
+        \else
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% If the next token is \cmd\check@icr\ (from an inner text command), we insert
+% ourselves just before it. This will then call \cmd\maybe@ic\ again the next
+% round (which however will always insert an italic correction, since it
+% doesn't read beyond our group).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+          \ifx\check@icr\MT@tr@outer@next
+            \def\MT@temp*{\aftergroup\MT@tr@outer@r\check@icr\let\MT@temp=}%
+          \else
+            \ifx\@sptoken\MT@tr@outer@next
+              \def\MT@temp* {\ifhmode\hskip\MT@outer@space
+%<debug>\MT@dinfo2{]]] adjusting post spaces (2): \the\MT@outer@space}%
+                \fi}%
+            \else
+              \ifx~\MT@tr@outer@next
+                \def\MT@temp*~{\nobreak\hskip\MT@outer@space
+%<debug>\MT@dinfo2{]]] adjusting post spaces (3): \the\MT@outer@space}%
+                  }%
+              \else
+                \ifx\ \MT@tr@outer@next \else
+                  \ifx\space\MT@tr@outer@next \else
+                    \ifx\@xobeysp\MT@tr@outer@next \else
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% If there's no outer spacing, there may be outer kerning.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+                      \def\MT@temp*{\ifdim\MT@outer@kern=\z@\else\MT@ls@outer@k
+%<debug>\MT@dinfo2{--- adjusting post kern: \the\MT@outer@kern}%
+                        \fi}%
+                      \let\MT@tr@outer@next\relax
+  \fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi\fi
+  \MT@temp*%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@tr@outer@icr}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@tr@outer@icr@}
+% Helper macros for the italic correction mess.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@tr@outer@icr{\afterassignment\MT@tr@outer@icr@\MT@tr@outer@r}
+\def\MT@tr@outer@icr@{%
+  \let\@let@token= \MT@tr@outer@next
+  \maybe@ic@
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+% For older \pdftex\ versions, throw an error.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+}{
+  \DeclareRobustCommand\lsstyle{%
+    \MT@error{Letterspacing only works with pdftex version 1.40\MessageBreak
+      or newer}{Upgrade pdftex, or use the `soul' package instead.}%
+    \MT@glet\lsstyle\relax
+  }
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% And for \luatex, too.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*lua>
+\MT@requires@luatex{
+  \DeclareRobustCommand\lsstyle{%
+    \MT@error{Letterspacing currently doesn't work with luatex}
+             {Run pdftex, or use the `soul' package instead.}%
+    \MT@glet\lsstyle\relax
+  }
+}\relax
+%</lua>
+%</package>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\begin{macro}{\textls}
+%\changes{v2.0}{2005/09/21}{(beta:1) new command: letterspacing}
+%\changes{v2.0}{2006/12/28}{starred version: remove spaces around text}
+%\changes{v2.1}{2007/01/19}{fix: use \cmd\hmode@bgroup}
+%\changes{v2.3d}{2008/11/16}{make math mode aware}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@ls@adjust@}
+% This command may be used like the other text commands.
+% The starred version removes kerning on the sides.
+% The optional argument changes the letterspacing factor.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\textls{%
+  \@ifstar{\let\MT@ls@adjust@\MT@ls@adjust@empty\MT@textls}%
+          {\let\MT@ls@adjust@\MT@ls@adjust@relax\MT@textls}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@textls}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@letterspace@}
+% This is now almost \LaTeX's \cmd\DeclareTextFontCommand, with the difference
+% that we adjust the outer spacing and kerning also for \cs{lsstyle}, while
+% \LaTeX's text \emph{switches} don't bother about italic correction.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\MT@textls[2][]{%
+  \ifmmode
+    \nfss@text{\MT@ls@set@ls{#1}\lsstyle#2}%
+  \else
+    \hmode@bgroup
+      \MT@ls@set@ls{#1}%
+      \lsstyle #2%
+      \expandafter
+    \egroup
+  \fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@ls@adjust}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@ls@adjust@empty}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@ls@adjust@relax}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@ls@set@ls}
+% Set current letterspacing amount and outer kerning. This has to be done inside
+% the same group as the letterspacing command.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@ls@adjust@empty{\let\MT@ls@adjust\@empty}
+\def\MT@ls@adjust@relax{\let\MT@ls@adjust\relax}
+\def\MT@ls@set@ls#1{%
+  \MT@ifempty{#1}%
+    {\let\MT@letterspace@\@undefined}%
+    {\KV@@sp@def\MT@letterspace@{#1}%
+     \MT@ls@too@large\MT@letterspace@}%
+  \MT@ls@adjust@
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@ls@too@large}
+% Test whether letterspacing amount is too large.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@ls@too@large#1{%
+  \ifnum#1>\MT@tr@max
+    \MT@warning{Maximum for option `letterspace' is \number\MT@tr@max}%
+    \let#1\MT@tr@max
+  \else
+    \ifnum#1<\MT@tr@min
+      \MT@warning{Minimum for option `letterspace' is \number\MT@tr@min}%
+      \let#1\MT@tr@min
+    \fi
+  \fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@outer@kern}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@tr@set@okern}
+%\changes{v2.3d}{2008/12/19}{allow empty value for \texttt{outer kerning}}
+% This dimen is used for the starred version of \cs{textls}, for \cs{lslig}
+% and for adjusted outer kerning.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newdimen\MT@outer@kern
+%<*package>
+\def\MT@tr@set@okern#1,#2,{%
+  \let\MT@temp\@empty
+  \MT@ifempty{#1}{\MT@tr@set@okern@{*}}{\MT@tr@set@okern@{#1}}%
+  \MT@ifempty{#2}{\MT@tr@set@okern@{*}}{\MT@tr@set@okern@{#2}}%
+  \MT@glet@nc{MT@outer@kern\expandafter\string\font@name}\MT@temp
+%<debug>\MT@dinfo@nl2{... outer kerning: (#1,#2)
+%<debug>              = \@nameuse{MT@outer@kern\expandafter\string\font@name}}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@tr@set@okern@}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@tr@set@okern@#1{%
+  \MT@test@ast#1*\@nil{%
+    \MT@ifdefined@c@TF\MT@tr@unit@
+      {\edef\@tempb{#1}\MT@scale@to@em}
+      {\@tempcntb=#1\relax}%
+    \@tempdima=\dimexpr \@tempcntb sp * \MT@dimen@six/1000\relax
+  }{%
+    \MT@ifempty\@tempa{\let\@tempa\@m}\relax
+    \@tempdima=\dimexpr \numexpr\@tempa*\MT@letterspace@/1000\relax sp
+                      * \fontdimen6\MT@lsfont/2000\relax
+  }%
+  \advance\@tempdima -\dimexpr \MT@letterspace@ sp
+                             * \fontdimen6\MT@lsfont/2000\relax
+  \edef\MT@temp{\MT@temp{\the\@tempdima}}%
+}
+%</package>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@ls@outer@k}
+% Adjust outer kerning.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@ls@outer@k{\ifhmode\kern\MT@outer@kern\relax\fi}
+%<*package>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%
+%\subsubsection{Disabling ligatures}
+%
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@noligatures}
+% The possibility to disable ligatures is a new features of \pdftex\ 1.30.
+%\changes{v2.3}{2007/10/23}{fix: set evaluation didn't work (bug introduced in 2.2)}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\MT@requires@pdftex5{
+\def\MT@noligatures{%
+  \MT@dotrue
+  \let\@tempa\MT@nl@setname
+  \MT@map@clist@n{font,encoding,family,series,shape,size}{%
+    \MT@ifdefined@n@TF{MT@checklist@##1}%
+      {\csname MT@checklist@##1\endcsname}%
+      {\MT@checklist@{##1}}%
+    {nl}%
+  }%
+  \ifMT@do
+    \MT@noligatures@\MT@font\MT@nl@ligatures
+  \fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@noligatures@}
+% This is also used by \cs{MT@set@tr@codes}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@noligatures@#1#2{%
+  \MT@ifdefined@c@TF#2{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Early MiK\TeX\ versions (before 2.5.2579) didn't know \cmd\tagcode.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \MT@ifdefined@c@TF\tagcode{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% No `|inputenc|' key.
+%\changes{v2.3b}{2008/03/27}{fix: warning messages for unknown slots}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+      \let\MT@warn@maybe@inputenc\@empty
+      \def\MT@curr@list@name{\@backslashchar DisableLigatures}%
+      \MT@map@clist@c#2{%
+        \KV@@sp@def\@tempa{##1}\MT@get@slot
+        \ifnum\MT@char>\m@ne \tagcode#1\MT@char=\m@ne \fi}%
+      \MT@vinfo{... Disabling ligatures for characters: #2}%
+    }{%
+      \pdfnoligatures#1%
+      \MT@warning{Cannot disable selected ligatures (pdftex doesn't\MessageBreak
+          know \@backslashchar tagcode). Disabling all ligatures of\MessageBreak
+          the font instead}%
+    }%
+  }{%
+    \pdfnoligatures#1%
+    \MT@vinfo{... Disabling ligatures}%
+  }%
+}
+}\relax
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%
+%\subsubsection{Loading the configuration}
+%
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@load@list}
+% Recurse through the lists to be loaded.
+%\changes{v1.3}{2004/10/27}{check whether list exists}
+%\todo{load more than one list}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@load@list#1{%
+  \edef\@tempa{#1}%
+  \MT@let@cn\@tempb{MT@\MT@feat @c@\@tempa @load}%
+  \MT@ifstreq\@tempa\@tempb{%
+    \MT@error{\@nameuse{MT@abbr@\MT@feat} list `\@tempa' cannot load itself}{}%
+  }{%
+    \ifx\@tempb\relax \else
+      \MT@ifdefined@n@TF{MT@\MT@feat @c@\@tempb}{%
+        \MT@vinfo{... : First loading \@nameuse{MT@abbr@\MT@feat} list `\@tempb'}%
+        \begingroup
+          \MT@load@list\@tempb
+        \endgroup
+        \edef\MT@curr@list@name{\@nameuse{MT@abbr@\MT@feat} list
+          \noexpand\MessageBreak`\@tempb'}%
+        \MT@let@cn\@tempc{MT@\MT@feat @c@\@tempb}%
+        \expandafter\MT@set@codes\@tempc,\relax,%
+      }{%
+        \MT@error{\@nameuse{MT@abbr@\MT@feat} list `\@tempb' undefined.\MessageBreak
+                    Cannot load it from list `\@tempa'}{}%
+      }%
+    \fi
+  }%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\changes{v1.1}{2004/09/13}{configuration file names in lowercase
+%               (suggested by \contributor Harald Harders <h.harders\at tu-bs.de>)}
+%                                                    ^^A private mail, 2004/09/13
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@find@file}
+%\changes{v1.1}{2004/09/14}{fix: also check whether the file for the base
+%                           font family has already been loaded}
+% Micro-typographic settings may be written into a file |mt-|\meta{font family}|.cfg|.
+%\changes{v1.8}{2005/04/16}{no longer wrap names in commands}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@file@list}
+% We must also record whether we've already loaded the file.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\MT@file@list\@empty
+\def\MT@find@file#1{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+% Check for existence of the file only once.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \MT@in@clist{#1}\MT@file@list
+  \ifMT@inlist@ \else
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Don't forget that because reading the files takes place inside a group, all
+% commands that may be used there have to be defined globally.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \MT@begin@catcodes
+      \let\MT@begin@catcodes\relax
+      \let\MT@end@catcodes\relax
+      \InputIfFileExists{mt-#1.cfg}{%
+        \edef\MT@curr@file{mt-#1.cfg}%
+        \MT@vinfo{... Loading configuration file \MT@curr@file}%
+        \MT@xadd\MT@file@list{#1,}%
+      }{%
+        \MT@get@basefamily#1\@empty\@empty\@empty\@nil
+        \MT@exp@one@n\MT@in@clist\@tempa\MT@file@list
+        \ifMT@inlist@
+          \MT@xadd\MT@file@list{#1,}%
+        \else
+          \InputIfFileExists{mt-\@tempa.cfg}{%
+            \edef\MT@curr@file{mt-\@tempa.cfg}%
+            \MT@vinfo{... Loading configuration file \MT@curr@file}%
+            \MT@xadd\MT@file@list{\@tempa,#1,}%
+          }{%
+            \MT@vinfo{... No configuration file mt-#1.cfg}%
+            \MT@xadd\MT@file@list{#1,}%
+          }%
+        \fi
+      }%
+    \endgroup
+  \fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@cfg@catcodes}
+% We have to make sure that all characters have the correct category code.
+% Especially, new lines and spaces should be ignored, since files might be
+% loaded in the middle of the document. This is basically \cmd\nfss@catcodes\
+% (from the \LaTeX\ kernel). I've added:
+%\changes{v1.4a}{2004/11/16}{fix: reset some more catcodes when reading files
+%                (reported by \contributor Michael Hoppe <mh\at michael-hoppe.de>)}
+%                                 ^^A MID: <p06002000bdbff1f93eb7@[192.168.0.34]>
+% |&| (in |tabular|s), |!|, |?|, |;|,
+%\changes{v1.7}{2005/02/06}{reset catcode of `\texttt{:}'
+%                           (compatibility with \pkg{french}* packages)}
+% |:| (|french|), |,|, |$|, |_|, |~|,
+%\changes{v1.5}{2004/11/28}{reset catcode of `\texttt{\quotechar=}'
+%                           (compatibility with Turkish \pkg{babel})}
+% and |=| (Turkish \pkg{babel}).
+%
+%\changes{v1.8}{2005/03/29}{reset catcodes of the remaining <ASCII> characters}
+% OK, now all printable characters up to 127 are `other'. We hope that letters
+% are always letters and numbers other. (\pkg{listings} makes them active, see
+% section~\ref{sub:compatibility}.)
+%
+% We leave |^| at catcode 7, so that stuff like `|^^ff|' remains possible.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@cfg@catcodes{%
+  \makeatletter
+  \catcode`\^7%
+  \catcode`\ 9%
+  \catcode`\^^I9%
+  \catcode`\^^M9%
+  \catcode`\\\z@
+  \catcode`\{\@ne
+  \catcode`\}\tw@
+  \catcode`\#6%
+  \catcode`\%14%
+  \MT@map@tlist@n
+    {\!\"\$\&\'\(\)\*\+\,\-\.\/\:\;\<\=\>\?\[\]\_\`\|\~}%
+    \@makeother
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@begin@catcodes}
+% This will be used before reading the files as well as in the configuration
+% commands \cs{Set...}, and \cs{DeclareCharacterInheritance}, so that the
+% catcodes are also harmless when these commands are used outside the
+% configuration files.
+%\changes{v1.7}{2005/02/17}{also use inside configuration commands}
+%\changes{v2.3}{2007/11/20}{fix: don't disable \cmd\KV@@sp@def}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@begin@catcodes{%
+  \begingroup
+  \MT@cfg@catcodes
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@end@catcodes}
+% End group if outside configuration file (otherwise relax).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\MT@end@catcodes\endgroup
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@get@basefamily}
+% The family name might have a suffix
+%\changes{v1.1}{2004/09/14}{only remove suffix if it is `\texttt{x}' or `\texttt{j}'}
+% \eg, for expert set (|x|), old style numbers (|j|)
+%\changes{v1.2}{2004/09/26}{also remove `w' (swash capitals)}
+% swash capitals (|w|) etc. We mustn't simply remove the last letter, as this
+% would make for instance |cms| out of |cmss| \textit{and} |cmsy| (OK, |cmex|
+% will still become |cme|~\dots).
+%\changes{v1.4b}{2004/11/25}{fix: failed for font names of the form \texttt{abczz}
+%                (reported by \contributor Georg Verweyen <Georg.Verweyen\at WEB.DE>)}
+%                                                 ^^A MID: <41A64DC7.7040404@web.de>
+%\changes{v2.2}{2007/02/04}{redone, working on font names and suffixes of arbitrary length}
+%
+% We only work on the font name if it is longer than three characters.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@get@basefamily#1#2#3#4\@nil{%
+  \ifx\@empty#4%
+    \def\@tempa{#1#2#3}%
+  \else
+    \let\@tempa\@empty
+    \edef\@tempb{#1#2#3#4}%
+    \expandafter\MT@get@basefamily@\@tempb\@nil
+  \fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@get@basefamily@}
+% This will only remove one suffix (the longest match), so that
+% \emph{combinations} of suffixes would have be to added manually (\eg,
+% |\DeclareMicrotypeVariants*{aw}|). But otherwise, something like `|padx|'
+% would be truncated to `|p|'.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@get@basefamily@#1#2\@nil{%
+  \edef\@tempa{\@tempa#1}%
+  \ifx\\#2\\\expandafter\@gobble\else\expandafter\@firstofone\fi
+  {\MT@in@tlist{#2}\MT@variants
+   \ifMT@inlist@\else\MT@get@basefamily@#2\@nil\fi}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@listname}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@get@listname}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@get@listname@}
+% Try all combinations of font family, series, shape and size to get a list for
+% the current font.
+%\changes{v1.1}{2004/09/15}{don't check for empty attributes list}
+%\changes{v1.2}{2004/09/30}{alternatively check for alias font name}
+%\changes{v1.7}{2005/03/15}{use \cmd\@tfor\
+%               (\contributor Andreas B\"uhmann <andreas.buehmann\at web.de>'s idea)}
+%                                                      ^^A private mail, 2005/03/12
+%\changes{v1.8}{2005/04/16}{made recursive}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@get@listname#1{%
+%<debug>\MT@dinfo@nl{1}{trying to find \@nameuse{MT@abbr@#1} list for font `\MT@@font'}%
+  \let\MT@listname\@undefined
+  \def\@tempb{#1}%
+  \MT@map@tlist@c\MT@try@order\MT@get@listname@
+}
+\def\MT@get@listname@#1{%
+  \expandafter\MT@next@listname#1%
+  \ifx\MT@listname\@undefined \else
+    \expandafter\MT@tlist@break
+  \fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@try@order}
+%\changes{v1.7}{2005/03/11}{fix: also check for //\meta{series}/\meta{shape}//
+%               (reported by \contributor Andreas B\"uhmann <andreas.buehmann\at web.de>)}
+%                                                           ^^A private mail, 2005/03/10
+%\changes{v1.7}{2005/03/11}{always check for size, too
+%               (suggested by \contributor Andreas B\"uhmann <andreas.buehmann\at web.de>)}
+%                                                           ^^A private mail, 2005/03/10
+%
+%\begin{table}\footnotesize
+%\caption{Order for matching font attributes}\label{tab:match-order}
+%\catcode`\!=13 \let!\match
+%\setlength\fboxsep{4pt}
+%\leavevmode\kern-\dimexpr\fboxsep+\fboxrule\relax
+%\fcolorbox{theframe}{white}{^^A
+%\begin{minipage}{\textwidth}
+%\begin{tabular}{@{}L{38pt}*{16}{p{19.5pt}<{\centering}@{}}}
+%          & 1.& 2.& 3.& 4.& 5.& 6.& 7.& 8.& 9.&10.&11.&12.&13.&14.&15.&16.\\
+%\cmidrule(r){2-2}  \cmidrule(r){3-3}  \cmidrule(r){4-4}  \cmidrule(r){5-5}
+%\cmidrule(r){6-6}  \cmidrule(r){7-7}  \cmidrule(r){8-8}  \cmidrule(r){9-9}
+%\cmidrule(r){10-10}\cmidrule(r){11-11}\cmidrule(r){12-12}\cmidrule(r){13-13}
+%\cmidrule(r){14-14}\cmidrule(r){15-15}\cmidrule(r){16-16}\cmidrule   {17-17}
+% Encoding & ! & ! & ! & ! & ! & ! & ! & ! & ! & ! & ! & ! & ! & ! & ! & ! \\
+% Family   & ! & ! & ! & ! & ! & ! & ! & ! & - & - & - & - & - & - & - & - \\
+% Series   & ! & ! & ! & ! & - & - & - & - & ! & ! & ! & ! & - & - & - & - \\
+% Shape    & ! & ! & - & - & ! & ! & - & - & ! & ! & - & - & ! & ! & - & - \\
+% Size     & ! & - & ! & - & ! & - & ! & - & ! & - & ! & - & ! & - & ! & - \\
+%\end{tabular}
+%\end{minipage}^^A
+%}\kern-\dimexpr\fboxsep+\fboxrule\relax ^^A end \fcolorbox
+%\end{table}
+%
+% Beginning with version 1.7, we always check for the font size. Since the
+% matching order has become more logical now, it can be described in words, so
+% that we don't need table~\ref{tab:match-order} in the documentation part any
+% longer and can cast it off here.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@try@order{%
+  {1111}{1110}{1101}{1100}{1011}{1010}{1001}{1000}%
+  {0111}{0110}{0101}{0100}{0011}{0010}{0001}{0000}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@next@listname}
+% The current context is added to the font attributes. That is, the context must
+% match.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@next@listname#1#2#3#4{%
+  \edef\@tempa{\MT@encoding
+              /\ifnum#1=\@ne \MT@family\fi
+              /\ifnum#2=\@ne \MT@series\fi
+              /\ifnum#3=\@ne \MT@shape\fi
+              /\ifnum#4=\@ne *\fi
+               \MT@context}%
+%<debug>\MT@dinfo@nl{1}{trying \@tempa}%
+  \MT@ifdefined@n@TF{MT@\@tempb @\@tempa}{%
+    \MT@next@listname@#4%
+  }{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Also try with an alias family.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \ifnum#1=\@ne
+      \ifx\MT@familyalias\@empty \else
+        \edef\@tempa{\MT@encoding
+                    /\MT@familyalias
+                    /\ifnum#2=\@ne \MT@series\fi
+                    /\ifnum#3=\@ne \MT@shape\fi
+                    /\ifnum#4=\@ne *\fi
+                     \MT@context}%
+%<debug>\MT@dinfo@nl{1}{(alias) \@tempa}%
+        \MT@ifdefined@n@T{MT@\@tempb @\@tempa}{%
+          \MT@next@listname@#4%
+        }%
+      \fi
+    \fi
+  }%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@next@listname@}
+% If size is to be evaluated, do that, otherwise use the current list.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@next@listname@#1{%
+  \ifnum#1=\@ne
+    \MT@exp@cs\MT@in@rlist{MT@\@tempb @\@tempa @sizes}%
+    \ifMT@inlist@
+      \let\MT@listname\MT@size@name
+    \fi
+  \else
+    \MT@let@cn\MT@listname{MT@\@tempb @\@tempa}%
+  \fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@if@list@exists}
+%\changes{v1.7}{2005/02/06}{don't define \cs{MT@\#1@c@name} \cmd\global ly,
+%                           here and elsewhere}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@context}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@if@list@exists{%
+  \MT@let@cn\MT@context{MT@\MT@feat @context}%
+  \MT@ifstreq{@}\MT@context{\let\MT@context\@empty}\relax
+  \MT@get@listname{\MT@feat @c}%
+  \MT@ifdefined@c@TF\MT@listname{%
+    \MT@edef@n{MT@\MT@feat @c@name}{\MT@listname}%
+    \ifMT@nonselected
+      \MT@vinfo{... Applying non-selected expansion (list `\MT@listname')}%
+    \else
+      \MT@vinfo{... Loading \@nameuse{MT@abbr@\MT@feat} list `\MT@listname'}%
+    \fi
+    \@firstoftwo
+  }{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Since the name cannot be \cmd\@empty, this is a sound proof that no matching
+% list exists.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \MT@let@nc{MT@\MT@feat @c@name}\@empty
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Don't warn if \opt{selected}|=false|.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \ifMT@nonselected
+      \MT@vinfo{... Applying non-selected expansion (no list)}%
+    \else
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Tracking doesn't require a list, either.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+      \MT@ifstreq\MT@feat{tr}\relax{%
+        \MT@warning{I cannot find a \@nameuse{MT@abbr@\MT@feat} list
+          for font\MessageBreak`\MT@@font'%
+            \ifx\MT@context\@empty\else\space(context: `\MT@context')\fi.
+          Switching off\MessageBreak\@nameuse{MT@abbr@\MT@feat} for this font}%
+      }%
+    \fi
+    \@secondoftwo
+  }%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@get@inh@list}
+%\changes{v1.6}{2004/12/18}{correct message if \opt{selected} is false}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@context}
+% The inheritance lists are global (no context).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@get@inh@list{%
+  \let\MT@context\@empty
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \MT@get@listname{\MT@feat @inh}%
+  \MT@ifdefined@c@TF\MT@listname{%
+    \MT@edef@n{MT@\MT@feat @inh@name}{\MT@listname}%
+%<debug>\MT@dinfo@nl{1}{... Using \@nameuse{MT@abbr@\MT@feat} inheritance list
+%<debug>                `\MT@listname'}%
+    \MT@let@cn\@tempc{MT@\MT@feat @inh@\MT@listname}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% If the list is \cmd\@empty, it has already been parsed.
+%\changes{v1.2}{2004/09/26}{fix: set inheritance list \cmd\global ly to \cmd\@empty}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \ifx\@tempc\@empty \else
+%<debug>\MT@dinfo@nl{1}{parsing inheritance list ...}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The group is only required in case an input encoding is given.
+%\changes{v1.9f}{2006/08/03}{fix: input encoding must be set after the inheritance
+%                            list has been parsed}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+      \begingroup
+      \edef\MT@curr@list@name{inheritance list\noexpand\MessageBreak`\MT@listname'}%
+      \MT@set@inputenc{inh}%
+      \expandafter\MT@inh@do\@tempc,\relax,%
+      \MT@glet@nc{MT@\MT@feat @inh@\MT@listname}\@empty
+      \endgroup
+    \fi
+  }{%
+    \MT@let@nc{MT@\MT@feat @inh@name}\@undefined
+  }%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Translating characters into slots}
+%
+%\changes{v1.4}{2004/11/04}{don't use scratch registers in global definitions}
+% Get the slot number of the character in the current encoding.
+%
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@get@slot}
+%^^A\changes{v1.2}{2004/09/26}{fix: group must also include \cs{MT@get@composite}}
+%\changes{v1.4b}{2004/11/22}{don't define \cs{MT@char} globally (save stack problem)}
+%\changes{v1.6a}{2005/01/30}{completely redone, hopefully more robust
+%                (compatible with \pkg{frenchpro}; problem reported by
+%                 \contributor Bernard Gaulle <gaulle\at idris.fr>)}
+%                                     ^^A private mail, 2005/01/28
+%\changes{v1.7}{2005/03/21}{remove backslash hack}
+% There are lots of possibilities how a character may be specified in the
+% configuration files, which makes translating them into slot numbers quite
+% expensive. Also, we want to have this as robust as possible, so that the user
+% does not have to solve a sphinx's riddle if anything goes wrong.
+%
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@char}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@char@}
+% The character is in \cs{@tempa}, we want its slot number in \cs{MT@char}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@get@slot{%
+  \escapechar`\\
+  \let\MT@char@\m@ne
+  \MT@noresttrue
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+% Save unexpanded string in case we need to issue a warning message.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \MT@toks=\expandafter{\@tempa}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Now, let's walk through (hopefully) all possible cases.
+%\begin{itemize}
+%  \item It's a letter, a character or a number.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \expandafter\MT@is@letter\@tempa\relax\relax
+  \ifnum\MT@char@ < \z@
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\changes{v1.8}{2005/03/30}{fix: expand active characters}
+%  \item It might be an active character, \ie, an 8-bit character defined by
+%        \pkg{inputenc}. If so, we will expand it here to its <LICR> form.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \MT@exp@two@c\MT@is@active\string\@tempa\@nil
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  \item OK, so it must be a macro. We do not allow random commands but only
+%        those defined in \LaTeX's idiosyncratic font encoding scheme:
+%
+%        If |\|\meta{encoding}|\|\meta{command} (that's \emph{one} command) is
+%        defined, we try to extract the slot number.
+%\changes{v1.7}{2005/02/27}{test whether \cs{}\meta{encoding}\cs{}\meta{...} is defined}
+%\changes{v1.8}{2005/04/04}{test whether \cs{}\meta{encoding}\cs{}\meta{...} is defined
+%                           made more robust}
+%
+%        We must be cautious not to stumble over accented characters consisting
+%        of two commands, like \cmd\`\cmd\i\ or \cmd\U\cmd\CYRI, hence,
+%        \cmd\string\ wouldn't be safe enough.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \MT@ifdefined@n@TF{\MT@encoding\MT@detokenize@c\@tempa}%
+      \MT@is@symbol
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  \item Now, we'll catch the rest, which hopefully is an accented character
+%        (\eg~|\"a|).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+      {\expandafter\MT@is@composite\@tempa\relax\relax}%
+    \ifnum\MT@char@ < \z@
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  \item It could also be a \cmd\chardef ed command (\eg, the percent character).
+%        This seems the least likely case, so it's last.
+%\changes{v1.7}{2005/03/20}{test for \cmd\chardef ed commands}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+      \expandafter\MT@exp@two@c\expandafter\MT@is@char\expandafter
+          \meaning\expandafter\@tempa\MT@charstring\relax\relax\relax
+    \fi
+  \fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{itemize}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \let\MT@char\MT@char@
+  \ifnum\MT@char < \z@
+    \MT@warn@unknown
+  \else
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% If the user has specified something like `|fi|', or wanted to define a number
+% but forgot to use three digits, we'll have something left of the string. In
+% this case, we issue a warning and forget the complete string.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \ifMT@norest \else
+      \MT@warn@rest
+      \let\MT@char\m@ne
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  \escapechar\m@ne
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\ifMT@norest}
+% Test whether all of the string has been used up.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\ifMT@norest
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@is@letter}
+% Input is a letter, a character or a number.
+%\changes{v1.8}{2005/04/04}{warning for non-<ASCII> characters}
+%\changes{v1.9}{2005/10/22}{using \cmd\catcode\ should be more efficient than
+%                           inspecting the \cmd\meaning}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@is@letter#1#2\relax{%
+  \ifcat a\noexpand#1\relax
+    \edef\MT@char@{\number`#1}%
+    \ifx\\#2\\%
+%<debug>\MT@dinfo@nl{3}{> `\the\MT@toks' is a letter (\MT@char@)}%
+    \else
+      \MT@norestfalse
+    \fi
+  \else
+    \ifcat !\noexpand#1\relax
+      \edef\MT@char@{\number`#1}%
+%<debug>\MT@dinfo@nl{3}{> `\the\MT@toks' is a character (\MT@char@)}%
+      \ifx\\#2\\%
+        \ifnum\MT@char@ > 127 \MT@warn@ascii \fi
+      \else
+        \MT@norestfalse
+        \expandafter\MT@is@number#1#2\relax\relax
+      \fi
+    \fi
+  \fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@is@number}
+% Numbers may be specified as a three-digit decimal number (|029|),
+%\changes{v1.1}{2004/09/13}{numbers may also be specified in hexadecimal or octal
+%               (suggested by \contributor Harald Harders <h.harders\at tu-bs.de>)}
+%                                                    ^^A private mail, 2004/09/13
+% as a hexadecimal number (prefixed with~|"|: |"1D|) or as a octal number
+% (prefixed with~|'|: |'35|). They must consist of at least three characters
+% (including the prefix), that is, |"F| is not permitted.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@is@number#1#2#3\relax{%
+  \ifx\relax#3\relax \else
+    \ifx\relax#2\relax \else
+      \MT@noresttrue
+      \if#1"\relax
+        \def\x{\uppercase{\edef\MT@char@{\number#1#2#3}}}\x
+%<debug>\MT@dinfo@nl{3}{> ... a hexadecimal number: \MT@char@}%
+      \else
+        \if#1'\relax
+          \def\MT@char@{\number#1#2#3}%
+%<debug>\MT@dinfo@nl{3}{> ... an octal number: \MT@char@}%
+        \else
+          \MT@ifint{#1#2#3}{%
+            \def\MT@char@{\number#1#2#3}%
+%<debug>\MT@dinfo@nl{3}{> ... a decimal number: \MT@char@}%
+          }\MT@norestfalse
+        \fi
+      \fi
+      \ifnum\MT@char@ > \@cclv
+        \MT@warn@number@too@large{\noexpand#1\noexpand#2\noexpand#3}%
+        \let\MT@char@\m@ne
+      \fi
+    \fi
+  \fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@is@active}
+%\changes{v1.8}{2005/03/30}{new macro: translate \pkg{inputenc}-defined characters}
+% Expand an active character. (This was completely broken in v1.7, and only
+% worked by chance before.)
+%\changes{v1.9}{2005/09/08}{redone: use \cmd\set@display@protect}
+% We \cmd\set@display@protect\ to translate, \eg, \expandafter|\"A| into |\"A|,
+% that is to whatever it is defined in the \pkg{inputenc} encoding file.
+%
+%\iffalse
+% Previous solution, slightly more robust (but doesn't understand Unicode):
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\def\MT@is@active#1#2\@nil{%
+%   \ifx\\#2\\%
+%      \ifnum\catcode`#1 = \active
+%         \toks@=\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter{\@tempa}%
+%         \expandafter\MT@active@inpenc\the\toks@\relax\relax
+%         \edef\@tempa{\the\toks@}%
+%         \edef\x{\MT@toks={\the\MT@toks\space(= \the\toks@)}}\x
+%      \fi
+%   \fi
+%}
+%\def\MT@active@inpenc#1#2#3\relax{%
+%   \ifx#1\IeC
+%      \def\IeC##1{\toks@={##1}}%
+%      \the\toks@
+%      \expandafter\MT@active@inpenc\the\toks@\relax\relax
+%   \fi
+%   \ifx#1\@tabacckludge
+%      \def\@tabacckludge##1##2{%
+%         \toks@=\expandafter{\csname\string##1\endcsname#3}}%
+%      \the\toks@
+%   \fi
+%   \ifx#1\@inpenc@undefined@
+%      \def\@inpenc@undefined@##1{%
+%         \edef\x{\toks@={%
+%            undefined^^J(\MT@MT)\@spaces\@spaces\@spaces\@spaces
+%            in input encoding ``##1''}}\x}%
+%      \the\toks@
+%   \fi
+%}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%\fi
+%
+% Unfortunately, the (older) \pkg{inputenc} definitions prefer the
+% protected\slash generic variants (\eg, \cmd\copyright\ instead of
+% \cmd\textcopyright), which our parser won't be able to understand.
+% (I'm fed up now, so you have to complain if you really, really want to be able
+% to write `\expandafter|\textcopyright|' instead of \cmd\textcopyright, thus
+% rendering your configuration files unportable.)
+%
+% Unicode characters (\pkg{inputenc}/|utf8|,|utf8x|) are also supported.
+%\changes{v1.9d}{2006/03/06}{support for Unicode (\pkg{inputenc}\slash\texttt{utf8})}
+%\changes{v2.3}{2007/11/11}{support for extended Unicode (\pkg{inputenc}\slash\texttt{utf8x} resp. \pkg{ucs}) -- experimental}
+%
+%\iffalse ^^A obsolete because of `inputenc' key
+% We presume that only one input encoding is being used throughout the entire
+% document. We could of course save the input encoding together with the list,
+% but this would entail a couple of problems: (1)~the overhead of resetting the
+% input encoding every time, (2)~the problem (or rather, impossibility) to
+% decide which input encoding should be chosen -- the one active when the list
+% was declared or the one active when the font is selected, and (3)~the
+% improbability of multiple input encodings being used at all.
+%\fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@is@active#1#2\@nil{%
+  \ifnum\catcode`#1 = \active
+    \begingroup
+      \set@display@protect
+      \let\IeC\@firstofone
+      \let\@inpenc@undefined@\MT@undefined@char
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% We refrain from checking whether there is a sufficient number of octets.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+      \def\UTFviii@defined##1{\ifx ##1\relax
+        \MT@undefined@char{utf8}\else\expandafter ##1\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% For \pkg{ucs} (utf8x). Let's call it experimental~\dots
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+      \MT@ifdefined@c@T\PrerenderUnicode
+        {\PrerenderUnicode{\@tempa}\let\unicode@charfilter\@firstofone}%
+      \edef\x{\endgroup
+        \def\noexpand\@tempa{\@tempa}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Append what we think the translation is to the token register we use for the
+% log.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \MT@toks={\the\MT@toks\space(= \@tempa)}%
+      }%
+    \x
+  \fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@undefined@char}
+% For characters not defined in the current input encoding.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@undefined@char#1{undefined in input encoding ``#1''}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@is@symbol}
+% The symbol commands might expand to funny stuff, depending on context.
+% Instead of simply expanding |\|\meta{command}, we construct the command
+% |\|\meta{encoding}|\|\meta{command} and see whether its meaning is
+% \cmd\char|"|\meta{hex number}, which is the case for everything that has
+% been defined with \cs{DeclareTextSymbol} in the encoding definition files.
+%\changes{v2.0}{2006/09/15}{made even more robust}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@is@symbol{%
+  \expandafter\def\expandafter\MT@char\expandafter
+      {\csname\MT@encoding\MT@detokenize@c\@tempa\endcsname}%
+  \expandafter\MT@exp@two@c\expandafter\MT@is@char\expandafter
+      \meaning\expandafter\MT@char\MT@charstring\relax\relax\relax
+  \ifnum\MT@char@ < \z@
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\changes{v2.2}{2007/03/07}{expand once more (for \pkg{frenchpro})}
+% \dots~or, if it hasn't been defined by \cs{DeclareTextSymbol}, a letter
+% (\eg, \cmd\i, when using \pkg{frenchpro}). ^^A as noted by Bernard Gaulle
+%                                              ^^A private mail, 2005/01/28
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\MT@is@letter\MT@char\relax\relax
+  \fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@is@char}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@charstring}
+% A helper macro that inspects the \cmd\meaning\ of its argument.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\begingroup
+  \catcode`\/=\z@
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\SpecialEscapechar{\/}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  /MT@map@tlist@n{/\CHAR}/@makeother
+  /lowercase{%
+    /def/x{/endgroup
+      /def/MT@charstring{\CHAR"}%
+      /def/MT@is@char##1\CHAR"##2##3##4/relax{%
+        /ifx/relax##1/relax
+          /if##3\/relax
+            /edef/MT@char@{/number"##2}%
+            /MT@ifstreq/MT@charstring{##3##4}/relax/MT@norestfalse
+          /else
+            /edef/MT@char@{/number"##2##3}%
+            /MT@ifstreq/MT@charstring{##4}/relax/MT@norestfalse
+          /fi
+%<debug>  /MT@dinfo@nl{3}{> `/the/MT@toks' is a \char (/MT@char@)}%
+        /fi
+      }%
+    }%
+  }
+/x
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@is@composite}
+% Here, we are dealing with accented characters, specified as two tokens.
+%\changes{v1.7}{2005/03/10}{new macro: construct command for composite character;
+%                           no uncontrolled expansion}
+%\changes{v2.2}{2007/06/08}{more robust: expand exactly once}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@is@composite#1#2\relax{%
+  \ifx\\#2\\\else
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Again, we construct a control sequence, this time of the form:
+% |\\|\meta{encoding}\allowbreak|\|\meta{accent}|-|\meta{character}, \eg,
+% |\\T1\"-a|, which we then expand once to see if it is a letter (if it has
+% been defined by \cs{DeclareTextComposite}). This should be robust, finally,
+% especially, since we also \cmd\detokenize\ the input instead of only
+% \cmd\string ifying it. Thus, we will die gracefully even on wrong Unicode
+% input without |utf8|.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \expandafter\def\expandafter\MT@char\expandafter{\csname\expandafter
+                    \string\csname\MT@encoding\endcsname
+                    \MT@detokenize@n{#1}-\MT@detokenize@n{#2}\endcsname}%
+    \expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\MT@is@letter\MT@char\relax\relax
+  \fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+% [What about math? Well, for a moment the following looked like a solution, with
+% \cs{mt@is@mathchar} defined accordingly, analogous to \cs{MT@is@char} above,
+% to pick up the last two tokens (the \cmd\meaning\ of a \cmd\mathchardef'ed
+% command expands to its hexadecimal notation):
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\def\MT@is@mathchar#1{%
+%  \if\relax\noexpand#1% it's a macro
+%    \let\x#1%
+%  \else % it's a character
+%    \mathchardef\x=\mathcode`#1\relax
+%  \fi
+%  \expandafter\MT@exp@two@c\expandafter\mt@is@mathchar\expandafter
+%    \meaning\expandafter\x\mt@mathcharstring\relax\relax\relax
+%}
+%\end{verbatim}
+% However, the problem is that \cmd\mathcode s and \cmd\mathchardef s have
+% global scope. Therefore, if they are changed by a package that loads
+% different math fonts, there is no guarantee whatsoever that things will still
+% be correct (\eg, the minus in |cmsy| when the \pkg{euler} package is loaded).
+% So, no way to go, unfortunately.]
+%
+% Some warning messages, for performance reasons separated here.
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@curr@list@name}
+%\changes{v1.8}{2005/06/08}{new macro: current list type and name}
+%\changes{v1.9f}{2006/08/03}{fix: \cs{MessageBreak} must not be expanded}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@set@listname}
+% The type and name of the current list, defined at various places.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@set@listname{%
+  \edef\MT@curr@list@name{\@nameuse{MT@abbr@\MT@feat} list\noexpand\MessageBreak
+    `\@nameuse{MT@\MT@feat @c@name}'}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@warn@ascii}
+% For `other' characters \textgreater\ 127, we issue a warning (\pkg{inputenc}
+% probably hasn't been loaded), since correspondence with the slot numbers
+% would be purely coincidental.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@warn@ascii{%
+  \MT@warning@nl{Character `\the\MT@toks' (= \MT@char@)
+    is outside of ASCII range.\MessageBreak
+    You must load the `inputenc' package before using\MessageBreak
+    8-bit characters in \MT@curr@list@name}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@warn@number@too@large}
+% Number too large.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@warn@number@too@large#1{%
+  \MT@warning@nl{%
+    Number #1 in encoding `\MT@encoding' too large!\MessageBreak
+    Ignoring it in \MT@curr@list@name}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@warn@rest}
+% Not all of the string has been parsed.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@warn@rest{%
+  \MT@warning@nl{%
+    Unknown slot number of character\MessageBreak`\the\MT@toks'%
+    \MT@warn@maybe@inputenc\MessageBreak
+    in font encoding `\MT@encoding'.\MessageBreak
+    Make sure it's a single character\MessageBreak
+    (or a number) in \MT@curr@list@name}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@warn@unknown}
+% No idea what went wrong.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@warn@unknown{%
+  \MT@warning@nl{%
+    Unknown slot number of character\MessageBreak`\the\MT@toks'%
+    \MT@warn@maybe@inputenc\MessageBreak
+    in font encoding `\MT@encoding' in \MT@curr@list@name}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@warn@maybe@inputenc}
+% In case an input encoding had been requested.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@warn@maybe@inputenc{%
+  \MT@ifdefined@n@T
+     {MT@\MT@feat @\MT@cat @\csname MT@\MT@feat @\MT@cat @name\endcsname @inputenc}%
+    { (input encoding `\@nameuse
+     {MT@\MT@feat @\MT@cat @\csname MT@\MT@feat @\MT@cat @name\endcsname @inputenc}')}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%
+%\subsubsection{Hook into \LaTeX's font selection}\label{sssec:impl.hook}
+%
+% We append \cs{MT@setupfont} to \cmd\pickup@font, which is called by \LaTeX\
+% every time a font is selected. We then check whether we've already seen this
+% font, and if not, set it up for micro-typography.
+% This ensures that we will catch all fonts, and that we will not set up fonts
+% more than once. The whole package really hangs on this command.
+%
+% In contrast to the \pkg{pdfcprot} package, it is not necessary to declare in
+% advance which fonts should benefit from micro-typographic treatment. Also,
+% only those fonts that are actually being used will be set up.
+%
+% For my reference:
+%\begin{itemize}
+%  \item \cmd\pickup@font\ is called by \cmd\selectfont, \cmd\wrong@fontshape,
+%     or \\ \cmd\getanddefine@fonts\ (for math).
+%  \item \cmd\pickup@font\ calls \cmd\define@newfont.
+%  \item \cmd\define@newfont\ may call (inside a group!)
+%  \begin{itemize}
+%     \item \cmd\wrong@fontshape, which in turn will call \cmd\pickup@font,
+%        and thus \\ \cmd\define@newfont\ again, or
+%     \item \cmd\extract@font.
+%  \end{itemize}
+%  \item \cmd\get@external@font\ is called by \cmd\extract@font, by itself,
+%        and by the substitution macros.
+%\end{itemize}
+%
+%\iffalse
+%\changes{v1.2}{2004/10/02}{check for packages that might load fonts}
+%\changes{v1.4}{2004/11/04}{no need to check for packages that might load fonts anymore}
+%\fi
+%\changes{v1.4}{2004/11/04}{use \cmd\pickup@font\ instead of \cmd\define@newfont\
+%                           as the hook for \cs{MT@setupfont}}
+% Up to version 1.3 of this package, we were using \cmd\define@newfont\ as the
+% hook, which is only called for \emph{new} fonts, and therefore seemed the
+% natural choice. However, this meant that we had to take special care to catch
+% all fonts: we additionally had to set up the default font, the error font (if
+% it wasn't the default font), we had to check for some packages that might
+% have been loaded before \microtype\ and were loading fonts, \eg,
+% \pkg{jurabib}, \pkg{ledmac}, \pkg{pifont} (loaded by \pkg{hyperref}),
+% \pkg{tipa}, and probably many more. Furthermore, we had to include a hack for
+% the \pkg{IEEEtran} class which loads all fonts in the class file itself (to
+% fine tune inter-word spacing), and the \pkg{memoir} class, too. To cut this
+% short: it seemed to get out of hand, and I decided that it would be better to
+% use \cmd\pickup@font\ and decide for ourselves whether we've already seen
+% that font. I hope the overhead isn't too large.
+%\changes{v1.8}{2005/05/15}{if font substitution has occurred, set up the
+%                           substitute font, not the selected one}
+%\changes{v1.9}{2005/10/03}{allow context-specific font setup}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@font@list}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@font}
+% We use a comma separated list.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\MT@font@list\@empty
+\let\MT@font\@empty
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+% All this is done at the beginning of the document.
+% It doesn't work for plain, of course, which doesn't have \cmd\pickup@font.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%</package>
+%<plain>\MT@requires@latex2{
+\MT@addto@setup{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\changes{v2.1}{2007/01/15}{compatibility with \pkg{CJK}: also check for its definition}
+%\changes{v2.3b}{2008/05/26}{compatibility with \pkg{CJKutf8}: also check for its definition}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@orig@pickupfont}
+% \microtype\ also works with \pkg{CJK} in the sense that nothing will break
+% when both packages are used at the same time. However, since \pkg{CJK} has
+% its own way of encoding, it is currently not possible to create
+% character-specific settings. That is, the only feature available with
+% \pkg{CJK} fonts is expansion.
+% (Tracking doesn't really work for other reasons.)
+%\todo{fix tracking with \pkg{CJK}, if worth the trouble}^^A
+% Like us, \pkg{CJK} redefines \cmd\pickup@font.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \@ifpackageloaded{CJK}{%
+    \@ifpackagelater{CJK}{2006/10/17}% 4.7.0
+      {\def\MT@orig@pickupfont{\CJK@ifundefined\CJK@plane}}%
+      {\def\MT@orig@pickupfont{\@ifundefined{CJK@plane}}}%
+    \g@addto@macro\MT@orig@pickupfont
+      {{\expandafter\ifx\font@name\relax\define@newfont\fi}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \pkg{CJKutf8} redefines \cmd\pickup@font\ once more (recent versions, in
+% <PDF> mode, as determined by \pkg{ifpdf}, which \pkg{CJKutf8} loads).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \@ifpackageloaded{CJKutf8}%
+      {\@ifpackagelater{CJKutf8}{2008/05/22}% 4.8.0
+        {\ifpdf\expandafter\@secondoftwo\else\expandafter\@firstoftwo\fi}%
+        {\@firstoftwo}}%
+      {\@firstoftwo}%
+    {\g@addto@macro\MT@orig@pickupfont{%
+      {\expandafter\ifx\csname\curr@fontshape/\f@size/\CJK@plane\endcsname\relax
+         \define@newfont\else\xdef\font@name{%
+           \csname \curr@fontshape/\f@size/\CJK@plane\endcsname}\fi}}}%
+    {\g@addto@macro\MT@orig@pickupfont{%
+      {\expandafter\ifx\csname \curr@fontshape/\f@size/\CJK@plane\endcsname\relax
+         \define@newfont\def\CJK@temp{v}%
+         \ifx\CJK@temp\CJK@plane
+           \expandafter\ifx\csname CJK@cmap@\f@family\CJK@plane\endcsname\relax
+           \else\csname CJK@cmap@\f@family\CJK@plane\endcsname\fi
+         \else \CJK@addcmap\CJK@plane \fi
+       \else\xdef\font@name{%
+         \csname \curr@fontshape/\f@size/\CJK@plane\endcsname}\fi}}}%
+  }{%
+    \def\MT@orig@pickupfont{\expandafter\ifx\font@name\relax\define@newfont\fi}%
+  }%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Check whether \cmd\pickup@font\ is defined as expected.
+% The warning issued by \cmd{\CheckCommand*} would be a bit too generic.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \ifx\pickup@font\MT@orig@pickupfont \else
+    \MT@warning@nl{%
+      Command \string\pickup@font\space is not defined as expected.%
+      \MessageBreak Patching it anyway. Some things may break%
+%<*package>
+     .\MessageBreak Double-check whether micro-typography is indeed%
+      \MessageBreak applied to the document.%
+      \MessageBreak (Hint: Turn on `verbose' mode)%
+%</package>
+    }%
+  \fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\pickup@font}
+% Then we append our stuff. Everything is done inside a group.
+%\changes{v2.2}{2007/04/15}{\letterspace: setup inside group}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \g@addto@macro\pickup@font{\begingroup}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% If the \pkg{trace} package is loaded, we turn off tracing of \microtype's
+% setup, which is extremely noisy.
+%\changes{v1.9e}{2006/05/25}{no tracing with \pkg{trace} package}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \MT@with@package@T{trace}{\g@addto@macro\pickup@font{\conditionally@traceoff}}%
+  \g@addto@macro\pickup@font{%
+      \escapechar\m@ne
+%<*package>
+%<debug>      \global\MT@inannottrue
+%<debug>      \MT@glet\MT@pdf@annot\@empty
+%<debug>      \MT@addto@annot{(line \number\inputlineno)}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% If \cs{MT@font} is empty, no substitution has taken place, hence
+% \cmd\font@name\ is correct. Otherwise, if they are different,
+% \cmd\font@name\ does not describe the font actually used. This test will
+% catch first order substitutions, like |bx| to |b|, but it will still fail if
+% the substituting font is itself substituted.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+      \MT@let@cn\MT@font{MT@subst@\expandafter\string\font@name}%
+      \ifx\MT@font\relax
+        \let\MT@font\font@name
+      \else
+        \ifx\MT@font\font@name \else
+%<debug>  \MT@addto@annot{= substituted with \MT@@font}%
+          \MT@register@subst@font
+        \fi
+      \fi
+      \MT@setupfont
+%</package>
+%<letterspace>      \MT@tracking
+    \endgroup
+  }%
+%<*package>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@pickupfont}
+% Remember the patched command for later.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \let\MT@pickupfont\pickup@font
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\do@subst@correction}
+% Additionally, we hook into \cmd\do@subst@correction, which is called if
+% a substitution has taken place, to record the name of the ersatz font.
+% Unfortunately, this will only work for one-level substitutions.
+%\changes{v2.3}{2007/08/05}{remember substitute font for all times
+%                           (reported by \contributor Stephan Hennig <stephanhennig\at arcor.de>)}
+%                               ^^A MID: <46ab4fbb$0$31632$9b4e6d93@newsspool3.arcor-online.net>
+% We have to remember the substitute for the rest of the document, not just for
+% the first time it is called, since we need it every time a font is
+% letterspaced.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \g@addto@macro\do@subst@correction
+    {\edef\MT@font{\csname\curr@fontshape/\f@size\endcsname}%
+     \MT@glet@nc{MT@subst@\expandafter\string\font@name}\MT@font}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\add@accent}
+%\changes{v1.8}{2005/06/14}{fix: disable micro-typographic setup inside \cmd\add@accent\
+%               (reported by \contributor Stephan Hennig <stephanhennig\at arcor.de>)}
+%                    ^^A MID: <42adb0e3$0$27784$9b4e6d93@newsread2.arcor-online.net>
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@orig@add@accent}
+% Inside \cmd\add@accent, we have to disable \microtype's setup, since the
+% grouping in the patched \cmd\pickup@font\ would break the accent if
+% different fonts are used for the base character and the accent. Fortunately,
+% \LaTeX\ takes care that the fonts used for the \cmd\accent\ are already set
+% up, so that we cannot be overlooking them.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \let\MT@orig@add@accent\add@accent
+  \def\add@accent#1#2{%
+    \let\pickup@font\MT@orig@pickupfont
+    \MT@orig@add@accent{#1}{#2}%
+    \let\pickup@font\MT@pickupfont
+  }%
+%</package>
+}
+%<plain>}\relax
+%<*package>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+% Consequently (if all goes well), we are the last ones to change these
+% commands, therefore there is no need to check whether our definition has
+% survived.
+%\changes{v1.6}{2004/12/29}{test whether \cmd\pickup@font\ has changed}
+%\changes{v1.9a}{2005/11/21}{remove superfluous test whether \cmd\pickup@font\ has changed}
+%
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@check@font}
+% Check whether we've already seen the current font.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@check@font{\MT@exp@one@n\MT@in@clist\MT@font\MT@font@list}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@register@subst@font}
+% Register the substituted font.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@register@subst@font{\xdef\MT@font@list{\MT@font@list\font@name,}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@register@font}
+% Register the current font.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@register@font{\xdef\MT@font@list{\MT@font@list\MT@font,}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%
+%\subsubsection{Context-sensitive setup}
+%
+% Here are the variants for context-sensitive setup.
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@active@features}
+% The activated features are stored in this command.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\MT@active@features\@empty
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@check@font@cx}
+% Every feature has its own list of fonts that have already been dealt with. If
+% the font needn't be set up for a feature, we temporarily disable the
+% corresponding setup command.
+%\changes{v1.9a}{2005/11/14}{optimise context-sensitive setup}
+% This should be more efficient than book-keeping the fonts in lists associated
+% with the combination of contexts, as we've done it before.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@check@font@cx{%
+  \MT@if@true
+  \MT@map@clist@c\MT@active@features{%
+    \expandafter\MT@exp@one@n\expandafter\MT@in@clist\expandafter\MT@font
+      \csname MT@##1@\csname MT@##1@context\endcsname font@list\endcsname
+    \ifMT@inlist@
+      \MT@let@nc{MT@\@nameuse{MT@abbr@##1}}\relax
+    \else
+      \MT@if@false
+    \fi
+  }%
+  \ifMT@if@ \MT@inlist@true \else \MT@inlist@false \fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@register@subst@font@cx}
+% Add the substituted font to each feature list.
+%\todo{remove from other lists?}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@register@subst@font@cx{%
+  \MT@map@clist@c\MT@active@features{%
+    \MT@exp@cs\MT@xadd
+      {MT@##1@\csname MT@##1@context\endcsname font@list}%
+      {\font@name,}%
+  }%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@register@font@cx}
+% For each feature, add the current font to the list, unless we didn't set it
+% up.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@register@font@cx{%
+  \MT@map@clist@c\MT@active@features{%
+    \MT@exp@cs\ifx{MT@\@nameuse{MT@abbr@##1}}\relax\else
+      \MT@exp@cs\MT@xadd
+        {MT@##1@\csname MT@##1@context\endcsname font@list}%
+        {\MT@font,}%
+      \def\@tempa{##1}%
+      \MT@exp@cs\MT@map@tlist@c{MT@##1@doc@contexts}\MT@maybe@rem@from@list
+    \fi
+  }%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@maybe@rem@from@list}
+% Recurse through all context font lists of the document and remove the font,
+% unless it's the current context.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@maybe@rem@from@list#1{%
+  \MT@ifstreq{\@tempa/#1}{\@tempa/\csname MT@\@tempa @context\endcsname}\relax{%
+    \expandafter\MT@exp@one@n\expandafter\MT@rem@from@clist\expandafter
+       \MT@font \csname MT@\@tempa @#1font@list\endcsname
+  }%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%
+%\begin{macro}{\microtypecontext}
+%\changes{v1.9}{2005/10/03}{new command: change setup context in the document}
+%\changes{v2.3}{2007/08/05}{made robust (reported by \contributor Stephan Hennig <stephanhennig\at arcor.de>)}
+%                                           ^^A MID: <46ab4fbb$0$31632$9b4e6d93@newsspool3.arcor-online.net>
+% The user may change the context, so that different setups are possible. This
+% is especially useful for multi-lingual documents.
+%
+% Inside the preamble, it shouldn't actually do anything but remember it for
+% later.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\microtypecontext#1{\MT@addto@setup{\microtypecontext{#1}}}
+\MT@addto@setup{%
+  \DeclareRobustCommand\microtypecontext[1]{%
+    \MT@setup@contexts
+    \let\MT@reset@context\relax
+    \setkeys{MTC}{#1}%
+    \selectfont
+    \MT@reset@context
+  }%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\textmicrotypecontext}
+%\changes{v2.2}{2007/07/03}{new command: wrapper around \cs{microtypecontext}}
+% This is just a wrapper around \cs{microtypecontext}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareRobustCommand\textmicrotypecontext[2]{{\microtypecontext{#1}#2}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@reset@context}
+%\changes{v1.9f}{2006/08/03}{only reset context if it has actually been changed}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@reset@context@}
+% We have to reset the font at the end of the group, provided there actually was
+% a change.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@reset@context@{%
+  \MT@vinfo{<<< Resetting contexts\on@line
+%<debug>  \MessageBreak= \MT@pr@context/\MT@ex@context
+%<debug>                /\MT@tr@context/\MT@kn@context/\MT@sp@context
+  }%
+  \selectfont
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@setup@contexts}
+% The first time \cs{microtypecontext} is called, we initialise the context
+% lists and redefine the commands used in \cmd\pickup@font.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@setup@contexts{%
+  \MT@map@clist@c\MT@active@features
+    {\MT@glet@nc{MT@##1@@font@list}\MT@font@list}%
+  \MT@glet\MT@check@font\MT@check@font@cx
+  \MT@glet\MT@register@font\MT@register@font@cx
+  \MT@glet\MT@register@subst@font\MT@register@subst@font@cx
+  \MT@glet\MT@setup@contexts\relax
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+% Define context keys.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\MT@map@clist@c\MT@features@long{%
+  \define@key{MTC}{#1}[]{%
+    \edef\@tempb{\@nameuse{MT@rbba@#1}}%
+    \MT@exp@one@n\MT@in@clist\@tempb\MT@active@features
+    \ifMT@inlist@
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Using an empty context is only asking for trouble, therefore we choose the
+% `|@|' instead (hoping for the \LaTeX\ users' natural awe of this character).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+      \MT@ifempty{##1}{\def\MT@val{@}}{\def\MT@val{##1}}%
+      \MT@exp@cs\ifx{MT@\@tempb @context}\MT@val
+%<debug>\MT@dinfo{1}{>>> no change of #1 context: `\MT@val'}%
+      \else
+        \MT@vinfo{>>> Changing #1 context to `\MT@val'\MessageBreak\on@line
+%<debug>          \space(previous: `\@nameuse{MT@\@tempb @context}')%
+                 }%
+        \def\MT@reset@context{\aftergroup\MT@reset@context@}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The next time we see the font, we have to reset \emph{all} factors.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \MT@glet@nn{MT@reset@\@tempb @codes}{MT@reset@\@tempb @codes@}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% We must also keep track of all contexts in the document.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \expandafter\MT@exp@one@n\expandafter\MT@in@tlist\expandafter
+          \MT@val \csname MT@\@tempb @doc@contexts\endcsname
+        \ifMT@inlist@ \else
+          \MT@exp@cs\MT@xadd{MT@\@tempb @doc@contexts}{{\MT@val}}%
+%<debug>  \MT@dinfo{1}{||| added #1 context: \@nameuse{MT@\@tempb @doc@contexts}}%
+        \fi
+        \MT@edef@n{MT@\@tempb @context}{\MT@val}%
+      \fi
+    \fi
+  }%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@pr@context}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@ex@context}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@tr@context}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@sp@context}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@kn@context}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@pr@doc@contexts}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@ex@doc@contexts}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@tr@doc@contexts}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@sp@doc@contexts}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@kn@doc@contexts}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@extra@context}
+% Initialise the contexts.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\MT@exp@one@n\MT@map@clist@n{\MT@features,nl}{%
+  \MT@def@n{MT@#1@context}{@}%
+  \MT@def@n{MT@#1@doc@contexts}{{@}}%
+}
+\let\MT@extra@context\@empty
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%
+%\subsection{Configuration}
+%
+%\subsubsection{Font sets}
+%\todo{allow for \texttt{load}ing and extending another set; or using more than one set?}
+%
+%\begin{macro}{\DeclareMicrotypeSet}
+%\begin{macro}{\DeclareMicrotypeSet*}
+% Calling this macro will create a comma list for every font attribute of the
+% form: |\MT|\meta{feature}|list@|\meta{attribute}|@|\meta{set name}. If the
+% optional argument is empty, lists for all available features will be created.
+%
+% The third argument must be a list of |key=value| pairs. If a font attribute
+% is not specified, we define the corresponding list to \cmd\relax, so that it
+% does not constitute a constraint.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\DeclareMicrotypeSet{%
+  \@ifstar
+    \MT@DeclareSetAndUseIt
+    \MT@DeclareSet
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@DeclareSet}
+%\changes{v1.1}{2004/09/15}{remove spaces around first argument}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\MT@DeclareSet[3][]{%
+  \KV@@sp@def\@tempa{#1}%
+  \MT@ifempty\@tempa{%
+    \MT@map@clist@c\MT@features{{\MT@declare@sets{##1}{#2}{#3}}}%
+  }{%
+    \MT@map@clist@c\@tempa{{%
+      \KV@@sp@def\@tempa{##1}%
+      \MT@ifempty\@tempa\relax{%
+        \MT@is@feature{set declaration `#2'}{%
+          \MT@exp@one@n\MT@declare@sets
+            {\csname MT@rbba@\@tempa\endcsname}{#2}{#3}%
+        }%
+      }%
+    }}%
+  }%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@DeclareSetAndUseIt}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand\MT@DeclareSetAndUseIt[3][]{%
+  \MT@DeclareSet[#1]{#2}{#3}%
+  \UseMicrotypeSet[#1]{#2}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@curr@set@name}
+% We need to remember the name of the set currently being declared.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\MT@curr@set@name\@empty
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@declare@sets}
+% Define the current set name and parse the keys.
+%\changes{v1.1}{2004/09/20}{remove spaces around set name}
+%\changes{v1.8}{2005/05/15}{warning when redefining a set}
+%\changes{v2.0}{2006/10/16}{fix: empty size list when redefining set}
+%\todo{share one set between features}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@declare@sets#1#2#3{%
+  \KV@@sp@def\MT@curr@set@name{#2}%
+  \MT@ifdefined@n@T{MT@#1@set@@\MT@curr@set@name}{%
+    \MT@warning{Redefining \@nameuse{MT@abbr@#1} set `\MT@curr@set@name'}%
+    \MT@glet@nc{MT@#1list@size@\MT@curr@set@name}\@empty
+  }%
+  \MT@glet@nc{MT@#1@set@@\MT@curr@set@name}\@empty
+%<debug>\MT@dinfo{1}{declaring \@nameuse{MT@abbr@#1} set `\MT@curr@set@name'}%
+  \setkeys{MT@#1@set}{#3}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@define@set@key@}
+% \meta{\#1} = font axis, \meta{\#2} = feature.
+%\changes{v1.8}{2005/04/16}{use comma lists instead of token lists}
+%\changes{v1.9a}{2005/11/21}{don't expand variables immediately
+%                (requested by \contributor Georg Verweyen <verweyen\at gmail.com>)}
+%                   ^^A MID: <437a522d$0$7419$9b4e6d93@newsread4.arcor-online.net>
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@define@set@key@#1#2{%
+  \define@key{MT@#2@set}{#1}[]{%
+    \MT@glet@nc{MT@#2list@#1@\MT@curr@set@name}\@empty
+    \MT@map@clist@n{##1}{%
+      \KV@@sp@def\MT@val{####1}%
+      \MT@get@highlevel{#1}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% We do not add the expanded value to the list~\dots
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+      \MT@exp@two@n\g@addto@macro
+        {\csname MT@#2list@#1@\MT@curr@set@name\expandafter\endcsname}%
+        {\MT@val,}%
+    }%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \dots~but keep in mind that the list has to be expanded at the end of the
+% preamble.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \expandafter\g@addto@macro\expandafter\MT@font@sets
+      \csname MT@#2list@#1@\MT@curr@set@name\endcsname
+%<debug>\MT@dinfo@nl{1}{-- #1: \@nameuse{MT@#2list@#1@\MT@curr@set@name}}%
+  }%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@get@highlevel}
+% Saying, for instance, `|family=rm*|' or `|shape=bf*|' will expand to
+% \cmd\rmdefault\ resp. \cmd\bfdefault.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@get@highlevel#1{%
+  \expandafter\MT@test@ast\MT@val*\@nil\relax{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% And `|family = *|' will become \cmd\familydefault.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \MT@ifempty\@tempa{\def\@tempa{#1}}\relax
+    \edef\MT@val{\expandafter\noexpand\csname \@tempa default\endcsname}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% In contrast to earlier version, these values will not be expanded immediately
+% but at the end of the preamble.
+%\changes{v1.2}{2004/09/26}{check whether defaults have changed}
+%\changes{v1.5}{2004/12/02}{don't test defaults if called after begin document}
+%\changes{v1.9a}{2005/11/21}{no longer check whether defaults have changed}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  }%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@test@ast}
+% It the last character is an asterisk, execute the second argument, otherwise
+% the first one.
+%\changes{v1.7}{2005/03/10}{make it simpler}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@test@ast#1*#2\@nil{%
+  \def\@tempa{#1}%
+  \MT@ifempty{#2}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@font@sets}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@fix@font@set}
+% Fully expand the font specification and fix catcodes for all font sets.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\MT@font@sets\@empty
+\def\MT@fix@font@set#1{%
+  \xdef#1{#1}%
+  \global\@onelevel@sanitize#1%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@define@set@key@size}
+% |size| requires special treatment.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@define@set@key@size#1{%
+  \define@key{MT@#1@set}{size}[]{%
+    \MT@map@clist@n{##1}{%
+      \KV@@sp@def\MT@val{####1}%
+      \expandafter\MT@get@range\MT@val--\@nil
+      \ifx\MT@val\relax \else
+        \MT@exp@cs\MT@xadd
+          {MT@#1list@size@\MT@curr@set@name}%
+          {{{\MT@lower}{\MT@upper}\relax}}%
+      \fi
+    }%
+%<debug>\MT@dinfo@nl{1}{-- size: \@nameuse{MT@#1list@size@\MT@curr@set@name}}%
+  }%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\changes{v1.7}{2005/03/11}{allow specification of size ranges
+%               (suggested by \contributor Andreas B\"uhmann <andreas.buehmann\at web.de>)}
+%                                                            ^^A private mail, 2005/03/10
+% Font sizes may also be specified as ranges. This has been requested by Andreas
+% B\"uhmann, who has also offered valuable help in implementing this. Now, it
+% is for instance possible to set up different lists for fonts with optical
+% sizes. (The MinionPro project is trying to do this for the OpenType version
+% of Adobe's Minion. See \url{http://developer.berlios.de/projects/minionpro/}.)
+%
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@get@range}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@upper}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@lower}
+% Ranges will be stored as triplets of |{|\meta{lower bound}|}|\allowbreak
+% |{|\meta{upper bound}|}|\allowbreak|{|\meta{list name}|}|.
+% For simple sizes, the upper boundary is \textminus1.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@get@range#1-#2-#3\@nil{%
+  \MT@ifempty{#1}{%
+    \MT@ifempty{#2}{%
+      \let\MT@val\relax
+    }{%
+      \def\MT@lower{0}%
+      \def\MT@val{#2}%
+      \MT@get@size
+      \edef\MT@upper{\MT@val}%
+    }%
+  }{%
+    \def\MT@val{#1}%
+    \MT@get@size
+    \ifx\MT@val\relax \else
+      \edef\MT@lower{\MT@val}%
+      \MT@ifempty{#2}{%
+        \MT@ifempty{#3}%
+          {\def\MT@upper{-1}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% 2048\,pt is \TeX's maximum font size.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+          {\def\MT@upper{2048}}%
+      }{%
+        \def\MT@val{#2}%
+        \MT@get@size
+        \ifx\MT@val\relax \else
+          \MT@ifdim\MT@lower>\MT@val{%
+            \MT@error{%
+              Invalid size range (\MT@lower\space > \MT@val) in font set
+              `\MT@curr@set@name'.\MessageBreak Swapping sizes}{}%
+            \edef\MT@upper{\MT@lower}%
+            \edef\MT@lower{\MT@val}%
+          }{%
+            \edef\MT@upper{\MT@val}%
+          }%
+          \MT@ifdim\MT@lower=\MT@upper
+            {\def\MT@upper{-1}}%
+            \relax
+        \fi
+      }%
+    \fi
+  }%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@get@size}
+% Translate a size selection command and normalise it.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@get@size{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% A single star would mean \cs{sizedefault}, which doesn't exist, so we define
+% it to be \cmd\normalsize.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \if*\MT@val\relax
+    \def\@tempa{\normalsize}%
+  \else
+    \MT@let@cn\@tempa{\MT@val}%
+  \fi
+  \ifx\@tempa\relax \else
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The \pkg{relsize} solution of parsing \cmd\@setfontsize\ does not work with the
+% <AMS> classes, among others. I hope my hijacking doesn't do any harm.
+%\changes{v1.2}{2004/09/26}{hijack \cmd\set@fontsize\ instead of \cmd\@setfontsize}
+% We redefine \cmd\set@fontsize, and not \cmd\@setfontsize\ because some classes
+% might define the size selection commands by simply using \cmd\fontsize\
+% (\eg, the \pkg{a0poster} class).
+%\changes{v2.3b}{2008/03/07}{grouping}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \begingroup
+      \def\set@fontsize##1##2##3##4\@nil{\endgroup\def\MT@val{##2}}%
+      \@tempa\@nil
+  \fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Test whether we finally got a number or dimension so that we can strip the
+% `|pt|' (\cmd\@defaultunits\ and \cmd\strip@pt\ are kernel macros).
+%\changes{v1.2}{2004/09/27}{additional magic to catch some errors}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \MT@ifdimen\MT@val{%
+    \@defaultunits\@tempdima\MT@val pt\relax\@nnil
+    \edef\MT@val{\strip@pt\@tempdima}%
+  }{%
+    \MT@warning{Could not parse font size `\MT@val'\MessageBreak
+                in font set `\MT@curr@set@name'}%
+    \let\MT@val\relax
+  }%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\changes{v1.9}{2005/07/13}{\cs{DeclareMicrotypeSet}: new key: \texttt{font}}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@define@set@key@font}
+%\changes{v2.3}{2007/11/20}{\texttt{font}: single asterisk means normal font}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@define@set@key@font#1{%
+  \define@key{MT@#1@set}{font}[]{%
+    \MT@glet@nc{MT@#1list@font@\MT@curr@set@name}\@empty
+    \MT@map@clist@n{##1}{%
+      \KV@@sp@def\MT@val{####1}%
+      \MT@ifstreq\MT@val*{\def\MT@val{*/*/*/*/*}}\relax
+      \expandafter\MT@get@font\MT@val/////\@nil
+      \MT@exp@two@n\g@addto@macro
+        {\csname MT@#1list@font@\MT@curr@set@name\expandafter\endcsname}%
+        {\MT@val,}%
+    }%
+    \expandafter\g@addto@macro\expandafter\MT@font@sets
+      \csname MT@#1list@font@\MT@curr@set@name\endcsname
+%<debug>\MT@dinfo@nl{1}{-- font: \@nameuse{MT@#1list@font@\MT@curr@set@name}}%
+  }%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@get@font}
+% Translate any asterisks.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@get@font#1/#2/#3/#4/#5/#6\@nil{%
+  \MT@get@font@{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}{0}%
+  \ifx\MT@val\relax\def\MT@val{0}\fi
+  \expandafter\g@addto@macro\expandafter\@tempb\expandafter{\MT@val}%
+  \let\MT@val\@tempb
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@get@font@}
+% Helper macro, also used by \cs{MT@get@font@and@size}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@get@font@#1#2#3#4#5#6{%
+  \let\@tempb\@empty
+  \def\MT@temp{#1/#2/#3/#4/#5}%
+  \MT@get@axis{encoding}{#1}%
+  \MT@get@axis{family}  {#2}%
+  \MT@get@axis{series}  {#3}%
+  \MT@get@axis{shape}   {#4}%
+  \ifnum#6>\z@\edef\@tempb{\@tempb*}\fi
+  \MT@ifempty{#5}{%
+    \MT@warn@axis@empty{size}{\string\normalsize}%
+    \def\MT@val{*}%
+  }{%
+    \def\MT@val{#5}%
+  }%
+  \MT@get@size
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@get@axis}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@get@axis#1#2{%
+  \def\MT@val{#2}%
+  \MT@get@highlevel{#1}%
+  \MT@ifempty\MT@val{%
+    \MT@warn@axis@empty{#1}{\csname #1default\endcsname}%
+    \expandafter\def\expandafter\MT@val\expandafter{\csname #1default\endcsname}%
+  }\relax
+  \expandafter\g@addto@macro\expandafter\@tempb\expandafter{\MT@val/}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@warn@axis@empty}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@warn@axis@empty#1#2{%
+  \MT@warning{#1 axis is empty in font specification\MessageBreak
+    `\MT@temp'. Using `#2' instead}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+% We can finally assemble all pieces to define \cs{DeclareMicrotypeSet}'s
+% keys.
+% They are also used for \cs{DisableLigatures}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\MT@exp@one@n\MT@map@clist@n{\MT@features,nl}{%
+  \MT@define@set@key@{encoding}{#1}%
+  \MT@define@set@key@{family}  {#1}%
+  \MT@define@set@key@{series}  {#1}%
+  \MT@define@set@key@{shape}   {#1}%
+  \MT@define@set@key@size      {#1}%
+  \MT@define@set@key@font      {#1}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\begin{macro}{\UseMicrotypeSet}
+% To use a particular set we simply redefine |MT@|\meta{feature}|@setname|.
+% If the optional argument is empty, set names for all features will be
+% redefined.
+%\changes{v1.1}{2004/09/20}{remove spaces around first argument}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand*\UseMicrotypeSet[2][]{%
+  \KV@@sp@def\@tempa{#1}%
+  \MT@ifempty\@tempa{%
+    \MT@map@clist@c\MT@features{{\MT@use@set{##1}{#2}}}%
+  }{%
+    \MT@map@clist@c\@tempa{{%
+      \KV@@sp@def\@tempa{##1}%
+      \MT@ifempty\@tempa\relax{%
+        \MT@is@feature{activation of set `#2'}{%
+          \MT@exp@one@n\MT@use@set
+            {\csname MT@rbba@\@tempa\endcsname}{#2}%
+        }%
+      }%
+    }}%
+  }%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@pr@setname}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@ex@setname}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@tr@setname}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@sp@setname}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@kn@setname}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@use@set}
+% Only use sets that have been declared.
+%\changes{v1.1}{2004/09/20}{remove spaces around set name}
+%\changes{v1.4b}{2004/11/25}{don't use undeclared font sets}
+%\changes{v1.6}{2005/01/19}{retain current set if new set is undeclared}
+%\changes{v1.8}{2005/05/15}{fix: remove braces in first line}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@use@set#1#2{%
+  \KV@@sp@def\@tempa{#2}%
+  \MT@ifdefined@n@TF{MT@#1@set@@\@tempa}{%
+    \MT@xdef@n{MT@#1@setname}{\@tempa}%
+  }{%
+    \MT@ifdefined@n@TF{MT@#1@setname}\relax{%
+      \MT@xdef@n{MT@#1@setname}{\@nameuse{MT@default@#1@set}}%
+    }%
+    \MT@error{%
+      The \@nameuse{MT@abbr@#1} set `\@tempa' is undeclared.\MessageBreak
+      Using set `\@nameuse{MT@#1@setname}' instead}{}%
+  }%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\DeclareMicrotypeSetDefault}
+%\changes{v1.8}{2005/05/15}{new command: set default font set}
+% This command can be used in the main configuration file to declare the
+% default font set, in case no set is specified in the package options.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand*\DeclareMicrotypeSetDefault[2][]{%
+  \KV@@sp@def\@tempa{#1}%
+  \MT@ifempty\@tempa{%
+    \MT@map@clist@c\MT@features{{\MT@set@default@set{##1}{#2}}}%
+  }{%
+    \MT@map@clist@c\@tempa{{%
+      \KV@@sp@def\@tempa{##1}%
+      \MT@ifempty\@tempa\relax{%
+        \MT@is@feature{declaration of default set `#2'}{%
+          \MT@exp@one@n\MT@set@default@set
+            {\csname MT@rbba@\@tempa\endcsname}{#2}%
+        }%
+      }%
+    }}%
+  }%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@default@pr@set}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@default@ex@set}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@default@tr@set}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@default@sp@set}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@default@kn@set}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@set@default@set}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@set@default@set#1#2{%
+  \KV@@sp@def\@tempa{#2}%
+  \MT@ifdefined@n@TF{MT@#1@set@@\@tempa}{%
+%<debug>\MT@dinfo{1}{declaring default \@nameuse{MT@abbr@#1} set `\@tempa'}%
+    \MT@xdef@n{MT@default@#1@set}{\@tempa}%
+  }{%
+    \MT@error{%
+      The \@nameuse{MT@abbr@#1} set `\@tempa' is not declared.\MessageBreak
+      Cannot make it the default set. Using set\MessageBreak `all' instead}{}%
+    \MT@xdef@n{MT@default@#1@set}{all}%
+  }%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%
+%\subsubsection{Variants and aliases}
+%
+%\begin{macro}{\DeclareMicrotypeVariants}
+%\changes{v2.2}{2007/02/04}{new command}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@variants}
+% Specify suffixes for variants (see \file{fontname/variants.map}).
+% The starred version appends to the list.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\MT@variants\@empty
+\def\DeclareMicrotypeVariants{%
+  \@ifstar
+    \MT@DeclareVariants
+    {\let\MT@variants\@empty\MT@DeclareVariants}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@DeclareVariants}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@DeclareVariants#1{%
+  \MT@map@clist@n{#1}{%
+    \KV@@sp@def\@tempa{##1}%
+    \@onelevel@sanitize\@tempa
+    \xdef\MT@variants{\MT@variants{\@tempa}}%
+  }%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\DeclareMicrotypeAlias}
+% This can be used to set an alias name for a font, so that the file and the
+% settings for the aliased font will be loaded.
+%\changes{v1.5}{2004/12/03}{remove spaces around arguments}
+%\changes{v1.8}{2005/05/09}{warning when overriding an alias font}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand*\DeclareMicrotypeAlias[2]{%
+  \KV@@sp@def\@tempa{#1}%
+  \KV@@sp@def\@tempb{#2}%
+  \@onelevel@sanitize\@tempb
+  \MT@ifdefined@n@T{MT@\@tempa @alias}{%
+    \MT@warning{Alias font family `\@tempb' will override
+      alias `\@nameuse{MT@\@tempa @alias}'\MessageBreak
+      for font family `\@tempa'}}%
+  \MT@xdef@n{MT@\@tempa @alias}{\@tempb}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% If we encounter this command while a font is being set up, we also set the
+% alias for the current font so that if \cs{DeclareMicrotypeAlias} has been
+% issued inside a configuration file, the configuration file for the alias font
+% will be loaded, too.
+%\changes{v1.7}{2005/03/23}{may also be used inside configuration files}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \MT@ifdefined@c@T\MT@family{%
+%<debug>\MT@dinfo{1}{Activating alias font `\@tempb' for `\MT@family'}%
+    \MT@glet\MT@familyalias\@tempb
+  }%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\LoadMicrotypeFile}
+%\changes{v1.7}{2005/03/22}{new command (suggested by
+%               \contributor Andreas B\"uhmann <andreas.buehmann\at web.de>)}
+%                                              ^^A private mail, 2005/03/21
+% May be used to load a configuration file manually.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\LoadMicrotypeFile#1{%
+  \KV@@sp@def\@tempa{#1}%
+  \@onelevel@sanitize\@tempa
+  \MT@exp@one@n\MT@in@clist\@tempa\MT@file@list
+  \ifMT@inlist@
+    \MT@vinfo{... Configuration file mt-\@tempa.cfg already loaded}%
+  \else
+    \MT@xadd\MT@file@list{\@tempa,}%
+    \MT@begin@catcodes
+    \InputIfFileExists{mt-\@tempa.cfg}{%
+      \edef\MT@curr@file{mt-\@tempa.cfg}%
+      \MT@vinfo{... Loading configuration file \MT@curr@file}%
+    }{%
+      \MT@warning{... Configuration file mt-\@tempa.cfg\MessageBreak
+                      does not exist}%
+    }%
+    \MT@end@catcodes
+  \fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%
+%\subsubsection{Disabling ligatures}
+%
+%\begin{macro}{\DisableLigatures}
+%\changes{v1.9}{2005/07/11}{new command: disable ligatures (requires \pdftex\ 1.30)}
+%\changes{v2.2}{2007/01/22}{new optional argument: disable selected ligatures only}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@DisableLigatures}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@nl@setname}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@nl@ligatures}
+% This is really simple now: we can re-use the set definitions of
+% \cs{DeclareMicrotypeSet}; there can only be one set, which we'll call
+% `|no ligatures|'.
+%
+% The optional argument may be used to disable selected ligatures only.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\MT@requires@pdftex5{
+\def\DisableLigatures{%
+  \MT@begin@catcodes
+  \MT@DisableLigatures
+}
+\newcommand*\MT@DisableLigatures[2][]{%
+  \MT@ifempty{#1}\relax{\gdef\MT@nl@ligatures{#1}}%
+  \xdef\MT@active@features{\MT@active@features,nl}%
+  \global\MT@noligaturestrue
+  \MT@declare@sets{nl}{no ligatures}{#2}%
+  \gdef\MT@nl@setname{no ligatures}%
+  \MT@end@catcodes
+}
+}{
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+% If \pdftex\ is too old, we throw an error.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand*\DisableLigatures[2][]{%
+  \MT@error{Disabling ligatures of a font is only possible\MessageBreak
+    with pdftex version 1.30 or newer.\MessageBreak
+    Ignoring \string\DisableLigatures}{Upgrade pdftex.}%
+}
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%
+%\subsubsection{Interaction with \pkg{babel}}
+%
+%\begin{macro}{\DeclareMicrotypeBabelHook}
+% Declare the context that should be loaded when a \pkg{babel} language
+% is selected. The command will not check whether a previous declaration will
+% be overwritten.
+%\changes{v2.0}{2005/10/04}{(beta:1) new command: interaction with \pkg{babel}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\DeclareMicrotypeBabelHook#1#2{%
+  \MT@map@clist@n{#1}{%
+    \KV@@sp@def\@tempa{##1}%
+    \MT@gdef@n{MT@babel@\@tempa}{#2}%
+  }%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%
+%
+%\subsubsection{Fine tuning}
+%
+% The commands \cs{SetExpansion} and \cs{SetProtrusion} provide an interface for
+% setting the character protrusion resp. expansion factors for a set of fonts.
+%
+%\begin{macro}{\SetProtrusion}
+%\changes{v1.9}{2005/07/13}{(et al.) new key: \texttt{font}}
+%\changes{v1.9d}{2006/02/23}{(et al.) split keys of optional and mandatory argument}
+%\changes{v1.9d}{2006/02/23}{(et al.) optimise: unify keys for mandatory argument}
+%\changes{v1.9e}{2006/07/26}{(et al.) new key: \texttt{inputenc}}
+%\changes{v1.9f}{2006/08/10}{(et al.) set catcodes before parsing optional argument}
+% This macro accepts three arguments: [options,] set of font attributes and
+% list of character protrusion factors.
+%
+% A new macro called |\MT@pr@c@|\meta{name} will be defined to be \meta{\#3}
+% (\ie, the list of characters, not expanded).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\SetProtrusion{%
+  \MT@begin@catcodes
+  \MT@SetProtrusion
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@SetProtrusion}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@pr@c@name}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@extra@context}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@permutelist}
+% We want the catcodes to be correct even if this is called in the preamble.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*\MT@SetProtrusion[3][]{%
+  \let\MT@extra@context\@empty
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Parse the optional first argument. We first have to know the name before we
+% can deal with the extra options.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \MT@set@named@keys{MT@pr@c}{#1}%
+%<debug>\MT@dinfo{1}{creating protrusion list `\MT@pr@c@name'}%
+  \def\MT@permutelist{pr@c}%
+  \setkeys{MT@cfg}{#2}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% We have parsed the second argument, and can now define macros for all
+% permutations of the font attributes to point to |\MT@pr@c@|\meta{name},~\dots
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \MT@permute
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \dots~which we can now define to be \meta{\#3}.
+% Here, as elsewhere, we have to make the definitions global, since they will
+% occur inside a group.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \MT@gdef@n{MT@pr@c@\MT@pr@c@name}{#3}%
+  \MT@end@catcodes
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\SetExpansion}
+%\changes{v1.4}{2004/11/10}{fix: specifying extra options does no
+%                           longer require to give a \texttt{name}, too}
+%\changes{v1.9e}{2006/07/26}{new key: \texttt{inputenc}}
+% \cs{SetExpansion} only differs in that it allows some extra options
+% (|stretch|, |shrink|, |step|, |auto|).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\SetExpansion{%
+  \MT@begin@catcodes
+  \MT@SetExpansion
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@SetExpansion}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@ex@c@name}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@extra@context}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@permutelist}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*\MT@SetExpansion[3][]{%
+  \let\MT@extra@context\@empty
+  \MT@set@named@keys{MT@ex@c}{#1}%
+  \MT@ifdefined@n@T{MT@ex@c@\MT@ex@c@name @factor}{%
+    \ifnum\csname MT@ex@c@\MT@ex@c@name @factor\endcsname > \@m
+      \MT@warning@nl{Expansion factor \number\@nameuse{MT@ex@c@\MT@ex@c@name @factor}
+        too large in list\MessageBreak `\MT@ex@c@name'. Setting it to the
+        maximum of 1000}%
+      \MT@glet@nc{MT@ex@c@\MT@ex@c@name @factor}\@m
+    \fi
+  }%
+%<debug>\MT@dinfo{1}{creating expansion list `\MT@ex@c@name'}%
+  \def\MT@permutelist{ex@c}%
+  \setkeys{MT@cfg}{#2}%
+  \MT@permute
+  \MT@gdef@n{MT@ex@c@\MT@ex@c@name}{#3}%
+  \MT@end@catcodes
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\SetTracking}
+%\changes{v2.0}{2006/12/28}{new command: tracking}
+%\changes{v2.2}{2007/02/23}{third argument may be empty}
+%\changes{v2.2}{2007/02/23}{new key `\texttt{no ligatures}' to disable
+%                           ligatures of letterspaced fonts}
+%\changes{v2.2}{2007/06/16}{new keys `\texttt{spacing}' and `\texttt{outer spacing}'
+%                           to adjust interword spacing
+%                           (suggested by \contributor Steven~E. Harris <seh\at panix.com>)}
+%                                                             ^^A private mail, 2007/06/15
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\SetTracking{%
+  \MT@begin@catcodes
+  \MT@SetTracking
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@SetTracking}
+% Third argument may be empty.
+%\changes{v2.3}{2007/11/20}{sanity check for value}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*\MT@SetTracking[3][]{%
+  \let\MT@extra@context\@empty
+  \MT@set@named@keys{MT@tr@c}{#1}%
+%<debug>\MT@dinfo{1}{creating tracking list `\MT@tr@c@name'}%
+  \def\MT@permutelist{tr@c}%
+  \setkeys{MT@cfg}{#2}%
+  \MT@permute
+  \KV@@sp@def\@tempa{#3}%
+  \MT@ifempty\@tempa\relax{%
+    \MT@ifint\@tempa
+      {\MT@xdef@n{MT@tr@c@\MT@tr@c@name}{\@tempa}}%
+      {\MT@warning{Value `\@tempa' is not a number in\MessageBreak
+                   tracking set `\MT@curr@set@name'}}}%
+  \MT@end@catcodes
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\SetExtraSpacing}
+%\changes{v2.0}{2005/09/28}{(beta:1) new command: adjustment of interword spacing}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\SetExtraSpacing{%
+  \MT@begin@catcodes
+  \MT@SetExtraSpacing
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@SetExtraSpacing}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@sp@c@name}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@extra@context}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@permutelist}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*\MT@SetExtraSpacing[3][]{%
+  \let\MT@extra@context\@empty
+  \MT@set@named@keys{MT@sp@c}{#1}%
+%<debug>\MT@dinfo{1}{creating spacing list `\MT@sp@c@name'}%
+  \def\MT@permutelist{sp@c}%
+  \setkeys{MT@cfg}{#2}%
+  \MT@permute
+  \MT@gdef@n{MT@sp@c@\MT@sp@c@name}{#3}%
+  \MT@end@catcodes
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\SetExtraKerning}
+%\changes{v2.0}{2005/09/28}{(beta:1) new command: additional kerning}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\SetExtraKerning{%
+  \MT@begin@catcodes
+  \MT@SetExtraKerning
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@SetExtraKerning}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@kn@c@name}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@extra@context}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@permutelist}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newcommand*\MT@SetExtraKerning[3][]{%
+  \let\MT@extra@context\@empty
+  \MT@set@named@keys{MT@kn@c}{#1}%
+%<debug>\MT@dinfo{1}{creating kerning list `\MT@kn@c@name'}%
+  \def\MT@permutelist{kn@c}%
+  \setkeys{MT@cfg}{#2}%
+  \MT@permute
+  \MT@gdef@n{MT@kn@c@\MT@kn@c@name}{#3}%
+  \MT@end@catcodes
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@set@named@keys}
+%\changes{v1.9f}{2006/08/10}{new macro: set name first, simplify parsing of
+%                            optional argument}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@options}
+% We first set the name (if specified), then remove it from the list, and set
+% the remaining keys.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@set@named@keys#1#2{%
+  \def\x##1name=##2,##3\@nil{%
+    \setkeys{#1}{name=##2}%
+    \gdef\MT@options{##1##3}%
+    \MT@rem@from@clist{name=}\MT@options
+  }%
+  \x#2,name=,\@nil
+  \@expandtwoargs\setkeys{#1}\MT@options
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@define@code@key}
+% Define the keys for the configuration lists (which are setting the codes, in
+% \pdftex\ speak).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@define@code@key#1#2{%
+  \define@key{MT@#2}{#1}[]{%
+    \@tempcnta=\@ne
+    \MT@map@clist@n{##1}{%
+      \KV@@sp@def\MT@val{####1}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Here, too, we allow for something like `|bf*|'. It will be expanded
+% immediately.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+      \MT@get@highlevel{#1}%
+      \MT@edef@n{MT@temp#1\the\@tempcnta}{\MT@val}%
+      \advance\@tempcnta \@ne
+    }%
+  }%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@define@code@key@size}
+%\changes{v1.9c}{2006/01/25}{fix: embrace \cs{MT@tempsize} in \cmd\csname\
+%                            (bug introduced in v1.9b)}
+% \cs{MT@tempsize} must be in a \cmd\csname, so that it is at least
+% \cmd\relax, not undefined.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@define@code@key@size#1{%
+  \define@key{MT@#1}{size}[]{%
+    \MT@map@clist@n{##1}{%
+      \KV@@sp@def\MT@val{####1}%
+      \expandafter\MT@get@range\MT@val--\@nil
+      \ifx\MT@val\relax \else
+        \MT@exp@cs\MT@xadd{MT@tempsize}%
+           {{{\MT@lower}{\MT@upper}{\MT@curr@set@name}}}%
+      \fi
+    }%
+  }%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@define@code@key@font}
+%\changes{v1.9c}{2006/01/25}{fix: context was ignored}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@define@code@key@font#1{%
+  \define@key{MT@#1}{font}[]{%
+    \MT@map@clist@n{##1}{%
+      \KV@@sp@def\MT@val{####1}%
+      \MT@ifstreq\MT@val*{\def\MT@val{*/*/*/*/*}}\relax
+      \expandafter\MT@get@font@and@size\MT@val/////\@nil
+      \MT@xdef@n{MT@\MT@permutelist @\@tempb\MT@extra@context}%
+        {\csname MT@\MT@permutelist @name\endcsname}%
+%<debug>\MT@dinfo@nl{1}{initialising: use list for font \@tempb=\MT@val
+%<debug>                \ifx\MT@extra@context\@empty\else\MessageBreak
+%<debug>                  (context: \MT@extra@context)\fi}%
+      \MT@exp@cs\MT@xaddb
+        {MT@\MT@permutelist @\@tempb\MT@extra@context @sizes}%
+        {{{\MT@val}{\m@ne}{\MT@curr@set@name}}}%
+    }%
+  }%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@get@font@and@size}
+% Translate any asterisks and split off the size.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@get@font@and@size#1/#2/#3/#4/#5/#6\@nil{%
+  \MT@get@font@{#1}{#2}{#3}{#4}{#5}{1}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\MT@define@code@key{encoding}{cfg}
+\MT@define@code@key{family}  {cfg}
+\MT@define@code@key{series}  {cfg}
+\MT@define@code@key{shape}   {cfg}
+\MT@define@code@key@size     {cfg}
+\MT@define@code@key@font     {cfg}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@define@opt@key}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@define@opt@key#1#2{%
+  \define@key{MT@#1@c}{#2}[]{\MT@ifempty{##1}\relax{%
+    \MT@xdef@n{MT@#1@c@\MT@curr@set@name @#2}{##1}}}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+% The options in the optional first argument.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\MT@map@clist@c\MT@features{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\changes{v1.9a}{2005/11/21}{`\meta{file name}\texttt{/}\meta{line number}' as default list name}
+% Use file name and line number as the list name if the user didn't bother
+% to invent one.
+%\changes{v1.3}{2004/10/27}{fix: specifying \texttt{load} option does no
+%                           longer require to give a \texttt{name}, too}
+%\changes{v2.2}{2007/01/28}{simplify key declarations}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \define@key{MT@#1@c}{name}[]{%
+    \MT@ifempty{##1}{%
+      \MT@edef@n{MT@#1@c@name}{\MT@curr@file/\the\inputlineno}%
+    }{%
+      \MT@edef@n{MT@#1@c@name}{##1}%
+      \MT@ifdefined@n@T{MT@#1@c@\csname MT@#1@c@name\endcsname}{%
+        \MT@warning{Redefining \@nameuse{MT@abbr@#1} list `\@nameuse{MT@#1@c@name}'}%
+      }%
+    }%
+    \MT@let@cn\MT@curr@set@name{MT@#1@c@name}%
+  }%
+  \MT@define@opt@key{#1}{load}%
+  \MT@define@opt@key{#1}{factor}%
+  \MT@define@opt@key{#1}{preset}%
+  \MT@define@opt@key{#1}{inputenc}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Only one context is allowed. This might change in the future.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \define@key{MT@#1@c}{context}[]{\MT@ifempty{##1}\relax{\def\MT@extra@context{##1}}}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Automatically enable font copying if we find a protrusion or expansion context.
+% After the preamble, check whether font copying is enabled.
+% For older \pdftex\ versions, disallow.
+% Also disable for \luatex.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\MT@requires@pdftex7{
+%<*lua>
+  \MT@requires@luatex{
+    \define@key{MT@ex@c}{context}[]{%
+      \MT@error{Expansion contexts currently don't work with luatex.\MessageBreak
+          Ignoring `context' key\on@line}%
+        {Use pdftex instead.}%
+    }
+  }{
+%</lua>
+    \define@key{MT@ex@c}{context}[]{%
+      \MT@ifempty{#1}\relax{%
+        \MT@glet\MT@copy@font\MT@copy@font@
+        \def\MT@extra@context{#1}%
+      }%
+    }
+    \MT@addto@setup{%
+      \define@key{MT@ex@c}{context}[]{%
+        \ifx\MT@copy@font\MT@copy@font@
+          \MT@ifempty{#1}\relax{\def\MT@extra@context{#1}}%
+        \else
+          \MT@error{\MT@MT\space isn't set up for expansion contexts.\MessageBreak
+             Ignoring `context' key\on@line}%
+            {Either move the settings inside the preamble,\MessageBreak
+             or load the package with the `copyfonts' option.}%
+        \fi
+      }%
+    }
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Protrusion contexts \emph{may} also work without copying the font, so we
+% don't issue an error but only a warning. The problem is that \pdftex\ only
+% allows one set of protrusion factors for a given font within one paragraph
+% (those that are in effect at the end of the paragraph will be in effect for
+% the whole paragraph). When different fonts are loaded -- like in the example
+% with the footnote markers -- we don't need to copy the fonts.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \define@key{MT@pr@c}{context}[]{%
+      \MT@ifempty{#1}\relax{%
+        \MT@glet\MT@copy@font\MT@copy@font@
+        \def\MT@extra@context{#1}%
+      }%
+    }
+    \MT@addto@setup{%
+      \define@key{MT@pr@c}{context}[]{%
+        \MT@ifempty{#1}\relax{\def\MT@extra@context{#1}}%
+        \ifx\MT@copy@font\MT@copy@font@\else
+          \MT@warning@nl{If protrusion contexts don't work as expected,
+            \MessageBreak load the package with the `copyfonts' option}%
+        \fi
+      }%
+    }
+%<lua>  }
+}{
+  \define@key{MT@ex@c}{context}[]{%
+    \MT@error{Expansion contexts only work with pdftex 1.40.4\MessageBreak
+        or later. Ignoring `context' key\on@line}%
+      {Upgrade pdftex.}%
+  }
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@warn@nodim}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@warn@nodim#1{%
+  \MT@warning{`\@tempa' is not a dimension.\MessageBreak
+              Ignoring it and setting values relative to\MessageBreak #1}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\changes{v1.8}{2005/04/14}{\cs{SetProtrusion}: new key: \texttt{unit}}
+%\changes{v1.9}{2005/09/28}{\cs{SetProtrusion}: value `\texttt{relative}' renamed
+%                           to `\texttt{character}' for key \texttt{unit}}
+%\changes{v2.0}{2006/09/30}{option `\opt{unit}', \cs{SetProtrusion}:
+%                           deprecate value `\texttt{relative}' completely}
+% Protrusion codes may be relative to character width, or to any dimension.
+%\todo{new key for unit: \texttt{dimen} (for \texttt{kerning}, especially)}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\define@key{MT@pr@c}{unit}[character]{%
+  \MT@glet@nc{MT@pr@c@\MT@curr@set@name @unit}\@empty
+  \def\@tempa{#1}%
+  \MT@ifstreq\@tempa{character}\relax{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Test whether it's a dimension, but do not translate it into its final
+% form here, since it may be font-specific.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \MT@ifdimen\@tempa
+      {\MT@glet@nc{MT@pr@c@\MT@curr@set@name @unit}\@tempa}%
+      {\MT@warn@nodim{character widths}}%
+  }%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Tracking may only be relative to a dimension.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\define@key{MT@tr@c}{unit}[1em]{%
+  \MT@glet@nc{MT@tr@c@\MT@curr@set@name @unit}\@empty
+  \def\@tempa{#1}%
+  \MT@ifdimen\@tempa
+    {\MT@glet@nc{MT@tr@c@\MT@curr@set@name @unit}\@tempa}%
+    {\MT@warn@nodim{1em}%
+     \MT@gdef@n{MT@tr@c@\MT@curr@set@name @unit}{1em}}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Spacing and kerning codes may additionally be relative to space dimensions.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\MT@map@clist@n{sp,kn}{%
+  \define@key{MT@#1@c}{unit}[space]{%
+    \MT@glet@nc{MT@#1@c@\MT@curr@set@name @unit}\@empty
+    \def\@tempa{##1}%
+    \MT@ifstreq\@tempa{character}\relax{%
+      \MT@glet@nc{MT@#1@c@\MT@curr@set@name @unit}\m@ne
+      \MT@ifstreq\@tempa{space}\relax{%
+        \MT@ifdimen\@tempa
+          {\MT@glet@nc{MT@#1@c@\MT@curr@set@name @unit}\@tempa}%
+          {\MT@warn@nodim{width of space}}%
+      }%
+    }%
+  }%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The first argument to \cs{SetExpansion} accepts some more options.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\MT@map@clist@n{stretch,shrink,step}{%
+  \define@key{MT@ex@c}{#1}[]{%
+    \MT@ifempty{##1}\relax{%
+      \MT@ifint{##1}{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% A space terminates the number.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \MT@gdef@n{MT@ex@c@\MT@curr@set@name @#1}{##1 }%
+      }{%
+        \MT@warning{%
+          Value `##1' for option `#1' is not a number.\MessageBreak
+          Ignoring it}%
+      }%
+    }%
+  }%
+}
+\define@key{MT@ex@c}{auto}[true]{%
+  \def\@tempa{#1}%
+  \csname if\@tempa\endcsname
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Don't use |autoexpand| for \pdftex\ version older than 1.20.
+%\changes{v1.7}{2005/03/07}{fix: remove space after \texttt{autoexpand}}
+%\changes{v1.7}{2005/03/07}{disallow automatic expansion if \pdftex\ too old}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \MT@requires@pdftex4{%
+      \MT@gdef@n{MT@ex@c@\MT@curr@set@name @auto}{autoexpand}%
+    }{%
+      \MT@warning{pdftex too old for automatic font expansion}%
+    }
+  \else
+    \MT@requires@pdftex4{%
+      \MT@glet@nc{MT@ex@c@\MT@curr@set@name @auto}\@empty
+    }\relax
+  \fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Tracking: Interword spacing and outer kerning.
+% The variant with space in case \cs{SetTracking} is called inside an argument
+% (\eg, to \cmd\IfFileExists).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\MT@define@opt@key{tr}{spacing}
+\MT@define@opt@key{tr}{outerspacing}
+\MT@define@opt@key{tr}{outerkerning}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Which ligatures should be disabled?
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\define@key{MT@tr@c}{noligatures}[]%
+  {\MT@xdef@n{MT@tr@c@\MT@curr@set@name @noligatures}{#1}}
+\define@key{MT@tr@c}{outer spacing}[]{\setkeys{MT@tr@c}{outerspacing={#1}}}
+\define@key{MT@tr@c}{outer kerning}[]{\setkeys{MT@tr@c}{outerkerning={#1}}}
+\define@key{MT@tr@c}{no ligatures}[]{\setkeys{MT@tr@c}{noligatures={#1}}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%\subsubsection{Character inheritance}
+%
+%\begin{macro}{\DeclareCharacterInheritance}
+%\changes{v1.1}{2004/09/15}{new command: possibility to specify character inheritance}
+%\changes{v1.9d}{2006/02/09}{fix: empty context}
+%\changes{v1.9e}{2006/07/26}{new key `\texttt{inputenc}' to set the input encoding}
+% This macro may be used in the configuration files to declare characters that
+% should inherit protrusion resp. expansion values from other characters. Thus,
+% there is no need to define all accented characters (\eg, |\`a|, |\'a|,
+% |\^a|, |\~a|, |\"a|, |\r{a}|, |\k{a}|, |\u{a}|), which will make the
+% configuration files look much nicer and easier to maintain. If a single
+% character of an inheritance list should have a different value, one can
+% simply override it.
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@inh@feat}
+% The optional argument may be used to restrict the list to some features,
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@extra@inputenc}
+% and to specify an input encoding.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\renewcommand*\DeclareCharacterInheritance[1][]{%
+  \let\MT@extra@context\@empty
+  \let\MT@extra@inputenc\@undefined
+  \let\MT@inh@feat\@empty
+  \setkeys{MT@inh@}{#1}%
+  \MT@begin@catcodes
+  \MT@set@inh@list
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@set@inh@list}
+% Safe category codes.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@set@inh@list#1#2{%
+  \MT@ifempty\MT@inh@feat{%
+    \MT@map@clist@c\MT@features{{\MT@declare@char@inh{##1}{#1}{#2}}}%
+  }{%
+    \MT@map@clist@c\MT@inh@feat{{%
+      \KV@@sp@def\@tempa{##1}%
+      \MT@ifempty\@tempa\relax{%
+        \MT@exp@one@n\MT@declare@char@inh
+          {\csname MT@rbba@\@tempa\endcsname}{#1}{#2}%
+      }%
+    }}%
+  }%
+  \MT@end@catcodes
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\changes{v1.9f}{2006/08/09}{fix: forgotten comma in the features list}
+%\end{macro}
+% The keys for the optional argument.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\MT@map@clist@c\MT@features@long{%
+  \define@key{MT@inh@}{#1}[]{\edef\MT@inh@feat{\MT@inh@feat#1,}}}
+\define@key{MT@inh@}{inputenc}{\def\MT@extra@inputenc{#1}}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@declare@char@inh}
+%\todo{share one list between features}
+% The lists cannot be given a name by the user.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@declare@char@inh#1#2#3{%
+  \MT@edef@n{MT@#1@inh@name}%
+    {\MT@curr@file/\the\inputlineno (\@nameuse{MT@abbr@#1})}%
+  \MT@let@cn\MT@curr@set@name{MT@#1@inh@name}%
+  \MT@ifdefined@c@T\MT@extra@inputenc{%
+    \MT@xdef@n{MT@#1@inh@\MT@curr@set@name @inputenc}{\MT@extra@inputenc}}%
+%<debug>\MT@dinfo{1}{creating inheritance list `\@nameuse{MT@#1@inh@name}'}%
+  \MT@gdef@n{MT@#1@inh@\csname MT@#1@inh@name\endcsname}{#3}%
+  \def\MT@permutelist{#1@inh}%
+  \setkeys{MT@inh}{#2}%
+  \MT@permute
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+% Parse the second argument. \cs{DeclareCharacterInheritance} may also be set
+% up for various combinations.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\define@key{MT@inh}{encoding}[]{%
+  \def\MT@val{#1}%
+  \expandafter\MT@encoding@check\MT@val,\@nil
+  \MT@get@highlevel{encoding}%
+  \MT@edef@n{MT@tempencoding1}{\MT@val}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@encoding@check}
+%\changes{v1.2}{2004/09/29}{check whether only one encoding specified}
+% But we only allow \emph{one} encoding.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@encoding@check#1,#2\@nil{%
+  \MT@ifempty{#2}\relax{%
+    \edef\MT@val{#1}%
+    \MT@warning{You may only specify one encoding for character\MessageBreak
+                inheritance lists. Ignoring encoding(s) #2}%
+  }%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+% For the rest, we can reuse the key setup from the configuration lists
+% (|\Set...|).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\MT@define@code@key{family}{inh}
+\MT@define@code@key{series}{inh}
+\MT@define@code@key{shape} {inh}
+\MT@define@code@key@size   {inh}
+\MT@define@code@key@font   {inh}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@inh@do}
+% Now parse the third argument, the inheritance lists. We define the commands
+% |\MT@inh@|\meta{name}|@|\meta{slot}|@|, containing the inheriting characters.
+% They will also be translated to slot numbers here, to save some time. The
+% following will be executed only once, namely the first time this inheritance
+% list is encountered (in |\MT@set@|\meta{feature}|@codes|).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@inh@do#1,{%
+  \ifx\relax#1\@empty \else
+    \MT@inh@split #1==\relax
+    \expandafter\MT@inh@do
+  \fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@inh@split}
+% Only gather the inheriting characters here. Their codes will actually be set
+% in |\MT@set@|\meta{feature}|@codes|.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@inh@split#1=#2=#3\relax{%
+  \def\@tempa{#1}%
+  \ifx\@tempa\@empty \else
+    \MT@get@slot
+    \ifnum\MT@char > \m@ne
+      \let\MT@val\MT@char
+      \MT@map@clist@n{#2}{%
+        \def\@tempa{##1}%
+        \ifx\@tempa\@empty \else
+          \MT@get@slot
+          \ifnum\MT@char > \m@ne
+            \MT@exp@cs\MT@xadd{MT@inh@\MT@listname @\MT@val @}{{\MT@char}}%
+          \fi
+        \fi
+      }%
+%<debug>\MT@dinfo@nl{2}{children of #1 (\MT@val):
+%<debug>                \@nameuse{MT@inh@\MT@listname @\MT@val @}}%
+    \fi
+  \fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%
+%\subsubsection{Permutation}
+%
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@permute}
+%\changes{v1.1}{2004/09/15}{don't use sets for empty encoding}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@permute@}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@permute@@}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@permute@@@}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@permute@@@@}
+% Calling \cs{MT@permute} will define commands for all permutations
+% of the specified font attributes of the form
+% |\MT@|\meta{list type}|@/|\allowbreak
+%       \meta{encoding}|/|\allowbreak
+%       \meta{family}|/|\allowbreak
+%       \meta{series}|/|\allowbreak
+%       \meta{shape}|/|\allowbreak
+%       \meta{|\textbar*|}
+% to be the expansion of |\MT@|\meta{list type}|@name|, \ie, the name of the
+% currently defined list. Size ranges are held in a separate macro called
+% |\MT@|\meta{list type}|@/|\allowbreak\meta{font axes}|@sizes|, which in turn
+% contains the respective \meta{list name}s attached to the ranges.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@permute{%
+  \let\MT@cnt@encoding\@ne
+  \MT@permute@
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Undefine commands for the next round.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \MT@map@tlist@n{{encoding}{family}{series}{shape}}\MT@permute@reset
+  \MT@glet\MT@tempsize\@undefined
+}
+\def\MT@permute@{%
+  \let\MT@cnt@family\@ne
+  \MT@permute@@
+  \MT@increment\MT@cnt@encoding
+  \MT@ifdefined@n@T{MT@tempencoding\MT@cnt@encoding}%
+    \MT@permute@
+}
+\def\MT@permute@@{%
+  \let\MT@cnt@series\@ne
+  \MT@permute@@@
+  \MT@increment\MT@cnt@family
+  \MT@ifdefined@n@T{MT@tempfamily\MT@cnt@family}%
+    \MT@permute@@
+}
+\def\MT@permute@@@{%
+  \let\MT@cnt@shape\@ne
+  \MT@permute@@@@
+  \MT@increment\MT@cnt@series
+  \MT@ifdefined@n@T{MT@tempseries\MT@cnt@series}%
+    \MT@permute@@@
+}
+\def\MT@permute@@@@{%
+  \MT@permute@@@@@
+  \MT@increment\MT@cnt@shape
+  \MT@ifdefined@n@T{MT@tempshape\MT@cnt@shape}%
+    \MT@permute@@@@
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@permute@@@@@}
+%\changes{v1.9a}{2005/12/05}{don't define permutations for unused encodings}
+% In order to save some memory, we can ignore unused encodings (inside the
+% document).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@permute@@@@@{%
+  \MT@permute@define{encoding}%
+  \ifMT@document
+    \ifx\MT@tempencoding\@empty \else
+      \MT@ifdefined@n@TF{T@\MT@tempencoding}\relax
+        {\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\@gobble}%
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  \MT@permute@@@@@@
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@permute@@@@@@}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@permute@@@@@@{%
+  \MT@permute@define{family}%
+  \MT@permute@define{series}%
+  \MT@permute@define{shape}%
+  \edef\@tempa{\MT@tempencoding
+              /\MT@tempfamily
+              /\MT@tempseries
+              /\MT@tempshape
+              /\MT@ifdefined@c@T\MT@tempsize *}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\changes{v1.2}{2004/09/29}{more sanity checks for \cs{SetProtrusion} and
+%                          \cs{SetExpansion}}
+% Some sanity checks: an encoding must be specified (unless nothing else is).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \MT@ifstreq\@tempa{////}\relax{%
+    \ifx\MT@tempencoding\@empty
+      \MT@warning{%
+        You have to specify an encoding for\MessageBreak
+        \@nameuse{MT@abbr@\MT@permutelist} list
+        `\@nameuse{MT@\MT@permutelist @name}'.\MessageBreak
+        Ignoring it}%
+    \else
+      \MT@ifdefined@c@TF\MT@tempsize{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Add the list of ranges to the beginning of the current combination, after
+% checking for conflicts.
+%\changes{v1.8}{2005/04/20}{add ranges to the beginning of the lists}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \MT@ifdefined@n@T{MT@\MT@permutelist @\@tempa\MT@extra@context @sizes}{%
+          \MT@map@tlist@c\MT@tempsize\MT@check@rlist
+        }%
+        \MT@exp@cs\MT@xaddb
+          {MT@\MT@permutelist @\@tempa\MT@extra@context @sizes}%
+          \MT@tempsize
+%<debug>\MT@dinfo@nl{1}{initialising: use list for font \@tempa,\MessageBreak
+%<debug>         sizes: \csname MT@\MT@permutelist @\@tempa\MT@extra@context
+%<debug>                        @sizes\endcsname}%
+      }{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Only one list can apply to a given combination.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \MT@ifdefined@n@T{MT@\MT@permutelist @\@tempa\MT@extra@context}{%
+          \MT@warning{\@nameuse{MT@abbr@\MT@permutelist} list
+            `\@nameuse{MT@\MT@permutelist @name}' will override list\MessageBreak
+            `\@nameuse{MT@\MT@permutelist @\@tempa\MT@extra@context}'
+            for font `\@tempa'}%
+        }%
+%<debug>\MT@dinfo@nl{1}{initialising: use list for font \@tempa
+%<debug>                \ifx\MT@extra@context\@empty\else\MessageBreak
+%<debug>                  (context: \MT@extra@context)\fi}%
+      }%
+      \MT@xdef@n{MT@\MT@permutelist @\@tempa\MT@extra@context}%
+          {\csname MT@\MT@permutelist @name\endcsname}%
+    \fi
+  }%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@permute@define}
+% Define the commands.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@permute@define#1{%
+  \@tempcnta=\csname MT@cnt@#1\endcsname\relax
+  \MT@ifdefined@n@TF{MT@temp#1\the\@tempcnta}%
+    {\MT@edef@n{MT@temp#1}{\csname MT@temp#1\the\@tempcnta\endcsname}}%
+    {\MT@let@nc{MT@temp#1}\@empty}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@permute@reset}
+% Reset the commands.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@permute@reset#1{%
+  \@tempcnta=\@ne
+  \MT@loop
+    \MT@let@nc{MT@temp#1\the\@tempcnta}\@undefined
+    \advance\@tempcnta\@ne
+    \MT@ifdefined@n@TF{MT@temp#1\the\@tempcnta}%
+      \iftrue
+      \iffalse
+  \MT@repeat
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@check@rlist}
+%\changes{v1.8}{2005/04/20}{made recursive}
+% For every new range item in \cs{MT@tempsize}, check whether it overlaps with
+% ranges in the existing list.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@check@rlist#1{\expandafter\MT@check@rlist@ #1}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@check@rlist@}
+% Define the current new range and~\dots
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@check@rlist@#1#2#3{%
+  \def\@tempb{#1}%
+  \def\@tempc{#2}%
+  \MT@if@false
+  \MT@exp@cs\MT@map@tlist@c
+    {MT@\MT@permutelist @\@tempa\MT@extra@context @sizes}%
+    \MT@check@range
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@check@range}
+% \dots~recurse through the list of existing ranges.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@check@range#1{\expandafter\MT@check@range@ #1}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@check@range@}
+% \cmd\@tempb\ and \cmd\@tempc\ are lower resp. upper bound of the new range,
+% \meta{\#2} and \meta{\#3} those of the existing range.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@check@range@#1#2#3{%
+  \MT@ifdim{#2}=\m@ne{%
+    \MT@ifdim\@tempc=\m@ne{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\begin{itemize}
+%  \item Both items are simple sizes.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+      \MT@ifdim\@tempb={#1}\MT@if@true\relax
+    }{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  \item Item in list is a simple size, new item is a range.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+      \MT@ifdim\@tempb>{#1}\relax{%
+        \MT@ifdim\@tempc>{#1}{%
+          \MT@if@true
+          \edef\@tempb{#1 (with range: \@tempb\space to \@tempc)}%
+        }\relax
+      }%
+    }%
+  }{%
+    \MT@ifdim\@tempc=\m@ne{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  \item Item in list is a range, new item is a simple size.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+      \MT@ifdim\@tempb<{#2}{%
+        \MT@ifdim\@tempb<{#1}\relax\MT@if@true
+      }\relax
+    }{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  \item Both items are ranges.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+      \MT@ifdim\@tempb<{#2}{%
+        \MT@ifdim\@tempc>{#1}{%
+          \MT@if@true
+          \edef\@tempb{#1 to #2 (with range: \@tempb\space to \@tempc)}%
+        }\relax
+      }\relax
+    }%
+  }%
+  \ifMT@if@
+    \MT@warning{\@nameuse{MT@abbr@\MT@permutelist} list
+      `\@nameuse{MT@\MT@permutelist @name}' will override\MessageBreak
+      list `#3' for font \@tempa,\MessageBreak size \@tempb}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% If we've already found a conflict with this item, we can skip the rest of the
+% list.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \expandafter\MT@tlist@break
+  \fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{itemize}
+%\end{macro}
+%
+%\subsection{Package options}
+%
+%\subsubsection{Declaring the options}
+%
+%\begin{macro}{\ifMT@opt@expansion}
+%\begin{macro}{\ifMT@opt@auto}
+%\begin{macro}{\ifMT@opt@DVI}
+% Keep track of whether the user explicitly set these options.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\newif\ifMT@opt@expansion
+\newif\ifMT@opt@auto
+\newif\ifMT@opt@DVI
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@optwarn@admissible}
+% Some warnings.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@optwarn@admissible#1#2{%
+  \MT@warning@nl{`#1' is not an admissible value for option\MessageBreak
+                 `#2'. Assuming `false'}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@optwarn@nan}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%</package>
+%<plain>\MT@requires@latex1{
+\def\MT@optwarn@nan#1#2{%
+  \MT@warning@nl{Value `#1' for option `#2' is not a\MessageBreak number.
+                 Using default value of \number\@nameuse{MT@#2@default}}%
+}
+%<plain>}\relax
+%<*package>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@opt@def@set}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@opt@def@set#1{%
+  \MT@ifdefined@n@TF{MT@\@tempb @set@@\MT@val}{%
+    \MT@xdef@n{MT@\@tempb @setname}{\MT@val}%
+  }{%
+    \MT@xdef@n{MT@\@tempb @setname}{\@nameuse{MT@default@\@tempb @set}}%
+    \MT@warning@nl{The #1 set `\MT@val' is undeclared.\MessageBreak
+                   Using set `\@nameuse{MT@\@tempb @setname}' instead}%
+  }%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+% \opt{expansion} and \opt{protrusion} may be |true|, |false|, |compatibility|,
+% |nocompatibility| and/or a \meta{set name}.
+%\changes{v1.9}{2005/10/06}{fix: use \texttt{true} as the default value}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\MT@map@clist@n{protrusion,expansion}{%
+  \define@key{MT}{#1}[true]{%
+    \csname MT@opt@#1true\endcsname
+    \MT@map@clist@n{##1}{%
+      \KV@@sp@def\MT@val{####1}%
+      \MT@ifempty\MT@val\relax{%
+        \csname MT@#1true\endcsname
+        \edef\@tempb{\csname MT@rbba@#1\endcsname}%
+        \MT@ifstreq\MT@val{true}\relax
+        {%
+          \MT@ifstreq\MT@val{false}{%
+            \csname MT@#1false\endcsname
+          }{%
+            \MT@ifstreq\MT@val{compatibility}{%
+              \MT@let@nc{MT@\@tempb @level}\@ne
+            }{%
+              \MT@ifstreq\MT@val{nocompatibility}{%
+                \MT@let@nc{MT@\@tempb @level}\tw@
+              }{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% If everything failed, it should be a set name.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+                \MT@opt@def@set{#1}%
+              }%
+            }%
+          }%
+        }%
+      }%
+    }%
+  }%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \opt{activate} is a shortcut for \opt{protrusion} and \opt{expansion}.
+%\changes{v1.9e}{2006/07/18}{fix: default value for \opt{activate}: \texttt{true}}
+%\todo{add \opt{spacing} to \opt{activate}, when the feature has stabilised in \pdftex?}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\define@key{MT}{activate}[true]{%
+   \setkeys{MT}{protrusion={#1}}%
+   \setkeys{MT}{expansion={#1}}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \opt{spacing}, \opt{kerning} and \opt{tracking} do not have a compatibility level.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\MT@map@clist@n{spacing,kerning,tracking}{%
+  \define@key{MT}{#1}[true]{%
+    \MT@map@clist@n{##1}{%
+      \KV@@sp@def\MT@val{####1}%
+      \MT@ifempty\MT@val\relax{%
+        \csname MT@#1true\endcsname
+        \MT@ifstreq\MT@val{true}\relax
+        {%
+          \MT@ifstreq\MT@val{false}{%
+            \csname MT@#1false\endcsname
+          }{%
+            \edef\@tempb{\csname MT@rbba@#1\endcsname}%
+            \MT@opt@def@set{#1}%
+          }%
+        }%
+      }%
+    }%
+  }%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\changes{v1.5}{2004/12/02}{new option: \opt{selected}, by default false
+%               (suggested by \contributor \thanh{} <hanthethanh\at gmx.net>)}
+%                                               ^^A private mail, 2004/11/30
+%\changes{v2.0}{2005/10/04}{(beta:1) new option: \opt{babel}, by default false
+%               (language-dependent setup suggested by \contributor Ulrich Dirr <ud\at art-satz.de>)}
+%                                               ^^A private mail, 2005/08/27
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@def@bool@opt}
+% The |true|/|false| options:
+% \opt{draft}, \opt{final} (may be inherited from the class options),
+% \opt{auto},
+% \opt{selected},
+% \opt{babel},
+% \opt{DVIoutput},
+% \opt{defersetup},
+% \opt{copyfonts}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@def@bool@opt#1#2{%
+  \define@key{MT}{#1}[true]{%
+    \def\@tempa{##1}%
+    \MT@ifstreq\@tempa{true}\relax{%
+      \MT@ifstreq\@tempa{false}\relax{%
+        \MT@optwarn@admissible{##1}{#1}%
+        \def\@tempa{false}%
+      }%
+    }%
+    #2%
+  }%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+% Boolean options that only set the switch.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\MT@map@clist@n{draft,selected,babel}{%
+  \MT@def@bool@opt{#1}{\csname MT@#1\@tempa\endcsname}}
+\MT@def@bool@opt{auto}{\csname MT@auto\@tempa\endcsname \MT@opt@autotrue}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The \opt{DVIoutput} option will change \cmd\pdfoutput\ immediately to minimise
+% the risk of confusing other packages.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\MT@def@bool@opt{DVIoutput}{%
+  \csname if\@tempa\endcsname
+    \ifnum\pdfoutput>\z@ \MT@opt@DVItrue \fi
+    \pdfoutput\z@
+  \else
+    \ifnum\pdfoutput<\@ne \MT@opt@DVItrue \fi
+    \pdfoutput\@ne
+  \fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\changes{v1.9a}{2005/11/21}{new option: \opt{defersetup}, by default true}
+% Setting the \opt{defersetup} option to false will restore the old behaviour,
+% where the setup took place at the time when the package was loaded. This is
+% undocumented, since I would like to learn about the cases where this is
+% necessary.
+%
+% The only problem with the new deferred setup I can think of is when a box
+% is being constructed inside the preamble and this box contains a font that is
+% not loaded before the box is being used.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\MT@def@bool@opt{defersetup}{%
+  \csname if\@tempa\endcsname \else
+    \AtEndOfPackage{%
+      \MT@setup@
+      \let\MT@setup@\@empty
+      \let\MT@addto@setup\@firstofone
+    }%
+  \fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \opt{copyfonts} will copy all fonts before setting them up. This allows
+% protrusion and expansion with different parameters.
+%\changes{v2.2}{2007/07/03}{new option: \opt{copyfonts}}
+% This options is also \emph{undocumented} in the hope that we can always find
+% out automatically whether it's required.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\MT@requires@pdftex7{
+%<*lua>
+  \MT@requires@luatex{
+    \MT@def@bool@opt{copyfonts}{%
+      \csname if\@tempa\endcsname
+        \MT@error{The `copyfonts' option doesn't work with luatex}
+                 {Use pdftex instead.}%
+      \fi
+    }
+  }{
+%</lua>
+    \MT@def@bool@opt{copyfonts}{%
+      \csname if\@tempa\endcsname
+        \MT@glet\MT@copy@font\MT@copy@font@
+      \else
+        \MT@glet\MT@copy@font\relax
+      \fi
+    }
+%<lua>  }
+}{
+  \MT@def@bool@opt{copyfonts}{%
+    \csname if\@tempa\endcsname
+      \MT@error{The pdftex version you are using is too old\MessageBreak
+        to use the `copyfonts' option}{Upgrade pdftex.}%
+    \fi
+  }
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \opt{final} is the opposite to \opt{draft}.
+%\changes{v1.4a}{2004/11/16}{new option: \opt{final}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\MT@def@bool@opt{final}{%
+  \csname if\@tempa\endcsname
+    \MT@draftfalse
+  \else
+    \MT@drafttrue
+  \fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% For \opt{verbose} output, we redefine \cs{MT@vinfo}.
+%\changes{v2.3}{2007/11/05}{turned some warnings into errors}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\define@key{MT}{verbose}[true]{%
+  \let\MT@vinfo\MT@info@nl
+  \def\@tempa{#1}%
+  \MT@ifstreq\@tempa{true}\relax{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\changes{v1.7}{2005/03/16}{new value for \opt{verbose} option: \texttt{errors}}
+% Take problems seriously.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \MT@ifstreq\@tempa{errors}{%
+      \let\MT@warning   \MT@warn@err
+      \let\MT@warning@nl\MT@warn@err
+    }{%
+      \let\MT@vinfo\@gobble
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\changes{v2.3}{2007/11/05}{new value for \opt{verbose} option: \texttt{silent}
+%                           (suggested by \contributor Karl Berry <karl\at freefriends.org>)}
+%                                                              ^^A private mail, 2007/11/05
+% Cast warnings to the winds.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+      \MT@ifstreq\@tempa{silent}{%
+        \let\MT@warning   \MT@info
+        \let\MT@warning@nl\MT@info@nl
+      }{%
+        \MT@ifstreq\@tempa{false}\relax{\MT@optwarn@admissible{#1}{verbose}}%
+      }%
+    }%
+  }%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\changes{v1.5}{2004/12/02}{defaults: \opt{step}: 4
+%               (suggested by \contributor \thanh{} <hanthethanh\at gmx.net>)}
+%                                               ^^A private mail, 2004/11/30
+%\changes{v1.6}{2004/12/18}{new option: \opt{factor}, by default 1000}
+%\changes{v2.0}{2005/09/21}{(beta:1) new option: \opt{letterspace}, by default 100}
+%^^A\changes{v2.0}{2007/01/05}{option `\texttt{letterspacing}' renamed to `\opt{letterspace}'}
+% Options with numerical keys:
+%   \opt{factor},
+%   \opt{stretch},
+%   \opt{shrink},
+%   \opt{step},
+%   \opt{letterspace}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%</package>
+%<plain>\MT@requires@latex1{
+\MT@map@clist@n{%
+%<package>    stretch,shrink,step,%
+    letterspace}{%
+  \define@key{MT}{#1}[\csname MT@#1@default\endcsname]{%
+    \def\@tempa{##1 }%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% No nonsense in \cs{MT@factor} et al.?
+%\changes{v1.6}{2005/01/06}{test whether numeric options receive a number}
+% A space terminates the number.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \MT@ifint\@tempa
+      {\MT@edef@n{MT@#1}{\@tempa}}%
+      {\MT@optwarn@nan{##1}{#1}}%
+  }%
+}
+%<plain>}\relax
+%<*package>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \opt{factor} will define the protrusion factor only.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\define@key{MT}{factor}[\MT@factor@default]{%
+  \def\@tempa{#1 }%
+  \MT@ifint\@tempa
+    {\edef\MT@pr@factor{\@tempa}}
+    {\MT@optwarn@nan{#1}{factor}}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Unit for protrusion codes.
+%\changes{v1.8}{2005/04/14}{new option: \opt{unit}, by default \texttt{character}}
+%\changes{v1.9}{2005/09/28}{option \opt{unit}: rename value \texttt{relative} to \texttt{character}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\define@key{MT}{unit}[character]{%
+  \def\@tempa{#1}%
+  \MT@ifstreq\@tempa{character}\relax{%
+    \MT@ifdimen\@tempa
+      {\let\MT@pr@unit\@tempa}%
+      {\MT@warning@nl{`\@tempa' is not a dimension.\MessageBreak
+              Ignoring it and setting values relative to\MessageBreak
+              character widths}}%
+  }%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Reading the configuration file}
+%
+% The package should just work if called without any options. Therefore,
+% expansion will be switched off by default if output is <DVI>, since it isn't
+% likely that expanded fonts are available. (This grows more important as
+% modern \TeX\ systems have switched to the \pdftex\ engine even for <DVI>
+% output, so that the user might not even be aware of the fact that she's
+% running \pdftex.)
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\MT@protrusiontrue
+\ifnum\pdfoutput<\@ne \else
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Also, we only enable expansion by default if \pdftex\ can expand the fonts
+% automatically.
+%\changes{v1.6}{2004/12/23}{defaults: turn off expansion for old \pdftex\ versions}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \MT@requires@pdftex4{
+    \MT@expansiontrue
+    \MT@autotrue
+  }\relax
+\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The main configuration file will be loaded before processing the package
+% options.
+%\changes{v1.8}{2005/05/15}{new option: \opt{config} to load a different main
+%                           configuration file}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@config@file}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@get@config}
+% However, the \opt{config} option must of course be evaluated beforehand.
+% We also have to define a no-op for the regular option processing later.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\define@key{MT}{config}[]{\relax}
+\def\MT@get@config#1config=#2,#3\@nil{%
+  \MT@ifempty{#2}%
+    {\def\MT@config@file{\MT@MT.cfg}}%
+    {\def\MT@config@file{#2.cfg}}%
+}
+\expandafter\expandafter\expandafter\MT@get@config
+  \csname opt@\@currname.\@currext\endcsname,config=,\@nil
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\changes{v1.4b}{2004/11/25}{fix: set catcodes before reading global configuration file
+%                (reported by \contributor Christoph Bier <christoph.bier\at web.de>)}
+%                                           ^^A MID: <30k2tqF30v483U1@uni-berlin.de>
+% Load the file.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\IfFileExists{\MT@config@file}{%
+  \MT@info@nl{Loading configuration file \MT@config@file}%
+  \MT@begin@catcodes
+    \let\MT@begin@catcodes\relax
+    \let\MT@end@catcodes\relax
+    \let\MT@curr@file\MT@config@file
+    \input{\MT@config@file}%
+  \endgroup
+}{\MT@warning@nl{%
+    Could not find configuration file `\MT@config@file'!\MessageBreak
+    This will almost certainly cause undesired results.\MessageBreak
+    Please fix your installation}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@check@active@set}
+% We have to make sure that font sets are active. If the user didn't activate
+% any, we use those sets declared by \cs{DeclareMicrotypeSetDefault} (this
+% is done at the end of the preamble).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@check@active@set#1{%
+  \MT@ifdefined@n@TF{MT@#1@setname}{%
+    \MT@info@nl{Using \@nameuse{MT@abbr@#1} set `\@nameuse{MT@#1@setname}'}%
+  }{%
+    \MT@ifdefined@n@TF{MT@default@#1@set}{%
+      \MT@glet@nn{MT@#1@setname}{MT@default@#1@set}%
+      \MT@info@nl{Using default \@nameuse{MT@abbr@#1} set `\@nameuse{MT@#1@setname}'}%
+    }{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% If no default font set has been declared in the main configuration file,
+% we use the (empty, non-existent) set `|@|',
+%\changes{v2.3d}{2008/11/24}{warning for missing default sets}
+% and issue a warning.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+      \MT@gdef@n{MT@#1@setname}{@}%
+      \MT@warning@nl{No \@nameuse{MT@abbr@#1} set chosen, no default set declared.
+                     \MessageBreak Using empty set}%
+    }%
+  }%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%
+%\subsubsection{Hook for other packages}\label{sub:hook}
+%
+% {\let\special@index\index\SpecialIndex@{\Microtype@Hook}{\encapchar usage}}
+%\begin{macro}{\Microtype@Hook}
+%\changes{v1.7}{2005/03/22}{new command for font package authors}
+% This hook may be used by font package authors, \eg, to declare alias fonts. If
+% it is defined, it will be executed here, \ie, after the main configuration
+% file has been loaded, and before the package options are evaluated.
+%
+% This hook was needed in versions prior to 1.9a to overcome the situation that
+% (1)~the \microtype\ package should be loaded after all font defaults have
+% been set up (hence, using \cmd\@ifpackageloaded\ in the font package was not
+% viable), and (2)~checking \cmd\AtBeginDocument\ could be too late, since
+% fonts might already have been loaded, and consequently set up, in the
+% preamble. With the new deferred setup, one could live without this command,
+% however, it remains here since it's simpler than testing whether the package
+% was loaded both in the preamble as well as at the beginning of the document
+% (which is what one would have to do).
+%
+% Package authors should check whether the command is already defined so that
+% existing definitions by other packages aren't overwritten. Example:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\def\MinionPro@MT@Hook{\DeclareMicrotypeAlias{MinionPro-LF}{MinionPro}}
+%\@ifpackageloaded{microtype}
+%  \MinionPro@MT@Hook
+%  {\@ifundefined{Microtype@Hook}
+%    {\let\Microtype@Hook\MinionPro@MT@Hook}
+%    {\g@addto@macro\Microtype@Hook{\MinionPro@MT@Hook}}}
+%\end{verbatim}
+% \cs{MicroType@Hook} with a capital |T| (which only existed in version 1.7) is
+% provided for compatibility reasons. At some point in the future, it will no
+% longer be available, hence it should not be used.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\MT@ifdefined@c@T\MicroType@Hook{\MT@warning{%
+  Command \string\MicroType@Hook\space is deprecated.\MessageBreak
+      Use \string\Microtype@Hook\space instead}\MicroType@Hook}
+\MT@ifdefined@c@T\Microtype@Hook\Microtype@Hook
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%
+%\subsubsection{Changing options later}
+%
+%\begin{macro}{\microtypesetup}
+%\changes{v1.4}{2004/11/04}{fix: set the correct levels, and remember them;
+%                           warning when enabling an option disabled in package options}
+%\changes{v1.7}{2005/02/17}{fix: warning also when setting to \texttt{(no)compatibility}}
+%\changes{v1.9a}{2005/11/21}{inside the preamble, accepts all package options}
+%\changes{v2.3d}{2009/03/05}{select font after setup}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@define@optionX}
+% Inside the preamble, \cs{microtypesetup} accepts the same options as the
+% package (unless \opt{defersetup}|=false|).
+% In the document body, it accepts the options:
+% |protrusion|, |expansion|, |activate|, |tracking|, |spacing| and |kerning|.
+% Specifying font sets is not allowed.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\microtypesetup{\setkeys{MT}}
+\MT@addto@setup{\def\microtypesetup#1{\setkeys{MTX}{#1}\selectfont}}
+\def\MT@define@optionX#1#2{%
+  \define@key{MTX}{#1}[true]{%
+    \edef\@tempb{\csname MT@rbba@#1\endcsname}%
+    \MT@map@clist@n{##1}{%
+      \KV@@sp@def\MT@val{####1}%
+      \MT@ifempty\MT@val\relax{%
+        \@tempcnta=\m@ne
+        \MT@ifstreq\MT@val{true}{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Enabling micro-typography in the middle of the document is not allowed if it
+% has been disabled in the package options since fonts might already have been
+% loaded and hence wouldn't be set up.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+          \MT@checksetup{#1}{%
+            \@tempcnta=\csname MT@\@tempb @level\endcsname
+            \MT@vinfo{Enabling #1
+                    (level \number\csname MT@\@tempb @level\endcsname)\on@line}%
+          }%
+        }{%
+          \MT@ifstreq\MT@val{false}{%
+            \@tempcnta=\z@
+            \MT@vinfo{Disabling #1\on@line}%
+          }{%
+            \MT@ifstreq\MT@val{compatibility}{%
+              \MT@checksetup{#1}{%
+                \@tempcnta=\@ne
+                \MT@let@nc{MT@\@tempb @level}\@ne
+                \MT@vinfo{Setting #1 to level 1\on@line}%
+              }%
+            }{%
+              \MT@ifstreq\MT@val{nocompatibility}{%
+                \MT@checksetup{#1}{%
+                  \@tempcnta=\tw@
+                  \MT@let@nc{MT@\@tempb @level}\tw@
+                  \MT@vinfo{Setting #1 to level 2\on@line}%
+                }%
+              }{\MT@error{Value `\MT@val' for key `#1' not recognised}
+                         {Use any of `true', `false', `compatibility' or
+                          `nocompatibility'.}%
+              }%
+            }%
+          }%
+        }%
+        \ifnum\@tempcnta>\m@ne
+          #2\@tempcnta\relax
+        \fi
+      }%
+    }%
+  }%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@checksetup}
+% Test whether the feature wasn't disabled in the package options.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@checksetup#1{%
+  \csname ifMT@#1\endcsname
+    \expandafter\@firstofone
+  \else
+    \MT@error{You cannot enable #1 if it was disabled\MessageBreak
+              in the package options}{Load microtype with #1 enabled.}%
+    \expandafter\@gobble
+  \fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\MT@define@optionX{protrusion}\pdfprotrudechars
+\MT@define@optionX{expansion}\pdfadjustspacing
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@define@optionX@}
+% The same for |tracking|, |spacing| and |kerning|, which do not have a
+% |compatibility| level.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\MT@requires@pdftex6{
+%<lua>  \MT@requires@luatex\@firstofone{
+  \def\MT@define@optionX@#1#2{%
+    \define@key{MTX}{#1}[true]{%
+      \MT@map@clist@n{##1}{%
+        \KV@@sp@def\MT@val{####1}%
+        \MT@ifempty\MT@val\relax{%
+          \@tempcnta=\m@ne
+          \MT@ifstreq\MT@val{true}{%
+            \MT@checksetup{#1}{%
+              \@tempcnta=\@ne
+              \MT@vinfo{Enabling #1\on@line}%
+            }%
+          }{%
+            \MT@ifstreq\MT@val{false}{%
+              \@tempcnta=\z@
+              \MT@vinfo{Disabling #1\on@line}%
+            }{\MT@error{Value `\MT@val' for key `#1' not recognised}
+                       {Use either `true' or `false'}%
+            }%
+          }%
+          \ifnum\@tempcnta>\m@ne
+            #2\relax
+          \fi
+        }%
+      }%
+    }%
+  }
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+% We cannot simply let \cs{MT@tracking} relax, since this may select the already
+% letterspaced font instance.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \MT@define@optionX@{tracking}{\ifnum\@tempcnta=\z@ \let\MT@tracking\MT@set@tr@zero
+                                \else \let\MT@tracking\MT@tracking@ \fi}
+  \MT@define@optionX@{spacing}{\pdfadjustinterwordglue\@tempcnta}
+  \MT@define@optionX@{kerning}{\pdfprependkern\@tempcnta
+                               \pdfappendkern \@tempcnta}
+  \@gobble
+%<lua>  }
+}\@firstofone
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Disable for older \pdftex\ versions and for \luatex.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+{\define@key{MTX}{tracking}[true]{\MT@warning{Ignoring tracking setup}}
+ \define@key{MTX}{kerning}[true]{\MT@warning{Ignoring kerning setup}}
+ \define@key{MTX}{spacing}[true]{\MT@warning{Ignoring spacing setup}}
+}
+\define@key{MTX}{activate}[true]{%
+  \setkeys{MTX}{protrusion={#1}}%
+  \setkeys{MTX}{expansion={#1}}%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@saved@setupfont}
+% Disable everything -- may be used as a work-around in case setting up fonts
+% doesn't work in certain environments. \emph{(Undocumented.)}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\let\MT@saved@setupfont\MT@setupfont
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\define@key{MTX}{disable}[]{%
+  \MT@info{Inactivate `\MT@MT' package}%
+  \let\MT@setupfont\relax
+}
+\define@key{MTX}{enable}[]{%
+  \MT@info{Reactivate `\MT@MT' package}%
+  \let\MT@setupfont\MT@saved@setupfont
+}
+%</package>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%\subsubsection{Processing the options}\label{sssec:impl.options}
+%
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@ProcessOptionsWithKV}
+% Parse options.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<plain>\MT@requires@latex1{
+\def\MT@ProcessOptionsWithKV#1{%
+  \let\@tempc\relax
+  \let\MT@temp\@empty
+%<plain>  \MT@requires@latex2{
+    \MT@map@clist@c\@classoptionslist{%
+      \def\CurrentOption{##1}%
+      \MT@ifdefined@n@T{KV@#1@\expandafter\MT@getkey\CurrentOption=\@nil}{%
+        \edef\MT@temp{\MT@temp,\CurrentOption,}%
+        \@expandtwoargs\@removeelement\CurrentOption
+          \@unusedoptionlist\@unusedoptionlist
+      }%
+    }%
+    \edef\MT@temp{\noexpand\setkeys{#1}%
+                    {\MT@temp\@ptionlist{\@currname.\@currext}}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \pkg{eplain} can handle package options.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*plain>
+  }{\edef\MT@temp{\noexpand\setkeys{#1}%
+                    {\csname usepkg@options@\usepkg@pkg\endcsname}}}
+%</plain>
+  \MT@temp
+  \MT@clear@options
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@getkey}
+% For |key=val| in class options.
+%\changes{v2.3a}{2008/02/09}{fix: \texttt{key\quotechar=val} in class options list}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@getkey#1=#2\@nil{#1}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\MT@ProcessOptionsWithKV{MT}
+%<plain>}\relax
+%<*package>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Now we can take the appropriate actions. We also tell the log file which
+% options the user has chosen (in case it's interested).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\MT@addto@setup{%
+\ifMT@draft
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% We disable most of what we've just defined in the \arabic{CodelineNo} lines
+% above if we are running in draft mode.
+%\changes{v1.7}{2005/02/06}{warning when running in draft mode}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \MT@warning@nl{`draft' option active.\MessageBreak
+                 Disabling all micro-typographic extensions.\MessageBreak
+                 This might lead to different line and page breaks}%
+  \let\MT@setupfont\relax
+  \renewcommand*\LoadMicrotypeFile[1]{}%
+  \renewcommand*\microtypesetup[1]{}%
+  \renewcommand*\microtypecontext[1]{}%
+  \renewcommand*\lsstyle{}%
+\else
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% For <DVI> output, the user must have explicitly passed the \opt{expansion}
+% option to the package.
+%\changes{v1.5}{2004/12/02}{defaults: turn off expansion for <DVI> output}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \ifnum\pdfoutput<\@ne
+    \ifMT@opt@expansion \else
+      \MT@expansionfalse
+    \fi
+  \fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \pdftex\ can create <DVI> output, too. However, both the <DVI> viewer and
+% |dvips| need to find actual fonts. Therefore, expansion will only work if the
+% fonts for different degrees of expansion are readily available.
+%
+%\changes{v1.4b}{2004/11/19}{new message if \cmd\pdfoutput\ is changed}
+% Some packages depend on the value of \cmd\pdfoutput\ and will get confused if
+% it is changed after they have been loaded. These packages are, among others:
+% \pkg{color}, \pkg{graphics}, \pkg{hyperref}, \pkg{crop}, \pkg{contour},
+% \pkg{pstricks} and, as a matter of course, \pkg{ifpdf}. Instead of testing
+% for each package (that's not our job), we only say that it was \microtype\
+% that changed it. This must be sufficient!
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \MT@info@nl{Generating \ifnum\pdfoutput<\@ne DVI \else PDF \fi output%
+              \ifMT@opt@DVI\space (changed by \MT@MT)\fi}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Working on font copies?
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \ifx\MT@copy@font\relax\else \MT@info@nl{Using font copies for contexts}\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Fix the font sets.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \MT@map@tlist@c\MT@font@sets\MT@fix@font@set
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Protrusion.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \ifMT@protrusion
+    \edef\MT@active@features{\MT@active@features,pr}%
+    \pdfprotrudechars\MT@pr@level
+    \MT@info@nl{Character protrusion enabled (level \number\MT@pr@level)%
+      \ifnum\MT@pr@factor=\MT@factor@default \else,\MessageBreak
+        factor: \number\MT@pr@factor\fi
+      \ifx\MT@pr@unit\@empty \else,\MessageBreak unit: \MT@pr@unit\fi}%
+    \MT@check@active@set{pr}%
+  \else
+    \let\MT@protrusion\relax
+    \MT@info@nl{No character protrusion}%
+  \fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Expansion.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \ifMT@expansion
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Set up the values for font expansion: if \opt{stretch} has not been specified, we
+% take the default value of 20.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \ifnum\MT@stretch=\m@ne
+      \let\MT@stretch\MT@stretch@default
+    \fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% If \opt{shrink} has not been specified, it will inherit the value from \opt{stretch}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \ifnum\MT@shrink=\m@ne
+      \let\MT@shrink\MT@stretch
+    \fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\changes{v2.3d}{2008/11/19}{default \texttt{step}: 1 for \pdftex\ versions $\geq$ 1.40}
+% If \opt{step} has not been specified, we will just set it to 1 for recent
+% \pdftex\ versions. My tests did not show much difference neither in
+% compilation time (within the margin of error) nor in file size (less than
+% 1\% difference for \file{microtype.pdf} with |step=1| compared to |step=5|).
+%\changes{v1.5}{2004/12/02}{defaults: calculate \opt{step} as
+%                           min(\texttt{stretch},\texttt{shrink})/5}
+% With older versions, we set it to min(\opt{stretch},\opt{shrink})/5,
+% rounded off, minimum value 1.
+%\changes{v1.9}{2005/07/08}{warning if user requested zero \opt{step}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \MT@requires@pdftex6{\def\MT@step{1 }}{%
+      \ifnum\MT@step=\m@ne
+        \ifnum\MT@stretch>\MT@shrink
+          \ifnum\MT@shrink=\z@
+            \@tempcnta=\MT@stretch
+          \else
+            \@tempcnta=\MT@shrink
+          \fi
+        \else
+          \ifnum\MT@stretch=\z@
+            \@tempcnta=\MT@shrink
+          \else
+            \@tempcnta=\MT@stretch
+          \fi
+        \fi
+        \divide\@tempcnta 5\relax
+      \else
+        \@tempcnta=\MT@step
+        \ifnum\@tempcnta=\z@
+          \MT@warning@nl{The expansion step cannot be set to zero.\MessageBreak
+            Setting it to one}
+        \fi
+      \fi
+      \ifnum\@tempcnta=\z@ \@tempcnta=\@ne \fi
+      \edef\MT@step{\number\@tempcnta\space}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@auto}
+% Automatic expansion of the font? This new feature of \pdftex\ 1.20 makes the
+% \textit{\fontfamily{pzc}\selectfont hz}~programme really usable.
+% It must be either `|autoexpand|' or empty (or `|1000|' for older versions of
+% \pdftex).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \let\MT@auto\@empty
+    \ifMT@auto
+      \MT@requires@pdftex4{%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+% We turn off automatic expansion if output mode is <DVI>.
+%\changes{v1.5}{2004/12/02}{disable automatic expansion for <DVI> output}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \ifnum\pdfoutput<\@ne
+          \ifMT@opt@auto
+            \MT@error{%
+              Automatic font expansion only works for PDF output.\MessageBreak
+              However, you are creating a DVI file}
+             {If you have created expanded fonts instances, remove `auto' from%
+              \MessageBreak the package options. Otherwise, you have to switch
+              off expansion\MessageBreak completely.}%
+          \fi
+          \MT@autofalse
+        \else
+          \def\MT@auto{autoexpand}%
+        \fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Also, if \pdftex\ is too old.
+%\changes{v1.1}{2004/09/13}{issue an error instead of a warning, when \pdftex\
+%                            version is too old for \texttt{autoexpand}}
+%\changes{v1.6}{2004/12/23}{disable automatic expansion for old \pdftex\ versions}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+      }{%
+        \MT@error{%
+          The pdftex version you are using is too old for\MessageBreak
+          automatic font expansion}%
+         {If you have created expanded fonts instances, remove `auto' from\MessageBreak
+          the package options. Otherwise, you have to switch off expansion\MessageBreak
+          completely, or upgrade pdftex to version 1.20 or newer.}%
+        \MT@autofalse
+        \def\MT@auto{1000 }%
+      }%
+    \else
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% No automatic expansion.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+      \MT@requires@pdftex4\relax{%
+        \def\MT@auto{1000 }%
+      }%
+    \fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Choose the appropriate macro for selected expansion.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \ifMT@selected
+      \let\MT@set@ex@codes\MT@set@ex@codes@s
+    \else
+      \let\MT@set@ex@codes\MT@set@ex@codes@n
+    \fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Filter out |stretch=0,shrink=0|, since it would result in a \pdftex\ error.
+%\changes{v1.9}{2005/07/08}{disable expansion if both \opt{step} and \opt{shrink} are zero}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \ifnum\MT@stretch=\z@
+      \ifnum\MT@shrink=\z@
+        \MT@warning@nl{%
+          Both the stretch and shrink limit are set to zero.\MessageBreak
+          Disabling font expansion}%
+        \MT@expansionfalse
+      \fi
+    \fi
+  \fi
+  \ifMT@expansion
+    \edef\MT@active@features{\MT@active@features,ex}%
+    \pdfadjustspacing\MT@ex@level
+    \MT@info@nl{\ifMT@auto A\else Non-a\fi utomatic font expansion enabled
+                (level \number\MT@ex@level),\MessageBreak
+                stretch: \number\MT@stretch, shrink: \number\MT@shrink,
+                step: \number\MT@step, \ifMT@selected\else non-\fi selected}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\changes{v2.2}{2007/01/28}{warning if \opt{stretch} or \opt{shrink} aren't multiples of \opt{step}}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@check@step}
+% Check whether \opt{stretch} and \opt{shrink} are multiples of \opt{step}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \def\MT@check@step#1{%
+      \@tempcnta=\csname MT@#1\endcsname
+      \divide\@tempcnta \MT@step
+      \multiply\@tempcnta \MT@step
+      \ifnum\@tempcnta=\csname MT@#1\endcsname\else
+        \MT@warning@nl{The #1 amount is not a multiple of step.\MessageBreak
+                       The effective maximum #1 is \the\@tempcnta\space
+                       (step \number\MT@step)}%
+      \fi
+    }%
+    \MT@check@step{stretch}%
+    \MT@check@step{shrink}%
+    \MT@check@active@set{ex}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\changes{v1.7}{2005/03/02}{modify \cmd\showhyphens}
+% Inside \cmd\showhyphens, font expansion should be disabled.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \CheckCommand*\showhyphens[1]{\setbox0\vbox{%
+      \color@begingroup\everypar{}\parfillskip\z@skip
+      \hsize\maxdimen\normalfont\pretolerance\m@ne\tolerance\m@ne
+      \hbadness\z@\showboxdepth\z@\ #1\color@endgroup}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\begin{macro}{\showhyphens}
+% I wonder why it's defined globally (in \file{ltfssbas.dtx})?
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \gdef\showhyphens#1{\setbox0\vbox{%
+      \color@begingroup\pdfadjustspacing\z@\everypar{}\parfillskip\z@skip
+      \hsize\maxdimen\normalfont\pretolerance\m@ne\tolerance\m@ne
+      \hbadness\z@\showboxdepth\z@\ #1\color@endgroup}}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \else
+    \let\MT@expansion\relax
+    \MT@info@nl{No font expansion}%
+  \fi
+}
+\MT@requires@pdftex6{
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@warn@lua}
+% Switch off the features that don't work with \luatex.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*lua>
+  \def\MT@warn@lua#1{%
+    \MT@error{The `#1' feature doesn't currently work\MessageBreak with luatex}
+             {Use pdftex instead.}%
+    \csname MT@#1false\endcsname
+    \MT@let@nc{MT@#1}\relax
+  }
+%</lua>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%</package>
+  \MT@addto@setup{%
+%<*package>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Tracking, spacing and kerning.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \ifMT@tracking
+%<lua>      \MT@requires@luatex{\MT@warn@lua{tracking}}{%
+        \edef\MT@active@features{\MT@active@features,tr}%
+        \MT@info@nl{Tracking enabled}%
+        \MT@check@active@set{tr}%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Enable protrusion for compensation at the line edges.
+%\changes{v2.3}{2007/07/27}{enable protrusion when tracking is enabled}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \ifMT@protrusion\else\pdfprotrudechars\@ne\fi
+%<lua>      }%
+    \else
+      \let\MT@tracking\relax
+      \MT@info@nl{No tracking}%
+    \fi
+    \ifMT@spacing
+%<lua>      \MT@requires@luatex{\MT@warn@lua{spacing}}{%
+        \edef\MT@active@features{\MT@active@features,sp}%
+        \pdfadjustinterwordglue\@ne
+        \MT@info@nl{Adjustment of interword spacing enabled}%
+        \MT@check@active@set{sp}%
+%<lua>      }%
+    \else
+      \let\MT@spacing\relax
+      \MT@info@nl{No adjustment of interword spacing}%
+    \fi
+    \ifMT@kerning
+%<lua>      \MT@requires@luatex{\MT@warn@lua{kerning}}{%
+        \edef\MT@active@features{\MT@active@features,kn}%
+        \pdfprependkern\@ne
+        \pdfappendkern\@ne
+        \MT@info@nl{Adjustment of character kerning enabled}%
+        \MT@check@active@set{kn}%
+%<lua>      }%
+    \else
+      \let\MT@kerning\relax
+      \MT@info@nl{No adjustment of character kerning}%
+    \fi
+%</package>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@warn@tracking@DVI}
+%\changes{v2.2}{2007/02/11}{warning when letterspacing in DVI mode}
+% We issue a warning, when letterspacing in <DVI> mode, since it will probably
+% not work. We also switch on protrusion if it isn't already, to compensate for
+% the letterspacing kerns.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \ifnum\pdfoutput<\@ne
+      \def\MT@warn@tracking@DVI{%
+        \MT@warning@nl{%
+            You are using tracking/letterspacing in DVI mode.\MessageBreak
+            This will probably not work, unless the post-\MessageBreak
+            processing program (dvips, dvipdfm(x), ...) is\MessageBreak
+            able to create the virtual fonts on the fly}%
+        \MT@glet\MT@warn@tracking@DVI\relax
+      }%
+    \else
+      \def\MT@warn@tracking@DVI{%
+        \ifnum\pdfprotrudechars<\@ne \global\pdfprotrudechars\@ne \fi
+        \MT@glet\MT@warn@tracking@DVI\relax
+      }%
+    \fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    \ifnum\MT@letterspace=\m@ne
+      \let\MT@letterspace\MT@letterspace@default
+    \else
+      \MT@ls@too@large\MT@letterspace
+    \fi
+  }%
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% If \pdftex\ is too old, we disable tracking, spacing and kerning,
+%\changes{v2.3a}{2008/02/16}{error messages if \pdftex\ is too old for extensions}
+% and throw an error message.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*package>
+}{
+  \MT@addto@setup{%
+    \ifMT@tracking
+      \MT@error{Tracking only works with pdftex version 1.40\MessageBreak
+        or newer. Switching it off}{Upgrade pdftex.}%
+    \else
+      \MT@info@nl{No tracking (pdftex too old)}%
+    \fi
+    \ifMT@spacing
+      \MT@error{Adjustment of interword spacing only works with\MessageBreak
+        pdftex version 1.40 or newer. Switching it off}{Upgrade pdftex.}%
+    \else
+      \MT@info@nl{No adjustment of interword spacing (pdftex too old)}%
+    \fi
+    \ifMT@kerning
+      \MT@error{Character kerning only works with\MessageBreak
+        pdftex version 1.40 or newer. Switching it off}{Upgrade pdftex.}%
+    \else
+      \MT@info@nl{No adjustment of character kerning (pdftex too old)}%
+    \fi
+  }
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \cs{DisableLigatures} is only admissible in the preamble, therefore we can
+% now disable the corresponding macro, if it was never called.
+%\changes{v2.0}{2006/12/14}{maybe disable \cs{MT@noligatures} after the preamble}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\MT@requires@pdftex5{
+  \MT@addto@setup{%
+    \ifMT@noligatures \else
+      \let\MT@noligatures\relax
+    \fi
+  }
+}\relax
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Remove the leading comma in \cs{MT@active@features}, and set the
+% document switch to true.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\MT@addto@setup{%
+  \ifx\MT@active@features\@empty \else
+    \edef\MT@active@features{\expandafter\@gobble\MT@active@features}%
+  \fi
+  \MT@documenttrue
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@set@babel@context}
+% Interaction with \pkg{babel}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\def\MT@set@babel@context#1{%
+  \MT@ifdefined@n@TF{MT@babel@#1}{%
+    \MT@vinfo{*** Changing to language context `#1'\MessageBreak\on@line}%
+    \expandafter\MT@exp@one@n\expandafter\microtypecontext
+      \csname MT@babel@#1\endcsname
+  }{%
+    \microtypecontext{protrusion=,expansion=,spacing=,kerning=}%
+  }%
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@shorthandoff}
+% Active characters can only be switched off if \pkg{babel} isn't loaded after
+% \microtype.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\@ifpackageloaded{babel}{
+  \def\MT@shorthandoff#1#2{%
+    \MT@info@nl{Switching off #1 babel's active characters (#2)}%
+    \shorthandoff{#2}}
+}{
+  \def\MT@shorthandoff#1#2{%
+    \MT@error{You must load `babel' before `\MT@MT'}
+             {Otherwise, `\MT@MT' cannot switch off #1 babel's\MessageBreak
+              active characters.}}
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+% We patch the language switching commands to enable language-dependent setup.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\MT@addto@setup{%
+  \ifMT@babel
+    \@ifpackageloaded{babel}{%
+      \MT@info@nl{Redefining babel's language switching commands}%
+      \let\MT@orig@select@language\select@language
+      \def\select@language#1{%
+        \MT@orig@select@language{#1}%
+        \MT@set@babel@context{#1}%
+      }%
+      \let\MT@orig@foreign@language\foreign@language
+      \def\foreign@language#1{%
+        \MT@orig@foreign@language{#1}%
+        \MT@set@babel@context{#1}%
+      }%
+      \ifMT@kerning
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\todo{make switching off of babel's shorthands configurable}
+% Disable French \pkg{babel}'s active characters.
+%\changes{v2.0}{2006/10/10}{(beta:8) option `\opt{babel}': fix: switch off French
+%                           \pkg{babel}'s shorthands properly
+%                           (reported by \contributor Daniel Flipo <daniel.flipo\at univ-lille1.fr>)}
+%                                                      ^^A private mail, 2006/10/09
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \MT@if@false
+        \MT@with@babel@and@T{french}  \MT@if@true
+        \MT@with@babel@and@T{frenchb} \MT@if@true
+        \MT@with@babel@and@T{francais}\MT@if@true
+        \MT@with@babel@and@T{canadien}\MT@if@true
+        \MT@with@babel@and@T{acadian} \MT@if@true
+        \ifMT@if@\MT@shorthandoff{French}{:;!?}\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Disable Turkish \pkg{babel}'s active characters.
+%\changes{v2.0}{2006/10/10}{(beta:8) option `\opt{babel}': switch off Turkish \pkg{babel}'s shorthands}
+%\changes{v2.3}{2007/10/03}{fix: really switch off Turkish shorthands}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+        \MT@if@false
+        \MT@with@babel@and@T{turkish} \MT@if@true
+        \ifMT@if@\MT@shorthandoff{Turkish}{:!=}\fi
+      \fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% In case \pkg{babel} was loaded before \microtype:
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+      \MT@set@babel@context\languagename
+    }{%
+      \MT@warning@nl{You did not load the babel package.\MessageBreak
+        The `babel' option won't have any effect}%
+    }%
+  \fi
+}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Now we close the \cs{fi} from \cs{ifMT@draft}.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\MT@addto@setup{\fi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Set up the current font, most likely the normal font. This has to come after
+% all of the setup (including anything from the preamble) has been dealt with.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+  \selectfont}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\begin{macro}{\MT@curr@file}
+% This is the current file (hopefully with the correct extension).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\edef\MT@curr@file{\jobname.tex}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{macro}
+% Finally, execute the setup macro at the end of the preamble, and empty it
+% (the \pkg{combine} class calls it repeatedly).
+%\changes{v2.3d}{2009/02/05}{move setup to the very end
+%                            (for \contributor Colin Rourke <gt\at msp.warwick.ac.uk>)}
+%                                                       ^^A private mail, 2009/02/03
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%</package>
+%<plain>\MT@requires@latex1{
+\AtBeginDocument{\MT@setup@ \MT@glet\MT@setup@\@empty}
+%<plain>}\relax
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Warning if \cmd\nonfrenchspacing\ is active, since space factors will be
+% ignored with \cmd\pdfadjustinterwordglue\,|>|\,0. Why 1500? Because some
+% packages redefine \cmd\frenchspacing.\footnote{
+%   Cf. the \texttt{c.t.t.} thread `\cmd\frenchspacing\ with <AMS> packages
+%   and babel', started by Philipp Lehman on 16~August 2005,
+%   <MID>:~\nolinkurl{ddtbaj$rob$1@online.de}}
+% This has to be checked after the setup has taken place. There still will be a
+% false warning if \pkg{babel} is loaded after \microtype\ (without the
+% \opt{babel} option).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*package>
+\MT@requires@pdftex6{
+  \AtBeginDocument{%
+    \ifMT@spacing
+      \ifMT@babel \else
+        \ifnum\sfcode`\. > 1500
+          \MT@ifstreq\MT@sp@context{nonfrench}\relax{%
+            \MT@warning@nl{%
+              \string\nonfrenchspacing\space is active. Adjustment of\MessageBreak
+              interword spacing will disable it. You might want\MessageBreak
+              to add `\@backslashchar\MT@MT context{spacing=nonfrench}'\MessageBreak
+              to your preamble}%
+          }%
+        \fi
+      \fi
+    \fi
+  }
+}\relax
+%</package>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Restore catcodes.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\MT@restore@catcodes
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% That was that.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%</package|letterspace>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% ^^A -------------------------------------------------------------------------
+%\NoIndexing  ^^A from now on, don't bother indexing
+%
+%\section{Configuration files}
+%\changes{v1.6}{2005/01/24}{restructure \file{dtx} file}
+%
+% Let's now write the font configuration files.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*config>
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\subsection{Font sets}
+%\GeneralChanges{Font sets}
+%
+% We first declare some sets in the main configuration file.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*m-t>
+%%% -----------------------------------------------------------------------
+%%% FONT SETS
+
+\DeclareMicrotypeSet{all}
+   { }
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\changes{v1.2}{2004/10/02}{new: \texttt{allmath} and \texttt{basicmath}}
+%\changes{v1.8}{2005/05/25}{add <U> encoding to \texttt{allmath}}
+%\changes{v1.9}{2005/08/17}{add <OT4> encoding to text sets}
+%\changes{v1.9}{2005/08/17}{add <T5> encoding to text sets}
+%\changes{v1.9d}{2006/04/20}{add <QX> encoding to text sets}
+%\changes{v2.3e}{2009/10/28}{add <T2A> encoding}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareMicrotypeSet{allmath}
+   { encoding = {OT1,T1,T2A,LY1,OT4,QX,T5,TS1,OML,OMS,U} }
+
+\DeclareMicrotypeSet{alltext}
+   { encoding = {OT1,T1,T2A,LY1,OT4,QX,T5,TS1} }
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\changes{v1.9d}{2006/02/22}{\texttt{md*} instead of \texttt{m} series in basic sets}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareMicrotypeSet{basicmath}
+   { encoding = {OT1,T1,T2A,LY1,OT4,QX,T5,OML,OMS},
+     family   = {rm*,sf*},
+     series   = {md*},
+     size     = {normalsize,footnotesize,small,large}
+   }
+
+\DeclareMicrotypeSet{basictext}
+   { encoding = {OT1,T1,T2A,LY1,OT4,QX,T5},
+     family   = {rm*,sf*},
+     series   = {md*},
+     size     = {normalsize,footnotesize,small,large}
+   }
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\changes{v2.0}{2006/12/28}{add \texttt{smallcaps} set}
+%\changes{v2.3e}{2009/06/01}{\texttt{sc*} instead of \texttt{sc} in \texttt{smallcaps} set}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareMicrotypeSet{smallcaps}
+   { encoding = {OT1,T1,T2A,LY1,OT4,QX,T5,TS1},
+     shape    = {sc*}
+   }
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\changes{v2.0}{2006/12/21}{add \texttt{footnotesize} and \texttt{scriptsize} sets}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareMicrotypeSet{footnotesize}
+   { encoding = {OT1,T1,T2A,LY1,OT4,QX,T5,TS1},
+     size     = {-small}
+   }
+
+\DeclareMicrotypeSet{scriptsize}
+   { encoding = {OT1,T1,T2A,LY1,OT4,QX,T5,TS1},
+     size     = {-footnotesize}
+   }
+
+\DeclareMicrotypeSet{normalfont}
+   { font = */*/*/*/* }
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The default sets.
+%\changes{v2.2}{2007/04/15}{default set for tracking: \texttt{smallcaps}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%%% -----------------------------------------------------------------------
+%%% DEFAULT SETS
+
+\DeclareMicrotypeSetDefault[protrusion]{alltext}
+\DeclareMicrotypeSetDefault[expansion] {basictext}
+\DeclareMicrotypeSetDefault[spacing]   {basictext}
+\DeclareMicrotypeSetDefault[kerning]   {alltext}
+\DeclareMicrotypeSetDefault[tracking]  {smallcaps}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%\subsection{Font variants and aliases}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%%% -----------------------------------------------------------------------
+%%% FONT VARIANTS AND ALIASES
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% These are the variants I happen to be using (expert encoding, oldstyle
+% numerals, swashes, alternative, display, inferior and superior numerals):
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareMicrotypeVariants{x,j,w,a,d,0,1}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Other candidates: |2|~(proportional digits), |e|~(engraved), |f|~(Fraktur),
+% |g|~(small text), |h|~(shadow), |l|~(outline), |n|~(informal),
+% |p|~(ornaments), |r|~(roman), |s|~(sans serif), |t|~(typewriter).
+% I've omitted them since they seem hardly be used and/or they are actually
+% more than a variant, \ie, they shouldn't share a file.
+%
+%\bigskip\noindent
+% Fonts that are `the same': The Latin Modern fonts, the virtual fonts from the
+% \pkg{ae} and \pkg{zefonts}, and the \pkg{eco} and \pkg{hfoldsty} packages
+% (oldstyle numerals) all inherit the (basic) settings from Computer Modern
+% Roman. Some of them are in part overwritten later.
+%\changes{v1.2}{2004/10/03}{declare \texttt{cmor} as an alias of \texttt{cmr}}
+%\changes{v1.3}{2004/10/22}{declare \texttt{aer}, \texttt{zer} and \texttt{hfor}
+%                           as aliases of \texttt{cmr}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareMicrotypeAlias{lmr} {cmr}  % lmodern
+\DeclareMicrotypeAlias{aer} {cmr}  % ae
+\DeclareMicrotypeAlias{zer} {cmr}  % zefonts
+\DeclareMicrotypeAlias{cmor}{cmr}  % eco
+\DeclareMicrotypeAlias{hfor}{cmr}  % hfoldsty
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The packages \pkg{pxfonts} and \pkg{txfonts} fonts inherit Palatino and Times
+% settings respectively,
+%\changes{v1.8}{2005/04/19}{declare \texttt{pxr} and \texttt{txr}
+%                           as aliases of \texttt{ppl} resp. \texttt{ptm}}
+% also the \TeX\ Gyre fonts Pagella and Termes (formerly: \pkg{qfonts}).
+%\changes{v1.9}{2005/08/16}{declare \texttt{qpl} and \texttt{qtm} (\pkg{qfonts}, \TeX\ Gyre)
+%                           as aliases of \texttt{ppl} resp. \texttt{ptm}}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareMicrotypeAlias{pxr} {ppl}  % pxfonts
+\DeclareMicrotypeAlias{qpl} {ppl}  % TeX Gyre Pagella (formerly: qfonts/QuasiPalatino)
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The `<FPL> Neu' fonts, a `re-implementation' of Palatino.
+%\changes{v2.2}{2007/05/27}{declare <FPL> Neu as an alias of Palatino}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareMicrotypeAlias{fp9x}{pplx} % FPL Neu
+\DeclareMicrotypeAlias{fp9j}{pplj} %   "
+\DeclareMicrotypeAlias{txr} {ptm}  % txfonts
+\DeclareMicrotypeAlias{qtm} {ptm}  % TeX Gyre Termes (formerly: qfonts/QuasiTimes)
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\todo{check Times variants}
+% More Times variants, to be checked: |pns|, |mns| (TimesNewRomanPS); |mnt|
+% (Times\-NewRomanMT, TimesNRSevenMT), |mtm| (TimesSmallTextMT); |pte|
+% (TimesEuropa); |ptt| (TimesTen); TimesEighteen; TimesModernEF.
+%
+% The \pkg{eulervm} package virtually extends the Euler fonts.
+%\changes{v1.9e}{2006/07/28}{declare \texttt{zeur} and \texttt{zeus} (\pkg{eulervm})
+%                            as aliases of \texttt{eur} resp. \texttt{eus} (\pkg{euler})}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareMicrotypeAlias{zeur}{eur}  % Euler VM
+\DeclareMicrotypeAlias{zeus}{eus}  %   "
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% MicroPress's Charter version (\pkg{chmath}).
+%\changes{v2.2}{2007/06/08}{declare \texttt{chr} (\pkg{chmath}) as an alias of Charter
+%                           (reported by \contributor Geoff Vallis <gkv\at Princeton.EDU>)}
+%                                                            ^^A private mail, 2007/06/07
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareMicrotypeAlias{chr} {bch}  % CH Math
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The \pkg{mathdesign} package provides math fonts matching Bitstream Charter
+%\changes{v1.9a}{2005/10/31}{declare \texttt{mdbch} (\pkg{mathdesign})
+%                            as an alias of Charter}
+% and <URW> Garamond.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareMicrotypeAlias{mdbch}{bch} % mathdesign/Charter
+\DeclareMicrotypeAlias{mdugm}{ugm} % mathdesign/URW Garamond
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% <URW> Letter Gothic is similar enough to Bitstream Letter Gothic to share the
+% configuration.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareMicrotypeAlias{ulg} {blg}  % URW LetterGothic -> Bitstream LetterGothic12Pitch
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Euro symbol fonts, to save some files.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareMicrotypeAlias{zpeus}   {zpeu}    % Adobe Euro sans -> serif
+\DeclareMicrotypeAlias{eurosans}{zpeu}    % Adobe Euro sans -> serif
+\DeclareMicrotypeAlias{euroitcs}{euroitc} % ITC Euro sans -> serif
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%\subsection{Interaction with \pkg{babel}}
+%
+% Contexts that are to be set when switching to a language.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%%% -----------------------------------------------------------------------
+%%% INTERACTION WITH THE `babel' PACKAGE
+
+\DeclareMicrotypeBabelHook
+   {english,UKenglish,british,USenglish,american}
+   {kerning=, spacing=nonfrench}
+
+\DeclareMicrotypeBabelHook
+   {french,francais,acadian,canadien}
+   {kerning=french, spacing=}
+
+\DeclareMicrotypeBabelHook
+   {turkish}
+   {kerning=turkish, spacing=}
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\GeneralChanges*
+%
+% \subsection{Note on admissible characters}
+%
+% All printable <ASCII> characters are allowed in the settings, with the
+% following exceptions (on the left hand side, the replacements on the right):
+%
+%\begin{tabbing}
+%  |\|\quad\=:\quad\=\cmd\textbackslash   \\
+%  |{|     \>:\>     \cmd\textbraceleft   \\
+%  |}|     \>:\>     \cmd\textbraceright  \\
+%  |^|     \>:\>     \cmd\textasciicircum \\
+%  |%|     \>:\>     \cmd\%               \\
+%  |#|     \>:\>     \cmd\#
+%\end{tabbing}
+%
+%\noindent
+% Comma and equal sign must be guarded with braces (`|{,}|', `|{=}|') to keep
+% \pkg{keyval} happy.
+%
+% Character commands are allowed as far as they have been defined in the proper
+% \LaTeX\ way, that is, when they have been assigned a slot in the font
+% encoding with \cmd\DeclareTextSymbol\ or \cmd\DeclareTextComposite.
+% Characters defined via \cmd\chardef\ are also possible.
+%
+% Ligatures and \cmd\mathchardef ed symbols have to be specified numerically.
+% Of course, numerical identification is possible in any other case, too.
+%
+%\changes{v1.1}{2004/09/14}{remove 8-bit characters from the configuration files
+%               (suggested by \contributor Harald Harders <h.harders\at tu-bs.de>)}
+%                                                    ^^A private mail, 2004/09/13
+% 8-bit characters are also admissible, provided they have been declared in the
+% input encoding file. They should, however, only be used in private
+% configuration files, where the proper input encoding is guaranteed, or else in
+% combination with the `|inputenc|' key.
+%
+%\subsection{Character inheritance}
+%\GeneralChanges{Inheritance}
+%
+% First the lists of inheriting characters. We only declare those characters
+% that are the same on \emph{both} sides, \ie, not \OE\ for O.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%</m-t>
+%<*m-t|zpeu|mvs>
+%%% -----------------------------------------------------------------------
+%%% CHARACTER INHERITANCE
+
+%</m-t|zpeu|mvs>
+%<*m-t>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%\subsubsection{<OT1>}
+% Glyphs that should possibly inherit settings on one side only:
+% |012|~(`fi' ligature), |013|~(`fl'), |014|~(`ffi'), |015|~(`ffl'),
+% \AE, \ae, \OE, \oe.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareCharacterInheritance
+   { encoding = OT1 }
+   { f = {011}, % ff
+     i = {\i},
+     j = {\j},
+     O = {\O},
+     o = {\o}
+   }
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%\subsubsection{<T1>}
+% Candidates here: |028|~(`fi'), |029|~(`fl'), |030|~(`ffi'), |031|~(`ffl'),
+% |156| (`\IJ'~ligature, since \LaTeX\ 2005/12/01 accessible as |\IJ|),
+% |188|~(`\ij', |\ij|), \AE, \ae, \OE, \oe.
+%\changes{v1.5}{2004/12/11}{remove \cmd\ss\ from <T1> list, add \cmd\DJ}
+%\changes{v1.8}{2005/04/26}{remove \cmd\DJ\ from <T1> list (it's the same as \cmd\DH)}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareCharacterInheritance
+   { encoding = T1 }
+   { A = {\`A,\'A,\^A,\~A,\"A,\r A,\k A,\u A},
+     a = {\`a,\'a,\^a,\~a,\"a,\r a,\k a,\u a},
+     C = {\'C,\c C,\v C},
+     c = {\'c,\c c,\v c},
+     D = {\v D,\DH},
+     d = {\v d,\dj},
+     E = {\`E,\'E,\^E,\"E,\k E,\v E},
+     e = {\`e,\'e,\^e,\"e,\k e,\v e},
+     f = {027}, % ff
+     G = {\u G},
+     g = {\u g},
+     I = {\`I,\'I,\^I,\"I,\.I},
+     i = {\`i,\'i,\^i,\"i,\i},
+     j = {\j},
+     L = {\L,\'L,\v L},
+     l = {\l,\'l,\v l},
+     N = {\'N,\~N,\v N},
+     n = {\'n,\~n,\v n},
+     O = {\O,\`O,\'O,\^O,\~O,\"O,\H O},
+     o = {\o,\`o,\'o,\^o,\~o,\"o,\H o},
+     R = {\'R,\v R},
+     r = {\'r,\v r},
+     S = {\'S,\c S,\v S,\SS},
+     s = {\'s,\c s,\v s},
+     T = {\c T,\v T},
+     t = {\c t,\v t},
+     U = {\`U,\'U,\^U,\"U,\H U,\r U},
+     u = {\`u,\'u,\^u,\"u,\H u,\r u},
+     Y = {\'Y,\"Y},
+     y = {\'y,\"y},
+     Z = {\'Z,\.Z,\v Z},
+     z = {\'z,\.z,\v z}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\changes{v2.2}{2007/02/04}{remove `\texttt{-}' $\rightarrow$ `\texttt{127}'}
+% The `soft hyphen' often has reduced right side bearing so that it may already
+% be protruded, hence no inheritance.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%    - = {127},
+   }
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%\subsubsection{<LY1>}
+% More characters: |008|~(`fl'), |012|~(`fi'), |014|~(`ffi'), |015|~(`ffl'),
+% \AE, \ae, \OE, \oe.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareCharacterInheritance
+   { encoding = LY1 }
+   { A = {\`A,\'A,\^A,\~A,\"A,\r A},
+     a = {\`a,\'a,\^a,\~a,\"a,\r a},
+     C = {\c C},
+     c = {\c c},
+     D = {\DH},
+     E = {\`E,\'E,\^E,\"E},
+     e = {\`e,\'e,\^e,\"e},
+     f = {011}, % ff
+     I = {\`I,\'I,\^I,\"I},
+     i = {\`i,\'i,\^i,\"i,\i},
+     L = {\L},
+     l = {\l},
+     N = {\~N},
+     n = {\~n},
+     O = {\`O,\'O,\^O,\~O,\"O,\O},
+     o = {\`o,\'o,\^o,\~o,\"o,\o},
+     S = {\v S},
+     s = {\v s},
+     U = {\`U,\'U,\^U,\"U},
+     u = {\`u,\'u,\^u,\"u},
+     Y = {\'Y,\"Y},
+     y = {\'y,\"y},
+     Z = {\v Z},
+     z = {\v z}
+   }
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%\subsubsection{<OT4>}
+%\changes{v1.9}{2005/08/16}{add list for <OT4>}
+% The Polish <OT1> extension. More interesting characters here:
+% |009|~(`fk'), |012|~(`fi'), |013|~(`fl'), |014|~(`ffi'), |015|~(`ffl'),
+% \AE, \ae, \OE, \oe.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareCharacterInheritance
+   { encoding = OT4 }
+   { A = {\k A},
+     a = {\k a},
+     C = {\'C},
+     c = {\'c},
+     E = {\k E},
+     e = {\k e},
+     f = {011}, % ff
+     i = {\i},
+     j = {\j},
+     L = {\L},
+     l = {\l},
+     N = {\'N},
+     n = {\'n},
+     O = {\O,\'O},
+     o = {\o,\'o},
+     S = {\'S},
+     s = {\'s},
+     Z = {\'Z,\.Z},
+     z = {\'z,\.z}
+   }
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%\subsubsection{<QX>}
+%\changes{v1.9d}{2006/04/20}{add list for <QX> encoding (contributed by
+%                            \contributor Maciej Eder <maciej_eder\at poczta.onet.pl>)}
+%                                                     ^^A private mail, 2006/04/19
+% The Central European <QX> encoding.\footnote{
+%   Contributed by \contributor Maciej Eder <maciej_eder\at poczta.onet.pl>.}
+% Ligatures: |009|~(`fk'), |012|~(`fi'), |013|~(`fl'), |014|~(`ffi'),
+% |015|~(`ffl'), \AE, \ae, \OE, \oe.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareCharacterInheritance
+   { encoding = QX }
+   { A = {\`A,\'A,\^A,\~A,\"A,\k A,\AA},
+     a = {\`a,\'a,\^a,\~a,\"a,\k a,\aa},
+     C = {\'C,\c C},
+     c = {\'c,\c c},
+     D = {\DH},
+     E = {\`E,\'E,\^E,\"E,\k E},
+     e = {\`e,\'e,\^e,\"e,\k e},
+     f = {011}, % ff
+     I = {\`I,\'I,\^I,\"I,\k I},
+     i = {\`i,\'i,\^i,\"i,\k i,\i},
+     j = {\j},
+     L = {\L},
+     l = {\l},
+     N = {\'N,\~N},
+     n = {\'n,\~n},
+     O = {\O,\`O,\'O,\^O,\~O,\"O},
+     o = {\o,\`o,\'o,\^o,\~o,\"o},
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\changes{v2.3c}{2008/09/01}{add \cmd\textcommabelow[\texttt{STst}] to <QX> encoding
+%                            (reported by \contributor Vasile Gaburici <vgaburici\at gmail.com>)}
+%                                          ^^A private mail, 2008/09/01, and
+%                                          ^^A http://tug.org/pipermail/tex-live/2008-September/017385.html
+% The Rumanian \cmd\textcommabelow\ accents are actually replacements for the
+% \cmd\c\ variants, which had previously (and erroneously\footnote{
+%   Cf. \url{http://tug.org/pipermail/tex-live/2008-August/017204.html}})
+% been included in <QX> encoding. They are still kept for backwards
+% compatibility.
+%\iffalse
+% If \cmd\textcommabelow\ is undefined, it will be silently ignored.
+% This is due to a quirk in \cs{\MT@map@clist@}.
+%\todo{fix \cs{\MT@map@clist@}?}
+%\fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+     S = {\'S,\c S,\textcommabelow S,\v S},
+     s = {\'s,\c s,\textcommabelow s,\v s},
+     T = {\c T,\textcommabelow T},
+     t = {\c t,\textcommabelow t},
+     U = {\`U,\'U,\^U,\"U,\k U},
+     u = {\`u,\'u,\^u,\"u,\k u},
+     Y = {\'Y,\"Y},
+     y = {\'y,\"y},
+     Z = {\'Z,\.Z,\v Z},
+     z = {\'z,\.z,\v z},
+     . = \textellipsis
+   }
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%\subsubsection{<T5>}
+%\changes{v1.9}{2005/08/17}{add list for <T5> (requested by
+%                           \contributor \thanh{} <hanthethanh\at gmail.com>)}
+%                                                ^^A private email, 2005/08/16
+% The Vietnamese encoding <T5>. It is so crowded with accented and double-accented
+% characters that there is no room for any ligatures.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareCharacterInheritance
+   { encoding = T5 }
+   { A = {\`A,\'A,\~A,\h A,\d A,\^A,\u A,
+          \`\Acircumflex,\'\Acircumflex,\~\Acircumflex,\h\Acircumflex,\d\Acircumflex,
+          \`\Abreve,\'\Abreve,\~\Abreve,\h\Abreve,\d\Abreve},
+     a = {\`a,\'a,\~a,\h a,\d a,\^a,\u a,
+          \`\acircumflex,\'\acircumflex,\~\acircumflex,\h\acircumflex,\d\acircumflex,
+          \`\abreve,\'\abreve,\~\abreve,\h\abreve,\d\abreve},
+     D = {\DJ},
+     d = {\dj},
+     E = {\`E,\'E,\~E,\h E,\d E,\^E,
+          \`\Ecircumflex,\'\Ecircumflex,\~\Ecircumflex,\h\Ecircumflex,\d\Ecircumflex},
+     e = {\`e,\'e,\~e,\h e,\d e,\^e,
+          \`\ecircumflex,\'\ecircumflex,\~\ecircumflex,\h\ecircumflex,\d\ecircumflex},
+     I = {\`I,\'I,\~I,\h I,\d I},
+     i = {\`i,\'i,\~i,\h i,\d i,\i},
+     O = {\`O,\'O,\~O,\h O,\d O,\^O,\horn O,
+          \`\Ocircumflex,\'\Ocircumflex,\~\Ocircumflex,\h\Ocircumflex,\d\Ocircumflex,
+          \`\Ohorn,\'\Ohorn,\~\Ohorn,\h\Ohorn,\d\Ohorn},
+     o = {\`o,\'o,\~o,\h o,\d o,\^o,\horn o,
+          \`\ocircumflex,\'\ocircumflex,\~\ocircumflex,\h\ocircumflex,\d\ocircumflex,
+          \`\ohorn,\'\ohorn,\~\ohorn,\h\ohorn,\d\ohorn},
+     U = {\`U,\'U,\~U,\h U,\d U,\horn U,
+          \`\Uhorn,\'\Uhorn,\~\Uhorn,\h\Uhorn,\d\Uhorn},
+     u = {\`u,\'u,\~u,\h u,\d u,\horn u,
+          \`\uhorn,\'\uhorn,\~\uhorn,\h\uhorn,\d\uhorn},
+     Y = {\`Y,\'Y,\~Y,\h Y,\d Y},
+     y = {\`y,\'y,\~y,\h y,\d y}
+   }
+
+%</m-t>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%\subsubsection{Euro symbols}
+% Make Euro symbols settings simpler.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*zpeu>
+\DeclareCharacterInheritance
+   { encoding = U,
+     family   = {zpeu,zpeus,eurosans} }
+   { E = 128 }
+
+%</zpeu>
+%<*mvs>
+\DeclareCharacterInheritance
+   { encoding = OT1,
+     family   = mvs }
+   { 164 = {099,100,101} } % \EURhv,\EURcr,\EURtm
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Since 2006/05/11 (that is, one week after I've added these settings, after the
+% package had been dormant for six years), \pkg{marvosym}'s encoding is
+% (correctly) <U> instead of <OT1>.
+%\changes{v1.9e}{2006/07/05}{adapt to \pkg{marvosym}'s changed encoding}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\DeclareCharacterInheritance
+   { encoding = U,
+     family   = mvs }
+   { 164 = {099,100,101} }
+
+%</mvs>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%\subsection{Tracking}
+%\GeneralChanges{Tracking}
+%
+%\changes{v2.2}{2007/02/23}{add ligatures that are to be disabled}
+% By default, we only disable the `f*' ligatures, for those fonts that have
+% any. Thus, ligatures and especially kerning for all other characters will be
+% retained.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*m-t>
+%%% -----------------------------------------------------------------------
+%%% TRACKING/LETTERSPACING
+
+\SetTracking
+  [ name         = default,
+    no ligatures = {f} ]
+  { encoding     = {OT1,T1,T2A,LY1,OT4,QX} }
+  { }
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%\subsection{Font expansion}
+%\GeneralChanges{Expansion}
+%
+% These are \thanh's original expansion settings. They are used for all fonts
+% (until somebody shows mercy and creates font-specific settings).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%%% -----------------------------------------------------------------------
+%%% EXPANSION
+
+\SetExpansion
+   [ name     = default      ]
+   { encoding = {OT1,OT4,QX,T1,LY1} }
+   {
+     A = 500,     a = 700,
+   \AE = 500,   \ae = 700,
+     B = 700,     b = 700,
+     C = 700,     c = 700,
+     D = 500,     d = 700,
+     E = 700,     e = 700,
+     F = 700,
+     G = 500,     g = 700,
+     H = 700,     h = 700,
+     K = 700,     k = 700,
+     M = 700,     m = 700,
+     N = 700,     n = 700,
+     O = 500,     o = 700,
+   \OE = 500,   \oe = 700,
+     P = 700,     p = 700,
+     Q = 500,     q = 700,
+     R = 700,
+     S = 700,     s = 700,
+     U = 700,     u = 700,
+     W = 700,     w = 700,
+     Z = 700,     z = 700,
+     2 = 700,
+     3 = 700,
+     6 = 700,
+     8 = 700,
+     9 = 700
+   }
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Settings for Cyrillic <T2A> encoding.\footnote{Contributed by
+%                                           \contributor Karl Karlsson <karl-karlsson\at yandex.ru>.}
+%\changes{v2.3e}{2009/10/28}{settings for <T2A> encoding
+%                            (contributed by \contributor Karl Karlsson <karl-karlsson\at yandex.ru>)}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\SetExpansion
+   [ name     = T2A ]
+   { encoding = T2A }
+   {
+     A = 500,     a = 700,
+     B = 700,     b = 700,
+     C = 700,     c = 700,
+     D = 500,     d = 700,
+     E = 700,     e = 700,
+     F = 700,
+     G = 500,     g = 700,
+     H = 700,     h = 700,
+     K = 700,     k = 700,
+     M = 700,     m = 700,
+     N = 700,     n = 700,
+     O = 500,     o = 700,
+     P = 700,     p = 700,
+     Q = 500,     q = 700,
+     R = 700,
+     S = 700,     s = 700,
+     U = 700,     u = 700,
+     W = 700,     w = 700,
+     Z = 700,     z = 700,
+     2 = 700,
+     3 = 700,
+     6 = 700,
+     8 = 700,
+     9 = 700,
+     \CYRA = 500,     \cyra = 700,
+     \CYRB = 700,     \cyrb = 700,
+     \CYRV = 700,     \cyrv = 700,
+     \CYRG = 700,     \cyrg = 700,
+     \CYRD = 700,     \cyrd = 700,
+     \CYRE = 700,     \cyre = 700,
+     \CYRZH = 700,    \cyrzh = 700,
+     \CYRZ = 700,     \cyrz = 700,
+     \CYRI = 700,     \cyri = 700,
+     \CYRISHRT = 700, \cyrishrt = 700,
+     \CYRK = 700,     \cyrk = 700,
+     \CYRL = 700,     \cyrl = 700,
+     \CYRM = 700,     \cyrm = 700,
+     \CYRN = 700,     \cyrn = 700,
+     \CYRO = 500,     \cyro = 700,
+     \CYRP = 700,     \cyrp = 700,
+     \CYRR = 700,     \cyrr = 700,
+     \CYRS = 700,     \cyrs = 700,
+     \CYRT = 700,     \cyrt = 700,
+     \CYRU = 700,     \cyru = 700,
+     \CYRF = 700,     \cyrf = 700,
+     \CYRH = 700,     \cyrh = 700,
+     \CYRC = 700,     \cyrc = 700,
+     \CYRCH = 700,    \cyrch = 700,
+     \CYRSH = 700,    \cyrsh = 700,
+     \CYRSHCH = 700,  \cyrshch = 700,
+     \CYRHRDSN = 700, \cyrhrdsn = 700,
+     \CYRERY = 700,   \cyrery = 700,
+     \CYRSFTSN = 700, \cyrsftsn = 700,
+     \CYREREV = 700,  \cyrerev = 700,
+     \CYRYU = 700,    \cyryu = 700,
+     \CYRYA = 700,    \cyrya = 700
+   }
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% <T5> encoding does not contain \cmd\AE, \cmd\ae, \cmd\OE\ and \cmd\oe.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\SetExpansion
+   [ name     = T5 ]
+   { encoding = T5 }
+   {
+     A = 500,     a = 700,
+     B = 700,     b = 700,
+     C = 700,     c = 700,
+     D = 500,     d = 700,
+     E = 700,     e = 700,
+     F = 700,
+     G = 500,     g = 700,
+     H = 700,     h = 700,
+     K = 700,     k = 700,
+     M = 700,     m = 700,
+     N = 700,     n = 700,
+     O = 500,     o = 700,
+     P = 700,     p = 700,
+     Q = 500,     q = 700,
+     R = 700,
+     S = 700,     s = 700,
+     U = 700,     u = 700,
+     W = 700,     w = 700,
+     Z = 700,     z = 700,
+     2 = 700,
+     3 = 700,
+     6 = 700,
+     8 = 700,
+     9 = 700
+   }
+
+%</m-t>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%\subsection{Character protrusion}
+%\GeneralChanges{Protrusion}
+%
+%\changes{v1.1}{2004/09/14}{add factors for some more characters}
+%\changes{v1.4b}{2004/11/19}{harmonise dashes in upshape and italic
+%                            (\texttt{cmr}, \texttt{pad}, \texttt{ppl})}
+%\changes{v1.9}{2005/08/16}{settings for <OT4> encoding (Computer Modern Roman,
+%                           Palatino, Times)}
+%\changes{v1.9}{2005/08/17}{settings for <T5> encoded Computer Modern Roman}
+%\changes{v1.9a}{2005/12/02}{settings for <T5> encoded Charter}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%%% -----------------------------------------------------------------------
+%%% PROTRUSION
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% For future historians, \thanh's original settings (from \file{protcode.tex},
+% converted to \microtype\ notation).
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\SetProtrusion
+%   [ name     = thanh ]
+%   { encoding = OT1 }
+%   {
+%     A = {50,50},
+%     F = {  ,50},
+%     J = {50,  },
+%     K = {  ,50},
+%     L = {  ,50},
+%     T = {50,50},
+%     V = {50,50},
+%     W = {50,50},
+%     X = {50,50},
+%     Y = {50,50},
+%     k = {  ,50},
+%     r = {  ,50},
+%     t = {  ,50},
+%     v = {50,50},
+%     w = {50,50},
+%     x = {50,50},
+%     y = {50,50},
+%     . = { ,700},    {,}= { ,700},
+%     : = { ,500},     ; = { ,500},
+%     ! = { ,200},     ? = { ,200},
+%     ( = {50,  },     ) = {  ,50},
+%     - = { ,700},
+%     \textendash        = { ,300},     \textemdash        = { ,200},
+%     \textquoteleft     = {700, },     \textquoteright    = { ,700},
+%     \textquotedblleft  = {500, },     \textquotedblright = { ,500}
+%   }
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+%\subsubsection{Normal}
+%
+% The default settings always use the most moderate value.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*cfg-t>
+\SetProtrusion
+%<m-t>   [ name     = default ]
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% We also create configuration files for the fonts
+%\begin{itemize}
+%  \item Bitstream Charter (<NFSS> code |bch|)
+%\changes{v1.5}{2004/11/28}{settings for Bitstream Charter}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<bch>   [ name     = bch-default ]
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  \item Bitstream Letter Gothic (|blg|)
+%\changes{v2.2}{2007/03/03}{settings for Bitstream Letter Gothic}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<blg>   [ name     = blg-default ]
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  \item Computer Modern Roman (|cmr|)
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<cmr>   [ name     = cmr-default ]
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  \item Adobe Garamond (|pad|, |padx|, |padj|)
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<pad>   [ name     = pad-default ]
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  \item Minion\footnote{Contributed by \contributor Harald Harders <h.harders\at tu-bs.de>
+%                        and \contributor Karl Karlsson <karl-karlsson\at yandex.ru>.}
+%        (|pmnx|, |pmnj|)
+%\changes{v1.1}{2004/09/14}{settings for Adobe Minion (contributed by
+%                           \contributor Harald Harders <h.harders\at tu-bs.de>)}
+%                                                  ^^A private mail, 2004/09/14
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<pmn>   [ name     = pmnj-default ]
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  \item Palatino (|ppl|, |pplx|, |pplj|)
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<ppl>   [ name     = ppl-default ]
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  \item Times (|ptm|, |ptmx|, |ptmj|)
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<ptm>   [ name     = ptm-default ]
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  \item <URW> Garamond (|ugm|)
+%\changes{v1.9c}{2006/01/26}{settings for <URW> Garamond}
+%\end{itemize}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<ugm>   [ name     = ugm-default ]
+%<m-t|cmr|pmn>   { }
+%<bch|blg|pad|ugm>   { encoding = OT1,
+%<ppl|ptm>   { encoding = {OT1,OT4},
+%<bch>     family   = bch }
+%<blg>     family   = blg }
+%<pad>     family   = {pad,padx,padj} }
+%<ppl>     family   = {ppl,pplx,pplj} }
+%<ptm>     family   = {ptm,ptmx,ptmj} }
+%<ugm>     family   = ugm }
+   {
+%<m-t|bch|blg|cmr|pad|pmn|ppl|ptm>     A = {50,50},
+%<ugm>     A = {50,100},
+%<pad|ptm>   \AE = {50,  },
+%<ugm>   \AE = {150,50},
+%<ugm>     B = {  ,50},
+%<bch|pad|pmn|ugm>     C = {50,  },
+%<bch|pad|pmn>     D = {  ,50},
+%<ugm>     D = {  ,70},
+%<ugm>     E = {  ,50},
+%<m-t|bch|cmr|pad|pmn|ptm>     F = {  ,50},
+%<ugm>     F = {  ,70},
+%<bch|pad|pmn>     G = {50,  },
+%<ugm>     G = {50,50},
+%<blg>     I = {150,150},
+%<m-t|cmr|pad|pmn|ppl|ptm|ugm>     J = {50,  },
+%<bch|blg>     J = {100,  },
+%<!blg>     K = {  ,50},
+%<blg>     K = {50,  },
+%<m-t|bch|cmr|pad|pmn|ppl>     L = {  ,50},
+%<blg>     L = {  ,150},
+%<ptm>     L = {  ,80},
+%<ugm>     L = {  ,120},
+%<bch|pad|pmn|ugm>     O = {50,50},
+%<pad>   \OE = {50,  },
+%<ugm>   \OE = {50,50},
+%<blg>     P = {  ,100},
+%<ugm>     P = {  ,50},
+%<bch|pad|pmn>     Q = {50,70},
+%<ugm>     Q = {50,50},
+%<bch>     R = {  ,50},
+%<ugm>     R = {  ,70},
+%<m-t|bch|cmr|pad|pmn|ppl|ptm>     T = {50,50},
+%<blg>     T = {100,100},
+%<ugm>     T = {70,70},
+%<m-t|bch|cmr|pad|pmn|ppl|ptm>     V = {50,50},
+%<blg|ugm>     V = {70,70},
+%<m-t|bch|cmr|pad|pmn|ppl|ptm>     W = {50,50},
+%<ugm>     W = {70,70},
+%<m-t|bch|cmr|pad|pmn|ppl|ptm>     X = {50,50},
+%<ugm>     X = {50,70},
+%<m-t|bch|cmr|pad|pmn|ppl>     Y = {50,50},
+%<blg|ptm|ugm>     Y = {80,80},
+%<ugm>     Z = {50,50},
+%<blg>     f = {150,100},
+%<blg>     i = {150,150},
+%<blg>     j = {100,100},
+%<m-t|bch|cmr|pad|pmn|ppl|ptm>     k = {  ,50},
+%<ugm>     k = {  ,70},
+%<blg>     l = {150,150},
+%<pmn>     l = {  ,-50},
+%<pad|ppl>     p = {50,50},
+%<ugm>     p = {  ,50},
+%<pad|ppl>     q = {50,  },
+%<!blg>     r = {  ,50},
+%<blg>     r = {100, 80},
+%<cmr|pad|pmn>     t = {  ,70},
+%<bch>     t = {  ,50},
+%<blg>     t = {150, 80},
+%<ugm>     t = {  ,100},
+%<m-t|bch|cmr|pad|pmn|ppl|ptm>     v = {50,50},
+%<blg>     v = {100,100},
+%<ugm>     v = {50,70},
+%<m-t|bch|cmr|pad|pmn|ppl|ptm>     w = {50,50},
+%<ugm>     w = {50,70},
+%<!blg>     x = {50,50},
+%<blg>     x = {100,100},
+%<m-t|bch|pad|pmn>     y = {  ,50},
+%<blg>     y = { 50,100},
+%<cmr|ppl|ptm>     y = {50,70},
+%<ugm>     y = {  ,70},
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\changes{v1.6}{2005/01/11}{improve settings for numbers
+%               (pointed out by \contributor Peter Muthesius <newsname\at gmx.de>)}
+%                                       ^^A MID: <34b1h7F48s44tU1@individual.net>
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<cmr>     0 = {  ,50},
+%<m-t>     1 = {50,50},
+%<bch|blg|pad|ptm|ugm>     1 = {150,150},
+%<cmr>     1 = {100,200},
+%<pmn>     1 = {  ,50},
+%<ppl>     1 = {100,100},
+%<bch|cmr|pad|ugm>     2 = {50,50},
+%<blg>     2 = {  ,100},
+%<bch|pmn>     3 = {50,  },
+%<cmr|pad|ugm>     3 = {50,50},
+%<blg>     3 = {100,  },
+%<m-t|pad>     4 = {50,50},
+%<bch>     4 = {100,50},
+%<blg>     4 = {100,  },
+%<cmr|ugm>     4 = {70,70},
+%<pmn>     4 = {50,  },
+%<ptm>     4 = {70,  },
+%<cmr>     5 = {  ,50},
+%<pad>     5 = {50,50},
+%<bch>     6 = {50,  },
+%<cmr>     6 = {  ,50},
+%<pad>     6 = {50,50},
+%<m-t>     7 = {50,50},
+%<bch|pad|pmn|ugm>     7 = {50,80},
+%<blg>     7 = {100,100},
+%<cmr|ptm>     7 = {50,100},
+%<ppl>     7 = {  ,50},
+%<cmr>     8 = {  ,50},
+%<bch|pad>     9 = {50,50},
+%<cmr>     9 = {  ,50},
+%<m-t|cmr|pad|pmn|ppl|ptm|ugm>     . = { ,700},
+%<bch>     . = { ,600},
+%<blg>     . = {400,500},
+%<!blg>    {,}= { ,500},
+%<blg>    {,}= {300,400},
+%<m-t|cmr|pad|pmn|ppl|ptm|ugm>     : = { ,500},
+%<bch>     : = { ,400},
+%<blg>     : = {300,400},
+%<m-t|bch|pad|pmn|ptm>     ; = { ,300},
+%<blg>     ; = {200,300},
+%<cmr|ppl>     ; = { ,500},
+%<ugm>     ; = { ,400},
+%<!blg>     ! = { ,100},
+%<blg>     ! = {200,200},
+%<m-t|pad|pmn|ptm>     ? = { ,100},
+%<bch|cmr|ppl|ugm>     ? = { ,200},
+%<blg>     ? = {150,150},
+%<pmn>     " = {300,300},
+%<m-t|bch|cmr|pad|pmn|ppl>     @ = {50,50},
+%<ptm>     @ = {100,100},
+%<m-t|bch|blg|cmr|pad|pmn|ppl|ptm>     ~ = {200,250},
+%<ugm>     ~ = {300,350},
+%<pad|ppl|ptm>     & = {50,100},
+%<ugm>     & = {  ,100},
+%<m-t|cmr|pad|pmn>    \% = {50,50},
+%<bch>    \% = {  ,50},
+%<ppl|ptm>    \% = {100,100},
+%<ugm>    \% = {50,100},
+%<blg>    \# = {100,100},
+%<m-t|ppl|ptm|ugm>     * = {200,200},
+%<bch|pmn>     * = {200,300},
+%<blg>     * = {150,200},
+%<cmr|pad>     * = {300,300},
+%<m-t|cmr|ppl|ptm>     + = {250,250},
+%<bch>     + = {150,250},
+%<pad>     + = {300,300},
+%<blg|pmn>     + = {150,200},
+%<ugm>     + = {250,300},
+%<blg|ugm>    {=}= {200,200},
+%<m-t|pad|pmn|ptm>     ( = {100,   },    ) = {   ,200},
+%<bch|ugm>     ( = {200,   },    ) = {   ,200},
+%<cmr|blg>     ( = {300,   },    ) = {   ,300},
+%<ppl>     ( = {100,   },    ) = {   ,300},
+%<bch|pmn>     [ = {100,   },    ] = {   ,100},
+%<blg>     [ = {300,100},    ] = {   ,300},
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\changes{v1.7}{2005/03/15}{fix: remove \textbackslash\ from <OT1>,
+%                           add \cmd\textbackslash\ to <T1> encoding}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<m-t|pad|pmn|ptm>     / = {100,200},
+%<bch>     / = { ,200},
+%<blg>     / = {300,300},
+%<cmr|ppl>     / = {200,300},
+%<ugm>     / = {100,300},
+%<m-t|ptm>     - = {500,500},
+%<bch|cmr|ppl>     - = {400,500},
+%<blg>     - = {300,400},
+%<pad>     - = {300,500},
+%<pmn>     - = {200,400},
+%<ugm>     - = {500,600},
+%<blg>     < = {200,100},    > = {100,200},
+%<blg>     _ = {150,250},
+%<blg>     | = {250,250},
+%<m-t|pmn>     \textendash       = {200,200},   \textemdash        = {150,150},
+%<bch>     \textendash       = {200,300},   \textemdash        = {150,250},
+%<cmr>     \textendash       = {400,300},   \textemdash        = {300,200},
+%<pad|ppl|ptm>     \textendash       = {300,300},   \textemdash        = {200,200},
+%<ugm>     \textendash       = {250,300},   \textemdash        = {250,250},
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Why settings for left \emph{and} right quotes? Because in some languages they
+% might be used like that (see the \pkg{csquotes} package for examples).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<m-t|bch|pmn>     \textquoteleft    = {300,400},   \textquoteright    = {300,400},
+%<blg>     \textquoteleft     = {400,600},   \textquoteright    = {400,600},
+%<cmr>     \textquoteleft    = {500,700},   \textquoteright    = {500,600},
+%<pad|ppl>     \textquoteleft    = {500,700},   \textquoteright    = {500,700},
+%<ptm>     \textquoteleft    = {500,500},   \textquoteright    = {300,500},
+%<ugm>     \textquoteleft    = {300,600},   \textquoteright    = {300,600},
+%<m-t|bch|pmn>     \textquotedblleft = {300,300},   \textquotedblright = {300,300}
+%<blg>     \textquotedblright = {300,400}
+%<cmr>     \textquotedblleft = {500,300},   \textquotedblright = {200,600}
+%<pad|ppl|ptm>     \textquotedblleft = {300,400},   \textquotedblright = {300,400}
+%<ugm>     \textquotedblleft = {400,400},   \textquotedblright = {400,400}
+   }
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Greek uppercase letters are in <OT1> encoding only.
+%\changes{v1.9}{2005/07/10}{fix: remove uppercase Greek letters from <T1> encoded <CMR>}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*m-t|cmr|pmn>
+\SetProtrusion
+%<m-t>   [ name     = OT1-default,
+%<cmr>   [ name     = cmr-OT1,
+%<pmn>   [ name     = pmnj-OT1,
+%<m-t>     load     = default ]
+%<cmr>     load     = cmr-default ]
+%<pmn>     load     = pmnj-default ]
+%<m-t>   { encoding = OT1 }
+%<cmr>   { encoding = {OT1,OT4},
+%<pmn>   { encoding = OT1,
+%<cmr>     family   = cmr  }
+%<pmn>     family   = pmnj }
+   {
+%<m-t|cmr>     \AE = {50,   },
+%<pmn>     \OE = {50,  }
+%<*cmr>
+     "00 = {   ,150}, % \Gamma
+     "01 = {100,100}, % \Delta
+     "02 = { 50, 50}, % \Theta
+     "03 = {100,100}, % \Lambda
+     "06 = { 50, 50}, % \Sigma
+     "07 = {100,100}, % \Upsilon
+     "08 = { 50, 50}, % \Phi
+     "09 = { 50, 50}  % \Psi
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Remaining slots can be found in the source file.
+%\iffalse ^^A ... namely, here:
+%    "04 = {   ,   }, % \Xi
+%    "05 = {   ,   }, % \Pi
+%    "0A = {   ,   }, % \Omega
+%\fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%</cmr>
+   }
+
+%</m-t|cmr|pmn>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% <T1> and <LY1> encodings contain some more characters. The default list
+% will be loaded first.
+%\changes{v1.9a}{2005/11/07}{fix: remove `\texttt{\_}' from <OT1> encoding}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\SetProtrusion
+%<m-t>   [ name     = T1-default,
+%<bch>   [ name     = bch-T1,
+%<blg>   [ name     = blg-T1,
+%<cmr>   [ name     = cmr-T1,
+%<pad>   [ name     = pad-T1,
+%<pmn>   [ name     = pmnj-T1,
+%<ppl>   [ name     = ppl-T1,
+%<ptm>   [ name     = ptm-T1,
+%<ugm>   [ name     = ugm-T1,
+%<m-t>     load     = default     ]
+%<bch>     load     = bch-default ]
+%<blg>     load     = blg-default ]
+%<cmr>     load     = cmr-default ]
+%<pad>     load     = pad-default ]
+%<pmn>     load     = pmnj-default ]
+%<ppl>     load     = ppl-default ]
+%<ptm>     load     = ptm-default ]
+%<ugm>     load     = ugm-default ]
+%<m-t>   { encoding = {T1,LY1}    }
+%<bch|cmr|pad|pmn|ppl>   { encoding = {T1,LY1},
+%<blg|ptm|ugm>   { encoding = {T1},
+%<bch>     family   = bch }
+%<blg>     family   = blg }
+%<cmr>     family   = cmr }
+%<pad>     family   = {pad,padx,padj} }
+%<pmn>     family   = pmnj }
+%<ppl>     family   = {ppl,pplx,pplj} }
+%<ptm>     family   = {ptm,ptmx,ptmj} }
+%<ugm>     family   = ugm }
+   {
+%<m-t|cmr>     \AE = {50,  },
+%<bch|pmn>     \OE = {50,  },
+%<pmn>     \TH = {  ,50},
+%<blg>     \v L = {   ,250},
+%<blg>     \v d = {   ,250},
+%<blg>     \v l = {   ,250},
+%<blg>     \v t = {   ,250},
+%<blg>     127 =  {300,400},
+%<blg>     156 =  {100,   }, % IJ
+%<blg>     188 =  { 80, 80}, % ij
+%<m-t|bch|pad|pmn|ppl|ptm>       _ = {100,100},
+%<cmr>       _ = {200,200},
+%<ugm>       _ = {100,200},
+%<m-t|pad|pmn|ptm>     \textbackslash    = {100,200},
+%<bch>     \textbackslash    = {150,200},
+%<blg>     \textbackslash    = {250,300},
+%<cmr|ppl>     \textbackslash    = {200,300},
+%<ugm>     \textbackslash    = {100,300},
+%<ugm>     \textbar          = {200,200},
+%<blg>     \textendash       = {300,300},   \textemdash        = {150,150},
+%<blg>     \textquotedbl     = {300,400},   \textquotedblleft  = {300,400},
+%<cmr>     \textquotedbl     = {300,300},   \textquotedblleft  = {200,600},
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\changes{v1.4}{2004/10/30}{tweak quote characters for \texttt{cmr}
+%                           variants (<OT1>, <T1>, \texttt{lmr})}
+% The <EC> fonts do something weird: they insert an implicit kern between quote
+% and boundary character. Therefore, we must override the settings from <OT1>.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<m-t|cmr|pad|ppl|ptm|ugm>     \quotesinglbase   = {400,400},   \quotedblbase      = {400,400},
+%<blg>     \quotesinglbase   = {400,400},   \quotedblbase      = {300,400},
+%<bch|pmn>     \quotesinglbase   = {400,400},   \quotedblbase      = {300,300},
+%<m-t|bch|pmn>     \guilsinglleft    = {400,300},   \guilsinglright    = {300,400},
+%<blg>     \guilsinglleft    = {300,500},   \guilsinglright    = {300,500},
+%<cmr|pad|ppl|ptm>     \guilsinglleft    = {400,400},   \guilsinglright    = {300,500},
+%<ugm>     \guilsinglleft    = {400,400},   \guilsinglright    = {300,600},
+%<m-t>     \guillemotleft    = {200,200},   \guillemotright    = {200,200},
+%<cmr>     \guillemotleft    = {300,200},   \guillemotright    = {100,400},
+%<bch|pmn>     \guillemotleft    = {200,200},   \guillemotright    = {150,300},
+%<blg|pad|ppl|ptm>     \guillemotleft    = {300,300},   \guillemotright    = {200,400},
+%<ugm>     \guillemotleft    = {300,400},   \guillemotright    = {300,400},
+%<m-t|bch|cmr|pad|pmn|ppl|ugm>     \textexclamdown   = {100,   },   \textquestiondown  = {100,   },
+%<blg>     \textexclamdown   = {200,   },   \textquestiondown  = {100,   },
+%<ptm>     \textexclamdown   = {200,   },   \textquestiondown  = {200,   },
+%<m-t|cmr|pad|ppl|ptm|ugm>     \textbraceleft    = {400,200},   \textbraceright    = {200,400},
+%<bch|blg|pmn>     \textbraceleft    = {200,   },   \textbraceright    = {   ,300},
+%<m-t|bch|cmr|pad|ppl|ptm|ugm>     \textless         = {200,100},   \textgreater       = {100,200}
+%<pmn>     \textless         = {100,   },   \textgreater       = {   ,100},
+%<pmn>     \textvisiblespace = {100,100} % not in LY1
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\iffalse
+%   \dh = {  ,  },
+%   \th = {  ,  },
+%   \NG = {  ,  },
+%   \ng = {  ,  },
+%   \textasciicircum = {  ,  },
+%   \textsterling = {  ,  }, % also in TS1
+%   \textsection = {  ,  }, % also in TS1
+%\fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+   }
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% The \pkg{lmodern} fonts used to restore the original settings from <OT1>
+% fonts. Now, they require even other settings, though.
+%\changes{v2.3a}{2008/02/19}{adjust <LMR> quotation marks again}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*cmr>
+\SetProtrusion
+   [ name     = lmr-T1,
+     load     = cmr-T1   ]
+   { encoding = {T1,LY1},
+     family   = lmr      }
+   {
+     \textquotedblleft  = {300,400},  \textquotedblright = {300,400}
+   }
+
+%</cmr>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Settings for the <T2A> encoding (generic, Computer Modern Roman, and Minion).\footnote{Contributed by
+%                            \contributor Karl Karlsson <karl-karlsson\at yandex.ru>.}
+%\changes{v2.3e}{2009/10/28}{settings for <T2A> encoding (contributed by
+%                            \contributor Karl Karlsson <karl-karlsson\at yandex.ru>)}
+%                                                       ^^A private mail, 2009/10/21
+%\changes{v2.4}{2009/11/15}{settings for <T2A> encoded Minion (contributed by
+%                           \contributor Karl Karlsson <karl-karlsson\at yandex.ru>)}
+%                                                       ^^A private mail, 2009/11/14
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*m-t|cmr|pmn>
+\SetProtrusion
+%<m-t>   [ name     = T2A-default,
+%<cmr>   [ name     = cmr-T2A,
+%<pmn>   [ name     = pmnj-T2A,
+%<m-t>     load     = default     ]
+%<cmr>     load     = cmr-default ]
+%<pmn>     load     = pmnj-default ]
+   { encoding = T2A,
+%<m-t>   }
+%<cmr>     family   = cmr }
+%<pmn>     family   = pmnj }
+   {
+     \CYRA = {50,50},
+     \CYRG = {  ,50},
+     \CYRK = {  ,50},
+     \CYRT = {50,50},
+     \CYRH = {50,50},
+     \CYRU = {50,50},
+%<pmn>     \CYRS = {50,  },
+%<pmn>     \CYRO = {50,50},
+     \cyrk = {  ,50},
+     \cyrg = {  ,50},
+     \cyrh = {50,50},
+%<m-t|pmn>     \cyru = {50,50},
+%<cmr>     \cyru = {50,70},
+%<m-t>        _  = {100,100},
+%<cmr>        _  = {200,200},
+%<m-t>     \textbackslash    = {100,200},   \quotedblbase      = {400,400},
+%<cmr>     \textbackslash    = {200,300},   \quotedblbase      = {400,400},
+%<pmn>     \textbackslash    = {100,200},   \quotedblbase      = {300,300},
+%<cmr>     \textquotedbl     = {300,300},   \textquotedblleft  = {200,600},
+%<m-t>     \guillemotleft    = {200,200},   \guillemotright    = {200,200},
+%<cmr>     \guillemotleft    = {300,200},   \guillemotright    = {100,400},
+%<pmn>     \guillemotleft    = {200,200},   \guillemotright    = {150,300},
+%<m-t|cmr>     \textbraceleft    = {400,200},   \textbraceright    = {200,400},
+%<pmn>     \textbraceleft    = {200,   },   \textbraceright    = {   ,300},
+%<m-t|cmr>     \textless         = {200,100},   \textgreater       = {100,200}
+%<pmn>     \textless         = {100,   },   \textgreater       = {   ,100}
+   }
+
+%</m-t|cmr|pmn>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Settings for the <QX> encoding (generic and Times).\footnote{Contributed by
+%                            \contributor Maciej Eder <maciej_eder\at poczta.onet.pl>.}
+%\changes{v1.9d}{2006/04/20}{settings for <QX> encoding (contributed by
+%                            \contributor Maciej Eder <maciej_eder\at poczta.onet.pl>)}
+%                                                     ^^A private mail, 2006/04/19
+% It also includes some glyphs otherwise in <TS1>.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*m-t|ptm>
+\SetProtrusion
+%<m-t>   [ name     = QX-default,
+%<ptm>   [ name     = ptm-QX,
+%<m-t>     load     = default ]
+%<ptm>     load     = ptm-default ]
+%<m-t>   { encoding = QX }
+%<ptm>   { encoding = QX,
+%<ptm>     family   = {ptm,ptmx,ptmj} }
+   {
+     \AE = {50,  },
+%<ptm>      *  = {200,200},
+     {=} = {100,100},
+     \textunderscore   = {100,100},
+     \textbackslash    = {100,200},
+     \quotedblbase     = {400,400},
+%<m-t>     \guillemotleft    = {200,200},   \guillemotright    = {200,200},
+%<ptm>     \guillemotleft    = {300,300},   \guillemotright    = {200,400},
+     \textexclamdown   = {100,   },   \textquestiondown  = {100,   },
+%<m-t>     \textbraceleft    = {400,200},   \textbraceright    = {200,400},
+%<ptm>     \textbraceleft    = {200,200},   \textbraceright    = {200,300},
+     \textless         = {200,100},   \textgreater       = {100,200},
+     \textminus        = {200,200},   \textdegree        = {300,300},
+%<m-t>     \copyright        = {100,100},   \textregistered    = {100,100}
+%<ptm>     \copyright        = {100,150},   \textregistered    = {100,150},
+%<ptm>     \textxgeq         = {   ,100},   \textxleq          = {100,   },
+%<ptm>     \textalpha        = {   , 50},   \textDelta         = { 70, 70},
+%<ptm>     \textpi           = { 50, 80},   \textSigma         = {   , 70},
+%<ptm>     \textmu           = {   , 80},   \texteuro          = { 50, 50},
+%<ptm>     \textellipsis     = {150,200},   \textasciitilde    = { 80, 80},
+%<ptm>     \textapprox       = { 50, 50},   \textinfty         = {100,100},
+%<ptm>     \textdagger       = {150,150},   \textdaggerdbl     = {100,100},
+%<ptm>     \textdiv          = { 50,150},   \textsection       = { 80, 80},
+%<ptm>     \texttimes        = {100,150},   \textpm            = { 50, 80},
+%<ptm>     \textbullet       = {150,150},   \textperiodcentered = {300,300},
+%<ptm>     \textquotesingle  = {500,500},   \textquotedbl      = {300,300},
+%<ptm>     \textperthousand  = {    ,50}
+   }
+
+%</m-t|ptm>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% <T5> is based on <OT1>; it shares some but not all extra characters of <T1>.
+% All accented characters are already taken care of by the inheritance list.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*cmr|bch>
+\SetProtrusion
+%<cmr>   [ name     = cmr-T5,
+%<cmr>     load     = cmr-default ]
+%<bch>   [ name     = bch-T5,
+%<bch>     load     = bch-default ]
+   { encoding = T5,
+%<cmr>     family   = cmr }
+%<bch>     family   = bch }
+   {
+%<bch>     _ = {100,100},
+%<bch>     \textbackslash    = {150,200},
+%<cmr>     \textbackslash    = {200,300},
+%<cmr>     \textquotedblleft = {200,600},
+%<cmr>     \textquotedbl     = {300,300},
+%<bch>     \quotesinglbase   = {400,400},   \quotedblbase      = {300,300},
+%<cmr>     \quotesinglbase   = {400,400},   \quotedblbase      = {400,400},
+%<bch>     \guilsinglleft    = {400,300},   \guilsinglright    = {300,400},
+%<cmr>     \guilsinglleft    = {400,400},   \guilsinglright    = {300,500},
+%<bch>     \guillemotleft    = {200,200},   \guillemotright    = {150,300},
+%<cmr>     \guillemotleft    = {300,200},   \guillemotright    = {100,400},
+%<bch>     \textbraceleft    = {200,   },   \textbraceright    = {   ,300},
+%<cmr>     \textbraceleft    = {400,200},   \textbraceright    = {200,400},
+     \textless         = {200,100},   \textgreater       = {100,200}
+   }
+
+%</cmr|bch>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Minion with lining numbers.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*pmn>
+\SetProtrusion
+   [ name     = pmnx-OT1,
+     load     = pmnj-default ]
+   { encoding = OT1,
+     family   = pmnx }
+   {
+     1 = {230,180}
+   }
+
+\SetProtrusion
+   [ name     = pmnx-T1,
+     load     = pmnj-T1  ]
+   { encoding = {T1,LY1},
+     family   = pmnx     }
+   {
+     1 = {230,180}
+   }
+
+\SetProtrusion
+   [ name     = pmnx-T2A,
+     load     = pmnj-T2A  ]
+   { encoding = {T2A},
+     family   = pmnx     }
+   {
+     1 = {230,180}
+   }
+
+%</pmn>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Times is the default font for <LY1>, therefore we provide settings for the
+% additional characters in this encoding, too.
+%\changes{v1.8}{2005/04/26}{add <LY1> characters for Times}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*ptm>
+ \SetProtrusion
+   [ name     = ptm-LY1,
+     load     = ptm-T1 ]
+   { encoding = LY1,
+     family   = {ptm,ptmx,ptmj} }
+   {
+     _                         = {100,100},
+     \texttrademark            = {100,100},
+     \textregistered           = {100,100},
+     \textcopyright            = {100,100},
+     \textdegree               = {300,300},
+     \textminus                = {200,200},
+     \textellipsis             = {150,200},
+%    \texteuro                 = {   ,   }, % ?
+     \textcent                 = {100,100},
+     \textquotesingle          = {500,500},
+     \textflorin               = { 50, 70},
+     \textdagger               = {150,150},
+     \textdaggerdbl            = {100,100},
+     \textperthousand          = {   , 50},
+     \textbullet               = {150,150},
+     \textonesuperior          = {100,100},
+     \texttwosuperior          = { 50, 50},
+     \textthreesuperior        = { 50, 50},
+     \textperiodcentered       = {300,300},
+     \textplusminus            = { 50, 80},
+     \textmultiply             = {100,100},
+     \textdivide               = { 50,150}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Remaining slots in the source file.
+%\iffalse
+%    \textbrokenbar            = {   ,   },
+%    \textyen                  = {   ,   },
+%    \textfractionsolidus      = {   ,   },
+%    \textordfeminine          = {   ,   },
+%    \textordmasculine         = {   ,   },
+%    \textmu                   = {   ,   },
+%    \textparagraph            = {   ,   },
+%    \textonequarter           = {   ,   },
+%    \textonehalf              = {   ,   },
+%    \textthreequarters        = {   ,   },
+%\fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+   }
+
+%</ptm>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%\subsubsection{Italics}
+%
+% To find default settings for italic is difficult, since the character shapes
+% and their behaviour at the beginning or end of line may be wildly different
+% for different fonts. Therefore, we leave the letters away, and only set up the
+% punctuation characters.
+%\changes{v1.4b}{2004/11/22}{slanted like italics}
+%\changes{v1.6}{2004/12/26}{add italic uppercase Greek letters}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\SetProtrusion
+%<m-t>   [ name     = OT1-it   ]
+%<bch>   [ name     = bch-it   ]
+%<blg>   [ name     = blg-it,
+%<blg>     load     = blg-default ]
+%<cmr>   [ name     = cmr-it   ]
+%<pad>   [ name     = pad-it   ]
+%<pmn>   [ name     = pmnj-it  ]
+%<ppl>   [ name     = ppl-it   ]
+%<ptm>   [ name     = ptm-it   ]
+%<ugm>   [ name     = ugm-it   ]
+%<m-t|bch|blg|pad|ugm>   { encoding = OT1,
+%<ppl|ptm>   { encoding = {OT1,OT4},
+%<bch>     family   = bch,
+%<blg>     family   = blg,
+%<pad>     family   = {pad,padx,padj},
+%<ppl>     family   = {ppl,pplx,pplj},
+%<ptm>     family   = {ptm,ptmx,ptmj},
+%<ugm>     family   = ugm,
+%<m-t|bch|pad|ppl|ptm>     shape    = {it,sl}  }
+%<blg|ugm>     shape    = it  }
+%<cmr|pmn>   { }
+   {
+%<cmr|ptm>     A = {100,50},
+%<pad|pmn>     A = {50,  },
+%<ugm>     A = {  ,150},
+%<ppl>     A = {50,50},
+%<ptm>   \AE = {100,  },
+%<pad|ppl>   \AE = {50,  },
+%<cmr|pad|ppl|ptm>     B = {50,  },
+%<pmn>     B = {20,-50},
+%<bch|ppl|ptm|ugm>     C = {50,  },
+%<cmr|pad>     C = {100, },
+%<pmn>     C = {50,-50},
+%<cmr|pad|ppl|ptm>     D = {50,50},
+%<pmn>     D = {20,  },
+%<cmr|pad|ppl|ptm>     E = {50,  },
+%<pmn>     E = {20,-50},
+%<cmr|pad|ptm>     F = {100, },
+%<pmn>     F = {10,  },
+%<ppl>     F = {50,  },
+%<bch|ppl|ptm|ugm>     G = {50,  },
+%<cmr|pad>     G = {100, },
+%<pmn>     G = {50,-50},
+%<cmr|pad|ppl|ptm>     H = {50,  },
+%<cmr|pad|ptm>     I = {50,  },
+%<pmn>     I = {20,-50},
+%<cmr|ptm>     J = {100, },
+%<pad>     J = {50,  },
+%<pmn>     J = {20,  },
+%<cmr|pad|ppl|ptm>     K = {50,  },
+%<pmn>     K = {20,  },
+%<cmr|pad|ppl|ptm>     L = {50,  },
+%<pmn>     L = {20,50},
+%<ugm>     L = {  ,100},
+%<cmr|ptm>     M = {50,  },
+%<pmn>     M = {  ,-30},
+%<cmr|ptm>     N = {50,  },
+%<pmn>     N = {  ,-30},
+%<bch|pmn|ppl|ptm>     O = {50,  },
+%<cmr|pad>     O = {100, },
+%<ugm>     O = {70,50},
+%<ppl|ptm>   \OE = {50,  },
+%<pad>   \OE = {100, },
+%<cmr|pad|ppl|ptm>     P = {50,  },
+%<pmn>     P = {20,-50},
+%<bch|pmn|ppl|ptm>     Q = {50,  },
+%<cmr|pad>     Q = {100, },
+%<ugm>     Q = {70,50},
+%<cmr|pad|ppl|ptm>     R = {50,  },
+%<pmn>     R = {20,  },
+%<bch|cmr|pad|ppl|ptm>     S = {50,  },
+%<pmn>     S = {20,-30},
+%<bch|cmr|pad|ppl|ptm>     $ = {50,  },
+%<pmn>     $ = {20,-30},
+%<bch|pmn|ugm>     T = {70,  },
+%<cmr|pad|ppl|ptm>     T = {100, },
+%<cmr|pad|ppl|ptm>     U = {50,  },
+%<pmn>     U = {50,-50},
+%<cmr|pad|pmn|ugm>     V = {100, },
+%<ppl|ptm>     V = {100,50},
+%<cmr|pad|pmn|ugm>     W = {100, },
+%<ppl>     W = {50,  },
+%<ptm>     W = {100,50},
+%<cmr|ppl|ptm>     X = {50,  },
+%<cmr|ptm>     Y = {100, },
+%<pmn>     Y = {50,  },
+%<ppl>     Y = {100,50},
+%<pmn>     Z = {  ,-50},
+%<pmn>     d = {  ,-50},
+%<pad|pmn>     f = { ,-100},
+%<pmn>     i = {  ,-30},
+%<pmn>     j = {  ,-30},
+%<pmn>     l = {  ,-100},
+%<bch>     o = {50,50},
+%<bch>     p = {  ,50},
+%<pmn>     p = {-50,  },
+%<bch>     q = {50,  },
+%<pmn>     r = {  ,50},
+%<bch>     t = {  ,50},
+%<pmn|ugm>     v = {50,  },
+%<bch>     w = {  ,50},
+%<pmn|ugm>     w = {50,  },
+%<bch>     y = {  ,50},
+%<cmr>     0 = {100, },
+%<bch|ptm>     1 = {150,100},
+%<cmr>     1 = {200,50},
+%<pad>     1 = {150, },
+%<pmn>     1 = {50,  },
+%<ppl>     1 = {100, },
+%<ugm>     1 = {150,150},
+%<cmr>     2 = {100,-100},
+%<pad|ppl|ptm>     2 = {50,  },
+%<pmn>     2 = {-50,  },
+%<bch>     3 = {50,  },
+%<cmr>     3 = {100,-100},
+%<pmn>     3 = {-100, },
+%<ptm>     3 = {100,50},
+%<bch>     4 = {100, },
+%<cmr|pad>     4 = {150, },
+%<ppl|ptm>     4 = {50,  },
+%<cmr>     5 = {100, },
+%<ptm>     5 = {50,  },
+%<bch>     6 = {50,  },
+%<cmr>     6 = {100, },
+%<bch|pad|ptm>     7 = {100, },
+%<cmr>     7 = {200,-150},
+%<pmn>     7 = {20,  },
+%<ppl>     7 = {50,  },
+%<cmr>     8 = {50,-50},
+%<cmr>     9 = {100,-100},
+%<m-t|cmr|pad|pmn|ppl>     . = { ,500},
+%<blg>     . = {400,600},
+%<bch|ptm|ugm>     . = { ,700},
+%<blg>    {,}= {300,500},
+%<m-t|cmr|pad|pmn|ppl>    {,}= { ,500},
+%<bch|ugm>    {,}= { ,600},
+%<ptm>    {,}= { ,700},
+%<m-t|cmr|pad|ppl>     : = { ,300},
+%<bch|ugm>     : = { ,400},
+%<pmn>     : = { ,200},
+%<ptm>     : = { ,500},
+%<m-t|cmr|pad|ppl>     ; = { ,300},
+%<bch|ugm>     ; = { ,400},
+%<pmn>     ; = { ,200},
+%<ptm>     ; = { ,500},
+%<ptm>     ! = { ,100},
+%<bch>     ? = { ,200},
+%<ptm>     ? = { ,100},
+%<ppl>     ? = { ,300},
+%<pmn>     " = {400,200},
+%<m-t|pad|pmn|ppl|ptm>     & = {50,50},
+%<bch>     & = {  ,80},
+%<cmr>     & = {100,50},
+%<ugm>     & = {50,100},
+%<m-t|cmr|pad|pmn>    \% = {100, },
+%<bch>    \% = {50,50},
+%<ppl|ptm>    \% = {100,100},
+%<ugm>    \% = {100,50},
+%<m-t|pmn|ppl>     * = {200,200},
+%<bch>     * = {300,200},
+%<cmr>     * = {400,100},
+%<pad>     * = {500,100},
+%<ptm|ugm>     * = {400,200},
+%<m-t|cmr|pmn|ppl>     + = {150,200},
+%<bch|ugm>     + = {250,250},
+%<pad|ptm>     + = {250,200},
+%<m-t|pad|pmn|ppl>     @ = {50,50},
+%<bch>     @ = {80,50},
+%<cmr>     @ = {200,50},
+%<ptm>     @ = {150,150},
+%<m-t|bch|ugm>     ~ = {150,150},
+%<cmr|pad|pmn|ppl|ptm>     ~ = {200,150},
+%<ugm>    {=}= {200,200},
+%<!blg>     ( = {200, },    ) = {  ,200},
+%<m-t|cmr|pad|ppl|ptm|ugm>     / = {100,200},
+%<bch>     / = {  ,150},
+%<pmn>     / = {100,150},
+%<m-t>     - = {300,300},
+%<bch|pad>     - = {300,400},
+%<pmn>     - = {200,300},
+%<cmr>     - = {500,300},
+%<ppl>     - = {300,500},
+%<ptm>     - = {500,500},
+%<ugm>     - = {400,700},
+%<blg>     _ = {0,300},
+%<m-t|pmn>     \textendash       = {200,200},   \textemdash        = {150,150},
+%<bch>     \textendash       = {200,300},   \textemdash        = {150,200},
+%<cmr>     \textendash       = {500,300},   \textemdash        = {400,200},
+%<pad|ppl|ptm|ugm>     \textendash       = {300,300},   \textemdash        = {200,200},
+%<m-t|bch|pmn|ugm>     \textquoteleft    = {400,200},   \textquoteright    = {400,200},
+%<blg>     \textquoteleft     = {400,400},    \textquoteright    = {400,400},
+%<cmr|pad>     \textquoteleft    = {800,200},   \textquoteright    = {800,200},
+%<ppl>     \textquoteleft    = {700,400},   \textquoteright    = {700,400},
+%<ptm>     \textquoteleft    = {800,500},   \textquoteright    = {800,500},
+%<m-t|bch|pmn>     \textquotedblleft = {400,200},   \textquotedblright = {400,200}
+%<blg>     \textquotedblright = {300,300}
+%<cmr>     \textquotedblleft = {700,100},   \textquotedblright = {500,300}
+%<pad>     \textquotedblleft = {700,200},   \textquotedblright = {700,200}
+%<ppl>     \textquotedblleft = {500,300},   \textquotedblright = {500,300}
+%<ptm>     \textquotedblleft = {700,400},   \textquotedblright = {700,400}
+%<ugm>     \textquotedblleft = {600,200},   \textquotedblright = {600,200}
+   }
+
+%<*cmr|pmn>
+\SetProtrusion
+%<cmr>   [ name     = cmr-it-OT1,
+%<pmn>   [ name     = pmnj-it-OT1,
+%<cmr>     load     = cmr-it   ]
+%<pmn>     load     = pmnj-it  ]
+%<cmr>   { encoding = {OT1,OT4},
+%<pmn>   { encoding = OT1,
+%<cmr>     family   = cmr,
+%<pmn>     family   = pmnj,
+%<cmr>     shape    = it       }
+%<pmn>     shape    = {it,sl}  }
+   {
+%<cmr>     \AE = {100,   },
+%<pmn>     \AE = {  ,-50},
+%<cmr>     \OE = {100,   },
+%<pmn>     \OE = {50,   }
+%<*cmr>
+     "00 = {200,150}, % \Gamma
+     "01 = {150,100}, % \Delta
+     "02 = {150, 50}, % \Theta
+     "03 = {150, 50}, % \Lambda
+     "04 = {100,100}, % \Xi
+     "05 = {100,100}, % \Pi
+     "06 = {100, 50}, % \Sigma
+     "07 = {200,150}, % \Upsilon
+     "08 = {150, 50}, % \Phi
+     "09 = {150,100}, % \Psi
+     "0A = { 50, 50}  % \Omega
+%</cmr>
+   }
+
+%</cmr|pmn>
+\SetProtrusion
+%<m-t>   [ name     = T1-it-default,
+%<bch>   [ name     = bch-it-T1,
+%<blg>   [ name     = blg-it-T1,
+%<cmr>   [ name     = cmr-it-T1,
+%<pad>   [ name     = pad-it-T1,
+%<pmn>   [ name     = pmnj-it-T1,
+%<ppl>   [ name     = ppl-it-T1,
+%<ptm>   [ name     = ptm-it-T1,
+%<ugm>   [ name     = ugm-it-T1,
+%<m-t>     load     = OT1-it   ]
+%<bch>     load     = bch-it   ]
+%<blg>     load     = blg-T1   ]
+%<cmr>     load     = cmr-it   ]
+%<pmn>     load     = pmnj-it  ]
+%<pad>     load     = pad-it   ]
+%<ppl>     load     = ppl-it   ]
+%<ptm>     load     = ptm-it   ]
+%<ugm>     load     = ugm-it   ]
+%<m-t|bch|cmr|pad|pmn|ppl>   { encoding = {T1,LY1},
+%<blg|ptm|ugm>   { encoding = T1,
+%<bch>     family   = bch,
+%<blg>     family   = blg,
+%<cmr>     family   = cmr,
+%<pmn>     family   = pmnj,
+%<pad>     family   = {pad,padx,padj},
+%<ppl>     family   = {ppl,pplx,pplj},
+%<ptm>     family   = {ptm,ptmx,ptmj},
+%<ugm>     family   = ugm,
+%<m-t|bch|pad|pmn|ppl|ptm>     shape    = {it,sl}  }
+%<blg|cmr|ugm>     shape    = it       }
+   {
+%<m-t|bch|pmn>     _ = {  ,100},
+%<blg>     _ = {0,300},
+%<cmr|ugm>     _ = {100,200},
+%<pad|ppl|ptm>     _ = {100,100},
+%<blg>     . = {400,600},
+%<blg>    {,}= {300,500},
+%<cmr>     \AE = {100,   },
+%<pmn>     \AE = {  ,-50},
+%<bch|pmn>     \OE = { 50,   },
+%<cmr>     \OE = {100,   },
+%<pmn>     031 = { ,-100}, % ffl
+%<cmr|ptm>     156 = {100, },  % IJ
+%<pad>     156 = {50,  },  % IJ
+%<pmn>     156 = {20,  },  % IJ
+%<pmn>     188 = {  ,-30}, % ij
+%<pmn>   \v t = { ,100},
+%<m-t|pad|ppl|ptm>     \textbackslash    = {100,200},
+%<cmr|ugm>     \textbackslash    = {300,300},
+%<bch>     \textbackslash    = {150,150},
+%<pmn>     \textbackslash    = {100,150},
+%<ugm>     \textbar          = {200,200},
+%<cmr>     \textquotedblleft = {500,300},
+%<blg>    \textquoteleft     = {400,400},    \textquoteright    = {400,400},
+%<blg>    \textquotedbl      = {300,300},    \textquotedblleft  = {300,300},
+%<blg>    \textquotedblright = {300,300},    \quotedblbase      = {200,600},
+%<m-t|ptm>     \quotesinglbase   = {300,700},   \quotedblbase      = {400,500},
+%<cmr>     \quotesinglbase   = {300,700},   \quotedblbase      = {200,600},
+%<bch|pmn>     \quotesinglbase   = {200,500},   \quotedblbase      = {150,500},
+%<pad|ppl>     \quotesinglbase   = {500,500},   \quotedblbase      = {400,400},
+%<ugm>     \quotesinglbase   = {300,700},   \quotedblbase      = {300,500},
+%<m-t|ppl|ptm>     \guilsinglleft    = {400,400},   \guilsinglright    = {300,500},
+%<bch|pmn>     \guilsinglleft    = {300,400},   \guilsinglright    = {200,500},
+%<cmr>     \guilsinglleft    = {500,300},   \guilsinglright    = {400,400},
+%<pad>     \guilsinglleft    = {500,400},   \guilsinglright    = {300,500},
+%<ugm>     \guilsinglleft    = {400,400},   \guilsinglright    = {300,600},
+%<m-t|ppl>     \guillemotleft    = {300,300},   \guillemotright    = {300,300},
+%<bch|pmn>     \guillemotleft    = {200,300},   \guillemotright    = {150,400},
+%<cmr>     \guillemotleft    = {400,100},   \guillemotright    = {200,300},
+%<pad>     \guillemotleft    = {300,300},   \guillemotright    = {200,400},
+%<ptm>     \guillemotleft    = {300,400},   \guillemotright    = {200,400},
+%<ugm>     \guillemotleft    = {300,400},   \guillemotright    = {300,400},
+%<m-t|pad|ppl|ugm>     \textexclamdown   = {100,   },   \textquestiondown  = {200,   },
+%<cmr|ptm>     \textexclamdown   = {200,   },   \textquestiondown  = {200,   },
+%<pmn>     \textexclamdown   = {-50,   },   \textquestiondown  = {-50,   },
+%<m-t|ppl|ugm>     \textbraceleft    = {200,100},   \textbraceright    = {200,200},
+%<bch|pmn>     \textbraceleft    = {200,   },   \textbraceright    = {   ,200},
+%<cmr|pad|ptm>     \textbraceleft    = {400,100},   \textbraceright    = {200,200},
+%<bch|pmn>     \textless         = {100,   },   \textgreater       = {   ,100},
+%<cmr|pad|ppl|ptm>     \textless         = {300,100},   \textgreater       = {200,100}
+%<pmn>     \textvisiblespace = {100,100}
+  }
+
+%<*m-t|cmr|pmn>
+\SetProtrusion
+%<m-t>   [ name     = T2A-it-default,
+%<cmr>   [ name     = cmr-it-T2A,
+%<pmn>   [ name     = pmnj-it-T2A,
+%<m-t>     load     = OT1-it   ]
+%<cmr>     load     = cmr-it   ]
+%<pmn>     load     = pmnj-it  ]
+   { encoding = T2A,
+%<cmr>     family   = cmr,
+%<pmn>     family   = pmnj,
+%<m-t|pmn>     shape    = {it,sl}  }
+%<cmr>     shape    = it       }
+   {
+%<cmr>     \CYRA = {100,50},
+%<pmn>     \CYRA = {50,  },
+%<cmr>     \CYRB = {50,  },
+%<cmr>     \CYRV = {50,  },
+%<pmn>     \CYRV = {20,-50},
+%<cmr>     \CYRG = {100, },
+%<pmn>     \CYRG = {10,  },
+%<cmr>     \CYRD = {50,  },
+%<cmr>     \CYRE = {50,  },
+%<pmn>     \CYRE = {20,-50},
+%<cmr>     \CYRZH = {50,  },
+%<cmr>     \CYRZ = {50,  },
+%<pmn>     \CYRZ = {20,-50},
+%<cmr>     \CYRI = {50,  },
+%<pmn>     \CYRI = {  ,-30},
+%<cmr>     \CYRISHRT = {50,  },
+%<cmr>     \CYRK = {50,  },
+%<pmn>     \CYRK = {20,  },
+%<cmr>     \CYRL = {50,  },
+%<cmr>     \CYRM = {50,  },
+%<pmn>     \CYRM = {  ,-30},
+%<cmr>     \CYRN = {50,  },
+%<cmr>     \CYRO = {100, },
+%<pmn>     \CYRO = {50,  },
+%<cmr>     \CYRP = {50,  },
+%<cmr>     \CYRR = {50,  },
+%<pmn>     \CYRR = {20,-50},
+%<cmr>     \CYRS = {100, },
+%<pmn>     \CYRS = {50,  },
+%<cmr>     \CYRT = {100, },
+%<pmn>     \CYRT = {70,  },
+%<cmr>     \CYRU = {100, },
+%<pmn>     \CYRU = {50,  },
+%<cmr>     \CYRF = {100, },
+%<cmr>     \CYRH = {50,  },
+%<cmr>     \CYRC = {50,  },
+%<cmr>     \CYRCH = {100, },
+%<cmr>     \CYRSH = {50,  },
+%<cmr>     \CYRSHCH = {50,  },
+%<cmr>     \CYRHRDSN = {100, },
+%<cmr>     \CYRERY = {50,  },
+%<cmr>     \CYRSFTSN = {50,  },
+%<cmr>     \CYREREV = {50,  },
+%<cmr>     \CYRYU = {50,  },
+%<cmr>     \CYRYA = {50,  },
+%<pmn>     \CYRYA = {  ,20},
+%<pmn>     \cyrr = {-50,  },
+%<m-t|pmn>      _ = {  ,100},
+%<cmr>      _ = {100,200},
+%<pmn>      031 = { ,-100}, % ffl
+%<pmn>     \v t = { ,100},
+%<m-t>     \textbackslash    = {100,200},   \quotedblbase      = {400,500},
+%<cmr>     \textbackslash    = {300,300},   \quotedblbase      = {200,600},
+%<pmn>     \textbackslash    = {100,150},   \quotedblbase      = {150,500},
+%<m-t>     \guillemotleft    = {300,300},   \guillemotright    = {300,300},
+%<cmr>     \guillemotleft    = {400,100},   \guillemotright    = {200,300},
+%<pmn>     \guillemotleft    = {200,300},   \guillemotright    = {150,400},
+%<m-t>     \textbraceleft    = {200,100},   \textbraceright    = {200,200},
+%<cmr>     \textbraceleft    = {400,100},   \textbraceright    = {200,200},
+%<pmn>     \textbraceleft    = {200,   },   \textbraceright    = {   ,200},
+%<cmr>     \textquotedblleft = {500,300},
+%<cmr>     \textless         = {300,100},   \textgreater       = {200,100}
+%<pmn>     \textless         = {100,   },   \textgreater       = {   ,100}
+  }
+
+%</m-t|cmr|pmn>
+%<*m-t|ptm>
+\SetProtrusion
+%<m-t>   [ name     = QX-it-default,
+%<ptm>   [ name     = ptm-it-QX,
+%<m-t>     load     = OT1-it ]
+%<ptm>     load     = ptm-it ]
+   { encoding = {QX},
+%<ptm>     family   = {ptm,ptmx,ptmj},
+     shape    = {it,sl}  }
+   {
+%<ptm>     009 = {  , 50}, % fk
+     {=} = {100,100},
+%<m-t>     \textunderscore   = {100,100},
+%<ptm>     \textunderscore   = {100,150},
+     \textbackslash    = {100,200},
+     \quotedblbase     = {300,400},
+%<m-t>     \guillemotleft    = {300,300},   \guillemotright    = {300,300},
+%<ptm>     \guillemotleft    = {200,400},   \guillemotright    = {200,400},
+     \textexclamdown   = {200,   },   \textquestiondown  = {200,   },
+     \textbraceleft    = {200,100},   \textbraceright    = {200,200},
+     \textless         = {100,100},   \textgreater       = {100,100},
+     \textminus        = {200,200},   \textdegree        = {300,150},
+%<m-t>     \copyright        = {100,100},   \textregistered    = {100,100}
+%<ptm>     \textregistered   = {100,150},   \copyright         = {100,150},
+%<ptm>     \textDelta        = { 70,   },   \textdelta         = {   , 50},
+%<ptm>     \textpi           = { 50, 80},   \textmu            = {   , 80},
+%<ptm>     \texteuro         = {200,   },   \textellipsis      = {100,200},
+%<ptm>     \textquoteleft    = {500,400},   \textquoteright    = {500,400},
+%<ptm>     \textquotedblleft = {500,300},   \textquotedblright = {400,400},
+%<ptm>     \textapprox       = { 50, 50},   \textinfty         = {100,100},
+%<ptm>     \textdagger       = {150,150},   \textdaggerdbl     = {100,100},
+%<ptm>     \textdiv          = {150,150},   \textasciitilde    = { 80, 80},
+%<ptm>     \texttimes        = {100,150},   \textpm            = { 50, 80},
+%<ptm>     \textbullet       = {300,100},   \textperiodcentered = {300,300},
+%<ptm>     \textquotesingle  = {500,500},   \textquotedbl      = {300,300},
+%<ptm>     \textperthousand  = {    ,50}
+   }
+
+%</m-t|ptm>
+%<*cmr|bch>
+\SetProtrusion
+%<cmr>   [ name = cmr-it-T5,
+%<cmr>     load = cmr-it ]
+%<bch>   [ name = bch-it-T5,
+%<bch>     load = bch-it ]
+   { encoding = T5,
+%<bch>     family   = bch,
+%<cmr>     family   = cmr,
+     shape    = it }
+   {
+%<bch>      _ = {  ,100},
+%<cmr>      _ = {100,200},
+%<bch>     \textbackslash    = {150,150},
+%<cmr>     \textbackslash    = {300,300},
+%<bch>     \quotesinglbase   = {200,500},   \quotedblbase      = {150,500},
+%<cmr>     \quotesinglbase   = {300,700},   \quotedblbase      = {200,600},
+%<bch>     \guilsinglleft    = {300,400},   \guilsinglright    = {200,500},
+%<cmr>     \guilsinglleft    = {500,300},   \guilsinglright    = {400,400},
+%<bch>     \guillemotleft    = {200,300},   \guillemotright    = {150,400},
+%<cmr>     \guillemotleft    = {400,100},   \guillemotright    = {200,300},
+%<bch>     \textbraceleft    = {200,   },   \textbraceright    = {   ,200},
+%<cmr>     \textbraceleft    = {400,100},   \textbraceright    = {200,200},
+%<bch>     \textless         = {100,   },   \textgreater       = {   ,100}
+%<cmr>     \textless         = {300,100},   \textgreater       = {200,100}
+  }
+
+%</cmr|bch>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\changes{v1.8}{2005/06/01}{verified settings for slanted Computer Modern Roman}
+% Slanted is very similar to italic.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*cmr>
+\SetProtrusion
+   [ name     = cmr-sl,
+     load     = cmr-it-OT1 ]
+   { encoding = {OT1,OT4},
+     family   = cmr,
+     shape    = sl  }
+   {
+      L = {  ,50},
+      f = { ,-50},
+      - = {300, },
+     \textendash = {400,  },  \textemdash = {300,  }
+   }
+
+\SetProtrusion
+   [ name     = cmr-sl-T1,
+     load     = cmr-it-T1 ]
+   { encoding = {T1,LY1},
+     family   = cmr,
+     shape    = sl  }
+   {
+      L = {  ,50},
+      f = { ,-50},
+      - = {300, },
+     \textendash = {400,  },  \textemdash = {300,  }
+   }
+
+\SetProtrusion
+   [ name     = cmr-sl-T2A,
+     load     = cmr-it-T2A ]
+   { encoding = T2A,
+     family   = cmr,
+     shape    = sl  }
+   {
+      L = {  ,50},
+      f = { ,-50},
+      - = {300, },
+     \textendash = {400,  },  \textemdash = {300,  }
+   }
+
+\SetProtrusion
+   [ name     = cmr-sl-T5,
+     load     = cmr-it-T5 ]
+   { encoding = T5,
+     family   = cmr,
+     shape    = sl  }
+   {
+      L = {  ,50},
+      f = { ,-50},
+      - = {300, },
+     \textendash = {400,  },  \textemdash = {300,  }
+   }
+
+\SetProtrusion
+   [ name     = lmr-it-T1,
+     load     = cmr-it-T1 ]
+   { encoding = {T1,LY1},
+     family   = lmr,
+     shape    = {it,sl} }
+   {
+     \textquotedblleft  = { ,200},  \textquotedblright = { ,200},
+     \quotesinglbase    = { ,400},  \quotedblbase      = { ,500}
+   }
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Oldstyle numerals are slightly different.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\SetProtrusion
+   [ name = cmr(oldstyle)-it,
+     load = cmr-it-T1 ]
+   { encoding = T1,
+     family   = {hfor,cmor},
+     shape    = {it,sl}  }
+   {
+     1 = {250, 50},
+     2 = {150,-100},
+     3 = {100,-50},
+     4 = {150,150},
+     6 = {200,   },
+     7 = {200, 50},
+     8 = {150,-50},
+     9 = {100, 50}
+   }
+
+%</cmr>
+%<*pmn>
+\SetProtrusion
+   [ name     = pmnx-it,
+     load     = pmnj-it ]
+   { encoding = OT1,
+     family   = pmnx,
+     shape    = {it,sl} }
+   {
+     1 = {100,150}
+   }
+
+\SetProtrusion
+   [ name     = pmnx-it-T1,
+     load     = pmnj-it-T1 ]
+   { encoding = {T1,LY1},
+     family   = pmnx,
+     shape    = {it,sl} }
+   {
+     1 = {100,150}
+   }
+
+\SetProtrusion
+   [ name     = pmnx-it-T2A,
+     load     = pmnj-it-T2A ]
+   { encoding = {T2A},
+     family   = pmnx,
+     shape    = {it,sl} }
+   {
+     1 = {100,150}
+   }
+
+%</pmn>
+%<*ptm>
+\SetProtrusion
+   [ name     = ptm-it-LY1,
+     load     = ptm-it-T1   ]
+   { encoding = {LY1},
+     family   = {ptm,ptmx,ptmj},
+     shape    = {it,sl}  }
+   {
+     _                         = {100,100},
+     \texttrademark            = {100,100},
+     \textregistered           = {100,100},
+     \textcopyright            = {100,100},
+     \textdegree               = {300,100},
+     \textminus                = {200,200},
+     \textellipsis             = {100,200},
+%    \texteuro                 = {   ,   }, % ?
+     \textcent                 = {100,100},
+     \textquotesingle          = {500,   },
+     \textflorin               = {100, 70},
+     \textdagger               = {150,150},
+     \textdaggerdbl            = {100,100},
+     \textbullet               = {150,150},
+     \textonesuperior          = {150,100},
+     \texttwosuperior          = {150, 50},
+     \textthreesuperior        = {150, 50},
+     \textparagraph            = {100,   },
+     \textperiodcentered       = {500,300},
+     \textonequarter           = { 50,   },
+     \textonehalf              = { 50,   },
+     \textplusminus            = {100,100},
+     \textmultiply             = {150,150},
+     \textdivide               = {150,150}
+   }
+
+%</ptm>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%\subsubsection{Small caps}
+%
+% Small caps should inherit the values from their big brothers. Since values are
+% relative to character width, we don't need to adjust them any further (but
+% we have to reset some characters).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*!(blg|ugm)>
+\SetProtrusion
+%<m-t>   [ name     = OT1-sc,
+%<bch>   [ name     = bch-sc,
+%<cmr>   [ name     = cmr-sc-OT1,
+%<pad>   [ name     = pad-sc,
+%<pmn>   [ name     = pmnj-sc,
+%<ppl>   [ name     = ppl-sc,
+%<ptm>   [ name     = ptm-sc,
+%<m-t>     load     = default ]
+%<bch>     load     = bch-default ]
+%<cmr>     load     = cmr-OT1 ]
+%<pad>     load     = pad-default ]
+%<pmn>     load     = pmnj-default ]
+%<ppl>     load     = ppl-default ]
+%<ptm>     load     = ptm-default ]
+%<m-t|bch|pad|pmn>   { encoding = OT1,
+%<cmr|ppl|ptm>   { encoding = {OT1,OT4},
+%<bch>     family   = bch,
+%<cmr>     family   = cmr,
+%<pad>     family   = {pad,padx,padj},
+%<pmn>     family   = pmnj,
+%<ppl>     family   = {ppl,pplx,pplj},
+%<ptm>     family   = {ptm,ptmx,ptmj},
+     shape    = sc }
+   {
+     a = {50,50},
+%<cmr|pad|ppl|ptm>   \ae = {50,  },
+%<bch|pmn>     c = {50,  },
+%<bch|pad|pmn>     d = {  ,50},
+%<m-t|bch|cmr|pad|pmn|ptm>     f = {  ,50},
+%<bch|pad|pmn>     g = {50,  },
+%<m-t|cmr|pad|pmn|ppl|ptm>     j = {50,  },
+%<bch>     j = {100,  },
+%<m-t|bch|cmr|pad|pmn|ppl>     l = {  ,50},
+%<ptm>     l = {  ,80},
+%<m-t|bch|cmr|pad|pmn|ppl>   013 = {  ,50}, % fl
+%<ptm>   013 = {  ,80}, % fl
+%<bch|pad|pmn>     o = {50,50},
+%<pad|pmn>   \oe = {50,  },
+%<ppl>     p = { 0, 0},
+%<bch|pad|pmn>     q = {50,70},
+%<ppl>     q = { 0,  },
+%<m-t|cmr|pad|pmn|ppl|ptm>     r = {  , 0},
+     t = {50,50},
+%<m-t|bch|cmr|pad|pmn|ppl>     y = {50,50}
+%<ptm>     y = {80,80}
+   }
+
+\SetProtrusion
+%<m-t>   [ name     = T1-sc,
+%<bch>   [ name     = bch-sc-T1,
+%<cmr>   [ name     = cmr-sc-T1,
+%<pad>   [ name     = pad-sc-T1,
+%<pmn>   [ name     = pmnj-sc-T1,
+%<ppl>   [ name     = ppl-sc-T1,
+%<ptm>   [ name     = ptm-sc-T1,
+%<m-t>     load     = T1-default ]
+%<bch>     load     = bch-T1     ]
+%<cmr>     load     = cmr-T1     ]
+%<pad>     load     = pad-T1     ]
+%<pmn>     load     = pmnj-T1    ]
+%<ppl>     load     = ppl-T1     ]
+%<ptm>     load     = ptm-T1     ]
+   { encoding = {T1,LY1},
+%<bch>     family   = bch,
+%<cmr>     family   = cmr,
+%<pad>     family   = {pad,padx,padj},
+%<pmn>     family   = pmnj,
+%<ppl>     family   = {ppl,pplx,pplj},
+%<ptm>     family   = {ptm,ptmx,ptmj},
+     shape    = sc }
+   {
+     a = {50,50},
+%<cmr|pad|ppl|ptm>   \ae = {50,  },
+%<bch|pmn>     c = {50,  },
+%<bch|pad|pmn>     d = {  ,50},
+%<m-t|bch|cmr|pad|pmn|ptm>     f = {  ,50},
+%<bch|pad|pmn>     g = {50,  },
+%<m-t|cmr|pad|pmn|ppl|ptm>     j = {50,  },
+%<bch>     j = {100,  },
+%<m-t|bch|cmr|pad|pmn|ppl>     l = {  ,50},
+%<ptm>     l = {  ,80},
+%<m-t|bch|cmr|pad|pmn|ppl>   029 = {  ,50}, % fl
+%<ptm>   029 = {  ,80}, % fl
+%<bch|pad|pmn>     o = {50,50},
+%<bch|pad|pmn>   \oe = {50,  },
+%<ppl>     p = { 0, 0},
+%<bch|pad|pmn>     q = {50,70},
+%<ppl>     q = { 0,  },
+%<m-t|cmr|pad|pmn|ppl|ptm>     r = {  , 0},
+     t = {50,50},
+%<m-t|bch|cmr|pad|pmn|ppl>     y = {50,50}
+%<ptm>     y = {80,80}
+   }
+
+%</!(blg|ugm)>
+%<*m-t|cmr>
+\SetProtrusion
+%<m-t>   [ name     = T2A-sc,
+%<cmr>   [ name     = cmr-sc-T2A,
+%<m-t>     load     = T2A-default ]
+%<cmr>     load     = cmr-T2A     ]
+   { encoding = T2A,
+%<cmr>     family   = cmr,
+     shape    = sc }
+   {
+     \cyra = {50,50},
+     \cyrg = {  ,50},
+     \cyrt = {50,50},
+     \cyry = {  ,50}
+   }
+
+%</m-t|cmr>
+%<*m-t>
+\SetProtrusion
+   [ name     = QX-sc,
+     load     = QX-default ]
+   { encoding = QX,
+     shape    = sc  }
+   {
+     a = {50,50},
+     f = {  ,50},
+     j = {50,  },
+     l = {  ,50},
+   013 = {  ,50}, % fl
+     r = {  , 0},
+     t = {50,50},
+     y = {50,50}
+   }
+
+%</m-t>
+%<*cmr|bch>
+\SetProtrusion
+%<bch>   [ name     = bch-sc-T5,
+%<bch>     load     = bch-T5 ]
+%<cmr>   [ name     = cmr-sc-T5,
+%<cmr>     load     = cmr-T5 ]
+   { encoding = T5,
+%<bch>     family   = bch,
+%<cmr>     family   = cmr,
+     shape    = sc }
+   {
+     a = {50,50},
+%<bch>     c = {50,  },
+%<bch>     d = {  ,50},
+     f = {  ,50},
+%<bch>     g = {50,  },
+%<bch>     j = {100, },
+%<cmr>     j = {50,  },
+     l = {  ,50},
+%<bch>     o = {50,50},
+%<bch>     q = { 0,  },
+%<cmr>     r = {  , 0},
+     t = {50,50},
+     y = {50,50}
+   }
+
+%</cmr|bch>
+%<*pmn>
+\SetProtrusion
+   [ name     = pmnx-sc,
+     load     = pmnj-sc ]
+   { encoding = OT1,
+     family   = pmnx,
+     shape    = sc }
+   {
+     1 = {230,180}
+   }
+
+\SetProtrusion
+   [ name     = pmnx-sc-T1,
+     load     = pmnj-sc-T1 ]
+   { encoding = {T1,LY1},
+     family   = pmnx,
+     shape    = sc }
+   {
+     1 = {230,180}
+   }
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%\subsubsection{Italic small caps}
+% Minion provides real small caps in italics.
+% The \pkg{slantsc} package calls them |scit|, Philipp Lehman's
+% \pkg{fontinstallationguide} suggests |si|.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\SetProtrusion
+   [ name     = pmnj-scit,
+     load     = pmnj-it   ]
+   { encoding = OT1,
+     family   = pmnj,
+     shape    = {scit,si} }
+   {
+     a = {50,  },
+   \ae = {  ,-50},
+     b = {20,-50},
+     c = {50,-50},
+     d = {20, 0},
+     e = {20,-50},
+     f = {10, 0},
+   012 = {10,-50}, % fi
+   013 = {10,-50}, % fl
+   014 = {10,-50}, % ffi
+   015 = {10,-50}, % ffl
+     g = {50,-50},
+     i = {20,-50},
+     j = {20, 0},
+     k = {20,  },
+     l = {20,50},
+     m = {  ,-30},
+     n = {  ,-30},
+     o = {50,  },
+   \oe = {50,-50},
+     p = {20,-50},
+     q = {50,  },
+     r = {20, 0},
+     s = {20,-30},
+     t = {70,  },
+     u = {50,-50},
+     v = {100,  },
+     w = {100,  },
+     y = {50,  },
+     z = {  ,-50}
+   }
+
+\SetProtrusion
+   [ name     = pmnj-scit-T1,
+     load     = pmnj-it-T1   ]
+   { encoding = {T1,LY1},
+     family   = pmnj,
+     shape    = {scit,si}    }
+   {
+     a = {50,  },
+   \ae = {  ,-50},
+     b = {20,-50},
+     c = {50,-50},
+     d = {20, 0},
+     e = {20,-50},
+     f = {10, 0},
+   028 = {10,-50}, % fi
+   029 = {10,-50}, % fl
+   030 = {10,-50}, % ffi
+   031 = {10,-50}, % ffl
+     g = {50,-50},
+     i = {20,-50},
+   188 = {20, 0},  % ij
+     j = {20, 0},
+     k = {20,  },
+     l = {20,50},
+     m = {  ,-30},
+     n = {  ,-30},
+     o = {50,  },
+   \oe = {50,-50},
+     p = {20,-50},
+     q = {50,  },
+     r = {20, 0},
+     s = {20,-30},
+     t = {70,  },
+     u = {50,-50},
+     v = {100,  },
+     w = {100,  },
+     y = {50,  },
+     z = {  ,-50}
+   }
+
+\SetProtrusion
+   [ name     = pmnx-scit,
+     load     = pmnj-scit ]
+   { encoding = OT1,
+     family   = pmnx,
+     shape    = {scit,si} }
+   {
+     1 = {100,150}
+   }
+
+\SetProtrusion
+   [ name     = pmnx-scit-T1,
+     load     = pmnj-scit-T1 ]
+   { encoding = {T1,LY1},
+     family   = pmnx,
+     shape    = {scit,si}    }
+   {
+     1 = {100,150}
+   }
+
+%</pmn>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%\subsubsection{Text companion}
+%
+% Finally the <TS1> encoding.
+% Still quite incomplete for Times and especially Palatino. Anybody?
+%\changes{v1.2}{2004/09/28}{add settings for Computer Modern Roman and
+%                           Adobe Garamond in <TS1> encoding}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\SetProtrusion
+%<m-t>   [ name     = textcomp ]
+%<bch>   [ name     = bch-textcomp ]
+%<blg>   [ name     = blg-textcomp ]
+%<cmr>   [ name     = cmr-textcomp ]
+%<pad>   [ name     = pad-textcomp ]
+%<pmn>   [ name     = pmn-textcomp ]
+%<ppl>   [ name     = ppl-textcomp ]
+%<ptm>   [ name     = ptm-textcomp ]
+%<ugm>   [ name     = ugm-textcomp ]
+%<m-t>   { encoding = TS1      }
+%<!m-t>   { encoding = TS1,
+%<bch>     family   = bch }
+%<blg>     family   = blg }
+%<cmr>     family   = cmr }
+%<pad>     family   = {pad,padx,padj} }
+%<pmn>     family   = {pmnx,pmnj} }
+%<ppl>     family   = {ppl,pplx,pplj} }
+%<ptm>     family   = {ptm,ptmx,ptmj} }
+%<ugm>     family   = ugm }
+   {
+%<blg>     \textquotestraightbase    = {400,500},
+%<cmr>     \textquotestraightbase    = {300,300},
+%<pad|pmn>     \textquotestraightbase    = {400,400},
+%<blg>     \textquotestraightdblbase = {300,400},
+%<cmr|pmn>     \textquotestraightdblbase = {300,300},
+%<pad>     \textquotestraightdblbase = {400,400},
+%<bch|cmr|pad|pmn|ugm>     \texttwelveudash          = {200,200},
+%<bch|cmr|pad|pmn>     \textthreequartersemdash  = {150,150},
+%<ugm>     \textthreequartersemdash  = {200,200},
+%<blg>     \textquotesingle          = {500,600},
+%<cmr|pmn>     \textquotesingle          = {300,400},
+%<pad>     \textquotesingle          = {400,500},
+%<ptm>     \textquotesingle          = {500,500},
+%<ugm>     \textquotesingle          = {300,500},
+%<bch|cmr|pmn>     \textasteriskcentered     = {200,300},
+%<blg>     \textasteriskcentered     = {150,200},
+%<pad>     \textasteriskcentered     = {300,300},
+%<ugm>     \textasteriskcentered     = {100,200},
+%<pmn>     \textfractionsolidus      = {-200,-200},
+%<cmr>     \textoneoldstyle          = {100,100},
+%<pmn>     \textoneoldstyle          = {   , 50},
+%<cmr>     \textthreeoldstyle        = {   , 50},
+%<pad|pmn>     \textthreeoldstyle        = { 50,   },
+%<cmr>     \textfouroldstyle         = { 50, 50},
+%<pad|pmn>     \textfouroldstyle         = { 50,   },
+%<cmr|pad|pmn>     \textsevenoldstyle        = { 50, 80},
+%<cmr>     \textlangle               = {400,   },
+%<cmr>     \textrangle               = {   ,400},
+%<m-t|bch|pmn|ptm>     \textminus                = {200,200},
+%<cmr|pad|ppl>     \textminus                = {300,300},
+%<blg|ugm>     \textminus                = {250,300},
+%<bch|pad|pmn>     \textlbrackdbl            = {100,   },
+%<blg>     \textlbrackdbl            = {200,   },
+%<bch|pad|pmn>     \textrbrackdbl            = {   ,100},
+%<blg>     \textrbrackdbl            = {   ,200},
+%<pmn>     \textasciigrave           = {200,500},
+%<bch|blg|cmr|pad|pmn>     \texttildelow             = {200,250},
+%<pmn>     \textasciibreve           = {300,400},
+%<pmn>     \textasciicaron           = {300,400},
+%<pmn>     \textacutedbl             = {200,300},
+%<pmn>     \textgravedbl             = {150,300},
+%<bch|pmn|ugm>     \textdagger               = { 80, 80},
+%<blg>     \textdagger               = {200,200},
+%<cmr|pad>     \textdagger               = {100,100},
+%<ptm>     \textdagger               = {150,150},
+%<blg>     \textdaggerdbl            = {150,150},
+%<cmr|pad|pmn>     \textdaggerdbl            = { 80, 80},
+%<ptm>     \textdaggerdbl            = {100,100},
+%<bch>     \textbardbl               = {100,100},
+%<blg|ugm>     \textbardbl               = {150,150},
+%<bch>     \textbullet               = {200,200},
+%<blg>     \textbullet               = {400,500},
+%<cmr|pad|pmn>     \textbullet               = {   ,100},
+%<ptm>     \textbullet               = {150,150},
+%<ugm>     \textbullet               = { 50,100},
+%<bch|cmr|pmn>     \textcelsius              = { 50,   },
+%<pad>     \textcelsius              = { 80,   },
+%<bch>     \textflorin               = { 50, 50},
+%<blg>     \textflorin               = {100,100},
+%<pad|ugm>     \textflorin               = {   ,100},
+%<pmn>     \textflorin               = { 50,100},
+%<ptm>     \textflorin               = { 50, 70},
+%<cmr>     \textcolonmonetary        = {   , 50},
+%<pad|pmn>     \textcolonmonetary        = { 50,   },
+%<pmn>     \textinterrobang          = {   ,100},
+%<pmn>     \textinterrobangdown      = {100,   },
+%<m-t|pad|ptm>     \texttrademark            = {100,100},
+%<bch>     \texttrademark            = {150,150},
+%<blg|cmr|ppl>     \texttrademark            = {200,200},
+%<pmn>     \texttrademark            = { 50, 50},
+%<ugm>     \texttrademark            = {100,150},
+%<bch|ugm>     \textcent                 = { 50,   },
+%<ptm>     \textcent                 = {100,100},
+%<bch>     \textsterling             = { 50,   },
+%<ugm>     \textsterling             = {   , 50},
+%<bch>     \textbrokenbar            = {200,200},
+%<blg>     \textbrokenbar            = {250,250},
+%<ugm>     \textbrokenbar            = {200,300},
+%<pmn>     \textasciidieresis        = {300,400},
+%<m-t|bch|cmr|pad|ptm|ugm>     \textcopyright            = {100,100},
+%<pmn>     \textcopyright            = {100,150},
+%<ppl>     \textcopyright            = {200,200},
+%<bch|cmr|ugm>     \textordfeminine          = {100,200},
+%<pad|pmn>     \textordfeminine          = {200,200},
+%<bch|cmr|pad|pmn|ugm>     \textlnot                 = {200,   },
+%<blg>     \textlnot                 = {200,100},
+%<m-t|bch|cmr|pad|ptm|ugm>     \textregistered           = {100,100},
+%<pmn>     \textregistered           = { 50,150},
+%<ppl>     \textregistered           = {200,200},
+%<pmn>     \textasciimacron          = {150,200},
+%<m-t|ppl|ptm>     \textdegree               = {300,300},
+%<bch>     \textdegree               = {150,200},
+%<blg|ugm>     \textdegree               = {200,200},
+%<cmr|pad>     \textdegree               = {400,400},
+%<pmn>     \textdegree               = {150,400},
+%<bch|cmr|pad|pmn|ugm>     \textpm                   = {150,200},
+%<blg>     \textpm                   = {100,100},
+%<ptm>     \textpm                   = { 50, 80},
+%<bch|blg|ugm>     \texttwosuperior          = {100,200},
+%<cmr>     \texttwosuperior          = { 50,100},
+%<pad|pmn>     \texttwosuperior          = {200,200},
+%<ptm>     \texttwosuperior          = { 50, 50},
+%<bch|blg|ugm>     \textthreesuperior        = {100,200},
+%<cmr>     \textthreesuperior        = { 50,100},
+%<pad|pmn>     \textthreesuperior        = {200,200},
+%<ptm>     \textthreesuperior        = { 50, 50},
+%<pmn>     \textasciiacute           = {300,400},
+%<bch|ugm>     \textmu                   = {   ,100},
+%<bch|pad|pmn>     \textparagraph            = {   ,100},
+%<bch|cmr|pad|pmn>     \textperiodcentered       = {300,400},
+%<blg>     \textperiodcentered       = {400,500},
+%<ptm>     \textperiodcentered       = {300,300},
+%<ugm>     \textperiodcentered       = {200,500},
+%<bch|blg|ugm>     \textonesuperior          = {200,300},
+%<cmr|pad|pmn>     \textonesuperior          = {200,200},
+%<ptm>     \textonesuperior          = {100,100},
+%<bch|pad|pmn|ugm>     \textordmasculine         = {200,200},
+%<blg|cmr>     \textordmasculine         = {100,200},
+%<bch|cmr|pmn>     \texteuro                 = {100,   },
+%<pad>     \texteuro                 = { 50,100},
+%<bch>     \texttimes                = {200,200},
+%<blg|ptm>     \texttimes                = {100,100},
+%<cmr>     \texttimes                = {150,250},
+%<pad>     \texttimes                = {100,150},
+%<pmn>     \texttimes                = { 70,100},
+%<ugm>     \texttimes                = {200,300},
+%<bch|pad|pmn>     \textdiv                  = {150,200}
+%<blg>     \textdiv                  = {100,100}
+%<cmr>     \textdiv                  = {150,250}
+%<ptm>     \textdiv                  = { 50,100},
+%<ugm>     \textdiv                  = {200,300},
+%<ptm>     \textperthousand          = {    ,50}
+%<ugm>     \textsection              = {   ,100},
+%<ugm>     \textonehalf              = { 50,100},
+%<ugm>     \textonequarter           = { 50,100},
+%<ugm>     \textthreequarters        = { 50,100},
+%<ugm>     \textsurd                 = {   ,100}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Remaining slots in the source file.
+%\iffalse
+%    \textyen                     = {  ,  },
+%    \texttwooldstyle             = {  ,  },
+%    \textfiveoldstyle            = {  ,  },
+%    \textsixoldstyle             = {  ,  },
+%    \texteightoldstyle           = {  ,  },
+%    \textnineoldstyle            = {  ,  },
+%    \textleftarrow               = {  ,  },
+%    \textrightarrow              = {  ,  },
+%    \textblank                   = {  ,  },
+%    \textdollar                  = {  ,  },
+%    \textdblhyphen               = {  ,  },
+%    \textdblhyphenchar           = {  ,  },
+%    \textohm                     = {  ,  },
+%    \textmho                     = {  ,  },
+%    \textbigcircle               = {  ,  },
+%    \textuparrow                 = {  ,  },
+%    \textdownarrow               = {  ,  },
+%    \textborn                    = {  ,  },
+%    \textdied                    = {  ,  },
+%    \textmarried                 = {  ,  },
+%    \textdivorced                = {  ,  },
+%    \textleaf                    = {  ,  },
+%    \textmusicalnote             = {  ,  },
+%    \textdollaroldstyle          = {  ,  },
+%    \textcentoldstyle            = {  ,  },
+%    \textwon                     = {  ,  },
+%    \textnaira                   = {  ,  },
+%    \textguarani                 = {  ,  },
+%    \textpeso                    = {  ,  },
+%    \textlira                    = {  ,  },
+%    \textrecipe                  = {  ,  },
+%    \textdong                    = {  ,  },
+%    \textpertenthousand          = {  ,  },
+%    \textpilcrow                 = {  ,  },
+%    \textbaht                    = {  ,  },
+%    \textnumero                  = {  ,  },
+%    \textdiscount                = {  ,  },
+%    \textestimated               = {  ,  },
+%    \textopenbullet              = {  ,  },
+%    \textservicemark             = {  ,  },
+%    \textlquill                  = {  ,  },
+%    \textrquill                  = {  ,  },
+%    \textcopyleft                = {  ,  },
+%    \textcircledP                = {  ,  },
+%    \textreferencemark           = {  ,  },
+%\fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+   }
+
+%<*cmr|pad|pmn|ugm>
+\SetProtrusion
+%<cmr>   [ name     = cmr-textcomp-it ]
+%<pad>   [ name     = pad-textcomp-it ]
+%<pmn>   [ name     = pmn-textcomp-it ]
+%<ugm>   [ name     = ugm-textcomp-it ]
+   { encoding = TS1,
+%<cmr>     family   = cmr,
+%<pad>     family   = {pad,padx,padj},
+%<pmn>     family   = {pmnx,pmnj},
+%<ugm>     family   = ugm,
+%<!ugm>     shape    = {it,sl} }
+%<ugm>     shape    = it }
+   {
+%<cmr>     \textquotestraightbase    = {300,600},
+%<pad|pmn>     \textquotestraightbase    = {400,400},
+%<cmr>     \textquotestraightdblbase = {300,600},
+%<pad>     \textquotestraightdblbase = {300,400},
+%<pmn>     \textquotestraightdblbase = {300,300},
+     \texttwelveudash          = {200,200},
+%<cmr|pad|pmn>     \textthreequartersemdash  = {150,150},
+%<ugm>     \textthreequartersemdash  = {200,200},
+%<cmr>     \textquotesingle          = {600,300},
+%<pad>     \textquotesingle          = {800,100},
+%<pmn>     \textquotesingle          = {300,200},
+%<ugm>     \textquotesingle          = {500,500},
+%<cmr>     \textasteriskcentered     = {300,200},
+%<pad>     \textasteriskcentered     = {500,100},
+%<pmn>     \textasteriskcentered     = {200,300},
+%<ugm>     \textasteriskcentered     = {300,150},
+%<pmn>     \textfractionsolidus      = {-200,-200},
+%<cmr>     \textoneoldstyle          = {100, 50},
+%<pad>     \textoneoldstyle          = {100,   },
+%<pmn>     \textoneoldstyle          = { 50,   },
+%<pad>     \texttwooldstyle          = { 50,   },
+%<pmn>     \texttwooldstyle          = {-50,   },
+%<cmr>     \textthreeoldstyle        = {100, 50},
+%<pmn>     \textthreeoldstyle        = {-100,  },
+%<cmr>     \textfouroldstyle         = { 50, 50},
+%<pad>     \textfouroldstyle         = { 50,100},
+%<cmr>     \textsevenoldstyle        = { 50, 80},
+%<pad>     \textsevenoldstyle        = { 50,   },
+%<pmn>     \textsevenoldstyle        = { 20,   },
+%<cmr>     \textlangle               = {400,   },
+%<cmr>     \textrangle               = {   ,400},
+%<cmr|pad>     \textminus                = {300,300},
+%<pmn>     \textminus                = {200,200},
+%<ugm>     \textminus                = {250,300},
+%<pad|pmn>     \textlbrackdbl            = {100,   },
+%<pad|pmn>     \textrbrackdbl            = {   ,100},
+%<pmn>     \textasciigrave           = {300,300},
+%<cmr|pad|pmn>     \texttildelow             = {200,250},
+%<pmn>     \textasciibreve           = {300,300},
+%<pmn>     \textasciicaron           = {300,300},
+%<pmn>     \textacutedbl             = {200,300},
+%<pmn>     \textgravedbl             = {150,300},
+%<cmr>     \textdagger               = {100,100},
+%<pad>     \textdagger               = {200,100},
+%<pmn>     \textdagger               = { 80, 50},
+%<ugm>     \textdagger               = { 80, 80},
+%<cmr|pad>     \textdaggerdbl            = { 80, 80},
+%<pmn>     \textdaggerdbl            = { 80, 50},
+%<ugm>     \textbardbl               = {150,150},
+%<cmr>     \textbullet               = {200,100},
+%<pad>     \textbullet               = {300,   },
+%<pmn>     \textbullet               = { 30, 70},
+%<ugm>     \textbullet               = { 50,100},
+%<cmr>     \textcelsius              = {100,   },
+%<pad>     \textcelsius              = {200,   },
+%<pmn>     \textcelsius              = { 50,-50},
+%<pad>     \textflorin               = {100,   },
+%<pmn>     \textflorin               = { 50,100},
+%<ugm>     \textflorin               = {   ,100},
+%<cmr>     \textcolonmonetary        = {150,   },
+%<pad>     \textcolonmonetary        = {100,   },
+%<pmn>     \textcolonmonetary        = { 50,-50},
+%<cmr|pad>     \texttrademark            = {200,   },
+%<pmn>     \texttrademark            = { 50,100},
+%<ugm>     \texttrademark            = {150, 50},
+%<ugm>     \textcent                 = { 50,   },
+%<ugm>     \textsterling             = {   , 50},
+%<ugm>     \textbrokenbar            = {200,300},
+%<pmn>     \textasciidieresis        = {300,200},
+%<cmr>     \textcopyright            = {100,   },
+%<pad>     \textcopyright            = {200,100},
+%<pmn>     \textcopyright            = {100,150},
+%<ugm>     \textcopyright            = {300,   },
+%<cmr>     \textordfeminine          = {100,100},
+%<pmn>     \textordfeminine          = {200,200},
+%<ugm>     \textordfeminine          = {100,200},
+%<cmr|pad>     \textlnot                 = {300,   },
+%<pmn|ugm>     \textlnot                 = {200,   },
+%<cmr>     \textregistered           = {100,   },
+%<pad>     \textregistered           = {200,100},
+%<pmn>     \textregistered           = { 50,150},
+%<ugm>     \textregistered           = {300,   },
+%<pmn>     \textasciimacron          = {150,200},
+%<cmr|pad>     \textdegree               = {500,100},
+%<pmn>     \textdegree               = {150,150},
+%<ugm>     \textdegree               = {300,200},
+%<cmr>     \textpm                   = {150,100},
+%<pad>     \textpm                   = {200,150},
+%<pmn|ugm>     \textpm                   = {150,200},
+%<cmr>     \textonesuperior          = {400,   },
+%<pad>     \textonesuperior          = {300,100},
+%<pmn>     \textonesuperior          = {200,100},
+%<ugm>     \textonesuperior          = {300,300},
+%<cmr>     \texttwosuperior          = {400,   },
+%<pad>     \texttwosuperior          = {300,   },
+%<pmn>     \texttwosuperior          = {200,100},
+%<ugm>     \texttwosuperior          = {300,200},
+%<cmr>     \textthreesuperior        = {400,   },
+%<pad>     \textthreesuperior        = {300,   },
+%<pmn>     \textthreesuperior        = {200,100},
+%<ugm>     \textthreesuperior        = {300,200},
+%<ugm>     \textmu                   = {   ,100},
+%<pmn>     \textasciiacute           = {300,200},
+%<cmr>     \textparagraph            = {200,   },
+%<pmn>     \textparagraph            = {   ,100},
+%<cmr>     \textperiodcentered       = {500,500},
+%<pad|pmn|ugm>     \textperiodcentered       = {300,400},
+%<cmr>     \textordmasculine         = {100,100},
+%<pmn>     \textordmasculine         = {200,200},
+%<ugm>     \textordmasculine         = {300,200},
+%<cmr>     \texteuro                 = {200,   },
+%<pad>     \texteuro                 = {100,   },
+%<pmn>     \texteuro                 = {100,-50},
+%<cmr>     \texttimes                = {200,200},
+%<pad>     \texttimes                = {200,100},
+%<pmn>     \texttimes                = { 70,100},
+%<ugm>     \texttimes                = {200,300},
+%<cmr|pad>     \textdiv                  = {200,200}
+%<pmn>     \textdiv                  = {150,200}
+%<ugm>     \textdiv                  = {200,300},
+%<ugm>     \textsection              = {   ,200},
+%<ugm>     \textonehalf              = { 50,100},
+%<ugm>     \textonequarter           = { 50,100},
+%<ugm>     \textthreequarters        = { 50,100},
+%<ugm>     \textsurd                 = {   ,100}
+   }
+
+%</cmr|pad|pmn|ugm>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%\subsubsection{Computer Modern math}
+%
+% Now to the math symbols for Computer Modern Roman. Definitions have been
+% extracted from \file{fontmath.ltx}.
+%\changes{v1.2}{2004/10/02}{add settings for Computer Modern Roman math symbols}
+% I did not spend too much time fiddling with these settings, so they can surely
+% be improved.
+%
+% The math font `|operators|' (also used for the \cmd\mathrm\ and
+% \cmd\mathbf\ alphabets) is |OT1/cmr|, which we've already set up above.
+% It's declared as:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\DeclareSymbolFont{operators}  {OT1}{cmr}{m} {n}
+%\SetSymbolFont{operators}{bold}{OT1}{cmr}{bx}{n}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%
+% \cmd\mathit\ (|OT1/cmr/m/it|) is also already set up.
+%
+% There are (for the moment) no settings for \cmd\mathsf\ and \cmd\mathtt.
+%
+% Math font `|letters|' (also used as \cmd\mathnormal) is declared as:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\DeclareSymbolFont{letters}    {OML}{cmm}{m}{it}
+%\SetSymbolFont{letters}  {bold}{OML}{cmm}{b}{it}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%\changes{v1.6}{2004/12/26}{tune <CMR> math letters (<OML> encoding)}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*cmr>
+\SetProtrusion
+   [ name     = cmr-math-letters ]
+   { encoding = OML,
+     family   = cmm,
+     series   = {m,b},
+     shape    = it    }
+   {
+       A = {100, 50}, % \mathnormal
+       B = { 50,   },
+       C = { 50,   },
+       D = { 50, 50},
+       E = { 50,   },
+       F = {100, 50},
+       G = { 50, 50},
+       H = { 50, 50},
+       I = { 50, 50},
+       J = {150, 50},
+       K = { 50,100},
+       L = { 50, 50},
+       M = { 50,   },
+       N = { 50,   },
+       O = { 50,   },
+       P = { 50,   },
+       Q = { 50, 50},
+       R = { 50,   },
+       S = { 50,   },
+       T = { 50,100},
+       U = { 50, 50},
+       V = {100,100},
+       W = { 50,100},
+       X = { 50,100},
+       Y = {100,100},
+       f = {100,100},
+       h = {   ,100},
+       i = {   , 50},
+       j = {   , 50},
+       k = {   , 50},
+       r = {   , 50},
+       v = {   , 50},
+       w = {   , 50},
+       x = {   , 50},
+     "0B = { 50,100}, % \alpha
+     "0C = { 50, 50}, % \beta
+     "0D = {200,150}, % \gamma
+     "0E = { 50, 50}, % \delta
+     "0F = { 50, 50}, % \epsilon
+     "10 = { 50,150}, % \zeta
+     "12 = { 50,   }, % \theta
+     "13 = {   ,100}, % \iota
+     "14 = {   ,100}, % \kappa
+     "15 = {100, 50}, % \lambda
+     "16 = {   , 50}, % \mu
+     "17 = {   , 50}, % \nu
+     "18 = {   , 50}, % \xi
+     "19 = { 50,100}, % \pi
+     "1A = { 50, 50}, % \rho
+     "1B = {   ,150}, % \sigma
+     "1C = { 50,150}, % \tau
+     "1D = { 50, 50}, % \upsilon
+     "1F = { 50,100}, % \chi
+     "20 = { 50, 50}, % \psi
+     "21 = {   , 50}, % \omega
+     "22 = {   , 50}, % \varepsilon
+     "23 = {   , 50}, % \vartheta
+     "24 = {   , 50}, % \varpi
+     "25 = {100,   }, % \varrho
+     "26 = {100,100}, % \varsigma
+     "27 = { 50, 50}, % \varphi
+     "28 = {100,100}, % \leftharpoonup
+     "29 = {100,100}, % \leftharpoondown
+     "2A = {100,100}, % \rightharpoonup
+     "2B = {100,100}, % \rightharpoondown
+     "2C = {300,200}, % \lhook
+     "2D = {200,300}, % \rhook
+     "2E = {   ,100}, % \triangleright
+     "2F = {100,   }, % \triangleleft
+     "3A = {   ,500}, % ., \ldotp
+     "3B = {   ,500}, % ,
+     "3C = {200,100}, % <
+     "3D = {300,400}, % /
+     "3E = {100,200}, % >
+     "3F = {200,200}, % \star
+     "5B = {   ,100}, % \flat
+     "5E = {200,200}, % \smile
+     "5F = {200,200}, % \frown
+     "7C = {100,   }, % \jmath
+     "7D = {   ,100}  % \wp
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Remaining slots in the source file.
+%\iffalse
+%    "11 = {   ,   }, % \eta
+%    "1E = {   ,   }, % \phi
+%    "40 = {   ,   }, % \partial
+%    "5C = {   ,   }, % \natural
+%    "5D = {   ,   }, % \sharp
+%    "60 = {   ,   }, % \ell
+%    "7B = {   ,   }, % \imath
+%\fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+   }
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Math font `|symbols|' (also used for the \cmd\mathcal\ alphabet) is declared
+% as:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\DeclareSymbolFont{symbols}    {OMS}{cmsy}{m}{n}
+%\SetSymbolFont{symbols}  {bold}{OMS}{cmsy}{b}{n}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\SetProtrusion
+   [ name     = cmr-math-symbols ]
+   { encoding = OMS,
+     family   = cmsy,
+     series   = {m,b},
+     shape    = n  }
+   {
+       A = {150, 50}, % \mathcal
+       C = {   ,100},
+       D = {   , 50},
+       F = { 50,150},
+       I = {   ,100},
+       J = {100,150},
+       K = {   ,100},
+       L = {100,   },
+       M = { 50, 50},
+       N = { 50,100},
+       P = {   , 50},
+       Q = { 50,   },
+       R = {   , 50},
+       T = { 50,150},
+       V = { 50, 50},
+       W = {   , 50},
+       X = {100,100},
+       Y = {100,   },
+       Z = {100,150},
+     "00 = {300,300}, % -
+     "01 = {   ,700}, % \cdot, \cdotp
+     "02 = {150,250}, % \times
+     "03 = {150,250}, % *, \ast
+     "04 = {200,300}, % \div
+     "05 = {150,250}, % \diamond
+     "06 = {200,200}, % \pm
+     "07 = {200,200}, % \mp
+     "08 = {100,100}, % \oplus
+     "09 = {100,100}, % \ominus
+     "0A = {100,100}, % \otimes
+     "0B = {100,100}, % \oslash
+     "0C = {100,100}, % \odot
+     "0D = {100,100}, % \bigcirc
+     "0E = {100,100}, % \circ
+     "0F = {100,100}, % \bullet
+     "10 = {100,100}, % \asymp
+     "11 = {100,100}, % \equiv
+     "12 = {200,100}, % \subseteq
+     "13 = {100,200}, % \supseteq
+     "14 = {200,100}, % \leq
+     "15 = {100,200}, % \geq
+     "16 = {200,100}, % \preceq
+     "17 = {100,200}, % \succeq
+     "18 = {200,200}, % \sim
+     "19 = {150,150}, % \approx
+     "1A = {200,100}, % \subset
+     "1B = {100,200}, % \supset
+     "1C = {200,100}, % \ll
+     "1D = {100,200}, % \gg
+     "1E = {300,100}, % \prec
+     "1F = {100,300}, % \succ
+     "20 = {100,200}, % \leftarrow
+     "21 = {200,100}, % \rightarrow
+     "22 = {100,100}, % \uparrow
+     "23 = {100,100}, % \downarrow
+     "24 = {100,100}, % \leftrightarrow
+     "25 = {100,100}, % \nearrow
+     "26 = {100,100}, % \searrow
+     "27 = {100,100}, % \simeq
+     "28 = {100,100}, % \Leftarrow
+     "29 = {100,100}, % \Rightarrow
+     "2A = {100,100}, % \Uparrow
+     "2B = {100,100}, % \Downarrow
+     "2C = {100,100}, % \Leftrightarrow
+     "2D = {100,100}, % \nwarrow
+     "2E = {100,100}, % \swarrow
+     "2F = {   ,100}, % \propto
+     "30 = {   ,400}, % \prime
+     "31 = {100,100}, % \infty
+     "32 = {150,100}, % \in
+     "33 = {100,150}, % \ni
+     "34 = {100,100}, % \triangle, \bigtriangleup
+     "35 = {100,100}, % \bigtriangledown
+     "38 = {   ,100}, % \forall
+     "39 = {100,   }, % \exists
+     "3A = {200,   }, % \neg
+     "3E = {200,200}, % \top
+     "3F = {200,200}, % \bot, \perp
+     "5E = {100,200}, % \wedge
+     "5F = {100,200}, % \vee
+     "60 = {   ,300}, % \vdash
+     "61 = {300,   }, % \dashv
+     "62 = {100,100}, % \lfloor
+     "63 = {100,100}, % \rfloor
+     "64 = {100,100}, % \lceil
+     "65 = {100,100}, % \rceil
+     "66 = {150,   }, % \lbrace
+     "67 = {   ,150}, % \rbrace
+     "68 = {400,   }, % \langle
+     "69 = {   ,400}, % \rangle
+     "6C = {100,100}, % \updownarrow
+     "6D = {100,100}, % \Updownarrow
+     "6E = {100,300}, % \, \backslash, \setminus
+     "72 = {100,100}, % \nabla
+     "79 = {200,200}, % \dagger
+     "7A = {100,100}, % \ddagger
+     "7B = {100,   }, % \mathparagraph
+     "7C = {100,100}, % \clubsuit
+     "7D = {100,100}, % \diamondsuit
+     "7E = {100,100}, % \heartsuit
+     "7F = {100,100}  % \spadesuit
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Remaining slots in the source file.
+%\iffalse
+%    "36 = {   ,   }, % \not
+%    "37 = {   ,   }, % \mapstochar
+%    "3B = {   ,   }, % \emptyset
+%    "3C = {   ,   }, % \Re
+%    "3D = {   ,   }, % \Im
+%    "40 = {   ,   }, % \aleph
+%    "5B = {   ,   }, % \cup
+%    "5C = {   ,   }, % \cap
+%    "5D = {   ,   }, % \uplus
+%    "6A = {   ,   }, % \arrowvert, \mid, \vert, |
+%    "6B = {   ,   }, % \Arrowvert, \parallel, \Vert
+%    "6F = {   ,   }, % \wr
+%    "70 = {   ,   }, % \sqrtsign
+%    "71 = {   ,   }, % \amalg
+%    "73 = {   ,   }, % \smallint
+%    "74 = {   ,   }, % \sqcup
+%    "75 = {   ,   }, % \sqcap
+%    "76 = {   ,   }, % \sqsubseteq
+%    "77 = {   ,   }, % \sqsupseteq
+%    "78 = {   ,   }, % \mathsection
+%\fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+   }
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% We don't bother about `|largesymbols|', since it will only be used in display
+% math, where protrusion doesn't work anyway. It's declared as:
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\DeclareSymbolFont{largesymbols}{OMX}{cmex}{m}{n}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%\iffalse
+%\SetProtrusion
+%   [ name     = cmr-math-largesymbols ]
+%   { encoding = OMX,
+%     family   = cmex }
+%   {
+%     "00 % (
+%     "01 % )
+%     "02 % [
+%     "03 % ]
+%     "04 % \lfloor
+%     "05 % \rfloor
+%     "06 % \lceil
+%     "07 % \rceil
+%     "08 % \lbrace
+%     "09 % \rbrace
+%     "0A % <, \langle
+%     "0B % >, \rangle
+%     "0C % \vert, |
+%     "0D % \Vert
+%     "0E % /
+%     "0F % \backslash
+%     "3A % \lgroup
+%     "3B % \rgroup
+%     "3C % \arrowvert
+%     "3D % \Arrowvert
+%     "3E % \bracevert
+%     "3F % \updownarrow
+%     "40 % \lmoustache
+%     "41 % \rmoustache
+%     "46 % \bigsqcup
+%     "48 % \ointop
+%     "4A % \bigodot
+%     "4C % \bigoplus
+%     "4E % \bigotimes
+%     "50 % \sum
+%     "51 % \prod
+%     "52 % \intop
+%     "53 % \bigcup
+%     "54 % \bigcap
+%     "55 % \biguplus
+%     "56 % \bigwedge
+%     "57 % \bigvee
+%     "60 % \coprod
+%     "70 % \sqrtsign
+%     "77 % \Updownarrow
+%     "78 % \uparrow
+%     "79 % \downarrow
+%     "7A % \braceld, \lmoustache
+%     "7B % \bracerd, \rmoustache
+%     "7C % \bracelu
+%     "7D % \braceru
+%     "7E % \Uparrow
+%     "7F % \Downarrow
+%  }
+%\fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%</cmr>
+%</cfg-t>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{<AMS> symbols}
+%
+% Settings for the <AMS> math fonts (\pkg{amssymb}).
+%\changes{v1.8}{2005/06/01}{settings for <AMS> math fonts}
+%\changes{v1.9d}{2006/02/04}{tweak <AMS> settings}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*cfg-u>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Symbol font `a'.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*msa>
+\SetProtrusion
+   [ name     = AMS-a ]
+   { encoding = U,
+     family   = msa  }
+   {
+     "05  =  {150,250},  % \centerdot
+     "06  =  {100,100},  % \lozenge
+     "07  =  { 50, 50},  % \blacklozenge
+     "08  =  { 50, 50},  % \circlearrowright
+     "09  =  { 50, 50},  % \circlearrowleft
+     "0A  =  {100,100},  % \rightleftharpoons
+     "0B  =  {100,100},  % \leftrightharpoons
+     "0D  =  {-50,200},  % \Vdash
+     "0E  =  {-50,200},  % \Vvdash
+     "0F  =  {-70,150},  % \vDash
+     "10  =  {100,150},  % \twoheadrightarrow
+     "11  =  {100,150},  % \twoheadleftarrow
+     "12  =  { 50,100},  % \leftleftarrows
+     "13  =  { 50, 80},  % \rightrightarrows
+     "14  =  {120,120},  % \upuparrows
+     "15  =  {120,120},  % \downdownarrows
+     "16  =  {200,200},  % \upharpoonright
+     "17  =  {200,200},  % \downharpoonright
+     "18  =  {200,200},  % \upharpoonleft
+     "19  =  {200,200},  % \downharpoonleft
+     "1A  =  { 80,100},  % \rightarrowtail
+     "1B  =  { 80,100},  % \leftarrowtail
+     "1C  =  { 50, 50},  % \leftrightarrows
+     "1D  =  { 50, 50},  % \rightleftarrows
+     "1E  =  {250,   },  % \Lsh
+     "1F  =  {   ,250},  % \Rsh
+     "20  =  {100,100},  % \rightsquigarrow
+     "21  =  {100,100},  % \leftrightsquigarrow
+     "22  =  {100, 50},  % \looparrowleft
+     "23  =  { 50,100},  % \looparrowright
+     "24  =  { 50, 80},  % \circeq
+     "25  =  {   ,100},  % \succsim
+     "26  =  {   ,100},  % \gtrsim
+     "27  =  {   ,100},  % \gtrapprox
+     "28  =  {150, 50},  % \multimap
+     "2B  =  {100,150},  % \doteqdot
+     "2C  =  {100,150},  % \triangleq
+     "2D  =  {100, 50},  % \precsim
+     "2E  =  {100, 50},  % \lesssim
+     "2F  =  { 50, 50},  % \lessapprox
+     "30  =  {100, 50},  % \eqslantless
+     "31  =  { 50, 50},  % \eqslantgtr
+     "32  =  {100, 50},  % \curlyeqprec
+     "33  =  { 50,100},  % \curlyeqsucc
+     "34  =  {100, 50},  % \preccurlyeq
+     "36  =  { 50,   },  % \leqslant
+     "38  =  {   , 50},  % \backprime
+     "39  =  {250,250},  % \dabar@ : the dash bar in \dash(left,right)arrow
+     "3C  =  { 50,100},  % \succcurlyeq
+     "3E  =  {   , 50},  % \geqslant
+     "40  =  {   , 50},  % \sqsubset
+     "41  =  { 50,   },  % \sqsupset
+     "42  =  {   ,150},  % \vartriangleright, \rhd
+     "43  =  {150,   },  % \vartriangleleft, \lhd
+     "44  =  {   ,100},  % \trianglerighteq, \unrhd
+     "45  =  {100,   },  % \trianglelefteq, \unlhd
+     "46  =  {100,100},  % \bigstar
+     "48  =  { 50, 50},  % \blacktriangledown
+     "49  =  {   ,100},  % \blacktriangleright
+     "4A  =  {100,   },  % \blacktriangleleft
+     "4B  =  {   ,150},  % \dashrightarrow (the arrow)
+     "4C  =  {150,   },  % \dashleftarrow
+     "4D  =  { 50, 50},  % \vartriangle
+     "4E  =  { 50, 50},  % \blacktriangle
+     "4F  =  { 50, 50},  % \triangledown
+     "50  =  { 50, 50},  % \eqcirc
+     "56  =  {   ,150},  % \Rrightarrow
+     "57  =  {150,   },  % \Lleftarrow
+     "58  =  {100,300},  % \checkmark
+     "5C  =  { 50, 50},  % \angle
+     "5D  =  { 50, 50},  % \measuredangle
+     "5E  =  { 50, 50},  % \sphericalangle
+     "5F  =  {   , 50},  % \varpropto
+     "60  =  {100,100},  % \smallsmile
+     "61  =  {100,100},  % \smallfrown
+     "62  =  { 50,   },  % \Subset
+     "63  =  {   , 50},  % \Supset
+     "66  =  {150,150},  % \curlywedge
+     "67  =  {150,150},  % \curlyvee
+     "68  =  { 50,150},  % \leftthreetimes
+     "69  =  {100, 50},  % \rightthreetimes
+     "6C  =  { 50, 50},  % \bumpeq
+     "6D  =  { 50, 50},  % \Bumpeq
+     "6E  =  {100,   },  % \lll
+     "6F  =  {   ,100},  % \ggg
+     "70  =  { 50,100},  % \ulcorner
+     "71  =  {100, 50},  % \urcorner
+     "75  =  {150,200},  % \dotplus
+     "76  =  { 50,100},  % \backsim
+     "78  =  { 50,100},  % \llcorner
+     "79  =  {100, 50},  % \lrcorner
+     "7C  =  {100,100},  % \intercal
+     "7D  =  { 50, 50},  % \circledcirc
+     "7E  =  { 50, 50},  % \circledast
+     "7F  =  { 50, 50}   % \circleddash
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Remaining slots in the source file.
+%\iffalse
+%    "00  =  {   ,   },  % \boxdot
+%    "01  =  {   ,   },  % \boxplus
+%    "02  =  {   ,   },  % \boxtimes
+%    "03  =  {   ,   },  % \square
+%    "04  =  {   ,   },  % \blacksquare
+%    "0C  =  {   ,   },  % \boxminus
+%    "29  =  {   ,   },  % \therefore
+%    "2A  =  {   ,   },  % \because
+%    "35  =  {   ,   },  % \leqq
+%    "37  =  {   ,   },  % \lessgtr
+%    "3A  =  {   ,   },  % \risingdotseq
+%    "3B  =  {   ,   },  % \fallingdotseq
+%    "3D  =  {   ,   },  % \geqq
+%    "3F  =  {   ,   },  % \gtrless
+%    "47  =  {   ,   },  % \between
+%    "51  =  {   ,   },  % \lesseqgtr
+%    "52  =  {   ,   },  % \gtreqless
+%    "53  =  {   ,   },  % \lesseqqgtr
+%    "54  =  {   ,   },  % \gtreqqless
+%    "55  =  {   ,   },  % \yen
+%    "59  =  {   ,   },  % \veebar
+%    "5A  =  {   ,   },  % \barwedge
+%    "5B  =  {   ,   },  % \doublebarwedge
+%    "64  =  {   ,   },  % \Cup
+%    "65  =  {   ,   },  % \Cap
+%    "6A  =  {   ,   },  % \subseteqq
+%    "6B  =  {   ,   },  % \supseteqq
+%    "72  =  {   ,   },  % \circledR
+%    "73  =  {   ,   },  % \circledS
+%    "74  =  {   ,   },  % \pitchfork
+%    "77  =  {   ,   },  % \backsimeq
+%    "7A  =  {   ,   },  % \maltese
+%    "7B  =  {   ,   },  % \complement
+%\fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+   }
+
+%</msa>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Symbol font `b'.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*msb>
+\SetProtrusion
+   [ name     = AMS-b ]
+   { encoding = U,
+     family   = msb  }
+   {
+       A  =  { 50, 50},  % \mathbb
+       C  =  { 50, 50},
+       G  =  {   , 50},
+       L  =  {   , 50},
+       P  =  {   , 50},
+       R  =  {   , 50},
+       T  =  {   , 50},
+       V  =  { 50, 50},
+       X  =  { 50, 50},
+       Y  =  { 50, 50},
+     "00  =  { 50, 50},  % \lvertneqq
+     "01  =  { 50, 50},  % \gvertneqq
+     "02  =  { 50, 50},  % \nleq
+     "03  =  { 50, 50},  % \ngeq
+     "04  =  {100, 50},  % \nless
+     "05  =  { 50,150},  % \ngtr
+     "06  =  {100, 50},  % \nprec
+     "07  =  { 50,150},  % \nsucc
+     "08  =  { 50, 50},  % \lneqq
+     "09  =  { 50, 50},  % \gneqq
+     "0A  =  {100,100},  % \nleqslant
+     "0B  =  {100,100},  % \ngeqslant
+     "0C  =  {100, 50},  % \lneq
+     "0D  =  { 50,100},  % \gneq
+     "0E  =  {100, 50},  % \npreceq
+     "0F  =  { 50,100},  % \nsucceq
+     "10  =  { 50,   },  % \precnsim
+     "11  =  { 50, 50},  % \succnsim
+     "12  =  { 50, 50},  % \lnsim
+     "13  =  { 50, 50},  % \gnsim
+     "14  =  { 50, 50},  % \nleqq
+     "15  =  { 50, 50},  % \ngeqq
+     "16  =  { 50, 50},  % \precneqq
+     "17  =  { 50, 50},  % \succneqq
+     "18  =  { 50, 50},  % \precnapprox
+     "19  =  { 50, 50},  % \succnapprox
+     "1A  =  { 50, 50},  % \lnapprox
+     "1B  =  { 50, 50},  % \gnapprox
+     "1C  =  {150,200},  % \nsim
+     "1D  =  { 50, 50},  % \ncong
+     "1E  =  {100,150},  % \diagup
+     "1F  =  {100,150},  % \diagdown
+     "20  =  {100, 50},  % \varsubsetneq
+     "21  =  { 50,100},  % \varsupsetneq
+     "22  =  {100, 50},  % \nsubseteqq
+     "23  =  { 50,100},  % \nsupseteqq
+     "24  =  {100, 50},  % \subsetneqq
+     "25  =  { 50,100},  % \supsetneqq
+     "26  =  {100, 50},  % \varsubsetneqq
+     "27  =  { 50,100},  % \varsupsetneqq
+     "28  =  {100, 50},  % \subsetneq
+     "29  =  { 50,100},  % \supsetneq
+     "2A  =  {100, 50},  % \nsubseteq
+     "2B  =  { 50,100},  % \nsupseteq
+     "2C  =  { 50,100},  % \nparallel
+     "2D  =  {100,150},  % \nmid
+     "2E  =  {150,150},  % \nshortmid
+     "2F  =  {100,100},  % \nshortparallel
+     "30  =  {   ,150},  % \nvdash
+     "31  =  {   ,150},  % \nVdash
+     "32  =  {   ,100},  % \nvDash
+     "33  =  {   ,100},  % \nVDash
+     "34  =  {   ,100},  % \ntrianglerighteq
+     "35  =  {100,   },  % \ntrianglelefteq
+     "36  =  {100,   },  % \ntriangleleft
+     "37  =  {   ,100},  % \ntriangleright
+     "38  =  {100,200},  % \nleftarrow
+     "39  =  {100,200},  % \nrightarrow
+     "3A  =  {100,100},  % \nLeftarrow
+     "3B  =  { 50,100},  % \nRightarrow
+     "3C  =  {100,100},  % \nLeftrightarrow
+     "3D  =  {100,200},  % \nleftrightarrow
+     "3E  =  { 50, 50},  % \divideontimes
+     "3F  =  { 50, 50},  % \varnothing
+     "60  =  {200,   },  % \Finv
+     "61  =  {   , 50},  % \Game
+     "68  =  {100,100},  % \eqsim
+     "69  =  { 50,   },  % \beth
+     "6A  =  { 50,   },  % \gimel
+     "6B  =  {150,   },  % \daleth
+     "6C  =  {200,   },  % \lessdot
+     "6D  =  {   ,200},  % \gtrdot
+     "6E  =  {100,200},  % \ltimes
+     "6F  =  {150,100},  % \rtimes
+     "70  =  { 50,100},  % \shortmid
+     "71  =  { 50, 50},  % \shortparallel
+     "72  =  {200,300},  % \smallsetminus
+     "73  =  {100,200},  % \thicksim
+     "74  =  { 50,100},  % \thickapprox
+     "75  =  { 50, 50},  % \approxeq
+     "76  =  { 50,100},  % \succapprox
+     "77  =  { 50, 50},  % \precapprox
+     "78  =  {100,100},  % \curvearrowleft
+     "79  =  { 50,150},  % \curvearrowright
+     "7A  =  { 50,200},  % \digamma
+     "7B  =  {100, 50},  % \varkappa
+     "7F  =  {200,   }   % \backepsilon
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Remaining slots in the source file.
+%\iffalse
+%    "40  =  {   ,   },  % \nexists
+%    "66  =  {   ,   },  % \mho
+%    "67  =  {   ,   },  % \eth
+%    "7C  =  {   ,   },  % \Bbbk
+%    "7D  =  {   ,   },  % \hslash
+%    "7E  =  {   ,   },  % \hbar
+%\fi
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+   }
+
+%</msb>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \subsubsection{Euler}
+%
+% Euler Roman font (package \pkg{euler}).
+%\changes{v1.9e}{2006/07/28}{settings for Euler Roman font}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*eur>
+\SetProtrusion
+   [ name     = euler ]
+   { encoding = U,
+     family   = eur  }
+   {
+     "01  =  {100,100},
+     "03  =  {100,150},
+     "06  =  {   ,100},
+     "07  =  {100,150},
+     "08  =  {100,100},
+     "0A  =  {100,100},
+     "0B  =  {   , 50},
+     "0C  =  {   ,100},
+     "0D  =  {100,100},
+     "0E  =  {   ,100},
+     "0F  =  {100,100},
+     "10  =  {100,100},
+     "13  =  {   ,100},
+     "14  =  {   ,100},
+     "15  =  {   , 50},
+     "16  =  {   , 50},
+     "17  =  { 50,100},
+     "18  =  { 50,100},
+     "1A  =  {   , 50},
+     "1B  =  {   , 50},
+     "1C  =  { 50,100},
+     "1D  =  { 50,100},
+     "1E  =  { 50,100},
+     "1F  =  { 50,100},
+     "20  =  {   , 50},
+     "21  =  {   , 50},
+     "22  =  { 50,100},
+     "24  =  {   , 50},
+     "27  =  { 50,100},
+       1  =  {100,100},
+       7  =  { 50,100},
+     "3A  =  {300,500},
+     "3B  =  {200,400},
+     "3C  =  {200,100},
+     "3D  =  {200,200},
+     "3E  =  {100,200},
+       A  =  {   ,100},
+       D  =  {   , 50},
+       J  =  { 50,   },
+       K  =  {   , 50},
+       L  =  {   , 50},
+       Q  =  {   , 50},
+       T  =  { 50,   },
+       X  =  { 50, 50},
+       Y  =  { 50,   },
+       h  =  {   , 50},
+       k  =  {   , 50}
+   }
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Extended by the \pkg{eulervm} package.
+%\changes{v1.9f}{2006/07/31}{fix: \texttt{euler-vm} did not load \texttt{euler} settings}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\SetProtrusion
+   [ name     = euler-vm,
+     load     = euler ]
+   { encoding = U,
+     family   = zeur  }
+   {
+     "28  =  {100,200},
+     "29  =  {100,200},
+     "2A  =  {100,150},
+     "2B  =  {100,150},
+     "2C  =  {200,300},
+     "2D  =  {200,300},
+     "2E  =  {   ,100},
+     "2F  =  {100,   },
+     "3F  =  {150,150},
+     "5B  =  {   ,100},
+     "5E  =  {100,100},
+     "5F  =  {100,100},
+     "80  =  {   , 50},
+     "81  =  {200,250},
+     "82  =  {100,200}
+   }
+
+%</eur>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Euler Script font (\pkg{eucal}).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*eus>
+\SetProtrusion
+   [ name     = euscript ]
+   { encoding = U,
+     family   = eus  }
+   {
+       A  =  {100,100},
+       B  =  { 50,100},
+       C  =  { 50, 50},
+       D  =  { 50,100},
+       E  =  { 50,100},
+       F  =  { 50,   },
+       G  =  { 50,   },
+       H  =  {   ,100},
+       K  =  {   , 50},
+       L  =  {   ,150},
+       M  =  {   , 50},
+       N  =  {   , 50},
+       O  =  { 50, 50},
+       P  =  { 50, 50},
+       T  =  {   ,100},
+       U  =  {   , 50},
+       V  =  { 50, 50},
+       W  =  { 50, 50},
+       X  =  { 50, 50},
+       Y  =  { 50,   },
+       Z  =  { 50,100},
+     "00  =  {250,250},
+     "18  =  {200,200},
+     "3A  =  {200,150},
+     "40  =  {   ,100},
+     "5E  =  {100,100},
+     "5F  =  {100,100},
+     "66  =  { 50,   },
+     "67  =  {   , 50},
+     "6E  =  {200,200}
+   }
+
+\SetProtrusion
+   [ name     = euscript-vm,
+     load     = euscript ]
+   { encoding = U,
+     family   = zeus  }
+   {
+     "01  =  {600,600},
+     "02  =  {200,200},
+     "03  =  {200,200},
+     "04  =  {200,200},
+     "05  =  {150,150},
+     "06  =  {200,200},
+     "07  =  {200,200},
+     "08  =  {100,100},
+     "09  =  {100,100},
+     "0A  =  {100,100},
+     "0B  =  {100,100},
+     "0C  =  {100,100},
+     "0D  =  {100,100},
+     "0E  =  {150,150},
+     "0F  =  {100,100},
+     "10  =  {150,150},
+     "11  =  {100,100},
+     "12  =  {150,100},
+     "13  =  {100,150},
+     "14  =  {150,100},
+     "15  =  {100,150},
+     "16  =  {200,100},
+     "17  =  {100,200},
+     "19  =  {150,150},
+     "1A  =  {150,100},
+     "1B  =  {100,150},
+     "1C  =  {100,100},
+     "1D  =  {100,100},
+     "1E  =  {250,100},
+     "1F  =  {100,250},
+     "20  =  {150,200},
+     "21  =  {150,200},
+     "22  =  {150,150},
+     "23  =  {150,150},
+     "24  =  {100,200},
+     "25  =  {150,150},
+     "26  =  {150,150},
+     "27  =  {100,100},
+     "28  =  {100,100},
+     "29  =  {100,150},
+     "2A  =  {100,100},
+     "2B  =  {100,100},
+     "2C  =  {100,100},
+     "2D  =  {150,150},
+     "2E  =  {150,150},
+     "2F  =  {100,100},
+     "30  =  {100,100},
+     "31  =  {100,100},
+     "32  =  {100,100},
+     "33  =  {100,100},
+     "34  =  {100,100},
+     "35  =  {100,100},
+     "3E  =  {150,150},
+     "3F  =  {150,150},
+     "60  =  {   ,200},
+     "61  =  {200,   },
+     "62  =  {100,100},
+     "63  =  {100,100},
+     "64  =  {100,100},
+     "65  =  {100,100},
+     "68  =  {300,   },
+     "69  =  {   ,300},
+     "6C  =  {100,100},
+     "6D  =  {100,100},
+     "6F  =  {100,100},
+     "72  =  {100,100},
+     "73  =  {200,100},
+     "76  =  {   ,100},
+     "77  =  {100,   },
+     "78  =  { 50, 50},
+     "79  =  {100,100},
+     "7A  =  {100,100},
+     "7D  =  {150,150},
+     "7E  =  {100,100},
+     "A8  =  {100,100},
+     "A9  =  {100,100},
+     "AB  =  {200,200},
+     "BA  =  {   ,200},
+     "BB  =  {   ,200},
+     "BD  =  {200,200},
+     "DE  =  {200,200}
+   }
+
+%</eus>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Euler Fraktur font (\pkg{eufrak}).
+%\changes{v1.9e}{2006/07/28}{complete settings for Euler Fraktur and Script fonts}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*euf>
+\SetProtrusion
+   [ name     = mathfrak ]
+   { encoding = U,
+     family   = euf  }
+   {
+       A  =  {   , 50},
+       B  =  {   , 50},
+       C  =  { 50, 50},
+       D  =  {   , 80},
+       E  =  { 50,   },
+       G  =  {   , 50},
+       L  =  {   , 80},
+       O  =  {   , 50},
+       T  =  {   , 80},
+       X  =  { 80, 50},
+       Z  =  { 80, 50},
+       b  =  {   , 50},
+       c  =  {   , 50},
+       k  =  {   , 50},
+       p  =  {   , 50},
+       q  =  { 50,   },
+       v  =  {   , 50},
+       w  =  {   , 50},
+       x  =  {   , 50},
+       1  =  {100,100},
+       2  =  { 80, 80},
+       3  =  { 80, 50},
+       4  =  { 80, 50},
+       7  =  { 50, 50},
+     "12  =  {500,500},
+     "13  =  {500,500},
+       !  =  {   ,200},
+       '  =  {200,300},
+       (  =  {200,   },
+       )  =  {   ,200},
+       *  =  {200,200},
+       +  =  {200,250},
+       -  =  {200,200},
+      {,} =  {300,300},
+       .  =  {400,400},
+      {=} =  {200,200},
+       :  =  {   ,200},
+       ;  =  {   ,200},
+       ]  =  {   ,200}
+   }
+
+%</euf>
+%</cfg-u>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\subsubsection{Euro symbols}
+%\changes{v1.9d}{2006/05/04}{settings for Euro symbols (Adobe, <ITC>, \pkg{marvosym})}
+%\changes{v1.9e}{2006/07/05}{fix: forgotten comma in \file{mt-mvs.cfg};
+%                            adapt to \pkg{marvosym}'s changed encoding}
+% Settings for various Euro symbols (Adobe Euro fonts (packages \pkg{eurosans},
+% \pkg{europs}), <ITC> Euro fonts (package \pkg{euroitc}) and \pkg{marvosym}\footnote{
+%   Of course, there are many more symbols in this font. Feel free to contribute
+%   protrusion settings!}).
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*cfg-e>
+\SetProtrusion
+%<zpeu|euroitc>   { encoding = U,
+%<mvs>   { encoding = {OT1,U},
+%<zpeu>     family   = zpeu }
+%<euroitc>     family   = {euroitc,euroitcs} }
+%<mvs>     family   = mvs }
+   {
+%<zpeu>     E = {50, }
+%<euroitc>     E = {100,50}
+%<mvs>     164 = {50,50},   % \EUR
+%<mvs>     068 = {50,-100}  % \EURdig
+   }
+
+%<*zpeu|euroitc>
+\SetProtrusion
+   { encoding = U,
+%<zpeu>     family   = zpeu,
+%<euroitc>     family   = {euroitc,euroitcs},
+     shape    = it* }
+   {
+%<zpeu>     E = {100,-50}
+%<euroitc>     E = {100,}
+   }
+
+%</zpeu|euroitc>
+%<*zpeu>
+\SetProtrusion
+   { encoding = U,
+     family   = {zpeus,eurosans} }
+   {
+     E = {100,50}
+   }
+
+\SetProtrusion
+   { encoding = U,
+     family   = {zpeus,eurosans},
+     shape    = it* }
+   {
+     E = {200, }
+   }
+
+%</zpeu>
+%</cfg-e>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%\subsection{Interword spacing}\label{sub:conf-spacing}
+%\GeneralChanges{Spacing}
+%
+% Default unit is space.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*m-t>
+%%% -----------------------------------------------------------------------
+%%% INTERWORD SPACING
+
+\SetExtraSpacing
+   [ name = default ]
+   { encoding = {OT1,T1,LY1,OT4,QX,T5} }
+   {
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% These settings are only a first approximation. The following reasoning is from
+% a mail from \contributor Ulrich Dirr <ud\at art-satz.de>^^A private mail, 2005/06/14
+%\ifpdf\IfFileExists{justification.jpg}{^^A
+% , who also provided the sample in figure~\ref{fig:example-spacing}^^A
+%\changes{v2.2}{2007/04/05}{add sample}^^A
+%   \begin{figure}
+%     \caption{^^A
+%       Example for interword spacing (from Siemoneit 1989).
+%         ^^A Manfred Siemoneit, Typographisches Gestalten.
+%         ^^A Regeln und Tips f\"ur die richtige Gestaltung von Drucksachen,
+%         ^^A Bielefeld 1989
+%       The numbers indicate the preference\slash order when the interword space
+%       needs to be shrunk.}
+%     \label{fig:example-spacing}
+%     \includegraphics[width=.6\textwidth]{justification.jpg}
+%   \end{figure}^^A
+%}\relax\fi.
+% I do not claim to have coped with the task.
+%\todo{fix settings}
+%
+%\begin{quote}
+% `The idea is -- analog to the tables for expansion and protrusion -- to
+% have tables for optical reduction\slash expansion of spaces in dependence of the
+% actual character so that the distance between words is optically equal.
+%
+% When reducing distances the (weighting) order is:
+%\begin{itemize}
+%  \item after commas
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+     {,} = { ,-500,500},
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  \item in front of capitals which have optical more room on their left
+%        side, \eg, `A', `J', `T', `V', `W', and `Y'
+%        [this is not yet possible -- RS]
+%  \item in front of capitals which have circle/oval shapes on their left
+%        side, \eg, `C', `G', `O', and `Q'
+%        [ditto -- RS]
+%  \item after `r' (because of the bigger optical room on the righthand side)
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+      r  = { ,-300,300},
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  \item\relax [before or] after lowercase characters with ascenders
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+      b  = { ,-200,200},
+      d  = { ,-200,200},
+      f  = { ,-200,200},
+      h  = { ,-200,200},
+      k  = { ,-200,200},
+      l  = { ,-200,200},
+      t  = { ,-200,200},
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  \item\relax [before or] after lowercase characters with x-height plus descender
+%        with additional optical space, \eg, `v', or `w'
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+      c  = { ,-100,100},
+      p  = { ,-100,100},
+      v  = { ,-100,100},
+      w  = { ,-100,100},
+      z  = { ,-100,100},
+      x  = { ,-100,100},
+      y  = { ,-100,100},
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  \item\relax [before or] after lowercase characters with x-height plus descender
+%        without additional optical space
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+      i  = { , 50, -50},
+      m  = { , 50, -50},
+      n  = { , 50, -50},
+      u  = { , 50, -50},
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  \item after colon and semicolon
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+      :  = { ,200,-200},
+      ;  = { ,200,-200},
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%  \item after punctuation which ends a sentence, \eg, period, exclamation
+%        mark, question mark
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+      .  = { ,250,-250},
+      !  = { ,250,-250},
+      ?  = { ,250,-250}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\end{itemize}
+% The order has to be reversed when enlarging is needed.'
+%\end{quote}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+   }
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Questions are:
+%\begin{itemize}
+%  \item Is the result really better?
+%  \item Is it overdone? (Try with a |factor| \textless\ 1000.)
+%  \item Should the first parameter also be used? (Probably.)
+%  \item What about quotation marks, parentheses etc.?
+%\end{itemize}
+%
+% Furthermore, there seems to be a \pdftex\ bug with spacing in combination
+% with a non-zero \cmd\spaceskip\
+% (reported by \contributor Axel Berger <Axel_Berger\at b.maus.de>):
+%  ^^A dctt, `myheadings, markboth', 2008/10/06, MID: <200810062134.a58193@b.maus.de>
+%\todo{report \pdftex\ bug}
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%\parfillskip0pt
+%\rightskip0pt plus 1em
+%\spaceskip\fontdimen2\font
+% test test\par
+%\pdfadjustinterwordglue2
+%\stbscode\font`t=-50
+% test test
+%\bye
+%\end{verbatim}
+% Some more characters in <T2A>.\footnote{Contributed by
+%                     \contributor Karl Karlsson <karl-karlsson\at yandex.ru>.}
+%\changes{v2.3e}{2009/10/28}{settings for <T2A> encoding (contributed by
+%                            \contributor Karl Karlsson <karl-karlsson\at yandex.ru>)}
+%                                                       ^^A private mail, 2009/10/21
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*m-t>
+\SetExtraSpacing
+   [ name     = T2A,
+     load     = default ]
+   { encoding = T2A,
+     family   = cmr }
+   {
+      \cyrg  = { ,-300,300},
+      \cyrb  = { ,-200,200},
+      \cyrk  = { ,-200,200},
+      \cyrs  = { ,-100,100},
+      \cyrr  = { ,-100,100},
+      \cyrh  = { ,-100,100},
+      \cyru  = { ,-100,100},
+      \cyrt  = { , 50, -50},
+      \cyrp  = { , 50, -50},
+      \cyri  = { , 50, -50},
+      \cyrishrt  = { , 50, -50},
+   }
+
+%</m-t>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsubsection{Nonfrenchspacing}
+% The following settings simulate \cmd\nonfrenchspacing\ (since space factors
+% will be ignored when spacing adjustment is in effect). They may be used for
+% English contexts.
+%
+% From the \TeX book:
+%\begin{quote}
+%                                                                   `If the
+% space factor $f$ is different from 1000, the interword glue is computed as
+% follows:  Take the normal space glue for the current font, and add the
+% extra space if $f\ge2000$.
+%  [\,\dots]
+% Then the stretch component is multiplied by $f/1000$, while the shrink
+% component is multiplied by $1000/f$.'
+%\end{quote}
+% The `extra space' (\fontdim7) for Computer Modern Roman is a third of
+% \fontdim2, \ie, 333.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\SetExtraSpacing
+   [ name     = nonfrench-cmr,
+     load     = default,
+     context  = nonfrench ]
+   { encoding = {OT1,T1,LY1,OT4,QX,T5},
+     family   = cmr }
+   {
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \file{latex.ltx} has:
+%\begin{verbatim}[morekeywords={[1]{\nonfrenchspacing}}]
+%\def\nonfrenchspacing{
+%  \sfcode`\. 3000
+%  \sfcode`\? 3000
+%  \sfcode`\! 3000
+%\end{verbatim}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+     . = {333,2000,-667},
+     ? = {333,2000,-667},
+     ! = {333,2000,-667},
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%  \sfcode`\: 2000
+%\end{verbatim}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+     : = {333,1000,-500},
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%  \sfcode`\; 1500
+%\end{verbatim}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+     ; = {   , 500,-333},
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%  \sfcode`\, 1250
+%\end{verbatim}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+    {,}= {   , 250,-200}
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%\begin{verbatim}
+%}
+%\end{verbatim}
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+   }
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% \pkg{fontinst}, however, which is also used to create the \pkg{PSNFSS} font
+% metrics, sets \fontdim7 to 240 by default. Therefore, the fallback settings
+% use this value for the first component.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\SetExtraSpacing
+   [ name     = nonfrench-default,
+     load     = default,
+     context  = nonfrench ]
+   { encoding = {OT1,T1,LY1,OT4,QX,T5} }
+   {
+     . = {240,2000,-667},
+     ? = {240,2000,-667},
+     ! = {240,2000,-667},
+     : = {240,1000,-500},
+     ; = {   , 500,-333},
+    {,}= {   , 250,-200}
+   }
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+% \subsection{Additional kerning}
+%\GeneralChanges{Kerning}
+%
+% Default unit is 1\,em.
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%%% -----------------------------------------------------------------------
+%%% ADDITIONAL KERNING
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% A dummy list to be loaded when no context is active.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\SetExtraKerning
+   [ name = empty ]
+   { encoding = {OT1,T1,T2A,LY1,OT4,QX,T5,TS1} }
+   { }
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%\subsubsection{French}
+%
+% The ratio of \fontdim2 to \fontdim6 varies for different fonts, so that
+% either the kerning of the colon (which should be a space, \ie, \fontdim2) or
+% that of the other punctuation characters (\TeX's \cmd\thinspace, \ie, one
+% sixth of \fontdim6) may be inaccurate, depending on which |unit| we choose
+% (|space| or |1em|). For Times, for example, a thin space would be 665. I
+% don't know whether French typography really wants a thin space, or rather (as
+% it happens to turn out with <CMR>) half a space.
+% (Wikipedia\footnote{\url{http://fr.wikipedia.org/wiki/Espace_typographique}, 5 July 2007.}
+% claims it should be a quarter of an em, which seems too much to me; then
+% again, it also says that this \emph{was} a thin space in French typography.)
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\SetExtraKerning
+   [ name     = french-default,
+     context  = french,
+     unit     = space   ]
+   { encoding = {OT1,T1,LY1} }
+   {
+     :  = {1000,}, % = \fontdimen2
+     ;  = {500, }, % ~ \thinspace
+     !  = {500, },
+     ?  = {500, }
+   }
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% These settings have the disadvantage that a word following a left guillemet
+% will not be hyphenated. This might be fixed in \pdftex.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\SetExtraKerning
+   [ name     = french-guillemets,
+     context  = french-guillemets,
+     load     = french-default,
+     unit     = space   ]
+   { encoding = {T1,LY1} }
+   {
+    \guillemotleft  = { ,800}, % = 0.8\fontdimen2
+    \guillemotright = {800, }
+   }
+
+\SetExtraKerning
+   [ name     = french-guillemets-OT1,
+     context  = french-guillemets,
+     load     = french-default,
+     unit     = space   ]
+   { encoding = OT1     }
+   { }
+
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%
+%\subsubsection{Turkish}
+%
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+\SetExtraKerning
+   [ name     = turkish,
+     context  = turkish ]
+   { encoding = {OT1,T1,LY1} }
+   {
+     :  = {167, }, % = \thinspace
+     !  = {167, },
+    {=} = {167, }
+   }
+
+%</m-t>
+%</config>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+%^^A\changes{v2.0}{2006/12/28}{remove \texttt{letterspacing} settings}
+%\GeneralChanges*
+%
+%\section{Auxiliary file for micro fine tuning}
+%
+% This file can be used to test protrusion and expansion settings.
+%    \begin{macrocode}
+%<*test>
+\documentclass{article}
+
+%% Here you can specify the font you want to test, using
+%% the commands \fontfamily, \fontseries and \fontshape.
+%% Make sure to end all lines with a comment character!
+\newcommand*\TestFont{%
+  \fontfamily{ppl}%
+%%  \fontseries{b}%
+%%  \fontshape{it}% sc, sl
+}
+
+\usepackage{ifthen}
+\usepackage[T1]{fontenc}
+\usepackage[latin1]{inputenc}
+\usepackage[verbose,expansion=alltext,stretch=50]{microtype}
+
+\pagestyle{empty}
+\setlength{\parindent}{0pt}
+\newcommand*\crulefill{\cleaders\hbox{$\mkern-2mu\smash-\mkern-2mu$}\hfill}
+\newcommand*\testprotrusion[2][]{%
+  \ifthenelse{\equal{#1}{r}}{}{#2}%
+  lorem ipsum dolor sit amet,
+    \ifthenelse{\equal{#1}{r}}{\crulefill}{\leftarrowfill} #2
+    \ifthenelse{\equal{#1}{l}}{\crulefill}{\rightarrowfill}
+  you know the rest%
+  \ifthenelse{\equal{#1}{l}}{}{#2}%
+  \linebreak
+  {\fontencoding{\encodingdefault}%
+  \fontseries{\seriesdefault}%
+  \fontshape{\shapedefault}%
+  \selectfont
+  Here is the beginning of a line, \dotfill and here is its end}\linebreak
+}
+\newcommand*\showTestFont{\expandafter\stripprefix\meaning\TestFont}
+\def\stripprefix#1>{}
+\newcount\charcount
+\begin{document}
+
+\microtypesetup{expansion=false}
+
+{\centering The font in this document is called by:\\
+ \texttt{\showTestFont}\par}\bigskip
+
+\TestFont\selectfont
+ This line intentionally left empty\linebreak
+%% A -- Z
+\charcount=65
+\loop
+  \testprotrusion{\char\charcount}
+  \advance\charcount 1
+  \ifnum\charcount < 91 \repeat
+%% a -- z
+\charcount=97
+\loop
+  \testprotrusion{\char\charcount}
+  \advance\charcount 1
+  \ifnum\charcount < 123 \repeat
+%% 0 -- 9
+\charcount=48
+\loop
+  \testprotrusion{\char\charcount}
+  \advance\charcount 1
+  \ifnum\charcount < 58 \repeat
+%%
+ \testprotrusion[r]{,}
+ \testprotrusion[r]{.}
+ \testprotrusion[r]{;}
+ \testprotrusion[r]{:}
+ \testprotrusion[r]{?}
+ \testprotrusion[r]{!}
+ \testprotrusion[l]{\textexclamdown}
+ \testprotrusion[l]{\textquestiondown}
+ \testprotrusion[r]{)}
+ \testprotrusion[l]{(}
+ \testprotrusion{/}
+ \testprotrusion{\char`\\}
+ \testprotrusion{-}
+ \testprotrusion{\textendash}
+ \testprotrusion{\textemdash}
+ \testprotrusion{\textquoteleft}
+ \testprotrusion{\textquoteright}
+ \testprotrusion{\textquotedblleft}
+ \testprotrusion{\textquotedblright}
+ \testprotrusion{\quotesinglbase}
+ \testprotrusion{\quotedblbase}
+ \testprotrusion{\guilsinglleft}
+ \testprotrusion{\guilsinglright}
+ \testprotrusion{\guillemotleft}
+ \testprotrusion{\guillemotright}
+
+\newpage
+The following displays the current font stretched by 5\%,
+normal, and shrunk by 5\%:
+
+\bigskip
+\newlength{\MTln}
+\newcommand*\teststring
+  {ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZabcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz0123456789}
+\settowidth{\MTln}{\teststring}
+\microtypesetup{expansion=true}
+
+\parbox{1.05\MTln}{\teststring\linebreak\\
+                   \teststring}\par\bigskip
+\parbox{0.95\MTln}{\teststring}
+
+\end{document}
+%</test>
+%    \end{macrocode}
+% Needless to say that things may always be improved. For suggestions, mail to
+% \mailtoRS.
+%
+% ^^A -------------------------------------------------------------------------
+%\makeatother
+%
+% \CharacterTable
+%  {Upper-case    \A\B\C\D\E\F\G\H\I\J\K\L\M\N\O\P\Q\R\S\T\U\V\W\X\Y\Z
+%   Lower-case    \a\b\c\d\e\f\g\h\i\j\k\l\m\n\o\p\q\r\s\t\u\v\w\x\y\z
+%   Digits        \0\1\2\3\4\5\6\7\8\9
+%   Exclamation   \!     Double quote  \"     Hash (number) \#
+%   Dollar        \$     Percent       \%     Ampersand     \&
+%   Acute accent  \'     Left paren    \(     Right paren   \)
+%   Asterisk      \*     Plus          \+     Comma         \,
+%   Minus         \-     Point         \.     Solidus       \/
+%   Colon         \:     Semicolon     \;     Less than     \<
+%   Equals        \=     Greater than  \>     Question mark \?
+%   Commercial at \@     Left bracket  \[     Backslash     \\
+%   Right bracket \]     Circumflex    \^     Underscore    \_
+%   Grave accent  \`     Left brace    \{     Vertical bar  \|
+%   Right brace   \}     Tilde         \~}
+%
+% \CheckSum{9578}
+%
+% \Finale
+%
+\endinput
+%
diff --git a/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/microtype-de/microtype-DE.pdf b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/microtype-de/microtype-DE.pdf
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..16ca1155ef7
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/texmf-dist/doc/latex/microtype-de/microtype-DE.pdf
diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/bin/tlpkg-ctan-check b/Master/tlpkg/bin/tlpkg-ctan-check
index a6ab029357b..3e32d8fcd56 100755
--- a/Master/tlpkg/bin/tlpkg-ctan-check
+++ b/Master/tlpkg/bin/tlpkg-ctan-check
@@ -239,7 +239,7 @@ my @TLP_working = qw(
     metafont-beginners metago metalogo metaobj metaplot metatex metauml
     method metre
     mfnfss mfpic mfpic4ode mftinc mh mhchem
-    mhequ microtype midnight midpage mil3 miller
+    mhequ microtype microtype-de midnight midpage mil3 miller
     minibox minipage-marginpar miniplot minitoc
     minted minutes
     mkgrkindex mkjobtexmf mkpattern
diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/libexec/ctan2tds b/Master/tlpkg/libexec/ctan2tds
index 06fc53c3f01..388ccc90726 100755
--- a/Master/tlpkg/libexec/ctan2tds
+++ b/Master/tlpkg/libexec/ctan2tds
@@ -1525,50 +1525,51 @@ $standardsource='\.(c|drv|dtx|fea|fdd|ins|sfd)$|configure.*|install-sh';
  'FAQ-en',		'NULL',
  'ae',			'\.mtx|\.etx|\.tex|clean|go|install|makepl',
  'amsldoc-vn',		'NULL',
- 'apl',			".*",    # just get everything, seems simplest
- 'arabxetex',		'NULL',  # keep dtx with others, why not
+ 'apl',			".*",    		# get everything, simplest
+ 'arabxetex',		'NULL',  		# dtx with others, why not
  'bbold',		$standardsource . '|fonttabl.sty',
- 'biber',		'.*',	 # get everything, lots to do in post
+ 'biber',		'.*',	 		# keep all, lots to do in post
  'bigints',		'NULL',
  'blacklettert1',	'\.dtx|\.ins|\.pl|Makefile',
- 'booktabs-de',		'NULL',		# keep together
+ 'booktabs-de',		'NULL',			# keep together
  'carlisle',		'\.dtx|\.ins|ltxtable\.tex',
  'chemarrow',		'\.mp|\.vfb',
  'concmath-fonts',	'NULL',
  'crossword',		$standardsource . '|AcrossLite',
  'epsf',		'NULL',
  'epslatex-fr',		'NULL',
- 'epspdf',		'NULL',  	# leave .install
- 'eskdx',		'NULL',  	# leave makefiles
- 'eurosym',		'NULL',  	# leave makefiles, etc.
+ 'epspdf',		'NULL',  		# leave .install
+ 'eskdx',		'NULL', 	 	# leave makefiles
+ 'eurosym',		'NULL',			# leave makefiles, etc.
  'export',		'\.l|' . $standardsource,
  'feynmf',		'feynmf\.pl|' . $standardsource,
- 'findhyph',		'NULL',		# leave makefile
+ 'findhyph',		'NULL',			# leave makefile
  'fmtcount',		'fmtcount.perl|' . $standardsource,
  'fpl',			'Add|\.pe|\.ps' . $standardsource,
- 'geometry-de',		'NULL',		# keep together
+ 'geometry-de',		'NULL',			# keep together
  'grverb',		'\.vpl|' . $standardsource,
  'hyper',		'\.pl|' . $standardsource,
  'hyphenex',		'.*',
- 'impatient',		'NULL',	# doc package
- 'intro-scientific',	'NULL',	# doc package
- 'js-misc',		'NULL',	# no gain in splitting up
+ 'impatient',		'NULL',			# doc package
+ 'intro-scientific',	'NULL',			# doc package
+ 'js-misc',		'NULL',			# no gain in splitting up
  'kpfonts',		'\.zip',
- 'latex-doc-ptr',	'NULL',	# doc package
- 'latex2e-help-texinfo','NULL',	# doc package
- 'latex2man',		'NULL',	# leave Makefile
- 'latexdiff',		'NULL',	# leave Makefile
+ 'latex-doc-ptr',	'NULL',			# doc package
+ 'latex2e-help-texinfo','NULL',			# doc package
+ 'latex2man',		'NULL',			# leave Makefile
+ 'latexdiff',		'NULL',			# leave Makefile
  'lua-alt-getopt',	'NULL',
  'mff',			'\.mfj|\.bat|\.diz',
+ 'microtype-de',	'NULL',			# doc package
  'mkjobtexmf',		'Makefile.in|' . $standardsource,
  'mpman-ru',		'NULL',	# doc package
  'ot2cyr',		'\.afm|\.etx|' . $standardsource,
  'patch',		'\.doc',
  'pdfx',		'rvdtx\.sty|' . $standardsource,
- 'pgfplots',		'NULL',	# keep manual.install.tex in doc/
+ 'pgfplots',		'NULL',			# manual.install.tex in doc/
  'rcs',			'rcs.el|src|' . $standardsource,
- 'thailatex',		'NULL',	# no gain in splitting up
- 'tkz-orm',		'NULL',	# no gain in splitting up
+ 'thailatex',		'NULL',			# no gain in splitting up
+ 'tkz-orm',		'NULL',			# no gain in splitting up
  'xlop',		'manual.sty|' . $standardsource,
 );
 
diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/tlpsrc/collection-langgerman.tlpsrc b/Master/tlpkg/tlpsrc/collection-langgerman.tlpsrc
index efaee579060..5ce1deeacfe 100644
--- a/Master/tlpkg/tlpsrc/collection-langgerman.tlpsrc
+++ b/Master/tlpkg/tlpsrc/collection-langgerman.tlpsrc
@@ -10,6 +10,7 @@ depend german
 depend germbib
 depend germkorr
 depend kalender
+depend microtype-de
 depend r_und_s
 depend umlaute
 depend hyphen-german
diff --git a/Master/tlpkg/tlpsrc/microtype-de.tlpsrc b/Master/tlpkg/tlpsrc/microtype-de.tlpsrc
new file mode 100644
index 00000000000..e69de29bb2d
--- /dev/null
+++ b/Master/tlpkg/tlpsrc/microtype-de.tlpsrc